JP2015192701A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine) and a turning game machine (slot machine) having a feature in display means.SOLUTION: A first display which is a display in association with a second area, where a touch operation of a touch panel which is first display means is enabled, is displayed in a first area. The second area includes a third area which overlaps with a part of the first area, and the second area includes a fourth area which does not overlap with a part of the first area.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

  Conventionally, a game machine having a display means is known (Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The above purpose is
A game machine comprising first display means capable of executing at least a first display,
The first display means is means including at least a touch panel,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in the first region;
The first display is a display related at least to an area (hereinafter referred to as “second area”) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is effective,
The second region is a region that is at least partially different from the first region.
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display design of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display design of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetch process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special drawing 1 related lottery process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table used with the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination used with the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table which determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table which determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is. The flow of the 1st sub control part command reception interruption process is shown, (c) has shown the flow of the 1st sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure explaining the control IC touch detection related process performed by the various update process of step S443 of the 1st sub control part timer interruption process of FIG.15 (c). It is a figure explaining the touchable area | region (area) of the touchscreen 252a stuck on the display screen of the touchscreen display apparatus 252. FIG. It is a figure explaining the process in the liquid crystal control part 700 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the box data, the position, and part data which are provided in RAM408 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of the command transmission in the presentation control in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is. The flow of the second sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the movable body control process and the movable body interruption process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows schematic structure of a resistive film system (4-wire type) touch panel. It is a figure which shows schematic structure of a resistive film system (5-wire type) touch panel. It is a figure which illustrates the multi-touch detection method in a resistive film system (4-wire type) touch panel. It is a figure which shows the structure which enabled multi-touch by arranging the resistive film of a resistive film type touchscreen in order to arrange in multiple cells. It is a figure which shows a capacitive touch panel. It is a figure which shows the example of a detection in the case of validating two-point simultaneous touch operation and invalidating three-point simultaneous touch operation with the capacitive touch panel shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 5 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 6 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 7 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 8 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 9 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 10 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 10 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 11 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 11 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 11 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 12 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 15 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 16 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 17 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 18 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game machine by the modification of one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. A telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process part of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetch process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure 1 related lottery process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table used with the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination used with the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table which determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table which determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is. The flow of a 1st sub control part command reception interruption process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part timer interruption process, and the figure (d) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part image control process. Is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is. The flow of the second sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the movable body control process and movable body interruption process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example (the 1) of the production | presentation movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example (the 2) of the production | presentation movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example (the 3) of the production | presentation movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example (the 4) of the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1 (the 1) of the concrete production using the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1 (the 2) of the concrete production using the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1 (the 3) of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example (the 5) of the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example (the 6) of the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example (the 7) of the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example (the 8) of the production | presentation movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 1) of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 2) of the concrete production using the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 3) of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 4) of the concrete production using the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 5) of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 6) of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 7) of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 8) of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 9) of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 10) of the concrete production using the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from upper right. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1 of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3 of the concrete effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4 of the specific production using the production movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 4th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 4th Embodiment of this invention from upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 4th Embodiment of this invention from upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 4th Embodiment of this invention from upper right. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 5th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows Example 1 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 5 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 6 (the 1) of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 6 (the 2) of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 6 (the 3) of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 6th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows Example 1 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 5 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 6 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the structure of the drive unit of the production | presentation movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1 (the 1) of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1 (the 2) of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1 (the 3) of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 1) of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 2) of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 3) of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display design of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration design, ( c) shows an example of a normal stop display symbol, and (d) is a diagram showing a decorative symbol for a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table used with the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination used with the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table which determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table which determines the variable time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 variable game in the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the holding | maintenance change lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold display of the special figure variable game of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the hold display mode of normal hold, (b) is the hold A The hold display mode is shown, and (c) shows the hold display mode of the hold B. It is a figure which shows an example of the gasse effect lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production start timing determination table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a table which shows the open / closed pattern of the special figure 2 starting port (electricity Chu) with the result of the usual figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a table which shows the variation time and variation pattern of the usual figure decoration symbol variation game in the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows an example of the character image of an electric tulong opening notification effect. It is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the common figure variable game used with the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for common figure determination used with the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart (the 1) which shows the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart (the 2) which shows the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part prefetch notice execution process at the time of the starting information acquisition in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the notice process in the 1st sub control part at the time of the special figure variable game in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the common figure effect determination process in the notice process in the 1st sub-control part at the time of the special figure variable game of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows Example 1 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows Example 1 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows Example 1 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (4) which shows Example 1 of the specific production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows Example 2 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows Example 2 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows Example 2 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (The 4) which shows Example 2 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (5) which shows Example 2 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (6) which shows Example 2 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (7) which shows Example 2 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (8) which shows Example 2 of the specific production | presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (The 9) which shows Example 2 of the specific production | presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (10) which shows Example 2 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows Example 3 of the specific production | presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows Example 3 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 5 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 6 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows Example 7 of the specific production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows Example 7 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows Example 8 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows Example 8 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows Example 8 of the specific production | presentation of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows Example 9 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows Example 9 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a change of Example 9 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows Example 10 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows Example 10 of the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (3) which shows Example 10 of the concrete production of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the example of a change of the pachinko machine 100 by the 8th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of a ROM 406 and a VRAM 436 before image data is expanded on the VRAM 436 in the ninth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of a ROM 406 and a VRAM 436 after image data is expanded on the VRAM 436 in the ninth embodiment of the present invention. It is the figure which showed the flow of the image drawing process at the time of reproducing | regenerating a movie in the 9th Embodiment of this invention. Circuit configuration for displaying an image on a plurality of display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208 and / or second decorative symbol display device 209) based on a signal from VDP 434 in the ninth embodiment of the present invention FIG. Based on the image data output from the VDP 434 in the ninth embodiment of the present invention, the first image is displayed on the first decorative design display device 208 and the second image is the second decorative design display device. 209 is a diagram illustrating a flow of processing displayed in 209. FIG. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game machine by the modification of one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. A telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 20 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation etc. which used the touch panel 252a in Example 20 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100, a spinning machine such as a slot machine, or an enclosed game machine) will be described in detail. explain. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device, and a game board on its front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden or metal frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion on the inner side. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function by the lock unit 105, and is configured in a frame shape. Thus, the door member has an opening 116 inside thereof. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board. In the approximate center of the game area, a decorative symbol display device 208 is provided. In addition, a front frame door opening sensor that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device, A lower plate for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the stored game balls to the lower plate by an operation of the player, and an operation of the player A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and the game balls guided to the launching device by the player's operation to the game area of the game board , A ball launching handle 134 for launching, a chance button 136 for changing the performance mode of various rendering devices 206 by the player's operation, a chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, and a setter (for example, A setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operations of a player and a game store clerk, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a card unit Are provided with a return operation button 142 for instructing to return the player's balance, a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the player's balance and card unit status, and a touch panel display 252. A touch panel 252a capable of starting a desired process by a touch operation in which a player's finger is brought into contact is attached to a display screen of the touch panel display device 252. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate is full is provided. The various operation buttons may be used as an alternative operation to the touch operation on the touch panel 252a of the touch panel display device 252. Further, a mechanism that allows the player to arbitrarily adjust the angle of the touch panel display device 252 may be provided.

  The launching device is attached below the main body 104, and includes a launcher that rotates when the ball launcher handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launcher that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launcher.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be. Further, the setting operation unit 137 can also be used as a system (for example, “Daitomo (trademark)”) related button for giving a special benefit or the like to the player based on the stored game history.

  The game board has a game area on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error canceling switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with 168, launch board constituting a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 74, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from the top of the effect device 206 to the right, and a game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper portion of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. In other words, the game area 124 has a first flow path on the left side across the effect device 206 as a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down, and a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down. And a second flow path on the right side. Hereinafter, hitting a game ball on the first downstream path may be referred to as “left-handed”, and hitting a game ball on the second downstream path may be referred to as “right-handed”.

  In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and an effect movable body 224 provided with a display plate 209 is disposed with its upper part slightly to the right as an initial position (origin return position). The size of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the size of the display board 209.

  Also, on the lower right side outside the game area 124, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, and 208 d can be freely changed within, for example, a horizontally long rectangular display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 is provided.

  The general winning opening 226 is arranged on the left side of the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (the general winning opening 226). ), The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the general drawing starting port 228. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Since the normal start port 228 and the special view 2 start port 232 below the normal start port 228 are in the second downstream flow path on the right side with the effect device 206 in between, the first start flow path on the left side with the effect device 206 in between. The game ball does not pass through the normal start port 228 or enter the special view start port 232. In addition, since the special figure 1 starting port 230 is in the first flow path on the left side with the effect device 206 in between, the game ball that has advanced to the second flow path on the right side with the effect device 206 in between is shown in FIG. There is no entry into the starting port 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the special figure 1 starting opening 230 of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  In FIG. 1, a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in a substantially straight line at an interval narrower than the diameter of the game ball in the region from the starting port 230 to the left end of the variable winning port 234. For this reason, at the time of a big hit, a right hit (how to hit a game ball through the space between the upper portion of the production device 206 and the outer rail 202 to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200) and a game in the second downflow path If the ball does not fly, the configuration is such that the game ball does not win the variable winning opening 234.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the scissors and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) Wins the Out Port 240 without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal start port 228 To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the production device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a region where the game ball can roll, and a production movable body 224 provided with a display board 209 in the region where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball passes to the special opening 1 230 in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  The effect movable body 224 has a configuration in which a display plate 209 is arranged inside a horizontally long rectangular frame-shaped portion. The display board 209 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device. In the initial state, the effect movable body 224 has its frame-like portion stopped at an initial position (origin position) above and outside the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG.

  The effect movable body 224 is driven by a drive system (not shown) within a plane approximately parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a display screen front plane). It can move in dimension. The drive system of the effect movable body 224 can take various configurations. For example, one end of two connecting rods that are rotatably connected is rotatably fixed to a predetermined position of the rendering device 206 outside the decorative symbol display device 208, and moved two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen The link mechanism that can be configured. The effect movable body 224 is fixed to the other end of the two connected connecting rods so as to be rotatable in the plane. A motor for driving the connecting rod is arranged at one end of the two connecting rods and the connecting node. Thereby, the effect movable body 224 can be moved two-dimensionally in the display screen front plane. Further, a motor for rotating the effect movable body is arranged at the other end of the two connecting rods. Thereby, the effect movable body 224 can be rotated in the display screen front plane.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly controls game ball payout, a launch control unit 630 that controls game ball launch control, a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100, and a first sub-control And a liquid crystal control unit 700 that controls the liquid crystal display device based on a command transmitted from the unit 400.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 retention lamp 220, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 222) And the like, and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Also, a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), and a drive circuit for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the game table frame lamp 122 and the chance button lamp 138). 420, a drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of a predetermined effect movable body, for example, a rotation operation of the chance button lamp 138 and an opening / closing operation of the shielding device 246, and various sensors for detecting the current positions of the effect movable bodies 138 and 246 430, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the various sensors 430 and the chance button sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402. The touch panel attached to the display screen of the touch panel display device 252 A touch sensor circuit 444 which outputs a detection signal for detecting a touch operation to the touch sensor) 252a to the basic circuit 402, is connected to the ROM406 for storing a control program and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The touch sensor circuit 444 includes a touch panel control IC. The touch panel control IC has a different function for each touch operation detection method, but in any method, the touch panel control IC has an A / D conversion function for converting an analog signal detected by the touch operation input to the touch sensor circuit 444 into a digital signal. Yes. The A / D converted touch operation detection signal is stored in a predetermined register arranged in the touch control IC, and can be read out at a necessary timing (for example, an instruction from the first sub-control unit 400). . In addition, the touch panel control IC can set a threshold value for resistance value reduction in the resistive touch multi-touch. Further, the IC includes a mode setting function that can set one mode from a plurality of modes based on the contents transmitted from the CPU 404. For example, mode 1 is a mode in which the state of the touch operation is always transmitted to the CPU 404 and is a mode that is detected (reacts) when the touch operation is performed. Mode 2 is a mode in which the state of the touch operation is always transmitted to the CPU 404. This mode is a transmission mode that detects (reacts) when a touch operation is completed. Mode 3 is a mode in which the state of the touch operation is transmitted to the CPU 404 only when the touch operation is performed, and is a mode that is detected (reacts) during the touch operation. Mode 4 is the mode in which the touch operation is performed. In this mode, the state of the touch operation is transmitted to the CPU 404 only when the touch operation is performed, and the mode is detected (reacts) when the touch operation is completed. Modes 1 and 3 tend to be set in association with continuous touch operation, and modes 2 and 4 tend to be set in association with long press touch operation.

  In addition, information communication between the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is bidirectional communication so that the first sub-control unit 400 can transmit signals such as commands to the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 can also transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, information communication between the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also bidirectional communication, and the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to transmit a signal such as a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. The liquid crystal control unit 700 is also configured to be able to send a signal such as a return command to the first sub control unit 400.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the chance button drive unit 708, and the current position of the effect movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 for detection, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a basic circuit A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication is connected between 502 and the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Also, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 632 and the launch motor 632 for driving the launcher and the ball feeder 634 for supplying the launcher sphere from the upper plate 126 are controlled.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The liquid crystal control unit 700 includes a CPU 704 that receives the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 based on the liquid crystal command. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 includes a RAM 708 for temporarily storing data, a ROM 706 storing control programs and data for controlling the entire liquid crystal control unit 700, data for image display, and the like, VDP (Video display processor) 720. The CPU 704 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 714a as a system clock.

  The VDP 720 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 714b as a system clock, reads image data stored in the CGROM 706a based on the signal from the CPU 704, and uses the work area of the VRAM 722. A display image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the touch panel display device 252. A VDP 720 is connected to the CPU 704, and a CGROM 706 a and a VRAM 722 are connected to the VDP 720. ROM 706 and RAM 708 are connected to both CPU 704 and VDP 720, respectively. In the present embodiment, the two liquid crystal display devices, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the touch panel type display device 252 are controlled by the same control means (liquid crystal control unit 700), but each is controlled by separate control means. There may be. Further, the touch panel display device 252 may be configured to be connected to the second sub-control unit 500 side. In addition, you may have the liquid crystal control part (3rd sub-control part) for touchscreens, and there exists an advantage that compatibility with a touchscreen control IC is easy to be taken in this case.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the types of types of special maps and general drawings that are stopped and displayed by the special map display device 212, the special map display device 214, and the general map display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows six types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure F” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 1. FIG. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is a difference in the special figure variable game after the big hit game, and the probability of winning the big hit is high (probable big hit) or low (normally big hit). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, the state shifts to the electric support state (referred to as a short time state together with the variable time reduction state of the special figure variable game). Although the time-short state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time-short state is referred to as a normal high-probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time-short state is referred to as a normal-low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot game is ended, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a jackpot The game state after the game ends is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state or short time state). Note that the timing when the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state are reached is the start of the first special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called sudden probability change. Sudden probability change will be in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game, like the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called latent probability variation. The latent probability change becomes a special figure high probability low probability state (latency probability variation state) after the big hit game ends.

  “Special figure E” is a small hit symbol, and after the small hit game, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (may be referred to as a normal state or a normal game state). In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as the “special drawing C” and “special drawing D” (twice in the case of this embodiment). Further, the “special drawing F” is a detachment symbol, which is a symbol that does not release an attacker and has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  FIG. 5B shows four types of special drawings from “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 2. In FIG. 5B, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. “Special figure a” is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol. In both “special chart a” and “special chart b”, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special chart high probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special drawing a” and “special drawing b” are symbols with which the degree of advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is entered. The “special drawing d” is an off symbol, the attacker does not release, and the symbol has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R big hit, 15R special big hit, 16R special big hit, 8R big hit, or 8R special big hit, a combination of symbols (for example, “decorative 1- (Decoration 1 -decoration 1 "," decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot or the 16R special jackpot is explicitly notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying the latent probability change or the small hit, the combination of symbols in which three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed. When notifying the probability change, the symbol combination ("decoration 1-ornament 3-ornament 5") in which three ornament symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing F” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined. However, the player may not know which combination of decorative symbols is which jackpot.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value for use in a lottery for determining a stop symbol in a special figure variable game Update random number counter. In addition, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a general winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number used for determining whether or not the normal game is changed is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determining random value counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a regular winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two initial value generation random number counters are updated respectively. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 including the above-described inner frame opening sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to detect the detection signal. The presence / absence is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the normal figure starting opening 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S205, the presence or absence of a door opening detection signal output from the dispensing control unit 600 that has received the detection result from the front frame door opening sensor that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is monitored, and the door detection provided in the RAM 308 is detected. Store in the signal state storage area.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then a special figure determination random number value used in the main control unit 300 is generated. The special figure determining random value counter and the common figure winning random value counter for generating the common winning random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure timer number determining random value counter for generating the special figure timer number determining random value for determining the symbol changing time in the special figure changing game or its initial value is updated. In addition, the value of the random number value counter for determining the general-purpose timer number for generating the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the general-purpose variable game or its initial value is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the value of the number-of-a-number-ball storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole is stored in the RAM 308. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and special figure determination random values in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") is special. 1 is stored in the same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 232 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and random number for determination of special figure in the special figure 2 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 start information") 2 is stored as many as the number of the special figure 2 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired from the general figure winning random number counter as the normal winning random number Store in the usual random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332) A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure off flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area A hit determination to be determined is performed, and in the case of winning, a flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number value counter for determining the normal timer number for generating the normal timer number determining random value is obtained as the random number value for determining the normal timer number. Based on the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number, one time for displaying the general-purpose figure on the general-purpose display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as the normal-type variable display time. , It is stored in the usual variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbol related lottery symbols are drawn Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process. The flow of the special figure prefetching process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prefetching result storage unit that stores a special figure prefetching result (also referred to as a prior determination result) as a result of executing the special figure prefetching process is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 1 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, there is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 1 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 1 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 1 prefetch result information in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted, the remaining special figure 1 prefetch information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 2 in this example. The RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results of the special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 2 prefetch result information in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 2 prefetching result is deleted, the remaining special figure 2 prefetching information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time. Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), which will be described later, the prefetch result information may be transmitted only in increments, or the prefetch result information for all suspensions may be transmitted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 3 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes flags for a 15R big hit flag, a 16R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, an outlier flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and an ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag. It is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is off and the 16R big hit flag is off FIG. 5 (b) when ON, 8R big hit flag is OFF, 2R big hit flag is OFF, small hit flag is OFF, outlier flag is OFF, special figure probability fluctuation flag is ON, and normal figure probability fluctuation flag is ON. Special figure a, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, 8R big hit flag is on, 2R big hit flag is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is off, special figure probability variation flag is on, and Special figure b when the normal probability fluctuation flag is on, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, 8R big hit flag is on, 2R big hit flag is off Is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is special figure c, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, When the 8R big hit flag is off, the 2R big hit flag is off, the small hit flag is off, the outlier flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, Thus, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off, and a setting indicating that the special figure 2 is being stopped is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 16R special big hit symbol (special figure a), the 8R special big hit symbol (special figure b), the 8R special big hit symbol (special figure c), and the off symbol (special figure). d) Confirm and display one of the symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1, or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to an opening / closing solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) of the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is also output. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (16 rounds or 8 rounds in the present embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. Here, the short-time state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The control state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric Chu extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state. In addition, a time-short state including a control state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is also shortened is called.

In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.
Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtaining and determining whether or not to make a big hit, determining whether or not to make a big hit using a determination table (not shown), and determining the time from the start of the variable display in FIG. 2 to the stop display Then, determination of a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is performed. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 are not included in the command data. 15R jackpot flag in the case of a symbol variation stop command, including information indicating the flag value, the flag value of the special symbol probability variation flag, and the flag value of each of the common symbol probability variation flags, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process , 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, outlier flag, special figure probability variation flag value, etc., 15R big hit flag (or 15R special big hit) start command Value, number of big hit rounds, special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, etc. In the case of the 16R special jackpot start command, the value of the 16R jackpot flag, the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the short time flag, etc. In the case of a 2R jackpot start command, including the flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number value, etc., in the case of a 2R jackpot start command, the value of the 2R jackpot flag, the number of jackpot rounds, the special figure probability variation flag value, the value of the hourly flag In the case of a jackpot end command, the special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number value, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, the special figure probability In the case of a big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  The prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information stored in the prefetch result storage unit together with the types of special figures 1 and 2 in the command data. The prefetch result information in the prefetch result information command may be only an increment or may include prefetch result information for all suspensions. In the present embodiment, the prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information for all suspensions.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag value, special figure probability variation flag value, special figure 1 stored in the RAM 308 as command data are also shown. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, and the like are set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Set. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224 in FIG. 7) will be described in more detail using FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure prefetching process. First, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased (step S251). It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 starting information has increased, the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetching stored in the special figure 2 prefetching number storage area. Compare with the number. The main control unit 300 compares the special figure 2 hold number with the special figure 2 prefetch number, and if the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, the special figure 2 start information is increased. If it is determined that the special figure 2 holding number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number, it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has not increased.

  When it is determined that the special figure 2 start information is increasing, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random number set related to the increased special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information are prefetched. Then, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229), using the pre-read random number for hit determination and the big hit determination table (not shown), the determination of whether or not the hit / failure is a big hit or small Pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S252). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to predetermine a symbol (stopped symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 2 ( Step S252). These pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and the special figure determination table (see FIGS. 11 and 12) used at the time of the success / failure determination, but a special determination table is prepared for the prefetching process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-determined special figure 2 variable game stop symbol information as a special figure 2 prefetching result in the preemptive space of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. Store (step S253), and proceed to step S254. If the main control unit 300 determines in step S251 that the special figure 2 start information has not increased, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S254 without executing steps S252 and S253.

  Next, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased (step S254). The determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 starting information has increased is made, for example, in the same manner as in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is performed by comparing the number of special figure 1 look-ahead stored in FIG. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is terminated.

  In step S <b> 255, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not non-electric support is being performed as an undetermined information setting condition. As the undetermined information setting condition, when the pre-reading result notification time is included in the electric support period, it is included in the jackpot game, or the case where the jackpot symbol is pre-determined for the suspension related to the special figure 1 etc. Can be mentioned.

  If the main control unit 300 determines that the undetermined information setting condition is not established, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values related to the increased special figure 1 start information from the special figure 1 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 1 start information are prefetched. Then, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), whether or not the success / failure determination becomes a big hit by using the pre-read random number for hit determination and a big hit determination table (not shown). A pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S256). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to pre-determine a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 1 ( Step S256). These pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and the special figure determination table (see FIGS. 11 and 12) used at the time of the success / failure determination, but a special determination table is prepared for the prefetching process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 1 variable game stop symbol as the special figure 1 prefetching result in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. (Step S257), the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S255 that the undetermined information setting condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 does not prefetch the increased special figure 1 start information, and prefetches the "undecided" information for special figure 1 It memorize | stores in a result memory | storage part (step S258), and a special figure prefetch process is complete | finished.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. FIG. 9A illustrates a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, and FIG. 9B illustrates the prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. This is an example of the state being performed. Moreover, FIG.9 (c) has illustrated the information memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 in electric support.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit includes, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas “prefetch results 1” to the number of the special figure 1 variable game that can be held. It has “look-ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 1 start information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas “prefetch result 1” to the number of special figure 2 variable games that can be held. It has “look-ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 2 start information storage area.

In FIG. 9A, “prefetch result 1” indicates that the stop symbol “special drawing F” is stored as the prefetch result 1. Similarly, the stop symbol “special diagram F” is stored in “prefetch result 2”, the stop symbol “special diagram A” is stored in “prefetch result 3”, and the stop symbol “special” is stored in “prefetch result 4”. FIG. F ”is stored.
In FIG. 9B, the stop symbol “special drawing d” is stored in “prefetch result 1”, and the state in which stop symbol information is not stored in “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4” is illustrated. Has been. In FIG. 11, a state in which information such as a stop symbol is not stored is expressed as “none”.
In FIG. 9C, “not-read information” is stored in “prefetch result 1” instead of the stop symbol. When undetermined information is stored, it is expressed as “undetermined information”. In “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4”, “none” in which information such as stop symbols is not stored is stored.

  Next, the special drawing 1 related lottery process in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes, for example, the special drawing 1 related lottery process based on the flow shown in FIG. The special figure 1 related lottery process is executed, for example, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controls the ROM 306, the RAM 308, and the like.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special drawing 1 related lottery process. As shown in FIG. 10, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or special electric accessory is in operation, that is, whether or not the special figure variable game or hit game is in progress (step S301). . For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that a special figure variable game or a winning game is in progress, the main control unit 300 ends the special figure 1 related lottery process without executing steps S303 to S321 described later, and is not in a special figure variable game or hits. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S303.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball, that is, whether or not a special figure 1 random number set is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 random value pair is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S305, and the special figure 1 random value set stores the special figure 1 holding number storage area. If it is determined that it is not stored in the area, the special drawing 1 related lottery process is terminated without executing steps S305 to S321 described later.

  In step S305, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 probability variation flag is on. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 probability variation flag is on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S307, and if it determines that the flag is not on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S309.

  In step S307, the success / failure determination is executed by using the high / failure determination high probability table [Special Figure 1] for special figure 1 described later with reference to FIG. 11 (b). Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a special figure 2 priority change machine that changes in preference to the special figure 2 over the special figure 1, for example, the main control unit 300 has a special figure 2 reservation number storage area. The special figure 2 random value set stored first is read, and if the special figure 2 random value set is not stored, the special figure 1 random value stored first in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. , Read the high-probability determination table shown in FIG. 11B [Special Figure 1], execute the determination, and go to step S311.

  On the other hand, in step S309, the success / failure determination is executed by using the low / probability determination probability table [Special Figure 1] for special figure 1 described later with reference to FIG. 11 (a). The processing in step S309 is the same as that in step S307 except that the table referred to in the determination of success / failure is the low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. . When the process of step S309 ends, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S311.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S319. If the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S319, a big hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table for special figure 1 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 1], a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321.

  On the other hand, in step S313, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S317, and if the determination result is not a small hit, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S315.

  In step S317, a small hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. Then, the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321. In the present embodiment, since there is one small hit symbol, it is determined as “Special E” with a probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, in step S315, a missing symbol is determined. With reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 12A, the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to Step S321. In the present embodiment, since there is only one off symbol, it is determined as “special drawing F” with a probability of 100%.

  In step S321 following step S315, S317, or S319, the variation time is determined according to the symbol. For example, the main controller 300 refers to the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG.

  The special figure 2 related lottery process is based on the fact that the variable game or special game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed and the number of special figure 2 variable games held is one or more. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (the special figure 2 winning information) from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. A random number value and a special figure 2 random value set), and is stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308. In addition, a determination (whether or not) of whether to win or lose is made using a table for determining whether or not to win (see FIGS. 11C to 11D). Next, the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (see FIG. 12B) based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined result determination result. ) Is used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) shown in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (see FIG. 14).

  Next, the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. The tables shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 11 (a) to 11 (d) are used in the success / failure determination process of FIG. 1 or FIG. An example of the success / failure determination table is shown. FIG. 11A shows a table for special figure 1 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 11B shows a table for special figure 1 used during the special figure high probability. FIG. 11C shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 11D shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability.

  11A and 11B, the success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1] includes “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Number Range” in the second column, “Random Number Range” in the third column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 11A indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, a numerical value 10220 to 10383, and a numerical value 10384 to 65535. In the third column, the “results of success / failure determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10384 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. The “small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10220 to 10383.

  The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 11B indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, a numerical value 12186 to 12349, and a numerical value 12350 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of determination” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 12350 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. , “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 12186 to 12349.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Special Figure 1]. For example, when the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. When the game state is a special figure low probability state, the probability determination low probability table [Special figure 1] shown in FIG. 11A is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 11C shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 11D shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability. 11C and 11D, the success / failure determination table [Special Figure 2] includes “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Number Range” in the second column, “Random Number Range” in the third column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 11C indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, and a numerical value 10220 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10220 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 11D indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10,000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, and a numerical value 12186 to 65535. In the third column, “Win / Fail determination result” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to “10000”, “loss” corresponding to the values 12186 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Special Figure 2]. For example, if the gaming state at the time of determination of success / failure is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special figure low probability state, the low / probability determination low probability table [Special figure 2] shown in FIG. 11C is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit probability of special figure 2 is set to 0 as one example in which the small hit probability of special figure 2 is lower than the small hit probability of special figure 1. Of course, a special random number range may be set in the special figure 2 as a small hit. Further, the small hit probability of special figure 2 may be the same as or higher than special figure 1.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 1 variable game is selected with the first probability, and the special figure 2 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 2 variable game is obtained by the first probability. Small hits are selected with a lower second probability.

  The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. For this reason, during the electric support, a penalty is given to the player who does not play the game intended by the pachinko machine developer so that the hit is increased, and the game is intended to be played by the pachinko machine developer. There are cases where it is possible. For example, in the case where the special figure 2 starting port is arranged in the right area of the game board 200, the developer intends that the player makes a right turn in the electric support state. In this case, if the player does not make a right strike and makes a left strike different from the intention of the developer, if the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player thinks that it is more advantageous to hit the right. There is a case that can be made. Further, since the small hit probability of the special figure 2 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is low, the small hit in the electric support is often the special figure 1 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by changing the production that can be changed when a predetermined change condition is established, the player is indirectly notified that the special figure 2 starting port 232 has not entered too much, thereby suppressing gambling. May be possible.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by reducing the small hits that are disadvantageous in terms of performance in the special figure 2 variable game, it is possible to highlight that the special figure 2 variable game is more advantageous than the special figure 1 variable game and to improve the interest of the game. There is a case.

  FIG. 12 shows a special figure determination table. FIG. 12A shows a special figure determination table [special figure 1] for special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 12B shows a special figure determination table [special figure 2] for special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 12 (a), the special figure determination table [special figure 1] is composed of items of "result / no-good determination result", "random number range", and "stop symbol" from the left column. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 11 (a) or FIG. 11 (b). As a result of the success / failure determination using the special figure success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1], the case where “small hit” is determined is shown, and “out” indicates whether the special figure success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1] is used. As a result of the determination, a case where it is determined as “disconnected” is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 12A indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of 0-24, numerical values 25-49, numerical values 50-54, and numerical values 55-99, corresponding to the item “big hit” in the left column “results of success / failure determination”, Corresponding to “small hit”, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99, and corresponding to “off”, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 12A represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the range of the design random number corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 24, “special drawing A (15R probability variation)”, the numerical values 25 to 49, “special drawing B (15R)”, Stop symbols of “special drawing C (sudden probability change)” corresponding to numerical values 50 to 54 and “special drawing D (latency probability change)” corresponding to numerical values 55 to 99 are assigned. In addition, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing E (small hit)” corresponding to the value “0” to “99” in the “random hit” range. Further, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing F (missing)” corresponding to “0” and “99” in the range of the symbol random number.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to display any one of the special figures A to F when the determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Whether to stop the display of the stop symbol pattern is determined with reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] for the acquired special figure determination random value. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the stop symbol form of the special figure E on the special figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on the entrance to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a small hit. Decide what to do. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure F when the determination result based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of place. To decide.

  In FIG. 12B, the special figure determination table [special figure 2] is composed of items of “result / no-good determination result”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol” from the left column. In order to facilitate understanding, a “description of symbol” is attached to the right side of the “stop symbol”. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where “hit” is determined as a result of the success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 11 (c) or FIG. 11 (d). The case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the determination as to whether or not the figure determination table [Special Figure 2] is used is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 12B indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. “Random number range” is divided into three values of 0 to 69, 70 to 74, and 75 to 99 corresponding to the item “big hit” in the left column “result of judgment”, and corresponds to “out of” Thus, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 12B represents a stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the range of symbol random numbers corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 69, “special drawing a (16R probability variation)”, and the numerical values 70 to 74 “special symbol b (8R probability variation)”. , Corresponding to the numerical values 75 to 99, the special symbol c (8R) stop symbol form is respectively assigned. Further, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing d (missing)” corresponding to “0” and “99” in the range of the symbol random number.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to display any one of the special figure a to the special figure c when the success / failure determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure determination table [special figure 2] with respect to the acquired special figure determination random value whether or not the stop symbol pattern is to be stopped and displayed. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure d when the determination result based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of place. To decide.

  FIG. 13 shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table shown in FIG. 13 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 13, the special figure 1 variable display time determination table has four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 1 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In the present embodiment, the first to fifth sub-tables are provided. The first sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure A or special figure B. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the first sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The second sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure C. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the second sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 30000, a numerical value 30001 to 45000, and a numerical value 45001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, the effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 30001 to 45000, an effect is selected in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super Reach A / Chance stop. . Here, the super reach A miss / chance eye stop is a display for stopping the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach A is missed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of values 45001 to 65535, an effect that the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super reach B / chance stop is selected. . Here, the super reach B miss / chance eye stop is a display in which the chance eye is stopped after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach B is missed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The third sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure D or special figure E. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the third sub-table is divided into two values, a numerical value 0 to 30000 and a numerical value 30001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, the effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of numerical values 30001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is out of the normal reach / chance stop is selected. Here, the normal reach miss / chance eye stop is a display that stops the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the normal reach is missed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The fourth sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure F, the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the non-electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is three. The “random number selection range” in the fourth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 65000, a numerical value 65001 to 65400, a numerical value 65401 to 65500, and a numerical value 65501 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 65000, the effect that the variation time is 3000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shortened is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65400, an effect in which the variation time is 10,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is out of the normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the values 65401 to 65500, an effect in which the variation time is 40000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach A is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is in the range of the numerical values 65501 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach B is selected.

  The fifth sub-table is for the case where the stop symbol is special figure F, the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is non-electric support and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0 to 2, or the game at the time of determination of success / failure It is used when the status is electric support and the number of holds in Fig. 1 is 0-3. The “random number selection range” in the fifth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is off is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, an effect in which the variation time is 10,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is out of normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the variation time is 40000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach A is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach B is selected.

  FIG. 14 shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 14 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 14, the special figure 2 variable display time determination table has four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 2 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In the present embodiment, there are four sub-tables from first to fourth. The first sub-table is used when the stop symbol is special figure a to special figure c. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the first sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The second sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, and the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 1 to 3. The “random number selection range” in the second sub-table is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of numerical values 0 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 1500 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is extremely short is selected.

  The third sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, and the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the electric support, and the holding number of the special figure 2 is 0. The “random number selection range” in the third sub-table is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 65535, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is off is selected.

  The fourth sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is non-electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0-3. The “random number selection range” in the fourth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is off is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, an effect in which the variation time is 10,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is out of normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the variation time is 40000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach A is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach B is selected.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S401 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area is 33 (33 ms) or more, and this process is repeated until the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the value becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable CNT. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed as indicated by 33, 33, and 34 every time the process proceeds from step S303 to step S305.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command from the main control unit 300, a command from the second sub control unit 500, and a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 have been received, and an unprocessed command Process.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Further, an effect lottery process is performed based on a command from the main control unit 300, and a liquid crystal command and a box data setting process (described later) for setting parts data at a predetermined position are performed. If there is part data in the position after receiving the return command from the liquid crystal controller 700, the part data to be transmitted to the speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, effect movable body 138, 246, 224, etc. Perform the setting process.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, when it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, touch panel related processing is performed. For example, mode setting processing related to detection on the touch panel 252a and detection level threshold setting processing are performed. A process of changing to effect data according to the detection of the touch operation on the touch panel 252a of the touch panel type display device 252 is performed.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, if there is a command to the effect movable bodies 138 and 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432, and the shielding device 246 and the chance button are output. Drive control of the rotating body in the lamp 138 is performed.

  In step S421 following step S419, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, this control command is set to be output to the second sub-control unit 500. If there is a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 in the effect data read in step S409, the liquid crystal command is set to be output to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the process returns to step S403.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command. This command reception interrupt process is also executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the second sub control unit 500. In step S431, the command output from the second sub-control unit 500 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408. This command reception interrupt process is also executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the liquid crystal control unit 700. In step S431, the command output from the liquid crystal control unit 700 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S441 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is set to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Add and store in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable CNT is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms (1 ms × 33).

  In step S443 subsequent to step S441, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500, transmission of a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 set in step S421 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400, and others Processing for updating the random number value for effects, etc., and related processing (detection, etc.) of the touch panel 252a of the touch panel display 252 are performed.

  Next, the control IC touch detection related process executed in the various update processes in step S443 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 15C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a flowchart of control IC touch detection related processing. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of the touch input process in step S505 in the control IC touch detection related process.

  First, in step S <b> 501 in FIG. 5A, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 performs mode setting processing for the touch sensor circuit 444. In the mode setting process, it is possible to instruct one of mode 1 and mode 2 that always send the detection result, or one of mode 3 and mode 4 that is sent only when there is a detection. Or it can also comprise so that the mode selected according to the content of a touch effect may be changed.

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, a threshold setting process for setting a threshold value for lowering the resistance value between the counter electrodes during multi-touch is performed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, but a threshold value for lowering the resistance value between the electrodes X1 and X2 facing each other in the X direction of the touch panel 252a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “between X1 and X2”). And a threshold value for decreasing the resistance value between the electrode Y1 and the electrode Y2 opposed in the Y direction (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “between Y1 and Y2”). In this embodiment, a threshold is set to such an extent that simultaneous touch operations are effective up to two points. When the amount of threshold value to be set is small, detection of three or more points may be possible. However, since there is an aspect that accuracy decreases, in this embodiment, the two-point simultaneous touch operation is set as the optimum operation. .

  In step S505 subsequent to step S503, touch input processing is performed. The touch input process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  In step S507 following step S505, an area specifying process is performed. In the area specifying process, the area where the touch operation is performed is specified based on the XY coordinates specified in the touch input process. Note that the validity of the coordinates may be directly determined by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 without performing this process.

  In step S509 subsequent to step S507, processing for transmitting area information to the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 is performed. When mode 3 or mode 4 is selected, the detection state is transmitted only when a touch operation is performed. Therefore, information is not transmitted to the CPU 404 when the area is not identified in the area identifying process. When the area information transmission process ends, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process ends.

  Next, touch input processing by the touch panel control IC will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S511, it is determined whether or not the resistance value in the X-axis direction of the touch panel 252a is lower than the threshold value. If the resistance value has decreased, the process proceeds to step S513. If the resistance value has not decreased, the process proceeds to step S515. In step S513, the detection signal of the touch operation between X1 and X2 is A / D converted to specify and store the X coordinates x1 and x2, and then the process proceeds to step S515.

  In step S515, it is determined whether or not the resistance value in the Y-axis direction of the touch panel 252a is lower than the threshold value. If the resistance value has decreased, the process proceeds to step S517. If the resistance value has not decreased, the process proceeds to step S519. In step S517, the detection signal of the touch operation between Y1 and Y2 is A / D converted to specify and store the Y coordinates y1 and y2, and then the process proceeds to step S519.

  If the resistance values in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction of the touch panel 252a are not lower than the respective threshold values, it is assumed that a single-touch touch operation has been performed, and in step S519, the single-touch XY coordinates are changed. Determine whether there is data. If there is XY coordinate data, the process proceeds to step S521, the coordinates (x, y) are specified, and the touch input process is terminated. The touch input process is also terminated when there is no XY coordinate data.

  In the touch panel type display device 252 in which the touch panel 252a is attached to the display screen, in the initial state, the correspondence relationship between the touch operation detection position and the display screen coordinates is set by the control of the control IC. The touch panel type display device 252 of this embodiment has a screen size of 7 inches (aspect ratio is 3: 2) and a display mode of HVGA (resolution is (horizontal) 480 × (vertical) 320 = 153600 pixels). .

  FIG. 17A shows a touchable area (area) of the touch panel 252a attached to the display screen of the touch panel type display device 252. FIG. In this embodiment, the touchable area is defined by 24 areas 1 to 24 in a matrix of 4 rows and 6 columns. FIG. 17B shows the arrangement range of the 24 areas 1 to 24 by the X coordinate and the Y coordinate. Each coordinate is represented by the position of a pixel (pixel) arranged in a matrix of 320 rows and 480 columns. For example, taking the X axis in the horizontal direction of the display screen and the Y axis in the vertical direction, the XY coordinate of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen is (1, 1), and the XY coordinate of the pixel at the lower right corner is (480, 320), the arrangement range of the area 1 is a square area where the coordinates of the upper left corner are (1, 1) and the coordinates of the lower right corner are (80, 80). Similarly, the arrangement ranges of the other areas 2 to 24 are also defined.

  The number of defined areas and the area of each area are related to the size of the touch area, ease of touching, and the like. The number and area of the areas can be made finer or rougher according to the touch effect and other effects. In the following embodiments, description will be made using the touchable area divided into the 24 areas described above. However, the range of the touch area may be further subdivided, or in accordance with the production and display. It may be changed, or a plurality of areas may be used as one touch area as in a decatouch area described later.

  Next, processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the VDP image control process of the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  First, in step S601 in FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the storage area in the RAM 708 is initialized. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S603 following step S601, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer variable CNT is 33 or more. This process is repeated until the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33, and the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more. Sometimes, the process proceeds to step S605. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed as indicated by 33, 33, and 34 every time the process proceeds from step S603 to step S605. In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable CNT.

  In step S607 following step S605, command processing is performed. The CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 determines whether a liquid crystal command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S609 following step S607, VDP command transmission processing is performed. For example, when there is an image display instruction from the first sub-control unit 400, a command is transmitted to the VDP 720 to cause the VDP 720 to perform image control processing.

  In step S611 following step S609, return command transmission processing is performed. If the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 or the touch panel display device 252 to display the requested image, the liquid crystal control unit 700 sets to send a return command to the first sub-control unit 400, and step S603 is performed. Return to.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the liquid crystal control unit 700 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S621 of the command reception interrupt process, the liquid crystal command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 708.

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal control unit 700 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). The timer interrupt processing is triggered by the timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle. Run with. In step S631 of the liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 708 described in step S603 in the liquid crystal control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable CNT is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms (1 ms × 33).

  In step S633 following step S631, transmission of a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S611 in the liquid crystal control unit main process, update processing of other random number values for production, and other various update processes are performed. Do.

  Next, the image control process of the VDP 720 that has received the VDP command in the VDP command transmission process of step S609 in the liquid crystal controller main process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S641, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 704 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 722. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the touch panel display device 252. Next, the CPU 704 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 706), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 722), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 720 based on the position information table and the like. A command for instructing the start of image data transfer is set. The VDP 720 transfers image data from the ROM 706 or CGROM 706a to the VRAM 722 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 720 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 704.

  In step S643 following step S641, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 720 has been input. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S645; Wait for the input signal to be input. In step S645, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 722 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 722 in step S641, the CPU 704 sets information on image data (coordinate axes of the VRAM 722, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 720. The VDP 720 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S647 following step S645, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 704 instructs the VDP 720 to start drawing an image. The VDP 720 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 704. In step S649 after step S647, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 720 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S651. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S651, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 708 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of box data provided in the RAM 408, FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of positions, and FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram of parts data.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the box data shown in FIG. 5A in the box data setting area of the RAM 408 at the timing of each effect execution, such as when the fluctuation starts, when the hold increases, when the big hit starts, or when the button effect occurs. Set. For example, at the time of starting the change, the start of change, the first pseudo stop (temporary stop of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a), the second pseudo stop (temporary stop of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c), the third pseudo stop Stop (temporary stop of decorative symbol in middle symbol display area 208b), fourth pseudo stop (temporary stop of decorative symbol in left middle right symbol display region 208a-208c), first symbol stop, second symbol stop, reach display The first sub-control unit 400 sends a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at each timing, such as the development of reach production, the third symbol stop, and the re-lottery display (the once-displayed and once-decorated decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). When there is part data in the position, the sound corresponding to the part data, the lamp mode, and the production movable body mode are set, and the production corresponding to the display is performed.

  The box data is composed of liquid crystal commands, part data (here, part 1 and part 5 as an example). The liquid crystal command is a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the touch panel display device 252 to display an effect display corresponding to each at the start of fluctuation, at the time of increase in hold, at the start of a jackpot, or when a button effect occurs. Contains. In addition, the part data includes an output sound (sound) output from the speaker 120 corresponding to each performance, various lamps 418 such as a game frame frame lamp 542 and / or a game board lamp 532 (hereinafter referred to as “lamp”). L ”) light emission mode, chance button lamp 138, shielding device 246 and / or effect movable body 224 (hereinafter collectively referred to as“ movable object M ”), such as box information. In the data, the storage position (position) of each part data is set. Here, it is assumed that position 0001 (first address) is set as the storage position of part 1 in the box data, and position 0003 (first address) is set as the storage position of part 5. The box data is set when the first sub control unit 400 sets a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, positions are arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and part data corresponding to a plurality of positions (here, position 0000 to position 9FFF) are stored. Note that parts data may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions. For example, in the example shown in the figure, no part data is stored in positions 0000, 0002, and 9FFF, part data (part 1) is stored in position 0001, and part data (part 5) is stored in position 0003.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, each part data (parts 1 and 5 here) includes a sound layer having sound device data, a run player having lamp device data, shutter device data, title device data, and the like. It consists of an actor action layer. Only one piece of sound device data, shutter device data, title device data, etc. is shown here, but each may have a plurality of device data such as lamp device data. For example, the lamp device data 1 is information on the light emission mode of the lamp at the time of BGM output, and the lamp device data 2 is information on the light emission mode of the lamp at the time of one notification. Further, for example, each layer or a plurality of layers (for example, run player 1 to run player 4, or the accessory action layer 1 and the accessory action layer 2) may be configured. The priority of 4 is the highest, the priority of layers 3 and 2 is sequentially lower, and the priority of layer 1 is the lowest. Each part data may have one layer number and may have one device data number (or type).

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the box data described above (for each effect) at the timing of each effect execution, and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the corresponding position in the RAM 408, and when the part data is stored, the sound of the sound layer of the part data is stored. The light emitting mode of the run player and the movable mode of the accessory action layer are set as transmission commands and transmitted to each device, and an effect corresponding to the effect display is performed.

  FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of command transmission timing in effect control according to the present embodiment. In the same figure, it shows about an example of each command transmitted with time progress shown by the arrow which goes from the left side to the right side.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 15, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs each effect according to the result. The control command is transmitted to the speaker 120, the lamp L, and the movable object M.

  For example, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when performing the change start effect of the special figure variable game (1). A plurality of liquid crystal commands are prepared in accordance with the type of effect. For example, in this case, the liquid crystal command instructs the decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the touch panel display device 252 to start the decorative symbol variation display. Contains commands. The first sub-control unit 400 transmits to the speaker 120, the lamp L, and the movable object M a sound corresponding to the start of fluctuation, a drive command that instructs a light emission mode or a movable mode (2). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts control for performing decorative display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the touch panel display device 252 (3).

  In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 executes control for producing an effect of the notice A in the decorative symbol display device 208 during the variable display (4), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400. (5). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. Configure command transmission settings. For example, when the return command includes the information of the position 0001 as the data for performing the effect of the notice A, various device data corresponding to the part 1 stored in the position 0001 of the RAM 408 (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) And the movement mode of the movable object M) are set in the transmission command, and the sound, the lamp mode and the movable mode corresponding to the notice A are transmitted to the speaker 120, the lamp L and the movable object M, respectively (6).

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 executes control for producing the notice B on the touch-panel display device 252 during the variable display (7), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400. (8). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. Configure command transmission settings. For example, when the return command includes information on the position 0003 as data for performing the notice B, various device data corresponding to the part 5 stored in the position 0003 of the RAM 408 (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) And a movable command of the movable object M) are set in a transmission command, and a sound command corresponding to the notice B, a light emission mode, or a drive command indicating the movable mode is transmitted to the speaker 120, the lamp L, and the movable object M, respectively. (9).

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of performing the touch effect requesting the touch operation (10). For example, when the return command includes information on the position 0100 as the data for performing the touch effect, the data of various device data (touch panel 252a) corresponding to the part stored in the position 0100 of the RAM 408 is set as the transmission command. Then, the detection signal from the touch panel 252a is transmitted to the touch sensor circuit 444 to which the detection signal is input (11). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits, for example, a liquid crystal command for instructing an effect display that prompts the user to press a button or a command related to a touch effect start to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (12). The display of the touch effect that prompts the user to press the button on the device 252 is executed (13).

  Next, the touch sensor circuit 444 to which the detection signal from the touch panel 252a is input transmits an operation command including touch operation reception information to the first sub-control unit 400 (14), and the first command that has received the operation command is transmitted. The sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command including a command related to the start of the effect after the touch operation corresponding to the touch operation to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (15). The first sub control unit 400 may determine a command to be transmitted to the touch sensor circuit 444 as necessary.

  In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 executes a control for performing an effect after the touch operation in the decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the touch panel display device 252 (16), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the first sub control unit 400. A return command is transmitted (17). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data when there is a position (part data) setting corresponding to the box data. Configure command transmission settings. For example, when the return command includes information on the position 0200 as the data for performing the touch operation, various device data (sound, light emission of the lamp L) corresponding to the part 9 stored in the position 0200 of the RAM 408 are included. The data of the mode and the movable mode of the movable object M) are set in the transmission command, and the sound, the lamp mode and the movable mode corresponding to the effects after the touch operation are transmitted to the speaker 120, the lamp L and the movable object M, respectively. (18). In this embodiment, an example of transmitting a command using a return command has been described. However, there is no need for a return command, and the control is described in the second and later embodiments, which will be described later. (For example, the second decorative symbol display device 209) can be replaced with the touch panel display device 252 of the present embodiment.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer variable CNT is 33 or more. This process is repeated until the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33, and the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more. Sometimes, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the value of the timer variable CNT.

  In step S707 following step S705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S711 following step S709, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713 following step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S721 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S731, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT value storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Remember. Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable CNT is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms (1 ms × 33). In step S733 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the movable body control process in step S713 of the second sub control unit main process in FIG. 21A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is a flowchart showing a flow of control processing to the effect movable body 224. In the movable body control process, various processes based on the received command are executed in step S801. When there is a command to the effect movable body 224 in the control command of the main control unit 300 or the first sub control unit 400 sent via the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500 Based on the command, predetermined data is stored or saved in a storage area in the drive circuit 516, and discarded from the storage area. If the sensor circuit 518 does not detect the predetermined signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 at the time of receiving the command, the operation based on the control command is discarded and the operation to return the effect movable body 224 to the origin position is executed. May be.

  FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body interruption process. The movable body control process is interrupted at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms), and the predetermined process is executed. For example, in step S811, predetermined data is written in the storage area of the drive circuit (driver) 516. For example, when the drive system is a solenoid, predetermined voltage data for excitation is written in the drive circuit 516, and in the case of a stepping motor or the like, a drive pulse, torque information, or the like is written. In step S813 following step S811, the state (ON / OFF) of the signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 is monitored. As described above, when the sensor circuit 518 has not detected the predetermined signal from the effect movable body sensor 424, an operation of returning the effect movable body 224 to the origin position may be executed. In step S815 following step S813, the driving data for the effect movable body 224 stored in the storage area in the driving circuit 516 is updated to new driving data based on the control command.

  FIG. 23 shows a schematic configuration of a resistive film type (4-wire type) touch panel. FIG. 23A illustrates a cross-sectional configuration of a resistive film type touch panel. In the resistive touch panel, for example, a lower substrate 801 made of a glass material and an upper substrate 803 made of an organic thin film (film) are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval (gap). Transparent electrodes of ITO (indium / tin / oxide) are formed on opposite sides of both the substrates 801 and 803. For example, on the transparent electrode surface of the lower substrate 801, insulative dot spacers are arranged at a predetermined arrangement density in order to prevent a short circuit with the counter electrode when no touch operation is performed. Two opposing substrates 801 and 803 are fixed with a paste 805 disposed around them. As shown on the right side of the figure, a connector tail 807 in which wiring ends for outputting signals to the outside are collected is disposed between the boards.

  FIG. 23B shows a touch operation state in which the surface of the upper substrate 803 of the resistive touch panel is pressed with a finger 901. The surface portion of the upper substrate 803 pressed by the finger 901 is bent and recessed downward, and the convex portion of the transparent electrode of the upper substrate 803 comes into contact with the transparent electrode of the lower substrate 801. Thereby, the input by touch operation is performed.

  FIG. 23C is a schematic exploded perspective view of the resistive touch panel viewed from an oblique direction. In the figure, the X axis is taken in the left-right direction and the Y axis is taken in the diagonally upper right direction. Both the upper substrate 803 and the lower substrate 801 are formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same size. An electrode X1 (left side) and an electrode X2 (right side) that are opposed to each other in the X direction are disposed on both ends of the upper substrate 803 in the X axis direction. A transparent electrode that is in electrical contact with these electrodes is formed between the electrodes X1 and X2. An electrode Y1 (upper side) and an electrode Y2 (lower side) that are opposed to each other in the Y direction are disposed at both ends of the lower substrate 801 in the Y-axis direction. A transparent electrode that is in electrical contact with the electrodes Y1 and Y2 is formed between the electrodes Y1 and Y2. The resistance of the transparent electrode (resistive film) is about 300 to 500 Ω / sq.

  When a central potential A on the surface of the upper substrate 803 is pressed with a finger or the like while a ground potential (0 V) is applied to the electrode X1 and Vcc (5 V) is applied to the electrode X2, for example, the electrode Y2 of the lower substrate 801, for example, A voltage of 2.5 V is detected at the detection point A1_in. Similarly, when a predetermined position B near the electrode X2 on the surface of the upper substrate 803 is pressed with a finger, a voltage of 4 V is detected at the detection point A1_in of the electrode Y2 of the lower substrate 801. The coordinate position in the X direction can be identified by A / D converting the detected voltage.

  Next, when the ground potential (0 V) is applied to the electrode Y1 and Vcc (5 V) is applied to the electrode Y2, for example, the center portion A on the surface of the upper substrate 803 is pressed with a finger or the like, for example, the electrode of the upper substrate 803 A voltage of 2.5 V is detected at the detection point A2_in of X2. Similarly, when a predetermined position B near the electrode X2 on the surface of the upper substrate 803 is pressed with a finger, a voltage of 4 V is detected at the detection point A2_in of the electrode X2 on the upper substrate 803. The coordinate position in the Y direction can be specified by A / D converting the detected voltage.

  FIG. 24 shows a schematic configuration of a resistive film type (5-wire type) touch panel. The resistive film type (5-wire type) touch panel has an ITO film formed on the opposing surface of the lower substrate and the upper substrate, and a dot spacer is provided to maintain a gap between the two substrates. Same but different electrode placement and configuration. In the 5-wire touch panel, electrodes A to D are arranged at the four corners of the lower substrate, the upper substrate functions as a detection circuit, and a detection point A_in for detecting a voltage by a touch operation is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, for example, a predetermined position C on the upper substrate surface is pressed in a state where a ground potential (0 V) is applied between the electrodes AB and Vcc (5 V) is applied between the electrodes CD. And the convex part of the transparent electrode of the upper substrate in the predetermined position C is in contact with the transparent electrode of the lower substrate. Thereby, the voltage in the X direction is detected at the detection point A_in of the upper substrate. The coordinate position in the X direction can be identified by A / D converting the detected voltage. Next, as shown in FIG. 24B, with the ground potential (0 V) applied between the electrodes AC and Vcc (5 V) applied between the electrodes BD, for example, a predetermined position C on the upper substrate surface is pressed. If it does, the convex part of the transparent electrode of the upper board | substrate in the predetermined position C will contact the transparent electrode of a lower board | substrate. Thereby, a voltage in the Y direction is detected at the detection point A_in of the upper substrate. The coordinate position in the Y direction can be specified by A / D converting the detected voltage.

  FIG. 25 shows an example of a multi-touch detection method using a resistive film type (4-wire type) touch panel. FIG. 25A shows an example of single touch (single point touch) described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25B shows an example of multi-touch (two-point touch). When two points are touched, the resistance value between X1 and X2 is lower than when one point is touched. The amount of decrease in the resistance value is compared with a predetermined threshold value to determine the occurrence of two-point touch. As for the detection of two or more touches, the resistance value of the resistor R5 decreases as the distance of the two-point touch decreases, and thus approaches the equivalent circuit at the time of one-point touch in FIG. For this reason, in order to prevent erroneous determination, in this embodiment, a threshold value is set so that it is possible to determine up to two-point touch.

  FIG. 26 shows a structure that enables multi-touch by arranging, for example, the resistive films of the resistive touch panel in a plurality of cells. FIG. 16A shows a resistive film type (4-wire multi) touch panel. A plurality of resistive films are arranged in a matrix of 3 rows and 5 columns, and touch detection is performed for each divided region. Since the resistive film region is divided into 15 regions A1 to A15, the coordinate specification is unnecessary, and the area can be directly specified by the regions A1 to A15. A slight gap is formed between each region to prevent a short circuit between adjacent electrodes.

  FIG. 26B shows a state where a finger or the like has touched the area A8 at one point. Since the resistive film type (4-wire multi) touch panel performs detection for each divided region, the area can be specified only by detecting the X coordinate. FIG. 26B ′ shows a state where a finger or the like has touched the area A7 and the area A9 at two points. Since the touch operation is detected for each divided region, a plurality of areas can be specified only by detecting the X coordinate even at the same voltage level.

  FIGS. 26C and 26D show a modified example of two-point detection on a resistive film type (4-wire multi) touch panel. FIGS. 26C and 26D show a state where a finger or the like has touched the area A7 and the area A9 at two points. First, the X coordinate detection shown in FIG. The X coordinate detection process is performed in the order of the areas A1, A2, A3,..., A15, and the detection process is terminated when the detection is first performed. Thereby, it is specified by the X coordinate detection that there is a touch operation in the area A7. Next, the Y coordinate detection shown in FIG. The Y coordinate detection process is performed in the order of the areas A15, A14, A13,..., A1, and the detection process is terminated when the detection is first performed. Thereby, it is specified that there is a touch operation in the area A9 by the Y coordinate detection. There is no coincidence determination, and one is specified when the X coordinate is detected, and one is specified when the Y coordinate is detected, so only two simultaneous operations are valid. Thereby, automatic simultaneous operation of three or more points can be regulated.

  FIG. 27 shows a capacitive touch panel. FIG. 27A shows a cross section cut in the normal direction of the touch surface of the touch panel. In FIG. 27A, a display screen is formed on a substrate constituting an LCD panel, and a capacitive touch panel is pasted on the display screen. A control IC or the like capable of position specifying control with a touch panel is mounted on the substrate. In the touch panel, two insulating thin films such as glass are arranged opposite to each other, and an X electrode and a Y electrode made of an ITO film having electrical conductivity and transparency are formed on the opposing surfaces of both thin films. An insulating adhesive is filled between the X electrode and the Y electrode.

  FIG. 27B shows a state where the electrode arrangement of the touch panel is viewed in the normal direction of the substrate surface. In the X electrode, eight electrodes X1 to X8 extending in the column direction of the rectangular display screen are arranged at predetermined intervals from left to right in the row direction of the display screen. Each electrode is provided with seven square regions in which diagonal lines are aligned. In the Y electrode, six electrodes X1 to X6 extending in the row direction of the rectangular display screen are arranged at predetermined intervals from top to bottom in the column direction of the display screen. Each electrode is provided with eight square regions in which diagonal lines are aligned. Since the square regions of the electrodes X1 to X8 are shifted by a half pitch vertically and horizontally with respect to the square regions of the electrodes Y1 to Y6 when viewed in the normal direction of the substrate surface, the square regions of the gaps between the square regions of the electrodes X1 to X8 Square regions of the electrodes Y1 to Y6 are arranged.

  When the circled portion shown in FIG. 27B is touched with a finger, the capacitance values of the electrodes X3 and X4 among the electrodes X1 to X8 increase as compared with the other X electrodes. In addition, the capacitance values of the electrodes Y4 and Y5 among the electrodes Y1 to Y6 increase as compared with the other Y electrodes. By detecting the capacitance difference for each X electrode, it can be specified that the finger is touched at a position between the electrode X3 and the electrode X4. Similarly, it is possible to identify that the finger is touched at a position between the electrode Y4 and the electrode Y5 by detecting a capacitance difference for each Y electrode. In specifying the touch position in this example, the area specifying information shown in FIG. 17 can be applied mutatis mutandis. Even if the coordinates are not specified, it is sufficient that the correspondence between the electrode and the effective area of the touch is taken.

  FIG. 28 shows a detection example when the two-point simultaneous touch operation on the capacitive touch panel shown in FIG. 27 is enabled and the three-point simultaneous touch operation is disabled. In FIG. 28A, X3-X4 is touched with respect to the X electrode, Y4-Y5 is touched with respect to the Y electrode, X6-X7 is touched with respect to the X electrode, and Y4-Y5 is touched with respect to the Y electrode. The state (first state) in which the two-point simultaneous touch operation is performed is shown.

  The table shown in FIG. 28B corresponds to an area. The table on the left shows the result of specifying the touch position based on the change in the capacitance of each X electrode by sequentially scanning the electrodes X1 to X8. With respect to the X electrode, “1” is stored in the range between X3 and X4 and between X6 and X7, and “0” is stored in the other range, and the detection position of the touch operation in the X direction is indicated. The table on the right side shows the result of specifying the touch position based on the change in the capacitance of each Y electrode by sequentially scanning the electrodes Y1 to Y6. “1” is stored in the range between Y4 and Y5 of the Y electrode in the range between X3 and X4 of the X electrode and the range between Y4 and Y5 of the Y electrode in the range between X6 and X7 of the electrode. In other ranges, “0” is stored to indicate the detection position of the touch operation in the Y direction.

  FIG. 28 (c) touches between X2 and X3 regarding the X electrode and touches between Y3 and Y4 regarding the Y electrode, and touches between X7 and X8 regarding the X electrode and touches between Y5 and Y6 regarding the Y electrode. A state (second state) in which a two-point simultaneous touch operation is performed is shown.

  The table shown in FIG. 28D corresponds to an area. The table on the left shows the result of specifying the touch position based on the change in the capacitance of each X electrode by sequentially scanning the electrodes X1 to X8. With respect to the X electrode, “1” is stored in a range indicating between X2 and X3 and between X7 and X8, and “0” is stored in another range, and the detection position of the touch operation in the X direction is indicated. The table on the right side shows the result of specifying the touch position based on the change in the capacitance of each Y electrode by sequentially scanning the electrodes Y1 to Y6. “1” is stored in the range between Y3 and Y4 of the Y electrode in the range between X2 and X3 of the X electrode and the range between Y5 and Y6 of the Y electrode in the range between X7 and X8 of the electrode. In other ranges, “0” is stored to indicate the detection position of the touch operation in the Y direction. In multi-touch detection, it is necessary to follow the movement of the touch for each state, and detection of three or more points is troublesome. In particular, when the coordinates of one axis are at the same level, it is difficult to detect three or more points. In the present embodiment, simultaneous touch operations are effective up to two points. Information on the touch position based on the tables of FIGS. 28B and 28D is sent from the touch controller IC to the CPU.

  Next, effects and the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to an example of the present embodiment will be described. First, a configuration that is used almost in common among the configurations shown in the drawings used in the following embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 29A as an example. 29A shows the touch panel type display device 252 and the touch panel 252a shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, and the special figure 1 holding lamp shown in FIG. 218 and a special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are schematically shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 and the touch panel display device 252 are display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays. The touch panel type display device 252 is shown below the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the touch panel display device 252. The special figure 2 display device 214 is shown on the right side of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is shown in the special figure 2 display device. It is shown above 214. In addition, the extinguished portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black.

  In FIG. 29 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c for performing decorative display variation display and stop display are assigned to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When a predetermined effect is executed by enlarging the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in an area other than the center of the image display area, for example, the upper left corner as necessary. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d. The left side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the right side is the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. When the special figure 1 variable game is in the non-actuated state and the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is out of place, an image representing "x" as the special figure 1 fourth graphic is the fourth graphic display area for the special figure 1 It is displayed at t1. When the special figure 1 variable game is in the non-actuated state and the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is a win, the image representing the character “A” as the special figure 1 fourth figure is the fourth figure for the special figure 1 It is displayed in the display area t1. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable game is in an operating state, an image representing “−” as the special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. If the special figure 2 variable game is inactive and the result of the previous special figure 2 variable game is out of place, an image representing "x" as the special figure 2 fourth graphic is the fourth graphic display area for the special figure 2 It is displayed at t2. When the special figure 2 variable game is in the non-actuated state and the result of the previous special figure 2 variable game is a win, the image representing the character “a” as the special figure 2 fourth graphic is the fourth graphic for the special figure 2 It is displayed in the display area t2. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is in an operating state, an image representing "-" as the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area t2.

  A horizontally long rectangular area on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the number of special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, etc. corresponding to the number of holds is displayed. Further, according to the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold is appropriate can be notified (pre-reading notice) with a predetermined reliability. In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the display mode with the lowest reliability. In this embodiment, a maximum of four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A plurality of special figure 1 hold icons are arranged and displayed in order from right to left in the special figure 1 hold icon display area as the holding order decreases. In this example, only the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed, but the special figure 2 hold icon display area may be displayed together. In that case, for example, a special figure 2 reserved icon display area is provided in a horizontally long rectangular area on the lower right side of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is performed (see FIG. 29B). The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214. Further, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during execution of the special symbol variable game is indicated by a downward arrow (see FIG. 29C).

  In FIG. 29A, the area numbers of areas 1 to 24 are displayed in order to explain the area of the touch panel 252a attached to the display screen of the touch panel type display device 252.

  In the following description, the operation of the touch panel 252a by the player's hand or finger may be referred to as “touch operation”. In addition, an area where the touch operation is valid may be referred to as a “touch area”. In addition, a display related to the touch area and capable of suggesting the touch area may be referred to as “touch display”. In addition, a period during which the acceptance of the touch operation is valid may be referred to as a “touch operation acceptance valid period”. In addition, the control for validating the acceptance of the touch operation may be referred to as “touch operation valid control”. Further, the control for invalidating the acceptance of the touch operation may be referred to as “touch operation invalidation control”. An effect related to the touch operation may be referred to as a “touch effect”. In addition, an effect corresponding to display by a touch operation may be referred to as a “touch operation-compatible effect”. Further, the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 by the player's hand or finger may be referred to as “button operation”.

(Example 1)
Effects and the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29A to FIG. 31I show the special figure variable games in this order in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  First, an example of a flow of a series of effects of a general special figure variable game will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 29, the touch effect using the touch panel 252 a is not executed in the image display area of the touch panel display device 252. FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the variable games of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are not in operation. The special figure 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special figure “Special figure F”. The special figure 2 display unit 214 stops and displays the special symbol “special figure d”. Each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the fourth symbol indicating that the game is inactive. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the immediately preceding special-figure variable game is wrong. Yes.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 reports that there are two special figure 1 holds. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, two special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  FIG. 29B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variable game is started in the same manner as the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display. The fourth symbol in the region t1 starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and then a display in which the special figure 1 holding icon is decreased by one is executed, and then the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the decorative symbol variation display, the symbol variation of the left symbol display region 208a is first started, then the symbol variation of the middle symbol display region 208b is started, and finally the symbol variation of the right symbol display region 208c is started.

  FIG. 29 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable display of decorative symbols is executed.

  In FIG. 29 (d), “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped (first stop row temporary stop) in the left symbol display area 208a in a swinging fluctuation state, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display is shown in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c. Indicates a state of continuing.

  In FIG. 29 (e), “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped (second stop row temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c in a fluctuation state, and the decorative symbol variation display is continued in the middle right symbol display area 208b. It shows the state.

  FIG. 29 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped (third stop row temporary stop) in the fluctuation state in the middle symbol display area 208 b.

  FIG. 29G shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 29 (h) shows a state where the special symbol “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 in the image display area, the fourth graphic indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 8” indicating a deviation from the combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed. FIG. 29 (a) to FIG. 29 (h) show the detailed flow of a general special figure variation game. In the description of the special figure variable game performed after FIG. 29 (i), for example, the state shown in FIG. 29 (b) or FIG. 29 (g) may be omitted. An operation similar to the detailed flow of the variable game is executed.

  FIG. 29 (i) shows a state during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 1 variation display is executed, and in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed. The LED of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is completely turned off to notify that there is no special figure 1 hold. In addition, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special symbol 1.

  FIG. 30A is a character image imitating a panda in front of the middle symbol display area 208b of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter referred to as a “panda image”) during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. Is displayed). The panda image notifies an advance notice that a touch effect may be started.

  FIG. 30B shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a in a swinging fluctuation state, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display is continued in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c. ing. A panda image is displayed in front of the middle symbol display area 208b, and the warning notice of the touch effect continues.

  FIG. 30 (c) shows a state in which a reach effect is started in which the decorative display of the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the middle-right symbol display region 208b while “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display region 208c. Is shown. A panda image is displayed in front of the middle symbol display area 208b, and the warning notice of the touch effect continues.

  In FIG. 30D, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area, and the enlarged display area 208d has a character image imitating the center length (hereinafter referred to as “number-length image”). ”Is displayed, and a reach effect is displayed in which a character string image of“ After this ... ”is displayed on the left side. Further, in the image display area of the touch panel display device 252, the touch display 1 having a horizontally long elliptical image including the character string image of “touch” is displayed in an area including a part of the areas 9 and 10, and similarly. The touch display 2 having a horizontally long elliptical image including a character string image of “touch” inside is displayed in an area including a part of the areas 21 and 22, and a touch effect is started. In addition, a panda image is displayed in the image display area of the touch-panel display device 252 while hiding a part of the touch display 1. In addition, a character string image “select reach by touch” is displayed at the top of the image display area.

  As described above, when the touch display is the first display and the panda image is the second display, the image display area of the touch panel type display device 252 hides at least a part of the first display and the second display. The display can be displayed. Note that the touch panel display device 252 may always hide at least a part of the first display with the second display, or may hide or not hide the first display. Further, the second display may be displayed while hiding all of the first display, or the second display may be displayed without hiding all of the first display. Further, the second display may be displayed so as to hide only a part of the first display. The first display is a display that can suggest a touch area (first area), and the first display is a display that includes an area (second area) other than the touch area. The second display can be displayed while hiding one of the first area and the second area in the display.

  FIG. 30 (e) shows a state where the touch effect is being executed and areas 9, 10 and areas 21, 22 of the touch panel (image display area) 252a are designated as touch areas as indicated by broken lines. Yes. The touch display area in which the touch display 1 is displayed partially overlaps the touch areas in the areas 9 and 10. That is, the touch areas of the areas 9 and 10 are areas that are partially different from the touch display area in which the touch display 1 is displayed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 30E, the touch areas of the areas 9 and 10 include at least an area that overlaps at least partly with the touch display area of the touch display 1. Includes at least an area that does not at least partially overlap the touch display area of the touch display 1. Note that the touch areas of the areas 9 and 10 may coincide with the touch display area of the touch display 1. Further, the touch area of the areas 9 and 10 may include the touch display area of the touch display 1, and conversely, the touch area of the areas 9 and 10 may be included in the touch display area of the touch display 1. Good. In addition, as shown in FIG. 30E, the area that overlaps the touch display area of the touch display 1 among the touch areas of the areas 9 and 10 is wider than the area that does not overlap the touch display area. Of the touch areas in areas 9 and 10, the area that overlaps the touch display area of touch display 1 may be narrower than the area that does not overlap the touch display area, or the same area. Similarly, the touch display area where the touch display 2 is displayed partially overlaps the touch areas of the areas 21 and 22.

  Also in FIG. 30E, when the touch display is the first display and the panda image is the second display, the image display area of the touch panel display 252 hides at least a part of the first display. The second display is displayed.

  In the upper part of the image display area of the touch panel display 252, a touch effective period image for displaying the touch operation reception effective period is displayed instead of the character string image “select reach by touch”. The touch effective period image of this example has a rectangular frame shape that is long horizontally. Initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and the bar-shaped portion of the predetermined color as the period elapses Are gradually shortened to the left, for example. More specifically, the touch effective period image is a gauge (meter) image, and the display of the gauge image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “gauge display” or “touch effective period display”) has a length of the gauge. It is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the touch operation reception valid period by performing a decreasing animation. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the touch operation reception valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes 0 (zero). The display of the touch effective period image may be a display related to the touch operation reception effective period. The display of the touch effective period image is a display that can be started in a period including a part of the touch operation reception effective period.

  The touch area is an area in which the touch operation is valid over the touch operation reception valid period (third period), and the touch display can be started in a period including a part of the touch operation reception valid period. The display can be started during a period in which the touch display can be started and includes a part of the touch operation reception valid period. Further, the start of the touch display may be a period before the start of the touch operation reception valid period, and the start of the display of the panda image may be a period before the start of the touch operation reception valid period. A character string image “GO” is displayed in the center of the touch panel.

  FIG. 30F shows a state in which the touch operation reception effective period has slightly passed and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the touch effective period image is somewhat shortened in the left direction. In this state, a touch operation in which the player's finger 901 presses the touch panel 252a is performed. The player's finger 901 is in the touch area but touches outside the touch display area, but the touch operation is accepted.

  FIG. 30 (g) shows a state in which a panorama image whose posture has been changed is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed on the left side, and a reach effect is being executed. Show. In addition, a panda image is displayed on the left side and a character string image of “SP reach B” is displayed on the right side in the image display area of the touch-panel display device 252, which develops into an SP (super) reach B effect by a touch operation. It is informed that As described above, in this example, although the touch operation is performed outside the touch display area, an effect corresponding to the touch operation is performed.

  FIG. 30 (h) shows a state in which the SP reach B effect has been started.

  FIG. 30 (i) shows a state in which the touch effect is started during the execution of the SP reach B effect. The SP reach B effect is executed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the touch advance notice effect is executed in the display area of the touch panel display device 252. In the touch notification effect, a decatouch display is performed as a touch display that suggests that the touch area is wide on the touch panel. In the decatouch display, a long dashed frame image is displayed along the area around the touch panel. In addition, the character string image “TOUCH!” Is displayed large inside the frame image.

  FIG. 31A shows a state where the touch effect is executed during the execution of the SP reach B effect, and the areas 8 to 11 and 14 to 17 of the touch panel (image display area) 252a are designated as the touch area. Yes. The touch effective period image is displayed below the character image “TOUCH!” Inside the frame image of the decatouch display. The touch effective period image may be at least partially included in the touch area. In this example, the touch display area is larger than the touch area.

  FIG. 31B shows a state where a touch operation has been performed. The finger 901 touches outside the touch area but inside the touch display area.

  In FIG. 31C, the touch operation is performed, but the touch panel 252a does not react because the finger 901 is touching a region other than the touch region, and the touch continues after the touch operation even though the touch display region is operated. An example in which no production occurs is shown. In addition, the touch operation reception valid period has slightly passed, and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the touch valid period image is somewhat shortened in the left direction.

  FIG. 31 (d) shows a state in which the bar operation portion for displaying the touch effective period image is further shortened in the left direction after the touch operation reception effective period has further passed.

  FIG. 31 (e) shows a state in which the bar-like portion of the display of the touch effective period image is further shortened in the left direction after the touch operation reception effective period has elapsed. In addition, a state is shown in which the finger 901 touches the touch area and a touch operation is accepted.

  FIG. 31F shows a state in which an image of a cut-in notice is displayed in the display area of the touch panel type display device 252 as a touch operation corresponding effect executed after acceptance of the touch operation.

  In FIG. 31 (g), the result of the SP reach B effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure variation game is a hit. In addition, in the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character string image of “I did it” is displayed together with the panda image, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure variation game is correct.

  FIG. 31H shows a state where “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, in the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character string image of “Large hit” is displayed together with the panda image, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure variation game is a win. . As described above, the touch panel display device 252 displays a tutorial in the display area and functions as a sub liquid crystal display device.

  In FIG. 31 (i), the special symbol “special symbol A” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 212, and “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c. It shows the state. In addition, an image representing the character “A” as the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning. In addition, in the display area of the touch panel display 252, a tutorial display (game table explanation) is displayed using a character string image of “immediately right-handed” together with a panda image.

(Example 2)
An effect or the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A shows the same state as FIG. 31A, and the touch effect by the decatouch display is executed during the execution of the SP reach B effect, and the areas 8 to 11 and 14 to 17 of the touch panel 252a are executed. Indicates a state designated as a touch area. The touch effective period image is displayed below the character image “TOUCH!” Inside the frame image of the decatouch display. The frame images are displayed in areas around the outside of the areas 8 to 11 and 14 to 17 that are touch areas. On the other hand, FIG. 32B illustrates a normal touch display and a touch area smaller than the decatouch display. The touch display is displayed at positions corresponding to the areas 8 to 11 and 14 to 17 in the display area, and the touch areas are set to the areas 9, 10, 15, and 16. As shown in FIG. 32B, the size of the touch area in the case of normal touch display may be different from the touch area in the case of decatouch display. Further, the display of the touch effective period image may be the same size for the decatouch display and the normal touch display. Further, the normal touch display includes a display of the touch effective period image outside the touch area, but the decatouch display may be within the touch area. In addition, a part of the normal touch display is included in the touch area, but a part may be displayed outside the touch area. Further, the touch display area and the touch area may be substantially the same or different.

  FIG. 32 (c) shows the same state as FIG. 32 (a). On the other hand, FIG. 32D illustrates a touch area in a normal touch display with respect to a decatouch display. In this example, the touch area has the same shape and size in normal touch display and decatouch display.

(Example 3)
An effect or the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A shows the same state as FIG. 31A, and the decatouch effect is executed while the SP reach B effect is being executed, and the areas 8 to 11 and 14 to 17 of the touch panel 252a become the touch area. Indicates the specified state. On the other hand, FIG. 33B illustrates a touch area in a normal touch display with respect to a decatouch display. As shown in FIG. 33B, in the normal touch display, the touch display area matches the touch area.

  FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the touch effective period image prompting the player's touch operation is not displayed in the decatouch display during execution of SP reach B. Since the decatouch display is a display that can improve the player's willingness to operate, the touch effective period image need not be displayed during the decatouch display.

  FIG. 33D shows an example in which the entire 24 areas 1 to 24 of the touch panel 252a may be a touch area in the decatouch display during execution of SP reach B.

Example 4
Production using the touch panel 252a in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 36 (h) show special figure variation games in this order in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the variable game shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 is not in operation. The special figure 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special figure “Special figure F”. The special figure 2 display unit 214 stops and displays the special symbol “special figure d”. Each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the fourth symbol indicating that the game is inactive. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 8” indicating a deviation from the combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that there is one special figure 1 hold. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that there is no special figure 2 hold. In this example, the special figure 1 hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and one special figure 1 hold icon is displayed in a white circular display mode below the display area of the touch panel display device 252. Has been.

  FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is consumed and the special FIG. 1 variable game is being executed. The special figure 1 hold icon displayed on the touch panel display 252 is deleted.

  FIG. 34C shows a state in which the decoration symbol “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which the decoration symbol “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208 c and shifts to a reach effect.

  FIG. 34 (e) shows a state in which the hold in the special figure 1 is increased by one and one LED of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is lit. On the lower side of the touch panel display 252, a hold increase / hold change animation accompanying the increase of the hold 1 is started, and a notice display using an effect image is performed.

  FIG. 34 (f) shows a state in which the touch effect by the display of the panda image and the character string image is started in the display area of the touch panel display device 252. In this example, the notice display by the effect image started first hides a part of the display of the panda image related to the touch effect started later.

  FIG. 34 (g) shows a state where the touch operation acceptance valid period is started but the touch valid period image is not displayed. Areas 9, 10, 15, and 16 of the touch panel 252a are touch areas, and a frame image for touch display is displayed in the area. In the frame image, a “touch” character image is displayed as part of the touch display. In addition, a character string image of “touch” is displayed at the top. Thereafter, the animation of the touch display is started. Further, the effect image below the display area of the touch panel type display device 252 disappears, and instead, a special figure 1 hold icon for informing the pre-reading notice with a long image having a predetermined reliability is displayed. Thereafter, an animation of the hold icon is also started.

  FIG. 34H shows a state in which the display of the touch display animation and the display of the hold icon animation are executed. In the display of the animation of the touch display, an effect that the display of the frame image and the character image of “touch” is enlarged or reduced is performed. In the animation of the hold icon, an effect that the hold icon is enlarged or reduced is performed. In these two animations, the hold icon of the pre-reading notice partially hides the touch display, and the area (area) where the touch display is hidden by the hold icon is changed by the animation.

  FIG. 34 (i) shows a state in which a character image of “3” in a countdown display indicating that the remaining touch operation acceptance period is 3 seconds is displayed on the right side of the display area of the touch panel display device 252. Show. In the two animations, the hold icon for the pre-reading notice and the touch display are in a reduced display state, so the hold icon does not hide the touch display. In this state, the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation in the touch area.

  FIG. 35A shows a state in which the character image “2” of the countdown display indicating that the remaining touch operation valid period is 2 seconds is displayed on the right side of the display area of the touch panel display 252. Show. Here, a character image of “x” is displayed large as a touch operation corresponding effect based on the touch operation, and a part of the hold icon is partially hidden. In this way, the touch operation-related effect performed later may hide at least a part of the hold icon, or the last time the touch operation-compatible effect hidden at least a part of the hold icon, this time the touch At least a part of the operation corresponding effect may be hidden by the hold icon, or the touch operation corresponding effect may hide at least a part of the hold icon both in the previous time and this time. Further, at least a part of the touch operation-compatible effect may be hidden behind the hold icon both in the previous time and this time.

  In FIG. 35B, the decoration symbol “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” temporarily changes as a combination of the decoration symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It has stopped. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, one hold icon for displaying a pre-read notice is displayed with a long image.

  In FIG. 35 (c), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the display area of the touch-panel display device 252, a single hold icon for displaying a pre-reading notice in a number-length image is enlarged and displayed.

  FIG. 35 (d) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is consumed and the special FIG. 1 variable game is being executed. All of the LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are turned off to notify that the special figure 1 no longer holds.

  FIG. 35E shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 35 (f) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208 c and has reached a reach state.

  FIG. 35 (g) shows a state in which the touch effect is started. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character image (hereinafter referred to as “character image A”) holding a bowling ball is displayed on the right side, and a character image holding a sword (hereinafter referred to as “character image B”). Is displayed on the left side. A character image “Select a reach by touch” is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 35 (h) shows a state where the touch effect is being executed. In the touch effect in the display area of the touch panel display 252, the areas 10, 11, 16, and 17 are selected as the touch area A, and the character image A is displayed as the touch display 1 in the touch area A. Further, areas 8, 9, 14, and 15 are selected as the touch area B, and the character image B is displayed as the touch display 2 in the touch area B. In this example, the boundary lines of the touch areas A and B by two selection effects overlap. When a touch operation is performed on an overlapping part, the touch operation may be disabled for both touch areas, or a control for enabling the touch operation of one touch area that has been determined in advance may be performed. May be. A touch effective period image for displaying the touch operation reception effective period is displayed at the bottom of the display area.

  FIG. 35 (i) shows a state where a touch operation has been performed. In this example, a simultaneous two-point touch operation in which the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area B and the finger 902 performs a touch operation on the touch area A is performed.

  FIG. 36A shows a state in which the touch operation by one touch area A is preferentially selected and accepted as a result of the simultaneous two-point touch operation, and has developed into the effect of SP reach A. A character image A is displayed in the display area of the touch panel display 252 and a character string image of “boring reach” is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 36B shows a state in which the SP reach effect is being executed in the effect display area 208 d and the display area of the touch panel display device 252.

  FIG. 36C shows a state where a button effect has occurred. In the button effect, a button image is displayed in the effect display area 208d and an effect that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is performed. On the other hand, as a hidden effect on the touch panel that is not notified to the player, the entire area of the touch panel 252a is effectively controlled as a touch area. A character image A and a character string image of “good course” are displayed as touch display.

  FIG. 36D shows a state where the player has performed a touch operation instead of a button operation.

  FIG. 36E shows a state in which a touch operation as a hidden effect is accepted and a touch operation-compatible effect is generated.

  FIG. 36F shows an effect for deriving the result of the special figure variable game. “Decoration 3” is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 36G shows a state in which the decoration symbol “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character string image of “big hit” is displayed.

  FIG. 36H shows a state where “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a combination of ornamental symbols, is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, an image representing the character “A” as the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a tutorial using a character string image “congratulations” is displayed together with the character image A.

(Example 5)
An effect using the touch panel 252a in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 (a) and FIG. 37 (b) correspond to FIG. 35 (i) and FIG. FIG. 37A 'shows a case where a simultaneous three-point touch operation is performed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 37 (b ′), only the touch operation acceptance valid period has passed and the effect selection operation by simultaneous three-point touch is not accepted. For example, when the effective control for enabling the acceptance of the touch operation on the touch panel 252a is the first control, and the invalid control for invalidating the acceptance of the touch operation on the touch panel 252a is the second control, The control can be executed when the first condition that two touch operations are simultaneously performed as the first number is satisfied, and the second control is simultaneously performed by three or more touch operations as the second number. This can be executed when the second condition to be performed is satisfied.

(Example 6)
An effect or the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 38A, a simultaneous two-point touch operation is performed in which the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area B and the finger 902 performs a touch operation on the touch area A in the same effect as in FIG. It shows the state. In the case shown in FIG. 35 (i), as a result of the simultaneous two-point touch operation as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the touch operation by one touch area A is preferentially selected and accepted, and the SP reach A It has developed into a directing. On the other hand, in FIG. 38B following FIG. 38A, an effect selection operation by simultaneous two-point touch is not accepted. In this example, even when two-point simultaneous operation is performed, if there are two options, the selection operation is invalidated.

  In FIG. 38 (a ′), a simultaneous two-point touch operation in which the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area A and the finger 902 also performs a touch operation on the touch area A in the same effect as in FIG. 38 (a) is performed. It shows the state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 38 (b ′) following FIG. 38 (a ′), an effect selection operation by simultaneous two-point touch is accepted. In this example, when two-point simultaneous operation is performed and there are a plurality of simultaneous touch operations in one option, the selection operation is validated.

  In the above example, the character image A that is a touch display is displayed in the touch area A, the character image B that is a touch display is displayed in the touch area B, and a touch operation only on the touch area A is a simultaneous two-point touch operation. When the first condition is satisfied, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the operation effective control, and the touch operation in both the touch area A and the touch area B is a simultaneous touch operation with three or more points. When the second condition is satisfied, the first sub-control unit 400 performs operation invalidation control.

(Example 7)
An effect using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A to FIG. 39D show special figure variation games in this order in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 39A shows a state in which an effect similar to that in FIG. 35I is performed and a three-point simultaneous touch operation is performed on the touch panel 252a. On the other hand, in FIG. 39 (b) following FIG. 39 (a), an effect selection operation by simultaneous three-point touch is not accepted. In this example, the three-point simultaneous touch operation invalidates the selection operation reception. FIG. 39C shows a state where the touch panel 252a is switched from the three-point simultaneous touch to the two-point simultaneous touch operation. FIG. 39 (d) shows a state where the selection operation becomes valid and the SP reach A effect is developed when the three-point simultaneous touch operation is switched to the two-point simultaneous touch operation.

  In the above example, when the second condition that is a simultaneous touch operation of three or more points is established in both the touch area A and the touch area B and the operation invalidation control is executed, the number of simultaneous touch operations is When the number is reduced from three points, the operation is switched to the operation enable control that enables the acceptance of the touch operation.

(Example 8)
An effect or the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (a) to 40 (i) show special figure variable games in this order in this order. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 40A shows a state where the touch effect is being executed. In the touch effect in the display area of the touch panel display 252, the areas 10, 11, 16, and 17 are selected as the touch area A, and the character image A is displayed as the touch display 1 in the touch area A. Further, areas 8, 9, 14, and 15 are selected as the touch area B, and the character image B is displayed as the touch display 2 in the touch area B. In this example, the boundary lines of the touch areas A and B by two selection effects overlap. Above the touch area, a character string image “Select a reach with a long press of a touch” is displayed to prompt the player to perform a long press touch operation.

  FIG. 40B shows a state where a touch operation has been performed. In this example, a touch operation of two long presses in which a player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area B and a finger 902 performs a touch operation on the touch area A is performed. In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a long press achievement meter image in which the meter extends in accordance with the long press time is displayed. When the length of the meter reaches the maximum (full tank), the selected performance is executed. In FIG. 40 (b), the length of the long press achievement meter is short because it is immediately after the start of the long press.

  FIG. 40C shows a state where the long press operation by the simultaneous two-point touch is continued. As shown in the drawing, in this example, the length of the long press achievement degree meter is also increased by a two-point simultaneous touch operation.

  FIG. 40D shows a state where the two-point simultaneous touch operation is changed to the three-point simultaneous touch operation.

  FIG. 40 (e) shows that the reception of the long press touch operation is disabled in the three-point simultaneous touch operation, and the touch operation reception valid period is wasted in the three-point simultaneous touch operation. It shows a state where the meter growth is stagnant.

  FIG. 40F shows that the effect image for notifying that the long press has failed has been replaced with the meter image because the long press achievement level meter has not reached the full level at the time when the valid period of the touch operation acceptance valid period expires. The displayed long press failure animation is shown.

  FIG. 40 (g) shows a state in which the effect is changed to the normal reach effect instead of the SP reach A effect to adjust the time after the expiration of the valid period of the touch operation.

  FIG. 40 (h) shows a state where the decoration symbol “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character string image of “big hit” is displayed.

  FIG. 40 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c. In addition, an image representing the character “A” as the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character string image “congratulations” is displayed.

  In the above example, the fourth condition in which the number of touch operations simultaneously performed during execution of the effective control due to the establishment of the first condition in which the touch operations are simultaneously performed by two as the first number is increased from the first number. When is established, the acceptance of touch operations is disabled.

Example 9
An effect using the touch panel 252a in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A shows a state where a touch effect similar to the touch effect shown in FIG. 35H is being executed during the reach effect. In the touch effect, the areas 10, 11, 16, and 17 are selected as the touch area A, and the character image A is displayed as the touch display 1 in the touch area A. Further, areas 8, 9, 14, and 15 are selected as the touch area B, and the character image B is displayed as the touch display 2 in the touch area B. The player's finger 901 performs a touch (single touch) operation on the touch area A.

  FIG. 41B shows a state where the touch operation by the touch area A is accepted and developed into the effect of SP reach A. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, the character image A is displayed, and the character string image “boring reach” is displayed at the top.

  In FIG. 41 (a ′), the touch effect is being executed while the reach effect is being executed. In the touch effect, the areas 17 and 23 are selected as the touch area A, and the character image A is displayed as the touch display 1 in the touch area A. Further, areas 14 and 20 are selected as the touch area B, and the character image B is displayed as the touch display 2 in the touch area B. In addition, areas 9 and 10 are selected as the touch area C, a reduced character image B is displayed in the area 9, and a reduced character image A is displayed in the area 10. . The reduced character image A and character image B constitute a character image C as the touch display 3. A “random” character string image is displayed across the area 9 and the area 10. The player's finger 901 performs a single touch operation on the touch area A. In this example, a touch effective period image of the touch panel is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 side.

  FIG. 41 (b ′) shows a state in which the touch operation by the touch area A is accepted and developed into the effect of SP reach A. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, the character image A is displayed, and the character string image “boring reach” is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 41 (a ″) shows a state in which the touch effect is started during the execution of the reach effect. In the touch effect of this example, a decatouch display is performed as a touch display. In the decatouch display, a long dashed frame image is displayed along the area around the touch panel. In addition, the character string image “TOUCH!” Is displayed large inside the frame image. In addition, a character string image “Please give a notice of intense heat!” Is displayed at the upper part of the display area of the touch panel display device 252. The touch areas are areas 9 to 11 and areas 14 to 17. The player's finger 901 performs a single touch operation on the touch area.

  FIG. 41 (b ″) shows a state in which an intense heat advance notice is displayed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when a touch operation by the touch area is accepted. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, the character image A is displayed, and the character string image “boring reach” is displayed at the top.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 41 (a ′), when three touch areas are provided in the area of the touch panel 252a and there are three options, the range of the touch area per one becomes the narrowest. Yes. In addition, the area where the touch area and the touch display do not overlap is wider when there are more touch options.

  In the above example, the touch area A is provided for the character image A, the touch area B is provided for the character image B, and the touch area C is provided for the character image C. The touch panel type display device 252 is provided correspondingly when the first condition that can display the display of the second character image, which is the first number, is satisfied, and when the second number is three. In the case where the second condition capable of displaying the display of the character image is satisfied, and the case where the first condition is satisfied, for example, an area that does not overlap the character image A of the touch area A is the second condition. When the condition is satisfied, the touch area A is different from the area that does not overlap the character image A.

  In the above example, the second number is larger than the first number, and the region that does not overlap the character image A in the touch region A when the first condition is satisfied satisfies the second condition. In this case, the touch area A is a larger area than the area that does not overlap the character image A.

(Example 10)
Effects and the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (a) to 43 (d) show animation display related to the select effect in this order in this order. In the diagrams showing the animation display in time series, the time lapse between one diagram and the next diagram does not necessarily match between the diagrams. In addition, although the present Example demonstrates the select production | presentation at the time of a demonstration screen display, it is applicable also to the selection production | presentation during the display of a special figure variable game.

  FIG. 42 (a) shows a state in which the variable game shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is not in operation. The special figure 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special figure “Special figure F”. The special figure 2 display unit 214 stops and displays the special symbol “special figure d”. Each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 and t2 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the fourth symbol indicating that the game is inactive. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 8” indicating a deviation from the combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 notifies that there is no special figure 1 hold. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that there is no special figure 2 hold. Nothing is displayed in the display area of the touch panel display device 252.

  FIG. 42B shows a state in which a demo screen is displayed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “CR Yoshimune” is displayed and a demonstration effect is executed. The touch panel display 252 is not displayed.

  FIG. 42 (c) shows a state in which the effect mode selection animation is started. In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “CR Yoshimune” is displayed in the upper part, a character string image of “select an effect mode by touch” is displayed in the center, and “ A Bancho image corresponding to the Bancho mode is displayed as an animation, a general image with the character string "Yatsushiro Shogun" placed in a circle corresponding to the Yoshimune mode is displayed in the center, and the Soldier mode is supported on the right. The soldier image is displayed as an animation. The animation executed at the lower center of the screen is displayed larger than the animation executed at the lower left and right of the screen. The mode for the animation executed in the lower center of the screen is active at the present time, and the mode is executed when the start prize is won.

  In the display area of the touch panel display 252, the areas 13, 14, 19, and 20 of the touch panel 252 a are touch areas A when the “number length” mode is selected. Areas 3, 4, 9, and 10 are touch areas B when the “Yoshimune” mode is selected. Areas 17, 18, 23, and 24 are touch areas C for selecting the “Soldier” mode. In the touch area A, the display of the Bancho image corresponding to the “bancho” mode is animated as the touch display 1, and in the touch area B, the display of the general image corresponding to the “Yoshimune” mode is animated as the touch display 2. In the touch area C, the display of the soldier image corresponding to the “Soldier” mode is animated as the touch display 3.

  FIG. 42D shows a state in which the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area A.

  FIG. 42E shows a state in which the touch operation on the touch area A is accepted and the “number length” mode is selected. When this touch operation is performed, in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the general image is reduced and moved upward (moving animation), and at the same time, the Bancho image moves to the center while enlarging the image ( Mode change animation display to start (moving animation) is started. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, the general image display (touch display 2) and the soldier image display (touch display 3) other than the display of the selected length image (touch display 1) and the soldier image (touch display 3) are large. Is reduced and displayed. In this example, a case where another option outside the operation area is affected by the touch operation is illustrated.

  FIG. 42 (f) shows a state in which the mode change animation has been completed. In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an enlarged Bancho image is displayed in the lower center, a small general image is displayed on the lower left side, and a small soldier image is displayed on the lower right side. In the touch panel display device 252, the display position of the image corresponding to each mode is not changed, but the number-length image of the selected “number-length” mode is displayed larger than the other images.

  FIG. 42 (g) shows a state in which the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area C.

  FIG. 42 (h) shows a state where the touch operation in the touch area C is accepted and the “corporate” mode is selected. When this touch operation is performed, in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the Bancho image is reduced and moved upward (moving animation), and at the same time, the soldier image moves to the center while enlarging the image ( Mode change animation display to start (moving animation) is started. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, the general image and the Bancho image other than the soldier image in the selected “Soldier” mode are displayed with a reduced size.

  FIG. 42 (i) shows a state in which the player's finger 901 touches the touch area A again before the mode change animation is completed.

  FIG. 43 (a) shows that the Bancho image is moved to the center area before the moving animation in which the Bancho image in the mode change animation moves to the right area and is miniaturized is canceled and the Bancho image is completely miniaturized. A reverse moving animation that begins to return and grows in size begins. Also in the display area of the touch panel display device 252, the enlargement is started before the miniaturization of the number-length image is completed.

  FIG. 43B shows a state in which the mode change animation is completed.

  FIG. 43C shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136.

  FIG. 43 (d) shows a state in which the mode change has been confirmed based on pressing of the chance button 136. The decorative design shown in FIG. 42A is displayed again on the decorative design display device 208, and a character string image of “number-length mode” is displayed in the display area of the touch panel display device 252 together with the number-length image.

  The difference in the presentation mode here is that the type of display such as the notice, the appearance rate of the notice, pre-read notice, etc., and the reliability differ, and the player can select the mode he prefers according to the game characteristics and the effect display. Can be selected. Note that the above example is also applicable to the case where the effect mode is sequentially switched by the number of button operations. During the mode change animation, the animation may be canceled by the next button operation, and an animation for switching to the effect mode corresponding to the latest button operation may be started.

  In the above example, if the first touch area is operated during the touch operation acceptance valid period, the display of the moving animation can be started during the touch operation acceptance valid period, and the movement animation is displayed during the touch operation acceptance valid period. When the second touch area is operated in a state of being disengaged, at least the reverse moving animation display can be started.

(Example 11)
Effects and the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 (a) to 46 (i) show the big hit game and the special figure variable game after the big hit game in this order in time series. It should be noted that, in the diagrams showing the effect display in time series, the passage of time between one diagram and the next diagram does not necessarily match between the diagrams.

  FIG. 44A shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a 16R special big hit. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, which is a combination of ornamental symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, an image representing the character “a” as the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t2 for the special figure 2 to notify that the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a win. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character string image of “congratulations” is displayed together with the character image A. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is informed that there are four special figure 2 holds. A special figure 2 hold icon display area is provided on the lower right side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and four special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b4 are arranged and displayed in a horizontal row. In addition, a character string image “probably changing” is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area to notify that the gaming state is a special figure high probability state.

  FIG. 44 (b) shows a state in which right-handed notification is performed before the big hit game is started. The decorative symbol display area moves to the upper left corner, and a combination of decorative symbols is reduced and displayed. In the enlarged effect display area 208d, a character string image of “right-handed” is displayed large in the upper part of the center, and three right-pointing arrow images are displayed in a line below, and should be right-handed. We are informing you. A panda image is displayed in the display area of the touch panel display 252, and a tutorial explaining the game table is displayed on the upper part of the panda image by a character string image of “Chance to occur during a big hit! .

  FIG. 44 (c) shows a state in which 1R (round) of 16R jackpot game is started. On the lower left side of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “1R” is displayed to notify the current number of rounds. In the center of the effect display area 208d, a display effect in the big hit game (animation display of the character image of “princess”) is executed. A panda image is displayed in the display area of the touch panel display 252, and a tutorial using a character string image “7R may be a chance?” Is displayed above the panda image.

  FIG. 44 (d) shows a state in which a jackpot game at 1R is being executed. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a panda image is displayed, and a character string image of “Let's expect” is displayed above the panda image.

  FIG. 44 (e) shows a state in which a jackpot game at 1R is being executed. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a panda image is displayed, and a character string image “Princess dance is cute” is displayed above the panda image.

  FIG. 44 (f) shows a state in which a big hit game at 6R is being executed. On the lower left side of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “6R” is displayed to notify the current number of rounds. In the center of the effect display area 208d, a display effect in the big hit game is executed. A panda image is displayed in the display area of the touch panel display 252, and a character string image of “Next is 7R” is displayed above the panda image.

  FIG. 44 (g) shows a state in which a lower plate full tank error has occurred during the 6R jackpot game. A character string image of “bottom pan full error” is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. Further, a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the front side of the panda image displayed in the display area of the touch panel type display device 252, and an error notification regarding the sphere removal is performed. Further, a part of the panda image is hidden by the error notification character string image.

  FIG. 44 (h) shows a state in which a 7R jackpot game is started. A character string image of “7R” is displayed on the lower left side of the effect display area 208d to notify the current number of rounds. A character string image of “bottom pan full error” is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. A panda image is displayed in the display area of the touch panel display device 252 and a character string image of “Kitter!” Is displayed above the panda image. In addition, a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the front side of the panda image displayed in the display area of the touch panel display device 252, and a part of the panda image is hidden by the character string image. .

  FIG. 44 (i) shows a state where a touch effect has occurred. In the touch effect, a Bancho image is displayed in the display area of the touch panel type display device 252 and a character string image of “Tear off clothes with a slide operation!” Is displayed on the right side. In the lower part of the display area, a character string image of “If you break your clothes, it ’s a reserved villa” is displayed. In the center of the display area, an error notification is made by a character string image of “please remove the sphere”.

  FIG. 45 (a) shows a state where a touch effect is being performed and areas 3 to 5, 9 to 11, 15 to 17, and 21 to 23 of the touch panel 252a are designated as touch areas as indicated by broken lines. Yes. As the touch display, the face image of the Bancho is displayed on the left side, the character string image of “GO” is displayed on the right side thereof, and the image of the Banchou wearing school uniform is displayed on the right side thereof. When the touch display area in which the touch display is displayed is shown corresponding to the area, areas 1 to 5, 7 to 11, 15 to 17, and 21 to 23 are obtained. For this reason, the touch display partially overlaps the touch area. Further, an error notification is performed in the center of the display area by a character string image of “please remove the sphere”. Since the display priority of the error notification is higher than the display priority of the touch effect, the character string image related to the error notification hides a part of the touch display related to the touch effect.

  In this way, in this example, when there is a touch display (display of the number-length image) as the first display related to the touch area and an error notification display as the second display not related to the touch area, the touch panel type The display device 252 can hide the part of the first display and display the second display.

  FIG. 45B shows a state in which the player's finger 901 has started a touch operation.

  In FIG. 45 (c), when the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation that slides (flicks) from the upper right to the lower left, an effect image that displays the locus of the slide is displayed as an effect corresponding to the touch operation. The state where the effect production is being executed is shown.

  FIG. 45 (d) shows a state in which the touch effect started at 7R is continued in the big hit game at 8R. Even if the player performs a touch operation in which the finger 901 is touched at one point, an effect effect in which an effect image displaying a slide locus is displayed as a touch operation-compatible effect. Thus, in this example, the first operation (effect production) is executed by the first operation (sliding touch operation) that is the first touch operation, and further the second operation (single-point touch operation). But the first performance is executed.

  FIG. 45 (e) shows a state where the touch effect started at 7R is continued in the big hit game at 8R. Even if the player's finger 901 is not touched on the touch panel 252a but a button operation of pressing the direction key of the setting operation unit 137 or the chance button 136 is performed, an effect image that displays a slide locus as a touch operation-related effect is displayed. The effect effect that is displayed is being executed. Thus, in this example, the first effect (effect effect) is executed by the first operation (touch operation), and the first effect is also executed by the second operation (button operation). After several effect productions, an image of the torn clothes worn by Bancho is displayed.

  FIG. 45 (f) shows a state in which the touch effect is finished and the notification of the reserved consecutive resort is performed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image D in which “Yoshimune” has a habit is displayed, and a character string image of “Ohban behaviour” is displayed on the right side of the character display image D to notify the reserved consecutive resort. In the display area of the touch-panel display 252, a dress length image with broken clothing is displayed at the center, a character string image of “Yataze” is displayed on the right side, and a face length image is displayed on the left side. Zhuang is being reported. The central Bancho image is partially hidden by the error display by the character string image “Please remove the ball”.

  FIG. 45 (g) shows a state in which the big hit game at 16R is being executed. The touch panel type display device 252 displays a panda image, and a character string image of “next is probability change” is displayed on the upper part.

  FIG. 45 (h) shows the end effect of the big hit game. At the center of the effect display area 208d, the decoration symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped, the character string “probably changing” is displayed in the upper left, and the special figure 2 hold icon on the lower right side. In the display area, four hold icons b1 to b4 of FIG. 2 are displayed in order from right to left in a white circular default display mode. The touch panel type display device 252 displays a panda image, and a character string image of “next is probability change” is displayed on the upper part. Also, a special figure 2 hold icon display area is provided at a position below the display area of the touch panel type display device 252 and corresponding to the areas 21 to 24 of the touch panel 252a, and the four hold icons b1 to b4 of the special figure 2 are provided. The white circles are displayed in order from right to left in the default display mode.

  FIG. 45 (i) shows a state in which one hold of FIG. 2 has been consumed and a special figure 2 variable game has started. It is notified that one LED of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is extinguished and the special figure 2 has been put on hold 3, and the special figure displayed in the display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the touch panel display device 252 is displayed. FIG. 2 shows that one hold icon is deleted and the number of special figure 2 hold icons is three. Also, the special figure 2 display device 214 starts the special figure variation display, and the decorative symbol variation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A “right-handed” character string image is displayed above the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c to notify that it should be right-handed.

  FIG. 46A shows a state where a touch effect has occurred. The areas 21, 22, and 23 of the touch panel 252a corresponding to the display positions of the special figure 2 hold icons b2 to b4 of the touch panel display device 252 are set as independent touch areas. A touch display of an image imitating a finger is displayed at a position corresponding to each touch area. A panda image is displayed on the left side of the area 21, a character string image of “Please change by hold” is displayed on the upper part, and one touch effective period image indicating the touch operation reception effective period is almost in the center. It is displayed. In this example, one touch effective period image is commonly used for a plurality of touch operations.

  FIG. 46B shows a state where a simultaneous two-point touch operation is being performed. The finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area in the area 21, and the finger 902 performs a touch operation on the touch area in the area 23.

  FIG. 46 (c) shows a state in which an effect corresponding to the touch operation based on the simultaneous two-point touch operation has occurred. Effect images are respectively displayed at positions corresponding to the areas 21 and 23 where the touch operation of the display area of the touch panel display device 252 is performed.

  FIG. 46D shows a state in which the touch operation corresponding effect is continued. The effect images displayed at the positions corresponding to the areas 21 and 23 disappear, and the special-type special figure 2 hold icons in the default mode are displayed.

  FIG. 46E shows a state where a one-point touch operation is performed. The finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area of the area 22.

  FIG. 46F shows a state in which a touch operation-related effect based on a one-point touch operation has occurred. The effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the area 22 where the touch operation on the display area of the touch panel display device 252 is performed.

  FIG. 46G shows a state where the display of the effect image is continued at the position corresponding to the area 22.

  FIG. 46H shows a state in which a pre-reading notice effect has occurred as a touch operation-compatible effect corresponding to the touch operation. The effect image displayed at the position corresponding to the area 22 of the display area of the touch panel type display device 252 disappears, and the special figure 2 hold icon is displayed in a display form of an image with a “t” character in a circle. Has been. A character string image “Congratulations” is displayed at the top of the display area. Furthermore, in the special figure 2 hold icon display area in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed in a display form of an image in which a circle is attached with the letter “to”. Yes. The display mode of the image with the letter “T” in a circle has a higher reliability of jackpot due to the pre-reading notice than the default display mode. The special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed larger than the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b4 in the default mode on both sides to hide a part of the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b4. Thus, in this example, when performing the pre-reading notice notification effect of the special figure 2 hold icon as the first effect, the first effect is an effect that is executed when a touch operation is performed, Not only the first effect is executed in the display area of the touch panel display device 252, but also the first effect is executed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 46 (i) shows a state in which the gauge of the touch effective period image has become zero and the touch operation reception effective period has expired. After this, the result of the special figure 2 variable game by the special figure 2 hold icon related to the display mode of the image with the letter “to” is a big hit.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 46B to 46D, the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute the first effect and the second effect, and the first touch area among the plurality of touch areas, for example, An area 21 is assumed, and the second touch area is, for example, an area 23. If there is a touch operation in the area 21 within the valid touch operation acceptance period, the first effect is executed in the first effect area of the effect display area 208d, and if there is a touch operation in the area 23 within the valid touch operation acceptance period, the effect is produced. The second effect is executed in the second effect region of the display area 208d.

(Example 12)
An effect or the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 44 (i), and a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed as a first error display at the time of touch production. . FIG. 47 (b) shows that a magnet error occurs during the touch effect, and the entire effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is colored in one color, and “Please clear the magnet error RAM” on the front. A character string image is displayed, and the entire display area of the touch panel type display device 252 is also colored as a second error display, and a character string image image of “magnet error” is displayed in front of it. Thus, in the error notification by the second error display, all of the touch display is hidden. In this state, the touch operation is also invalidated.

  In this way, in this example, a part of the touch display can be hidden to display the first error display (for example, display of the character string image of “Pull out the sphere”), and all the touch display can be hidden. A second error indication (eg, magnet error indication) can be displayed.

(Example 13)
An effect using the touch panel 252a in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 (a) shows a state where a touch effect has occurred, as in FIG. 46 (a). The areas 21, 22, and 23 of the touch panel 252a corresponding to the display positions of the special figure 2 hold icons b2 to b4 of the touch panel display device 252 are set as independent touch areas. A touch display of an image imitating a finger is displayed at a position corresponding to each touch area. A panda image is displayed on the left side of the area 21, a character string image of “Please change by hold” is displayed on the upper part, and one touch effective period image indicating the touch operation reception effective period is almost in the center. It is displayed.

  FIG. 48B shows a state where a button operation is performed by pressing the chance button 136.

  FIG. 48C shows a state where an effect based on button operation has occurred. Since it is not a touch operation, the production order cannot be selected according to the player's preference. The first sub-control unit 400 is selected in a predetermined order, or the rendering order is determined by performing random number lottery processing, and in this example, corresponds to the area 23 of the display area of the touch panel display device 252. The effect image is displayed at the position.

  FIG. 48D shows a state where the effect based on the button operation is continued. The effect image displayed at the position corresponding to the area 23 disappears, and the special form 2 hold icon in the default mode is displayed.

  FIG. 48E shows a state where a button operation is performed by pressing the chance button 136.

  FIG. 48F shows a state where an effect based on button operation has occurred. Since it is not a touch operation, the production order cannot be selected according to the player's preference. The first sub-control unit 400 is selected in a predetermined order, or the rendering order is determined by performing random number lottery processing, and in this example, corresponds to the area 22 of the display area of the touch panel display device 252. The effect image is displayed at the position.

  FIG. 48 (g) shows a state in which a pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the button operation has occurred. The effect image displayed at the position corresponding to the area 22 of the display area of the touch panel type display device 252 disappears, and the special figure 2 hold icon is displayed in a display form of an image with a “t” character in a circle. Has been. Furthermore, in the special figure 2 hold icon display area in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed in a display form of an image in which a circle is attached with the letter “to”. Yes. The display mode of the image with the letter “T” in a circle has a higher reliability of jackpot due to the pre-reading notice than the default display mode. The special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed larger than the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b4 in the default mode on both sides to hide a part of the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b4. Thus, in this example, when performing the pre-reading notice notification effect of the special figure 2 hold icon as the first effect, the first effect is an effect that is executed when a touch operation is performed, Not only the first effect is executed in the display area of the touch panel display device 252, but also the first effect is executed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 48H shows a state where a button operation is performed by pressing the chance button 136.

  FIG. 48 (i) shows a state where an effect based on a button operation has occurred. The effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the remaining area 21 of the display area of the touch panel display device 252. A character string image “Congratulations” is displayed at the top of the display area. Moreover, the length of the gauge of the touch effective period image becomes zero, and the touch operation reception effective period has expired. After this, the result of the special figure 2 variable game by the special figure 2 hold icon related to the display mode of the image with the letter “to” is a big hit.

  In the above example, the first effect in which the character string image of “congratulations” is displayed on the upper part of the display area of the touch panel display device 252 of FIG. When the touch operation is performed, the first effect is also performed when the button operation is performed three times as the second number during the touch operation reception valid period.

(Example 14)
An effect or the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 (a) shows a state where a touch effect has occurred, as in FIG. 46 (a). The areas 21, 22, and 23 of the touch panel 252a corresponding to the display positions of the special figure 2 hold icons b2 to b4 of the touch panel display device 252 are set as independent touch areas. A touch display of an image imitating a finger is displayed at a position corresponding to each touch area. A panda image is displayed on the left side of the area 21, a character string image of “Please change by hold” is displayed on the upper part, and one touch effective period image indicating the touch operation reception effective period is almost in the center. It is displayed.

  FIG. 49B shows a state in which button effects are executed in duplicate during a touch effect. A button image and a button operation effective period image are displayed at the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208d. On the touch panel 252a, a simultaneous two-point touch operation is performed. The finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area in the area 21, and the finger 902 performs a touch operation on the touch area in the area 23. At about the same time, the player presses the chance button 136 by hand.

  FIG. 49 (c) shows a state in which the touch operation corresponding effect based on the touch operation and the button operation corresponding effect based on the button operation are generated in an overlapping manner. Effect images are respectively displayed at positions corresponding to the areas 21 and 23 where the touch operation of the display area of the touch panel display device 252 is performed. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect is displayed in which a character image of “画像” is displayed based on a button operation.

  FIG. 49 (d) shows a state where the touch effect is being executed. In the touch effect, the areas 10, 11, 16, and 17 are one touch area A, and the character image A is displayed as the touch display 1. Areas 8, 9, 14, and 15 are the other touch area B, and the character image B is displayed as the touch display 2. In this example, the player's finger 901 touches the outside vicinity of the touch area B by a single touch operation, but has a function of correcting a point in the touch area B at a position different from the position of the finger. Therefore, the touch area B is accepted as a touch operation.

(Example 15)
An effect using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 15 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a) to 50 (g) show special figure variable games in this order in this order. It should be noted that, in the diagrams showing the effect display in time series, the passage of time between one diagram and the next diagram does not necessarily match between the diagrams.

  FIG. 50A shows “decoration 3” in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c that are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area while the special figure variable game is being executed. "" Indicates a state where the temporary stop and the reach effect are being executed. In the center of the enlarged effect display area 208d, an Amida lottery image simulating two Amida lotteries with choices in which a route on the way is hidden with a band-like image is displayed. A Bancho face image is displayed in the upper center of the two options of the Amidakuji image, a “decoration 3” image is displayed at the lower left corner of the two options, and a “decoration 2” image is displayed at the lower right corner. ing. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, the face image of the longest length is displayed in the center, a thick left arrow image is displayed on the left side of the face image, and a thick right arrow image is displayed on the right side of the face image. ing. A character string image of “Select left and right by touching” is displayed at the top, and a tutorial display that prompts the user to select one of the two options of Amidakuji is executed. Thereby, a touch effect is started in both the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the display area of the touch panel display device 252.

  FIG. 50B shows a state where the touch effect is being executed. In the touch effect, areas 7, 8, 13, and 14 are selected as the left touch area, and a left arrow image is displayed as the touch display 1 in the left touch area. Areas 11, 12, 17, and 18 are selected as the right touch area, and a right arrow image is displayed as the touch display 2 in the right touch area. FIG. 50B shows a state where a touch operation has been performed. In this example, the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the left touch area.

  FIG. 50C shows a state in which the result of the touch operation is notified in the touch operation corresponding effect. As a result of the touch operation in the left touch area, the face image of the chief that was located at the upper center of the two options of the Amidakuji displayed in the effect display area 208d moves to the upper part of the left option, and left by touch operation. It is informed that the choice of is selected. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, the face image of the longest is moved to the left side, and the character string image “left is good look!” Is displayed on the right side.

  FIG. 50D shows a state in which the touch operation-related effect after the touch operation is started. The belt-like image displayed in the effect display area 208d disappears and the entire Amidakuji is displayed.

  FIG. 50 (e) shows a state in which the touch operation corresponding effect after the touch operation is being executed. In the effect display area 208d, the lottery result is displayed, and the face image of the Bancho reaches the “decoration 2” on the right side and is displayed. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a face image of the longest length is displayed on the left side, and “decoration 2” is displayed largely on the right side. In addition, a character string image of “sorry” is displayed small on them.

  In FIG. 50F, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c that have been reduced and displayed in the upper left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed large in the center, and the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 2- The decoration 3 "is temporarily stopped and displayed with shaking fluctuation. The display area of the touch panel display device 252 is not displayed.

  FIG. 50 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. On the special figure 1 display device 212, a special symbol "Special figure F" indicating a loss is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3 -decoration 2 -decoration 3”, which is a combination of decorative symbols indicating a disengagement, is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 50H illustrates a touch operation in a state where the same touch effect as that in FIG. 50B is being executed. In FIG. 50B, the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the left touch area, but in this example, the player's finger 901 performs a flick operation from right to left outside the left and right touch area. Yes.

  FIG. 50 (i) shows a state where the result of the touch operation is notified in the touch operation corresponding effect. Even when the flick operation is performed from right to left outside the left and right touch areas, the face image of the head length located at the upper center of the two options of the Amidakuji displayed in the effect display area 208d is the left option. Moving to the top, it is notified that the left option has been selected by a touch operation. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, the face image of the longest is moved to the left side, and the character string image “left is good look!” Is displayed on the right side. As described above, in this example, it is determined which one of the left touch area and the right touch area is selected by recognizing the left and right directions by the flick operation. Note that in the flick operation, operation reception when the finger 9010 slides including the left and right touch areas may be validated.

(Example 16)
An effect using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (a) to 51 (i) show special figure variable games in this order in this order. It should be noted that, in the diagrams showing the effect display in time series, the passage of time between one diagram and the next diagram does not necessarily match between the diagrams.

  FIG. 51A shows a state in which the touch effect is started during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image and a finger image of “Take out 3 touches!” Are displayed. Further, a touch effective period image is displayed below these images. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a symbol display area is provided at the upper left, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the middle symbol display area. It is in the production state. In addition, a character string image of “push-up” is displayed at the center of the display area.

  FIG. 51B shows a state where the touch effect continues. In the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “It is touching repeatedly” and a finger image are displayed. The touch effective period image is informed that the gauge image is shortened in the left direction and the touch operation reception effective period is slightly shortened. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the ornament is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, all of the areas 1 to 24 that are the entire area of the touch panel 252a of the touch panel type display device 252 are touch areas, and the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the area 3.

  FIG. 51 (c) shows a state where the touch effect continues. In the effect display area 208d, “decoration 2” is displayed at a position corresponding to the area 3 of the touch panel 252a as an effect corresponding to the touch operation based on the touch operation of the area 3 by the player's finger 901. The touch effective period image is informed that the gauge image is shortened in the left direction and the touch operation reception effective period is further shortened. The player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the area 12 of the touch panel 252a.

  FIG. 51D shows a state where the touch effect is continued. In the effect display area 208d, “decoration 8” is displayed at a position corresponding to the area 12 on the touch panel 252a as an effect corresponding to the touch operation based on the touch operation performed on the area 12 by the player's finger 901. The touch effective period image is informed that the gauge image is further shortened in the left direction and the touch operation reception effective period is further shortened. In addition, the player's two fingers 901 and 902 simultaneously perform two-point touch operation on the area 11 and the area 20 of the touch panel 252a.

  FIG. 51E shows a state where the touch effect is continued. In the effect display area 208d, “decoration 7” is displayed at a position corresponding to the area 11 and the area 20 of the touch panel 252a as an effect corresponding to the touch operation based on the player's finger 901 touching the area 11 and the area 20 simultaneously. And “Decoration 4” are displayed. In this example, the two-point simultaneous touch operation is accepted and the effect is effectively executed. The touch effective period image is informed that the gauge image is further shortened in the left direction and the touch operation reception effective period is further shortened. In addition, the player's four fingers are simultaneously touching four areas of the touch panel 252a.

  FIG. 51F shows a state where the touch effect is continued. In this example, the simultaneous touch operation of three or more points is not accepted, and the effect is invalidated. Therefore, the decorative design is not displayed in the effect display area 208d. The touch effective period image is informed that the gauge image is further shortened in the left direction and the touch operation reception effective period is further shortened. The player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the area 10 of the touch panel 252a.

  FIG. 51G shows a state where the touch effect is continued. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of “decoration 3” is remarkably displayed at a position corresponding to the area 10 of the touch panel 252a as an effect corresponding to the touch operation based on the touch operation on the area 10 by the player's finger 901. Has been. The touch effective period image is informed that the gauge image is further shortened in the left direction and the touch operation reception effective period is further shortened. The player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the area 11 of the touch panel 252a.

  FIG. 51H shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The display area of the touch panel display device 252 is in a non-display state.

  In FIG. 51 (i), the special symbol “special symbol A” is stopped on the special symbol display device 212, and “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is halted on the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state. In addition, an image representing the character “A” as the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning.

  Next, a modified example of the effect according to the present embodiment will be described. In the above embodiment, the period during which the acceptance of the touch operation is valid is continuous, and the state in which the touch area is valid is continuously maintained during the period, but the acceptance of the touch operation is performed based on a predetermined condition. The period may be intermittent. For example, during the period in which the touch operation corresponding effect based on the touch operation on the touch area is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 51C, the design image of “decoration 2” is started for a moment as the touch operation corresponding effect. The period may be a state in which the touch operation is invalidally controlled, and then the touch operation is again validly controlled between the states illustrated in FIGS. 51C and 51D. Moreover, the structure by which the effective control of reception of a touch operation becomes intermittent according to an operation state like the middle of the three-point simultaneous touch operation shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 may be sufficient. In addition, regarding the display mode of the touch area and the related animation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “related display”) in the period in which the touch operation is valid and the period in which the touch operation is invalid for a moment, the related display in both periods is the same. It may be good or different. As an example of different related display, the related display may be hidden during the invalid period, for example, dark display such as sepia, reduced display, only display of related animation, stop display of effective period gauge, etc. There may be. Moreover, the structure which brings about change in output modes, such as a sound and a lamp, may be sufficient.

(Example 17)
An effect using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (a) to 52 (d) show special figure variable games in this order in this order. It should be noted that, in the diagrams showing the effect display in time series, the passage of time between one diagram and the next diagram does not necessarily match between the diagrams.

  FIG. 52A shows a state in which the same touch effect as that in FIG.

  FIG. 52B shows a state where the touch effect continues. In the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “It is touching repeatedly” and a finger image are displayed. The touch effective period image is informed that the gauge image is shortened in the left direction and the touch operation reception effective period is slightly shortened. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the ornament is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, all of the areas 1 to 24 that are the entire area of the touch panel 252a of the touch panel type display device 252 are touch areas, and the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the area 3. The player intends to perform a touch operation with the finger 901 immediately after the touch operation with the finger 902.

  FIG. 52C shows a state where the touch effect is continued. A state in which the touch operation with the finger 901 is performed immediately after the touch operation with the finger 902 is shown. In this example, the touch operation reception time interval in the touch sensor circuit 444 is a 1 ms (millisecond) interval of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process. In this example, when the next touch operation is performed 1 ms after the previous touch operation, the next touch operation is not determined to be accepted. The touch operation is valid on the display, but there may be a configuration in which there is an invalid period for ignoring acceptance on software control. For example, the simultaneous touch operation may be valid and the most recent shift may be invalid. Or conversely, the touch operation is invalid on the display, but the touch operation may be accepted. On the other hand, the button operation by pressing the chance button 136 is determined to be valid even if it is performed 1 ms after the touch operation with the finger 901.

  FIG. 52D shows a state where the touch effect is continued. In the effect display area 208d, “decoration 2” is displayed at a position corresponding to area 3 on the touch panel 252a as an effect corresponding to the touch operation based on the touch operation of the area 3 by the player's finger 901. “Decoration 2” is displayed at a predetermined position unrelated to the area of the touch panel 252a (in this example, the lower right portion of the effect display area 208d) as an effect corresponding to the button operation based on the button operation by pressing. About the predetermined position regarding button operation, the effect area | region may be determined previously and the structure determined at random by lottery processing may be sufficient.

(Example 18)
An effect or the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a) to 53 (f) show the special figure variable games in this order in this order. It should be noted that, in the diagrams showing the effect display in time series, the passage of time between one diagram and the next diagram does not necessarily match between the diagrams.

  FIG. 53A shows a state in which the touch effect is started. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character image A holding a bowling ball is displayed on the right side, and a character image B holding a sword is displayed on the left side. A character string image “Select a reach by touch” is displayed at the top. In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the fluctuating state in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the middle symbol display area 208b. It is running.

  FIG. 53B shows a state in which the touch effect is being executed. In the touch effect, the areas 10, 11, 16, and 17 are selected as the touch area A, and the character image A is displayed as the touch display 1 in the touch area A. Further, areas 8, 9, 14, and 15 are selected as the touch area B, and the character image B is displayed as the touch display 2 in the touch area B. In this example, the boundary lines of the touch areas A and B by two selection effects overlap. A touch effective period image for displaying the touch operation reception effective period is displayed at the bottom of the display area.

  FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which a touch operation has been performed. The touch effective period image is informed that the gauge image is shortened in the left direction and the touch operation reception effective period is slightly shortened. In this example, a simultaneous two-point touch operation in which the player's finger 901 performs a touch operation on the touch area B and the finger 902 performs a touch operation on the touch area A is performed.

  FIG. 53D shows a touch effect that allows the player to select whether or not SP reach A may be selected as a touch operation-compatible effect based on the simultaneous two-point touch operation. Indicates the state. In the touch effect on the touch panel display 252, the areas 7, 8, 13, and 14 are selected as the left touch area, and a character string image of “OK” is internally displayed as the touch display 1 including a part of the left touch area. The effect image display that contains it is displayed. Areas 11, 12, 17, and 18 are selected as the right touch area, and an effect image display including a character string image of “reselect” is displayed as the touch display 2 partially including the right touch area. Character images A are displayed in areas 9, 10, 15, and 16 between the left and right touch areas. A character string image of “Are you sure you want to reach A?” Is displayed at the top. In addition, the touch effective period image is informed that the gauge image is further shortened in the left direction and the touch operation reception effective period is further shortened. As described above, in this example, the remaining time of the previous gauge display is used as it is with respect to the effects of a plurality of touch operations, and a gauge display for the second touch operation is not newly provided.

  FIG. 53 (e) shows a state in which a simultaneous two-point touch operation is performed in which the player's finger 901 touches the area 7 in the left touch area and the finger 902 touches the area 12 in the right touch area. ing.

  FIG. 53 (f) shows a state in which the touch operation with the finger 901 is accepted among the simultaneous two-point touch operations. In this example, the touch operation signals are detected in the order of increasing area numbers from area 1 of the touch panel 252a, the touch operation of area 7 is detected prior to the touch operation of area 12, and the touch is determined to be valid. An effect corresponding to the touch operation of the area is performed. In the effect corresponding to the touch operation, the character image A is displayed large in the display area of the touch panel display device 252.

  FIG. 53 (g) shows an effect different from the effect corresponding to the touch operation shown in FIG. 53 (f), and shows a state continued from FIG. 53 (e). In this example, the effect of redoing the selection is started in the same manner as in FIG. However, from the state of FIG. 53 (e), it is informed that the touch effective period image has further shortened the touch operation reception effective period by further shortening the gauge image in the left direction. Thus, in the simultaneous two-point touch operation, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), it is not determined that the touch operation previously determined according to the area number order is effective, but as a function related to the rendering, The touch operation in the area 7 when the point touch operation is performed determines that the player's intention is unclear, accepts the touch operation in the area 12 determined later, and touches the right touch area to be redone the selection. Priority is given to operations. Conversely, the touch operation in the left touch area may be prioritized and validated.

(Example 19)
Effects and the like using touch panel 252a in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, an effect using the touch panel 252a in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 190 (a) to 190 (d) show special figure variation games in this order in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 190 (a) shows a state in which the panda image imitating a panda is displayed in front of the middle symbol display area 208b in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. ing. The panda image notifies an advance notice that a touch effect may be started. The touch effect using the touch panel 252a is not executed in the image display area of the touch panel display device 252.

  FIG. 190 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the fluctuation variation state in the left symbol display area 208a, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is continued in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c. ing. A panda image is displayed in front of the middle symbol display area 208b, and the warning notice of the touch effect continues.

  FIG. 190 (c) shows a state in which a reach effect is started in which the decorative display of the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the middle-right symbol display region 208b, while “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display region 208c. Is shown. A panda image is displayed in front of the middle symbol display area 208b, and the warning notice of the touch effect continues. In addition, in the display area of the touch panel display 252, an image in which a character “?” Is drawn in a circle is displayed together with the panda image, and a notice that the touch display related to the touch area may be displayed. ing.

  In FIG. 190 (d), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the image display area. In the enlarged effect display area 208d, a Bancho image is displayed at the center, and “ Is a state where a reach effect is displayed in which a character string image of “...” is displayed. Further, in the image display area of the touch panel display device 252, the touch display 1 having a horizontally long elliptical image including the character string image of “touch” is displayed in an area including a part of the areas 9 and 10, and similarly. The touch display 2 having a horizontally long elliptical image including a character string image of “touch” inside is displayed in an area including a part of the areas 21 and 22, and a touch effect is started. In addition, a panda image is displayed in the image display area of the touch-panel display device 252 while hiding a part of the touch display 1. In addition, a character string image “select reach by touch” is displayed at the top of the image display area.

  FIG. 190 (d ′) shows an effect executed in place of FIG. 190 (d). In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect similar to that in FIG. 190 (d) is executed. In addition, in the image display area of the touch panel display 252, an intense display having a horizontally long rectangular image including a character string image of “super intense” is included in an area including a part of the areas 9 to 11 and 15 to 17. It is displayed. A panda image is displayed on the left side of the intense display. As described above, the intense display may function as a notice without displaying the touch display 1 and the touch display 2 shown in FIG. 190 (d). Moreover, the structure which branches off to other productions by making the intense display display appear as a touch display (touch production). Further, for example, the animation of the panda image in FIG. 190 (c), (d), or (d ′) may be an animation that operates the touch panel 252a, or is introduced in order to expect other effects. The animation may be the same part. Further, for example, the acceptance period of the touch operation may be valid at the time of FIG. 190 (c), or may be valid at the time of FIG. 190 (d).

  Next, effects and the like using the touch panel 252a in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (f) show special figure variation games in this order in time series. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  Since FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (d) show the same state as FIGS. 190 (a) to (d), description thereof will be omitted. FIGS. 191 (e) to (f) show a state in which the same effects as in FIGS. 30 (e) to (f) of the first embodiment are executed. FIG. 191 (e) shows a state in which the panda image animation display is continued, but the display of the gauge image indicating the valid period of the touch operation reception is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the valid reception period of the touch operation is started. Show.

  FIGS. 191 (e ′) to (f ′) show modifications. In FIG. 191 (e ′), the gauge image is not displayed, and it is notified that the acceptance period of the touch operation is started by the animation display of the panda image and the display of the touch displays 1 and 2. FIG. 191 (f ′) notifies that the acceptance period of the touch operation has ended because the animation display of the panda image and the touch displays 1 and 2 have been deleted.

(Example 20)
Effects and the like using the touch panel 252a in the pachinko machine 100 according to the twentieth example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, even in a period in which a touch display indicating the touch area is not displayed in a state where the touch area is defined, an effect corresponding to the touch operation according to the touch operation (hereinafter simply referred to as “effect”). Is characterized in that is executed or not executed. For example, a predetermined area of the touch panel 252a is effectively controlled as a touch area (hereinafter referred to as “touch area A”) in which the touch operation is valid, and a touch display indicating the touch area A (hereinafter referred to as “touch display A”). The case where the touch area A is touched during a non-display period until the display state is displayed is referred to as state A. The following six types of modes (1) to (6) are listed as modes related to the effects executed as a result of the state A and the execution timing of the effects. Aspect (1) is an aspect in which all effects are executed before the touch display A is displayed. Mode (2) is a mode in which all effects are executed simultaneously with the display of touch display A. Aspect (3) is an aspect in which all effects are executed after touch display A is displayed. Mode (4) is a mode in which only some of the effects are executed before the touch display A is displayed. Mode (5) is a mode in which only some of the effects are executed simultaneously with the display of touch display A. Mode (6) is a mode in which only some of the effects are executed after touch display A is displayed.

  Further, for example, a predetermined area of the touch panel 252a is effectively controlled as a touch area (hereinafter referred to as “touch area B”) in which the touch operation is valid, and a touch display (hereinafter referred to as “touch display”) that suggests the touch area B. A case where the touch area B is touched during a non-display period after the display state is changed to the non-display state is referred to as a state B. The following six types of modes (7) to (12) are listed as modes related to effects that are not executed as a result of state B and the non-execution timing of the effects. Mode (7) is a mode in which all effects are not executed before the touch display B is not displayed. Aspect (8) is an aspect in which all effects are not executed at the same time as the touch display B is not displayed. Mode (9) is a mode in which all effects are not executed after the touch display B is not displayed. Aspect (10) is an aspect in which only some of the effects are not executed before the touch display B is not displayed. The aspect (11) is an aspect in which only a part of the effects is not executed at the same time as the touch display B is not displayed. A mode (12) is a mode in which only a part of all effects is not executed after the touch display B is not displayed.

  Further, for example, in a case where the state A and the state B are combined, the touch area A shifts from the state A indicated by the display of the touch display A to the state B indicated by the display of the touch display B. Let the case be state C. As a pattern of the combination of transitions to become the state C, a mode in which the transition from the state A to the state B is directly performed is the pattern 1, a mode in which the transition from the state A to the states A and B is performed as the pattern 2, Assuming that the pattern 3 is a state that shifts to the state B through a state that is not the state B, the following seven types of aspects (13) to (19) are given as the aspect of the effect to be executed. The aspect (13) is an aspect in which all effects included in the state B from the state A shift in the pattern 1. Aspect (14) is an aspect in which all effects included in state B from state A shift in pattern 2. Aspect (15) is an aspect in which all effects included in state B from state A shift in pattern 3. The mode (16) is a mode in which a part of all effects included in the state A to the state B transitions to the pattern 1, a part is the pattern 2, and the rest is the pattern 3. A mode (17) is a mode in which a part of all effects included in the state A to the state B shifts from the pattern 1 and the rest from the pattern 2. The mode (18) is a mode in which a part of all effects included in the state A from the state A shifts in the pattern 1 and the rest in the pattern 3. The mode (19) is a mode in which a part of all the effects included in the state A from the state A shifts with the pattern 2 and the rest with the pattern 3.

  FIG. 192 (a) to FIG. 193 (f) show the special figure variable games in this order in this order. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 192 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 34 (i) of the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 192 (a) shows a state in which the character image “2” in the countdown display indicating that the remaining touch operation acceptance valid period is 2 seconds is displayed on the right side of the display area of the touch panel display 252. Show. Here, a character image of “x” is displayed large as a touch operation corresponding effect based on the touch operation, and a part of the hold icon is partially hidden.

  In FIG. 192 (b), the decoration symbol “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is provisionally displayed as a combination of the decoration symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It has stopped. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, one hold icon for displaying a pre-read notice is displayed with a long image.

  In FIG. 192 (c), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the display area of the touch-panel display device 252, a single hold icon for displaying a pre-reading notice in a number-length image is enlarged and displayed.

  FIG. 192 (d) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is consumed and the special FIG. 1 variable game is being executed. All of the LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are turned off to notify that the special figure 1 no longer holds.

  FIG. 192 (e) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 192 (f) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c and is in a reach state. In this example, the touch area is defined as an area including the area 9 at this time, but the player's finger 901 is placed in the area 9 of the touch panel 252a when the touch display is not yet performed in the display area of the touch panel type display device 252. A state A in which a single touch operation is performed is shown.

  FIG. 192 (g) shows a state in which the touch effect is started. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a touch display is displayed in which a character image A holding a bowling ball is positioned on the right side and a character image B holding a sword is positioned on the left side. A character image “Select a reach by touch” is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 192 (h) shows a state developed as an effect of SP reach A as a result of the touch operation. A character image A is displayed in the display area of the touch panel display 252 and a character string image of “boring reach” is displayed at the top. In this example, a gauge image indicating the acceptance valid period of the touch operation is not displayed even between FIGS. 192 (f) to (h). Thus, in this example, as a result of the state A, the effect is executed in such a manner that only some effects of the effect (6) are executed after the touch display is displayed. In this way, since the effect based on the touch operation is performed after the display of the touch display, it may be possible to relieve the player by notifying whether the development destination for SP reach is reach A or reach B. .

  FIG. 192 (i) shows a state in which the SP reach A effect is being executed in the effect display area 208 d and the display area of the touch panel display device 252.

  FIG. 193 (a) shows a state in which the SP reach A effect is being executed. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a touch display “a” is displayed by a frame image surrounding the areas 9 to 12 of the touch panel 252 and a character string image of “TOUCH!” Positioned inside the frame. A touch display b by the character image A is displayed on the left side of the touch display a, and a gauge image touch display c is displayed below the touch display a. Further, the entire area of the touch panel 252a is effectively controlled as a touch area.

  FIG. 193 (b) shows a state in which the SP reach A effect is being executed. This example shows a state B in which the player's finger 901 performs a single touch operation on the area 10 of the touch panel 252a after all of the touch displays a to c suggesting the touch area disappear from the display area of the touch panel type display device 252. .

  FIG. 193 (c) shows a state in which a touch operation-related effect has occurred as a result of the touch operation. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character string image “Gekiatsu” is displayed together with the character image A. In this example, the cut-in notice as shown in FIG. 36 (e) is not displayed. As described above, in this example, as a result of the state B, only some effects of all the effects according to the mode (12) are executed in a mode that is not executed after the touch display is not displayed. In this way, there is a case where the presentation can be omitted when the active notification such as the notice is unnecessary.

  FIG. 193 (d) shows an effect for deriving the result of the special figure variable game. “Decoration 3” is displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 193 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a character string image of “big hit” is displayed.

  FIG. 193 (f) shows a state where “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a combination of ornamental symbols, is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c. In addition, an image representing the character “A” as the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning. In the display area of the touch panel display 252, a tutorial using a character string image “congratulations” is displayed together with the character image A.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to the drawings again.
(1-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine comprising display means (for example, a touch panel display device 252) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays (for example, a first display and a second display),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of an elliptical image including a character string image of “touch” (for example, touch display) (FIG. 30D)). Yes,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display (for example, a panda image (FIG. 30D)),
The display means includes at least a touch panel (for example, a touch panel 252a),
The first display is a display related at least to an area (hereinafter referred to as a “touch area” (for example, a touch area)) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as a “touch operation”) is effective.
The second display is a display not related at least to the touch area;
The display means is means capable of hiding at least a part of the first display (for example, touch display) and displaying at least the second display (for example, a display in which a part of an elliptical image is hidden by a panda image). is there,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, at least a part of the first image related to the touch area is at least hidden by the second image not related to the touch area. Can be provided. The display that is not related to the touch area includes a display that is not related to the first display, a display that is not related to the effect related to the touch operation, and the like. Specifically, a display prompting a touch operation, a character such as a character, PUSH, or a frame display is a display related to the touch area, and a notice (pre-read notice), an error display, a game description, or the like is a touch area. It is an unrelated display.

The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display that can at least suggest the touch area.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display can suggest a touch area. The first display may be wider or narrower than the touch area. Since the second display hides at least a part of the first display, the hidden part may or may not include the actual touch area. Further, the second display may be configured to hide only a part of the first display. Moreover, since the 1st display should just contain the display relevant to a touch area | region, it may contain a notice etc.

The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display that can at least suggest the touch area (hereinafter referred to as “first area”),
The first display is a display including at least a region other than the touch region (hereinafter referred to as “second region”),
The display means is means capable of displaying the second display while hiding at least one of the first area and the second area in the first display.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second display hides at least one of the touch area and the first display other than the touch area. Since the first display is configured to include at least the second region, the first display may be displayed conspicuously even if it is hidden by the second display.
The first display may be a display that includes only a part of the touch area (may be a display that is narrower than the actual touch area), or a display in a range substantially the same as the touch area. Alternatively, the display may include a touch area and a non-touch area (a display wider than the actual touch area). Further, the display may include a non-touch area while including a part (not all) of the touch area. There are cases where the display can be varied by a display that is not bound to the actual touch area.

(1-2) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in a first period (for example, a period including the start of the first display),
The second display is a display that can be started at least in a second period (for example, a period including the start of the second display),
The touch area is an area where reception of the touch operation is at least effective over a third period (for example, a touch operation reception valid period),
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the first period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the touch-related display and the touch non-related display are within the touch operation reception valid period. Even if it is a touch operation reception valid period, there are cases where a variety of effects can be provided by the second display. The first period and the second period may include a period that does not include the third period. Further, the first period and the second period may be a period that includes the entire third period, or may be a period that coincides with the third period.

(1-3) The pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period including at least a period before the start of the third period (hereinafter referred to as a “fourth period” (for example, a period before the start of a touch operation reception valid period)). Yes,
The second period is a period including at least the fourth period (for example, the second display is performed before the start of the touch operation reception valid period),
The second display is a display at least related to the first display;
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display by hiding at least a part of the first display in the fourth period,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display without being hidden by the second display in the third period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the second display is a display related to the first display and hides the first display in a period outside the touch effective period. Note that the display of the first display without being hidden by the second display in the third period includes the case where the second display is not performed, and the second display overlaps with the first display. It also includes the case where it is displayed while being saved at a position where it is not possible. The first display may be displayed in a period outside the touch effective period.

(1-4) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means can display the second display by hiding at least a part of the first display even when the second display is displayed before the first display. Means (for example, hiding the panda image (first display) with the effect image (second display) as a prefetch notice of the hold icon (FIG. 34 (f))),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the first display that is displayed first hides the first display that is displayed later. By doing so, the second display may be conspicuous. The second display may be displayed after the first display to hide at least a part of the first display. Further, the first display may be hidden regardless of the second display start timing.

(1-5) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, display of a touch effective period image),
The third indication is an indication at least related to the third period;
The third display is a display that can be started at least in the fifth period;
The fifth period is a period including at least a part of the third period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it is possible to display an effective period image (gauge display (touch effective period display)).

The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display which is a first number,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the third display which is a second number,
The first number is two or more;
The second number is one (for example, FIG. 46 (a)),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the operation acceptance valid period is common to the display of a plurality of touch areas. Alternatively, the first effect may be generated when the first number of touch operations are performed, and the second effect may be generated for each touch operation.

  Conventionally, there has been a technique for increasing the interest of the game through display effects by the display means, but there is still room for improvement in the display means. According to the above embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the display means.

(1-6) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display is a notice (for example, a pre-read notice hold icon (FIGS. 34 (g), (h), (i))).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the second display is a notice, there is a case where the game can be excited by the notice even during the display of the touch area.
The “notice” only needs to be related at least to special figure variation games (design variation display, decorative symbol variation display), ordinary figure variation games (general drawing effects or special figure-related effects masquerading as ordinary figure effects). The second display relating to the notice corresponds to cut-in notice, group notice, step-up notice, various effects, background change, and the like. In addition, “preliminary notice” also includes a prefetch notice such as a change in hold icon and a transition to a prefetch-only production mode.

The pachinko machine 100,
The second display is a notice by at least animation display (for example, the size of the hold icon of the prefetch notice changes (FIGS. 34 (g), (h), (i))),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second display by changing a range in which the first display is hidden by the animation display.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the range of the second display that is hidden together with the advance notice by the animation display is variable, there is a case where the display period of the touch area can be increased by executing the animation display. is there.
Depending on the display timing of the animation display, the first display may be performed, there may be a timing at which the first display is not hidden at all, or the entire display period of the animation display In this configuration, at least a part of the first display may be hidden. The first display may be an animation display.
The animation display may be a display other than the notice. It may be a production animation, a selection animation of music, etc., an animation related to execution of individual mode settings, or the like.

Here, the animation display in the character selection effect shown in FIGS. 42 to 43 will be described. In an effect of selecting one of a plurality of options by a plurality of touch operations (tap, double tap, swipe, etc.) to be described later, the selection change animation or the options themselves may be displayed in animation.
When a selection operation is further performed during the selection change animation, the current selection change animation may be canceled to perform the next selection change animation.
When a plurality of simultaneous touch operations are performed, one selection change animation may be performed, or a plurality of selection change animations may be sequentially performed. The second selection change animation may be performed by canceling a part or all of the second selection change animation. By doing so, there is an effect that it may be possible to notify early of the option that is finally selected when a plurality of selection operations are performed continuously or simultaneously.
In terms of the above effect, a configuration in which a part of each of the two selection change animations is canceled or shortened may be used. The part to be canceled or the part to be shortened can be arbitrarily determined. On the other hand, in order to show the selection change animation without fail, it is possible to use it as another function such as disabling simultaneous touch operation or returning to the default option.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 42 (c) to 42 (f), the options ("bancho", "Yatsushiro general's mark", and the like displayed in the three touch areas of the touch panel and the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, The display of each image of “military”) itself may be the first display. In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the option moves by animation, but the three touch areas of the touch panel do not change.

(1-7) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display is a display related at least to an error (for example, an error notification by displaying a character string image of “please remove the sphere” (FIG. 45A)).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since the second display is an error display, the error display may be conspicuous even during the touch operation reception valid period.

The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of error displays (for example, a ball removal error and a magnet error) as the second display,
At least one of the plurality of types of error displays is a first error display (for example, a ball removal error display),
At least one of the plurality of types of error indications is a second error indication (for example, a magnet error indication),
The display means is means capable of hiding a part of the first display and displaying at least the first error display (for example, FIG. 47 (a)),
The display means is a means capable of hiding all of the first display and displaying at least the second error display (for example, FIG. 47 (b)).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second error display hides all of the first display, so that the important error display is to notify the player by hiding all operations on the touch panel. May be able to arouse.

  In the above embodiment, the ball removal error display corresponds to the first error display, and the error display of the magnet error that stops the game corresponds to the second error display. Because the game is stopped by the second error display, the third period ends when the second error is displayed even during the third period (touch operation acceptance valid period) during which the touch operation is valid. To do. Further, not limited to the above example, errors that may occur on the game machine and their error displays can be arbitrarily displayed as a first error and a second error. For example, a display related to a door opening error, a ball removal error, and a ball shortage error may be set as a first error display, and a display related to a magnet error, a vibration sensor error, and an abnormal winning error may be set as a second error display.

(1-8) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved by using the resistive touch-sensitive touch panel or the capacitive touch panel to produce the game using the touch feeling of the player. An infrared touch panel or the like may be used.

The pachinko machine 100,
It further includes display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means” (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208)) different from the display means,
At least one of the display unit and the second display unit is a unit capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are a plurality of display means, one of which can execute a decorative symbol variation display. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may be performed by simultaneous variation or the like on both display means. Moreover, the structure by which the display means on which a decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display is performed in relation to a game state or effect mode may be decided.

The pachinko machine 100,
One of the display means and the second display means (for example, the touch panel display device 252) is a means provided on the frame (for example, the outer frame 102) side,
The other display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) of the display means and the second display means is a means provided on the game board (for example, the game board 200) side.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, one display means is provided on the frame side and the other display means is provided on the game board side. Both display means may be provided on the frame side or may be provided on the game board side.

It should be noted that the display that hides the touch area in the embodiment corresponds to the second display. Accordingly, the fourth symbol, the hold icon, and the like described in the above embodiment correspond to the second display when the touch area is hidden.
Further, the touch panel according to the present embodiment is configured to correct at least a part of the area where the character image is displayed to the invalid area when the display (touch display) of the character image overlaps the touch area. May be.

(1-9) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a part of the second display in a state where the second display is preferentially displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
The display means is means capable of erasing and displaying at least a part of the first display in the first state.
It is characterized by that.
In the above embodiment, for example, the first display is hidden and the second display is displayed. Here, “hide” means that at least a part of the display is erased or displayed, or This is a concept that includes that at least a part is not displayed.

Next, a basic operation of the touch panel will be described.
“Tap” is an operation of tapping the touch panel with a finger. This corresponds to a click operation with a mouse of an input device of a personal computer (PC). In some cases, it is also used as an effect operation equivalent to an operation of pressing an effect button in a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  “Double tap” means that the touch panel is operated twice. This corresponds to a double-click operation with a PC mouse. In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, there is a case where a double tap is operated once or a plurality of times to be used as an effect operation corresponding to a repetitive effect of an effect button.

  “Touch” is an operation of touching the touch panel. When the panel is touched for a longer time than the operation time of “tap”, it is referred to as “touch”. Note that pachinko machines and slot machines may be used for long press operations. It may be regarded as an operation equivalent to “long tap”, “touch and hold”, and “long press” described later, and the same effect may be performed based on these operations.

  “Drag” is an operation of moving a finger while pressing the touch panel. This corresponds to a drag operation of the PC mouse. In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, even a “flick” or “swipe” operation described later is regarded as an operation equivalent to “drag”, and the same effect may be performed based on these operations.

“Flick” is an operation of lightly touching the touch panel with a finger.
“Swipe” is an operation of sliding a finger while touching the touch panel.

  “Long tap”, “touch and hold”, or “long press” refers to an operation of holding down the touch panel. In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, it may be used as an effect equivalent to a long press operation of an effect button.

“Multi-tap” is a general term for operations with a plurality of fingers, and examples of operations are as follows.
“Rotation” is an operation of turning another finger with one finger as a fulcrum. In pachinko machines and slot machines (especially in pachinko machines), “rotation” while operating the steering wheel may be less versatile due to the difficulty of operation. The configuration may be performed in association with the performance when the player is highly likely to stop the launch operation, such as during high SP reach.

“Pinch” is a general term for an operation of pinching with two fingers, and mainly includes the following two operations.
“Pinch out” and “pinch open” are operations when the touch panel is pressed with two fingers and the space between them is expanded. In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, there is a case where an effect display is performed in an area hidden by an operation of “pinch out” for an area hidden by an effect display or the like.

  “Pinch-in” or “pinch close” refers to an operation for reducing the size by pressing and holding between two fingers. In a pachinko machine or a slot machine, there may be an effect display that hides an area displayed by an effect display or the like by an operation of “pinch in”.

Other operations will be described below.
“Pinch in with four or five fingers” is used when returning to the home screen on tablet devices, etc., but in pachinko machines and slot machines, for example, switching between multiple production modes is described above. In a configuration that can be switched in a predetermined order by any operation (for example, double tap), it can be used for effects such as “pinch-in with four or five fingers” to return to a predetermined effect mode. Good.

  “Swipe up / down or left / right with four or five fingers” is used to display a multitasking bar or switch apps on a bullet device etc., but on a pachinko machine or slot machine, for example, a big hit It may be configured to be used for switching display related to the implementation of an information display screen such as a history and earned balls, switching display related to the execution of an individual setting mode setting screen, and the like.

  The “tracing” may be configured to shift to, for example, a game explanation display or an effect explanation display when traced as displayed on the display means.

  “Shake” has a cancel function by shaking the device itself (vibration), but particularly in pachinko machines, fraudulent action that changes the flow of game balls (the vibration sensor provided in the pachinko machine reacts) There is a risk of misidentification. However, for example, a game ball is not being fired, a demonstration display screen or an individual mode setting screen is being displayed, etc., etc. There may be. In this operation, the operability may be improved by combining with another operation. For example, a configuration in which only one function is canceled by the above-described operation (for example, pinch-in) may be provided, and all may be canceled by “shake”.

  Any operation of the touch panel described above is generically referred to as a touch operation in this embodiment. Next, a common modification example regarding the pachinko machine and the slot machine related to the above operation will be described. The various operations are not only during the execution of the symbol variation display, for example, during the period when the symbol variation display is not being executed, such as the demonstration display period, the description of the various operations (the production or production that is irrelevant) It may be used for volume setting, brightness setting, and the like. The contents exemplified above can be appropriately combined with the type of operation of the touch panel.

  About the timing which a touch panel reacts, the structure which reacts at the moment of touch (off-on) and the structure which reacts by touch-up (on-off) can be suitably employ | adopted by the combination with production. The player may be provided with a function that the player feels by touch when various touch operations are performed. For example, it may be configured to have a function of imparting vibration by a vibration motor, ultrasonic waves, or the like, or a function of imparting electrical stimulation due to static electricity. Further, a function of adjusting the sensitivity of the touch panel may be provided. For example, the configuration may be such that the speed, acceleration, locus, etc. of various operations are adjusted by sensitivity setting and an effect according to the result is performed.

The touch panel system described in the present embodiment may adopt a general system, but may be a system shown below, for example.
In the “resistive film pressure sensitive type (analog resistive film type)”, an electrode surface is formed by two sheet panels, and a position is detected by energizing a pressed portion. In this method, it is necessary to perform a strong operation with a player's finger. However, it may be configured to increase the sensitivity setting described above, or may have a configuration in which accessories such as a touch pen are always provided on the game stand, and various effects are produced by operations using the accessories. . When the accessory is used, there may be a case where the touch panel sensitivity can be prevented from being lowered due to the attachment of the player's fingerprint, or an effect that the visibility of the touch panel is not lowered can be expected.

  In the “capacitance method (analog capacitive coupling method)”, a weak electric field is applied to the surface of the touch panel, and the position is detected by a change in the electric field due to static electricity in the touched portion. According to this structure, since it reacts only by touching the operation surface of a touchscreen lightly, operativity is high. Although operation through an insulator cannot be performed, even if it is an accessory such as the above-mentioned touch pen, it is possible to transmit static electricity of the player's hand if it is an accessory that has conductivity, so the above effect May have the same effect.

  In the “infrared sensor method”, a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit using LEDs are arranged around a touch panel, and a position blocked by a player's finger is detected. Detection is possible without pressing the surface of the touch panel. In the operation of the present embodiment, an infrared sensor method may be used as long as there is no particular problem (the effective range of touch may be read as the range in which the operation is effective).

  The “optical sensor method” is a method in which a sensor is embedded in a touch panel, and optical sensor cells are arranged in the gaps between RGB sensors, and a position is detected by optically reading a finger like a scanner. By adopting this method, there are cases where clear display can be performed.

(2-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
Display means (for example, a touch panel display 252) capable of executing at least display;
Control means capable of controlling at least a plurality of types of control (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700);
A game machine equipped with
The display means includes at least a touch panel (for example, a touch panel 252a),
At least one of the plurality of types of control is a first control,
At least one of the plurality of types of control is a second control,
The first control is control (for example, touch operation enable control (see FIGS. 37A and 37B)) that at least enables reception of the operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”). Yes,
The second control is a control that at least disables acceptance of the touch operation (for example, touch operation invalidation control (see FIGS. 37A and 37B)).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, when a plurality of places are touched at the same time, there are cases where the acceptance of the operation of the touch panel is valid and invalid, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by control means. . By combining the effective control and the invalid control, the player may be able to perform an appropriate touch panel operation.

(2-2) The pachinko machine 100,
The first control (for example, effective control) is a control that can be executed at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The second control (for example, invalid control) is control that can be executed at least when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the touch operation is simultaneously performed by the first number,
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the touch operation is simultaneously performed by the second number,
The second number is a number that is at least greater than the first number.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the acceptance of the touch operation is enabled by the first number of simultaneous operations and is invalidated by the second number of simultaneous operations greater than the first number. By determining the number of possible touch operations, the control burden may be reduced. Note that the first number and the second number may be appropriately changed depending on the touch panel method, the size of the touch panel, and the like. Moreover, the structure by which a number changes with the kind etc. of the production using a touch panel may be sufficient.

(2-3) The pachinko machine 100,
The first number is two;
The second number is three or more;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the two-point simultaneous operation is valid, and the three-point simultaneous operation is invalid. In the pachinko machine, one hand (right hand) is used for the handle operation to launch the game ball. Therefore, depending on the touch operation only with the other hand (finger), it may be possible to prevent the touch operation from becoming too complicated.

(2-4) The pachinko machine 100,
Providing production means (for example, an image display area of the touch panel display 252) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display related to the effective area of the touch operation,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, display of the image for reach A in FIG. 35 (i)),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of the image for reach B in FIG. 35 (i)),
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in a first area (for example, the right side of the image display area of the touch panel display device 252),
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in a second area (for example, the left side of the image display area of the touch panel display device 252).
The second region is a region different from the first region,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect (for example, a display selection effect (FIG. 35 (i)) for reach A / B images)
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect corresponding to the selected display (FIG. 36A)),
The first effect is an effect of selecting at least one of the first display and the second display by the touch operation,
The second effect is an effect corresponding to at least the display selected by the touch operation,
The production means can execute any one of the first production and the second production when both the first area and the second area are touch-operated simultaneously. Means,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, if there is a simultaneous operation with a selection effect in a plurality of touch areas, any effect is executed, so even if there is a simultaneous operation due to an erroneous operation, etc. It may be possible to avoid not executing. Note that whether to execute the first effect or the second effect may be uniquely determined, or may be determined each time by random lottery or the like. Moreover, the structure which performs the 3rd production which can generate | occur | produce only in the case of simultaneous touch operation may be sufficient.

(2-5) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of types of control is a third control (for example, the control shown in FIG. 39),
The third control is a control that can be executed at least when the third condition is satisfied,
The third control is a control that at least enables acceptance of the touch operation,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied during execution of the second control due to the establishment of the second condition,
The third condition is a condition that can be established when the number of touch operations performed simultaneously decreases from the second number.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the transition from the three-point simultaneous touch operation to the two-point simultaneous touch operation switches from the invalid control to the valid control. The decrease in the number of simultaneous touch operations is presumed to be due to the player's intentional operation and the elimination of problems related to touch panel detection. There are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by performing.

The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of types of control is a fourth control (for example, the control shown in FIG. 40),
The fourth control is a control that can be executed at least when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The fourth control is a control that at least disables acceptance of the touch operation,
The fourth condition is a condition that may be satisfied during execution of the first control due to the establishment of the first condition,
The fourth condition is a condition that can be established when the number of touch operations performed simultaneously increases from the first number.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the control is switched from the effective control to the invalid control in the transition from the two-point simultaneous touch operation to the three-point simultaneous touch operation.

(2-6) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display related to the effective area of the touch operation,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, the display of the image for reach A in FIGS. 38A and 38B).
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of the image for reach B in FIGS. 38A and 38B).
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in a first area (for example, the right side of the image display area of the touch panel display device),
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in a second area (for example, the left side of the image display area of the touch panel display device),
The second region is a region different from the first region,
The first control (for example, effective control) is a control that can be executed at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The second control (for example, invalid control) is control that can be executed at least when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the touch operation is performed only on the first region (for example, FIG. 38 (a ′)),
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the touch operation is simultaneously performed by the first number (for example, two),
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the touch operation is performed in both the first region and the second region (for example, FIG. 38 (a)),
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the touch operation is simultaneously performed by a third number (for example, two),
The third number is a number that is at least the first number or more.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the simultaneous touch operation to one of the first region and the second region is effective control by the two-point simultaneous touch operation in the selection effect. The simultaneous touch operation to the area becomes invalid control. When the selection effect is performed on the touch panel, when one option is simultaneously touch-operated, the player's operation may not be wasted by executing the effect.

  For touch panel selection, for example, the size of the touch operation detection range is set according to the size of the first display and the second display in all touch panel effects (used on one game machine). It may be configured to. By doing so, there is no “simultaneous operation of a plurality of touches on the same option”, and therefore it may be possible to perform an accurate performance according to the player's operation.

(2-7) The pachinko machine 100,
Equipping means (for example, an image display area of a touch panel display device) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of effects,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, a display selection effect of the image for reach A / B (FIG. 38A)),
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect corresponding to the selected display (FIG. 38 (b ′))),
The first effect is an effect (for example, a touch effect) for selecting at least one of the first display and the second display by the touch operation.
The second effect is an effect corresponding to at least the display selected by the touch operation (for example, an effect corresponding to a touch operation),
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the touch operation is performed only on the first region (FIG. 38 (a ′)), the rendering means displays the first display. It is a means capable of executing at least the corresponding second effect (for example, FIG. 38 (b ′)),
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the touch operation is performed in both the first region and the second region), the effect unit is configured to display the first display. Is a means that does not execute at least the second performance corresponding to (for example, FIG. 38 (b)),
The effect means is means for not executing at least the second effect corresponding to the second display (for example, FIG. 38 (b)) when the second condition is satisfied.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the display, and when a touch operation is performed simultaneously on a plurality of options, the player is configured not to perform the effect. In some cases, the touch operation can be performed accurately.
Further, when the second condition is satisfied, a third effect different from the second effect may be performed, or a second effect corresponding to one of the displays may be performed. In some cases, it is possible to give the time between the times corresponding to the fluctuation time.

(2-8) The pachinko machine 100,
Providing production means (for example, an image display area of the touch panel display 252) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display related to the effective area of the touch operation,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, the display of the image for reach A in FIGS. 38A and 38B).
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of the image for reach B in FIGS. 38A and 38B).
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in a first area (for example, the right side of the image display area of the touch panel display device 252),
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in a second area (for example, the left side of the image display area of the touch panel display device 252).
The second region is a region different from the first region,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
The first effect is an effect (for example, a touch effect) that causes at least selection of both the first display and the second display by the touch operation.
The second effect is an effect corresponding to at least the first display by the touch operation (for example, an effect corresponding to a touch operation),
The third effect is an effect corresponding to at least the second display by the touch operation (for example, an effect corresponding to a touch operation),
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least the second effect and the third effect in an order corresponding to the order of the touch operations,
The production means is a means capable of starting the third production after starting the second production when the first condition is satisfied,
The effect means is means for not starting the second effect when the second condition is satisfied,
The production means is means for not starting the third production when the second condition is satisfied.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the production order is determined by the operation order of the plurality of touch areas, but the production can be performed in the determined order by the 2-point simultaneous touch operation, but the production is performed by the 3-point simultaneous touch operation. Since the execution is not performed, there may be a case where the execution order of the effects is determined by the touch operation, and even if it is a simultaneous touch operation, the effect can be provided. As described above, the order of effects may be determined in advance, or may be determined each time by random lottery or the like.

(2-9) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period during which reception of the touch operation is valid (hereinafter referred to as “third period” (for example, a touch operation reception effective period));
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period.
It is characterized by that.

Even for the same type of simultaneous touch operation, it may be determined whether to perform the effective control or the invalid control in relation to the third period. For example, when a touch operation is simultaneously performed on each option in a selection-type effect, invalid control may be performed when the remaining period of the period during which the acceptance of the touch operation is valid is longer than a predetermined time. Since there is time to surely reflect the player's intention to select, there is a case where it is not necessary to decide the production without permission.
Further, when the remaining period of the period during which the acceptance of the touch operation is valid is shorter than a predetermined time, the effective control may be performed. Since the touch operation becomes invalid and the subsequent presentation may not be performed, the presentation may be surely shown to the player by receiving the touch operation and performing the presentation.

  In addition, the number of touches may be changed between valid control and invalid control even when the number of touches to be simultaneously touched is the same. For example, when there is a two-point simultaneous touch operation in a selection-type production, when two-point simultaneous touch operation is performed for a plurality of options, invalid control may be performed. In some cases, it is possible to prevent an effect different from the player's selection intention from being executed. In addition, when two simultaneous touch operations are performed on only one option, effective control may be performed. Even if it is a two-point simultaneous touch operation, since the selected item is one option, the player's intention of selection may be reliably reflected.

  Conventionally, effects involving operation of operation means provided at a position that can be operated by the player have been adopted to enhance the interest of the game, but there is room for improvement in control related to the operation means. According to the above embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the control means.

(2-10) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved by using the resistive touch-sensitive touch panel or the capacitive touch panel to produce the game using the touch feeling of the player. An infrared touch panel or the like may be used.

The pachinko machine 100,
It further comprises display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”) different from the display means,
At least one of the display unit and the second display unit is a unit capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are a plurality of display means, one of which can execute a decorative symbol variation display. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may be performed by simultaneous variation or the like on both display means. Moreover, the structure by which the display means on which a decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display is performed in relation to a game state or effect mode may be decided.

The pachinko machine 100,
One of the display means and the second display means is a means provided on the frame side,
The other display means of the display means and the second display means is a means provided on the game board side.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, one display means is provided on the frame side and the other display means is provided on the game board side. Both display means may be provided on the frame side or may be provided on the game board side.

  The number of simultaneous operations can be changed depending on the touch panel method, the touch panel size, and the effect type.

(3-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
A first operation means (for example, a touch panel 252a) provided at least at a position operable by the player;
Production means capable of executing at least a first production (for example, effect production (FIGS. 45 (c) to (e)),
A game machine equipped with
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in connection with a player's first operation (for example, a touch operation on the touch panel 252a).
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in connection with the player's second operation (for example, the button operation of the chance button 252a),
The second operation is an operation different from the first operation,
The first operation means is a touch panel (for example, a touch panel 252a),
The first operation is an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “first touch operation”).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first effect is executed even in a second operation different from the first operation. By doing so, there may be a case where it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the operation means. In some cases, the player can select an operation. Further, the second operation may be a touch operation different from the first operation, or may be another operation using another operation means.

(3-2) The pachinko machine 100,
The second operation is a touch operation on the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “second touch operation”),
The first effect is an effect (for example, FIG. 45 (c)) that can be executed at least in association with the first touch operation (for example, a slide operation).
The first effect is an effect (for example, FIG. 45 (d)) that can be executed at least in association with the second touch operation (for example, a touch-only operation).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the first effect can be executed even if the operation type of the touch operation is different. For example, the operation type is different such as a slide (swipe) operation and a touch operation. However, the same first performance is executed. Even if the touch operation method is different, the first effect may be executable.

(3-3) The pachinko machine 100,
The touch panel is capable of receiving at least the touch operation in a first period (for example, a touch operation reception valid period),
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the first touch operation is performed in the first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the second touch operation is performed in the first period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the first effect is executed in both the first touch operation and the second touch operation within the same touch operation reception valid period. By doing so, an operation for causing the first effect to appear may be facilitated. The first effect may be an effect that can appear when the first touch operation is performed in a second period different from the first period, or an event unrelated to the touch operation may be performed. An effect that can appear as an opportunity may be used.

(3-4) The pachinko machine 100,
Second operation means (for example, a chance button 136 and a setting operation unit 137)
The second operating means is means provided at least at a position where the player can operate,
The second operation means is an operation means different from the first operation means,
The second operation is an operation of the second operation means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first effect is also executed by operating the operating means other than the touch panel. By doing this, the range of operations may be widened. In addition, the player may be able to select different tactile operations.

(3-5) The pachinko machine 100,
The touch panel is at least capable of accepting the touch operation in a first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the first number of times of the first touch operation (for example, three touch operations) is performed in the first period,
In the first effect, the second operation (for example, three button operations (FIGS. 48B, 48E, 48H)) is performed a second number of times during the first period. It is a production that can be performed at least in the case of
The second number of times is the same number of times as the first number of times,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the first effect can be executed by a plurality of operations, and the operation of the touch panel and the operation of another operation means are different because the operation speed and operability are different. In some cases, it is possible to prompt the user to select an operation means corresponding to the operation of each time.
The second number of times may be different from the first number of times. Depending on the number of times and operability, the player may be able to select which operation means to operate.
Moreover, the structure performed by the auto mode of a touchscreen or a 2nd operation means may be sufficient as a 1st effect.

(3-6) The pachinko machine 100,
First control means (for example, touch sensor circuit 444) capable of controlling at least the touch panel;
A second control means (for example, a sensor circuit 428) capable of controlling at least the second operation means;
The first control means is a means capable of at least control for accepting a plurality of touch operations performed simultaneously,
The second control means is means capable of at least control for receiving the second operation once (for example, FIGS. 36 (c) and (d)),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the touch panel can accept a plurality of simultaneous touch operations, and can enable the simultaneous touch operations. On the other hand, since the second operation means is effective for each operation, it may be easy to select an operation on the touch panel.

  Conventionally, an attempt has been made to improve the fun of the game by operating the operating means that can be operated by the player, but there is room for improvement in the operating means. According to the above embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the operation means.

(3-7) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation that is accepted at least when directly touching the screen of the touch panel.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved by using the resistive touch-sensitive touch panel or the capacitive touch panel to produce the game using the touch feeling of the player. An infrared touch panel or the like may be used.

The pachinko machine 100,
It further comprises display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”) different from the display means,
At least one of the display unit and the second display unit is a unit capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are a plurality of display means, one of which can execute a decorative symbol variation display. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may be performed by simultaneous variation or the like on both display means. Moreover, the structure by which the display means on which a decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display is performed in relation to a game state or effect mode may be decided.

The pachinko machine 100,
One of the display means and the second display means is a means provided on the frame side,
The other display means of the display means and the second display means is a means provided on the game board side.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, one display means is provided on the frame side and the other display means is provided on the game board side. Both display means may be provided on the frame side or may be provided on the game board side.

(4-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
A game machine comprising first display means (for example, a touch panel display device 252) capable of executing at least a first display (for example, touch display (FIG. 30 (f))),
The first display means includes at least a touch panel (for example, a touch panel 252a),
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in a first area (for example, a touch display area),
The first display is a display at least related to an area (hereinafter referred to as a “second area” (for example, a touch area)) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as a “touch operation”) is effective. Yes,
The second region is a region that is at least partially different from the first region.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the touch area, which is an effective area for the touch operation, is an area that is at least partially different from the touch display area. In some cases, variations in touch display can be provided without being trapped in the touch area more than necessary.

(4-2) The pachinko machine 100,
The second region (for example, touch region) is a region including at least a region (hereinafter referred to as “third region”) at least partially overlapping the first region (for example, touch display region). ,
The second region is a region including at least a region that does not overlap at least partly with the first region (hereinafter referred to as “fourth region”) (for example, FIG. 30 (f)),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the touch area includes an area that does not overlap with the area that overlaps the touch display area. By providing the third area that overlaps the touch display area in the touch area, the touch operation may be easily reported. If the touch display area is narrower than the touch area, the fourth area need not be provided. In the case of only the third region, the operability of the touch panel may be improved.

(4-3) The pachinko machine 100,
The fourth region is a region (for example, FIG. 30 (f)) narrower than the third region.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the third area where the touch area and the touch display area overlap is wider than the fourth area where the touch area and the touch display area do not overlap, so that the touch display decoration is maintained. However, the operability of the touch panel may be improved. Note that the fourth region may be configured to be a region wider than the third region. The fourth area may be the same area as the third area.

(4-4) The pachinko machine 100,
The second area is an area narrower than the first area (for example, FIG. 31B).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the touch area is narrower than the touch display area, so that the player may be able to carefully perform the touch operation.

(4-5) The pachinko machine 100,
The second region is a region in which all the second regions are included in the first region (for example, FIG. 31 (b)),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since all the touch areas are included in the touch display area, the touch areas in the touch display area may be carefully operated. For example, there is a case where the center of the touch display area can be touched. In addition, even when the touch area is smaller than the touch display area, the touch area may include an area where the touch area is not included in the touch display area (a part of the touch area does not overlap with the touch display area).

(4-6) The pachinko machine 100,
The second region is a region that is at least wider than the first region (for example, FIGS. 34 (g) and (i)),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the touch area is wider than the touch display area, and thus there are cases where a touch operation can be performed more easily than it looks.

(4-7) The pachinko machine 100,
In the second area (for example, touch area), one second area (for example, one touch area) corresponds to one first display (for example, one touch display). Is an area to be provided,
The first display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display which is the first number when the first condition is satisfied,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display of the second number when the second condition is satisfied,
The second number is a number different from the first number;
One of the fourth regions (for example, a region that does not overlap with one touch display of one touch region) when the first condition is satisfied is equal to one of the fourth regions when the second condition is satisfied. A region different from the four regions (for example, FIG. 41),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, when the size or number of touch display areas changes, the non-overlapping area of the touch area and the touch display area changes. Depending on the number of touch areas, the operability of the touch panel may be improved by changing the fourth area (the touch area and the area that does not overlap the touch display area). In some cases, it is possible to clarify between the touch area and another touch area. Note that the fourth area may be constant regardless of the number of touch display areas and the number of touch areas.

(4-8) The pachinko machine 100,
The second number is at least greater than the first number;
The one fourth area when the first condition is satisfied is an area larger than the one fourth area when the second condition is satisfied.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the area where the touch area and the display do not overlap increases as the number of touch display areas decreases.

The pachinko machine 100,
The second number is at least greater than the first number;
The one third region when the first condition is satisfied is a region smaller than the one third region when the second condition is satisfied.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the first fourth area when the first condition is satisfied is an area smaller than the first fourth area when the second condition is satisfied. May be. In addition, the one third region when the first condition is satisfied may be a region larger than the one third region when the second condition is satisfied.

(4-9) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, a decatouch display),
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in a fifth area (for example, a decatouch display area),
The fifth area is an area that is at least wider than the first area (for example, a touch display area),
The second display is a display related at least to the second region (for example, a touch region),
The second area is a larger area when the second display is performed than when the first display (for example, touch display) is performed (for example, FIGS. 31 and 32). , FIG. 33),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the decatouch display (second display) includes an area that overlaps the touch area and an area that does not overlap the touch area. It should be noted that there may be no area that does not overlap the touch area in the decatouch display. Further, when comparing the normal touch display and the decatouch display, the decatouch display is wider in the area overlapping the touch area and the area not overlapping the touch area. Note that the area that overlaps the touch area and the area that does not overlap the touch area may be narrower or the same in the decatouch display.

  The decatouch display is larger than the normal touch display, and is displayed using, for example, two or more touch areas corresponding to one touch display. Note that the entire touch panel may be a touch area for a touch operation. Further, the touch area related to the decatouch display may have a size twice or more as compared with the normal touch area. Further, a plurality of decatouch displays may be displayed at the same time, or only one display may be displayed.

The pachinko machine 100,
The second region (for example, a touch region) is a region in which one second region is provided corresponding to one first display (for example, touch display),
The second region (for example, a touch region) is a region in which one second region is provided corresponding to one second display (for example, decatouch display),
When the third condition is satisfied, the first display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display that is the third number,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The third number is two or more;
The second area corresponding to one second display is an area including at least the second area corresponding to a plurality of the first displays (for example, the entire area of the touch panel 252a is a touch area (see FIG. 33). (D)))
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the touch area corresponding to the decatouch display may use two or more touch areas corresponding to a plurality of touch displays.

(4-10) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display (for example, touch display) is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second area (for example, a touch area) is an area in which the touch operation is valid over a second period (for example, a touch operation reception valid period),
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the touch area is defined during the touch operation reception valid period.

The pachinko machine 100,
Production means (for example, an image display area of the touch panel display device 252) capable of at least producing the production,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least the effect when the touch operation is performed on the third region in the second period;
The effect means is means for not executing at least the effect when the touch operation is performed on the fourth area in the second period.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the effect can be executed by a touch operation on the third region.

  Conventionally, there has been a technique for increasing the interest of the game through display effects by the display means, but there is still room for improvement in the display means. According to the above embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the display means.

(4-11) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved by using the resistive touch-sensitive touch panel or the capacitive touch panel to produce the game using the touch feeling of the player. An infrared touch panel or the like may be used.

The pachinko machine 100,
It further comprises display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”) different from the display means,
At least one of the display unit and the second display unit is a unit capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are a plurality of display means, one of which can execute a decorative symbol variation display. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may be performed by simultaneous variation or the like on both display means. Moreover, the structure by which the display means on which a decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display is performed in relation to a game state or effect mode may be decided.

The pachinko machine 100,
One of the display means and the second display means is a means provided on the frame side,
The other display means of the display means and the second display means is a means provided on the game board side.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, one display means is provided on the frame side and the other display means is provided on the game board side. Both display means may be provided on the frame side or may be provided on the game board side.

(5-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
Display means (for example, a touch panel display 252);
Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a first production (for example, a prefetch notice notification production of a hold icon);
A game machine equipped with
The display means includes at least a touch panel (for example, a touch panel 252a),
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as a “touch operation”) is received,
The effect means is a means different from the display means (for example, see FIG. 46 (h))
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, an effect corresponding to the operation of the touch panel is executed by means different from the touch panel (including the display means), so that a game stand having characteristics of the effect means is provided. it can. Despite the presence of the display means related to the touch panel, unexpectedness may be imparted by performing in a place different from the part operated by the player with the tactile sensation. Note that the display means and the rendering means are the same, and the display means may perform the rendering.

(5-2) The pachinko machine 100,
The effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is a means capable of executing at least a second effect (for example, a prefetch notice notification effect for a hold icon (FIG. 46)),
The touch panel is provided with a plurality of areas in which the touch operation is effective (hereinafter referred to as “touch areas”),
At least one of the plurality of touch areas is a first touch area (for example, a touch area corresponding to one hold icon),
At least one of the plurality of touch areas is a second touch area (for example, a touch area corresponding to another hold icon),
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in a first effect area (for example, a display area of one hold icon),
The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the second effect area (for example, the display area of other hold icons),
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when a touch operation of the first touch area is performed,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least when a touch operation on the second touch area is performed,
The second touch area is an area at least partially different from the first touch area,
The second effect area is an area that is at least partially different from the first effect area (for example, FIGS. 46B to 46E).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, when a touch operation is performed in the first touch area, the first effect is executed in the first effect area, and the touch operation is performed in the second touch area. In such a case, since the second effect is executed in the second effect region, the association between the touch operation and the effect may be easily understood by associating the touch region with the effect region. The first effect may be a configuration in which an effect is performed in the second effect region or the third effect region in response to a touch operation in the first touch area. Further, the second effect may be a configuration in which an effect is performed in the first effect region or the third effect region in response to the touch operation in the second touch area. Further, there is a third effect, and the third effect may be configured such that an effect is performed in the first effect region or the second effect region with respect to the touch operation of the third touch region. . The present invention can also be applied when there is an n-th effect (n is an integer of 3 or more).

(5-3) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means (for example, the touch panel display device 252) is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of displays.
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a touch display of an image imitating a finger in the area 21 (FIG. 46B)),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a touch display of an image imitating a finger in the area 22 (FIG. 46B)),
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in a first display area (for example, a display area overlapping the area 21),
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in a second display area (for example, a display area overlapping the area 22).
The first display area is an area related at least to the first touch area;
The second display area is an area related at least to the second touch area;
The second display area is an area at least partially different from the first display area.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, when a touch operation is performed in the first touch area, the first display is executed in the first display area, and the touch operation is performed in the second touch area. In such a case, since the second display is executed in the second display area, the relationship between the touch operation and the display may be easily understood by associating the touch area with the display area. The first display may be configured such that display is performed in the second display area or the third display area in response to the touch operation in the first touch area. Further, the second display may be configured such that display is performed in the third display area which is the first display area in response to the touch operation in the second touch area. Further, there is a third display, and the third display may be configured such that display is performed in the first display area or the second display area in response to a touch operation in the third touch area. . The present invention is also applicable when there is an nth display (n is an integer of 3 or more).

(5-4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in a first period (for example, a period including the start of the first display),
The second display is a display that can be started at least in a second period (for example, a period including the start of the second display),
The first touch area is an area in which an operation is at least effective over a third period (for example, a touch operation reception valid period),
The second touch area is an area where an operation is at least effective over the third period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period.
It is characterized by that.

  In the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the first display and the second display may appear corresponding to different effective periods.

(5-5) The pachinko machine 100,
The rendering means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) operates the first touch area (for example, the area 21 (FIG. 46 (b))) during the third period (for example, the touch operation acceptance effective period). If it is, it is a means capable of executing at least the first effect (for example, a pre-read notice notification effect of one hold icon),
When the first touch area is operated in the third period, the effect unit is a unit that does not execute at least the second effect (for example, a pre-read notice notification effect of another hold icon),
When the second touch area (for example, the area 22 (FIG. 46 (b))) is operated during the third period, the rendering means performs the second rendering (for example, other hold icons). Is a means capable of executing at least a pre-read notice notification effect),
The effect means is means for not executing at least the first effect when the second touch area is operated in the third period.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the effect means can execute only one effect of the first effect and the second effect. By adopting a configuration in which only one effect is performed, the interest of the touch operation can be improved, and the effect region can be changed, so that variations can be produced.
The effect means may execute the second effect when the first touch area is operated, and executes the first effect when the second touch area is operated. It may be possible. For example, there is a case where the content of the effect to be performed can be made interested by using it for breaking the law. The present invention is also applicable when the nth (n is an integer of 3 or more) touch area is operated and there is an nth effect.

The pachinko machine 100,
The first touch operation is an operation in which the first touch operation (in the third period) is at least invalidated when the first condition is satisfied,
The second touch operation is an operation in which the second touch operation (in the third period) is at least invalidated when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the second touch operation is performed rather than the first touch operation in the third period,
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first touch operation is performed rather than the second touch operation in the third period (for example, FIG. 46).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, when one touch operation is accepted, the other touch operation is not accepted even during the third period.

(5-6) The pachinko machine 100,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least the first production when the first touch area is operated in the third period;
The effect means is means capable of executing at least the second effect when the second touch area is operated in the third period (for example, FIGS. 46B to 46D). ,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, a plurality of touch operations may be promoted and a plurality of effects may be executed by enabling a plurality of touch operations in the third period.

(5-7) The pachinko machine 100,
When the first touch area is operated during the third period, the effect means is means capable of at least starting the first effect during the third period;
The effect means is means capable of at least starting the second effect when the second touch area is operated while the first effect is being performed in the third period. For example, FIG.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration, the second touch operation can be accepted during the execution of the first effect, and a plurality of effects can be executed during the third period. May be performed continuously.
Further, when a plurality of touch operations are performed at the same time, only one predetermined effect may be executed, or a plurality of effects may be performed in an order corresponding to a predetermined priority order. It may be. Alternatively, a plurality of effects may be performed simultaneously. Or you may make it determine selection and order of production contents by random number lottery.

(5-8) The pachinko machine 100,
Decorative symbol display means capable of executing at least decorative symbol variation display is provided,
The effect means is means including at least the decorative symbol display means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the effect means includes the decorative symbol display means, so that the effect related to the operation on another touch panel can be executed by the decorative symbol display means, and the effect related to the success / failure is achieved. In some cases, the player can be noticed.
The production means may not include the decorative symbol display means. For example, only the light emission of the lamp or the output of sound may be used. Moreover, the structure which does not include a decoration symbol display means only for some effects may be sufficient.

(5-9) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved by using the resistive touch-sensitive touch panel or the capacitive touch panel to produce the game using the touch feeling of the player. An infrared touch panel or the like may be used.

The pachinko machine 100,
It further comprises display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”) different from the display means,
At least one of the display unit and the second display unit is a unit capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display.
It is characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the display that hides the touch area in the embodiment corresponds to the second display. Accordingly, the fourth symbol, the hold icon, and the like described in the above embodiment correspond to the second display when the touch area is hidden.

  Conventionally, an attempt has been made to improve the interest of the game by the production by the production means, but there is still room for improvement in the production means. According to the above embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the production means.

The pachinko machine 100,
It further comprises display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”) different from the display means,
At least one of the display unit and the second display unit is a unit capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there are a plurality of display means, one of which can execute a decorative symbol variation display. Note that the decorative symbol variation display may be performed by simultaneous variation or the like on both display means. Moreover, the structure by which the display means on which a decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display is performed in relation to a game state or effect mode may be decided.

The pachinko machine 100,
One of the display means and the second display means is a means provided on the frame side,
The other display means of the display means and the second display means is a means provided on the game board side.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, one display means is provided on the frame side and the other display means is provided on the game board side. Both display means may be provided on the frame side or may be provided on the game board side.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
For example, in the configuration described in the above embodiment, the configuration described as “at least ... possible” can be interpreted by replacing the part with “only possible ...”. For example, the display means described as “at least the first display can be displayed” can be interpreted by replacing the display means “display only the first display”. In addition, the configuration described as “display related at least to the touch area” can be interpreted as “display related only to the touch area”.

  In addition, the configuration described as “... possible” in the above-described embodiment is interpreted by replacing the part with “... may not be included, or necessarily includes ...” You can also For example, the configuration described as “display that can be started at least in the first period” is replaced with “display that may or may not start in the first period”. Can also be interpreted.

  In the above embodiment, what is called a lamp is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube. In addition, the touch panel display device 252 of the present embodiment is an example of a combination of a display device and a touch panel 252a as a position input device. The device 252 may be substituted. Further, the touch panel 252a may be provided on the game board 200 or may be provided on the frame 106.

  The touch panel 252a or the touch panel display device 252 may be configured to vibrate when a position input operation is received. Further, as a configuration for notifying that a position input operation has been performed, other devices such as light emission, sound, vibration of a handle, wind, and the like can be used in addition to display effects. With such a configuration, it may be possible to effectively notify that the player has operated the touch panel 252a as compared with the proximity sensor. In some cases, the user can feel a sense of achievement of the operation as compared with the proximity sensor type device.

  In the present embodiment, only a configuration in which one effect is selected by the touch panel 252a or the touch panel type display device 252 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effects are simultaneously performed using the touch panel 252a or the touch panel type display device 252. It may be a configuration. For example, a plurality of effects in each embodiment may be combined. Further, not only the performance but also a combination of an operation related to the system setting of the game and the performance. For example, the configuration may be such that the touch panel type display device 252 described in the embodiment is rendered while the volume selection is performed by the touch panel 252a or the touch panel type display device 252.

  The embodiment described above relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine. In the conventional game stand, various displays are performed by the display means. However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display. An object of the above-described embodiment is to provide a game machine having a display characteristic. According to the above embodiment, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

  Moreover, in the conventional game machine, there was a game machine equipped with an operation means. However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement with respect to the operation means. An object of the above-described embodiment is to provide a game machine having a feature in operation means. According to the above embodiment, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the operation means.

  In addition, the embodiment described above and the embodiments described below can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine. The enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above and the following detailed description, in particular, the items described in the embodiments and the modifications can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The game table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 54, “a plurality of types of reels 1002 which are rotated and driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels”. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 displays a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins. And the stopped displayed After moving, are also suitable for the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 55 (a). “Insert bills into bill insertion slot 2002, execute lottery based on bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display lottery result on lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

The game table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix A1)
A game machine having display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The display means includes at least a touch panel,
The first display is a display at least related to an area (hereinafter referred to as “touch area”) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is effective.
The second display is a display not related at least to the touch area;
The display means is means capable of hiding at least a part of the first display and displaying at least the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A1,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The touch area is an area where reception of the touch operation is valid at least over a third period;
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A3)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A2,
The first period is a period including at least a period before the start of the third period (hereinafter referred to as “fourth period”),
The second period is a period including at least the fourth period,
The second display is a display at least related to the first display;
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second display by hiding at least a part of the first display in the fourth period,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display without being hidden by the second display in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A4)
A game machine according to appendix A2 or A3,
The display means can display the second display by hiding at least a part of the first display even when the second display is displayed before the first display. Means,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A2 to A4,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third indication is an indication at least related to the third period;
The third display is a display that can be started at least in the fifth period;
The fifth period is a period including at least a part of the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A5,
The second display is a notice,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A5,
The second indication is an indication associated at least with an error;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix A9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A8,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a part of the second display in a state where the second display is preferentially displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
The display means is means capable of erasing and displaying at least a part of the first display in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B1)
Display means capable of executing at least display;
Control means capable of controlling at least a plurality of types of control;
A game machine equipped with
The display means includes at least a touch panel,
At least one of the plurality of types of control is a first control,
At least one of the plurality of types of control is a second control,
The first control is a control for enabling at least reception of an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”);
The second control is a control that at least disables acceptance of the touch operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B1,
The first control is a control that can be executed at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The second control is a control that can be executed at least when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the touch operation is simultaneously performed by the first number,
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the touch operation is simultaneously performed by the second number,
The second number is a number that is at least greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B3)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B2,
The first number is two;
The second number is three or more;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B4)
A gaming table according to appendix B2 or B3,
Providing production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display related to the effective area of the touch operation,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in the first region;
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in the second region,
The second region is a region different from the first region,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect of selecting at least one of the first display and the second display by the touch operation,
The second effect is an effect corresponding to at least the display selected by the touch operation,
The production means can execute any one of the first production and the second production when both the first area and the second area are touch-operated simultaneously. Means,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B2 to B4,
At least one of the plurality of types of control is a third control,
The third control is a control that can be executed at least when the third condition is satisfied,
The third control is a control that at least enables acceptance of the touch operation,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied during execution of the second control due to the establishment of the second condition,
The third condition is a condition that can be established when the number of touch operations performed simultaneously decreases from the second number.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B6)
A gaming table according to appendix B2 or B3,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display related to the effective area of the touch operation,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in the first region;
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in the second region,
The second region is a region different from the first region,
The first control is a control that can be executed at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The second control is a control that can be executed at least when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied by performing the touch operation only on the first region,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the touch operation is simultaneously performed by the first number,
The second condition is a condition that may be established by performing the touch operation on both the first region and the second region,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied by performing the touch operation by the third number at the same time,
The third number is a number that is at least the first number or more.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B7)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix B6,
Providing production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect of selecting at least one of the first display and the second display by the touch operation,
The second effect is an effect corresponding to at least the display selected by the touch operation,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least the second production corresponding to the first display when the first condition is satisfied;
The production means is means for not executing at least the second production corresponding to the first display when the second condition is satisfied;
The production means is means for not executing at least the second production corresponding to the second display when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B8)
A gaming table according to appendix B2 or B3,
Providing production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display related to the effective area of the touch operation,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in the first region;
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in the second region,
The second region is a region different from the first region,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
The first effect is an effect that causes at least the display of the first display and the second display to be selected by the touch operation,
The second effect is an effect corresponding to at least the first display by the touch operation,
The third effect is an effect corresponding to at least the second display by the touch operation,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least the second effect and the third effect in an order corresponding to the order of the touch operations,
The production means is a means capable of starting the third production after starting the second production when the first condition is satisfied,
The effect means is means for not starting the second effect when the second condition is satisfied,
The production means is means for not starting the third production when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B4 or B6 to B8,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the acceptance of the touch operation is valid (hereinafter referred to as “third period”);
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix B10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices B1 to B9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C1)
A first operating means provided at least at a position operable by the player;
Production means capable of executing at least the first production;
A game machine equipped with
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in connection with the first operation of the player,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in connection with the player's second operation,
The second operation is an operation different from the first operation,
The first operation means is a touch panel,
The first operation is an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “first touch operation”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix C2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C1,
The second operation is a touch operation on the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “second touch operation”),
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in relation to the first touch operation,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in relation to the second touch operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix C3)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C2,
The touch panel is at least capable of accepting the touch operation in a first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the first touch operation is performed in the first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the second touch operation is performed in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix C4)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C1,
Comprising a second operating means;
The second operating means is means provided at least at a position where the player can operate,
The second operation means is an operation means different from the first operation means,
The second operation is an operation of the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix C5)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C4,
The touch panel is at least capable of accepting the touch operation in a first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the first number of times of the first touch operation is performed in the first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the second operation is performed a second number of times in the first period,
The second number of times is the same number of times as the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix C6)
A gaming table according to appendix C4 or C5,
First control means capable of controlling at least the touch panel;
A second control means capable of controlling at least the second operation means;
The first control means is a means capable of at least control for accepting a plurality of touch operations performed simultaneously,
The second control means is a means capable of at least control for receiving the second operation once.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix C7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C1 to C6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation that is accepted at least when directly touching the screen of the touch panel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D1)
A game machine comprising first display means capable of executing at least a first display,
The first display means is means including at least a touch panel,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in the first region;
The first display is a display related at least to an area (hereinafter referred to as “second area”) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is effective,
The second region is a region that is at least partially different from the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix D1,
The second region is a region including at least a region overlapping with the first region (hereinafter referred to as “third region”),
The second region is a region including at least a region that does not overlap at least partly with the first region (hereinafter referred to as “fourth region”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D3)
A game machine according to appendix D2,
The fourth region is a region narrower than the third region,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D3,
The second region is a region narrower than the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D4,
The second region is a region in which all the second regions are included in the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D3,
The second region is a region that is at least wider than the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D7)
A gaming machine according to appendix D2 or D3,
The second region is a region in which one second region is provided corresponding to one first display,
The first display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display which is the first number when the first condition is satisfied,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display of the second number when the second condition is satisfied,
The second number is a number different from the first number;
The one fourth region when the first condition is satisfied is a region different from the one fourth region when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D8)
A gaming machine according to appendix D7,
The second number is at least greater than the first number;
The one fourth area when the first condition is satisfied is an area larger than the one fourth area when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D8,
The first display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display,
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in the fifth area,
The fifth region is a region that is at least wider than the first region;
The second display is a display associated at least with the second region;
The second region is a region that is wider when the second display is performed than when the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D9,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second area is an area where the touch operation is effective over a second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E1)
Display means;
Production means capable of executing at least the first production;
A game machine equipped with
The display means includes at least a touch panel,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as a “touch operation”) is received,
The presentation means is a means different from the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix E2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E1,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a second effect,
The touch panel is provided with a plurality of areas in which the touch operation is effective (hereinafter referred to as “touch areas”),
At least one of the plurality of touch areas is a first touch area,
At least one of the plurality of touch areas is a second touch area,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the first effect region,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the second effect area,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least when a touch operation of the first touch area is performed,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed at least when a touch operation on the second touch area is performed,
The second touch area is an area at least partially different from the first touch area,
The second effect area is an area that is at least partially different from the first effect area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix E3)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E2,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of displays,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in the first display area;
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in the second display area,
The first display area is an area related at least to the first touch area;
The second display area is an area related at least to the second touch area;
The second display area is an area at least partially different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix E4)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E3,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period,
The first touch area is an area where an operation is at least effective over a third period;
The second touch area is an area where an operation is at least effective over the third period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period;
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix E5)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix E4,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least the first production when the first touch area is operated in the third period;
When the first touch area is operated in the third period, the effect means is a means that does not execute at least the second effect,
When the second touch area is operated in the third period, the effect means is a means capable of executing at least the second effect,
The effect means is means for not executing at least the first effect when the second touch area is operated in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix E6)
A game stand according to appendix E4 or E5,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least the first production when the first touch area is operated in the third period;
The production means is a means capable of executing at least the second production when the second touch area is operated in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix E7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E4 to E6,
When the first touch area is operated during the third period, the effect means is means capable of at least starting the first effect during the third period;
The production means is means capable of at least starting the second production when the second touch area is operated while the first production is being performed in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix E8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E7,
Decorative symbol display means capable of executing at least decorative symbol variation display is provided,
The effect means is means including at least the decorative symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix E9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices E1 to E8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. Further, an effect or the like executed by the second decorative symbol display device 209 (described later) may be executed by the touch panel display device 252 in the first embodiment. In addition to the touch panel display device 252, a display device may be provided. The pachinko machine 100 may include three or more display devices. The pachinko machine 100 may include a plurality of touch panel display devices. The pachinko machine 100 may use a touch panel display device as the second decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the pachinko machine 100 may arrange the second decorative symbol display device at a position where the player can operate (for example, the front frame door 106, the door with ball storage tray 108, etc.). Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 56 to 93 are used only in the description of the second embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment. In the explanation of Fig. 56, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function by the lock unit 105, and is configured in a frame shape. Thus, the door member has an opening 116 inside thereof. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, a front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Operation means (for example, setting of time and setting of production contents) by the operation of the sbutton lamp 138 and a setting person (for example, an operator of a manufacturing factory of the pachinko machine 100, a game shop clerk, a player) Not shown (for example, a confirmation button and a cross key are provided), a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a player for the card unit A return operation button 142 for instructing the return of the balance of the player, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 57 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 56 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error canceling switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with 168, launch board constituting a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 74, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 58 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from the top of the effect device 206 to the right, and a game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper portion of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. In other words, the game area 124 has a first flow path on the left side across the effect device 206 as a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down, and a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down. And a second flow path on the right side. Hereinafter, hitting a game ball on the first downstream path may be referred to as “left-handed”, and hitting a game ball on the second downstream path may be referred to as “right-handed”.

  The effect device 206 is provided with a first decorative symbol display device 208 disposed substantially at the center, and an effect movable body 224 provided with a second decorative symbol display device 209 with the upper part thereof slightly to the right as an initial position (origin return position). Has been established. The size of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the size of the second decorative symbol display device 209.

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the sizes of the first display unit and the second display unit are different, there are cases where more various effects can be performed.
Also, on the lower right side outside the game area 124, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). To do. The first decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area. 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, and 208 d can be freely changed within, for example, a horizontally-long rectangular display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it is comprised so that various effects and various game information can be displayed. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector are adopted. May be.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 is provided.

  The general winning opening 226 is arranged on the left side of the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (the general winning opening 226). ), The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the general drawing starting port 228. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Since the normal start port 228 and the special view 2 start port 232 below the normal start port 228 are in the second downstream flow path on the right side with the effect device 206 in between, the first start flow path on the left side with the effect device 206 in between. The game ball does not pass through the normal start port 228 or enter the special view start port 232. In addition, since the special figure 1 starting port 230 is in the first flow path on the left side with the effect device 206 in between, the game ball that has advanced to the second flow path on the right side with the effect device 206 in between is shown in FIG. There is no entry into the starting port 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the special figure 1 starting opening 230 of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  In FIG. 1, a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in a substantially straight line at an interval narrower than the diameter of the game ball in the region from the starting port 230 to the left end of the variable winning port 234. For this reason, at the time of a big hit, a right hit (how to hit a game ball through the space between the upper portion of the production device 206 and the outer rail 202 to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200) and a game in the second downflow path If the ball does not fly, the configuration is such that the game ball does not win the variable winning opening 234.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) Wins the Out Port 240 without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal start port 228 To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the production device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a region where the game ball can roll, and a second decorative symbol display device 209 is provided in the region where the game ball cannot roll. A movable body 224 is provided. A first decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball passes to the special opening 1 230 in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  The effect movable body 224 has a configuration in which a second decorative symbol display device 209 is arranged inside a horizontally long rectangular frame-shaped portion. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device. In the initial state, the effect movable body 224 has its frame-like portion stopped at the initial position (origin position) above the outside of the first decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG.

  The effect movable body 224 is a front plane of the first decorative symbol display device 208 that is substantially parallel to the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as a display screen front plane) by a drive system (not shown). ) Can be moved two-dimensionally. The drive system of the effect movable body 224 can take various configurations. For example, one end of two connecting rods connected so as to be rotatable is fixed to a predetermined position of the rendering device 206 outside the first decorative symbol display device 208 so as to be rotatable in a two-dimensional manner in the front plane of the display screen. A link mechanism that can be moved to is configured. The effect movable body 224 is fixed to the other end of the two connected connecting rods so as to be rotatable in the plane. A motor for driving the connecting rod is arranged at one end of the two connecting rods and the connecting node. Thereby, the effect movable body 224 can be moved two-dimensionally in the display screen front plane. Further, a motor for rotating the effect movable body is arranged at the other end of the two connecting rods. Thereby, the effect movable body 224 can be rotated in the display screen front plane.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end portions thereof slightly overlap the outer end portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can display the first decorative symbol display device 208. All are visible. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the first decorative symbol display device 208 on the rear side may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely closed (shielded), and the first decorative symbol display device 208 on the rear side. May not be visible at all.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 retention lamp 220, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 222) And the like, and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Also, a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and driving of the shielding device. A drive circuit 432 for performing control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and a shielding device sensor 430 and a chance button detection unit 724. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the ROM 406 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effects data, and image data stored in the ROM 406 based on signals from the CPU 404, and the VRAM 436 Use the work area to generate a display image and Connected VDP434 for displaying an image on the symbol display unit 208 and the second decoration symbol display device 209 and (video display processor), a. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the VDP 434 and the VRAM 436 may be provided separately for the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209, respectively.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the chance button drive unit 708, and the current position of the effect movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 to be detected, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table A game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 The circuit 520 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Also, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the types of types of special drawings and general drawings that are stopped and displayed by the special map display device 212, the special map display device 214, and the general map display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 60 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of FIG. FIG. 60 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 60 (a), six types of special figures from "Special figure A" to "Special figure F" are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 60 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is a difference in the special figure variable game after the big hit game, and the probability of winning the big hit is high (probable big hit) or low (normally big hit). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, the state shifts to the electric support state (referred to as a short time state together with the variable time reduction state of the special figure variable game). Although the time-short state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time-short state is referred to as a normal high-probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time-short state is referred to as a normal-low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot game is ended, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a jackpot The game state after the game ends is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state or short time state). Note that the timing when the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state are reached is the start of the first special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called sudden probability change. Sudden probability change will be in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game, like the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called latent probability variation. The latent probability change becomes a special figure high probability low probability state (latency probability variation state) after the big hit game ends.

  “Special figure E” is a small hit symbol, and after the small hit game, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (may be referred to as a normal state or a normal game state). In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as the “special drawing C” and “special drawing D” (twice in the case of this embodiment). Further, the “special drawing F” is a detachment symbol, which is a symbol that does not release an attacker and has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  In FIG. 60 (b), four types of special figures from “special figure a” to “special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 2. In FIG. 60 (b), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure a” is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol. In both “special chart a” and “special chart b”, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special chart high probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special drawing a” and “special drawing b” are symbols with which the degree of advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is entered. The “special drawing d” is an off symbol, the attacker does not release, and the symbol has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  FIG. 60C shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 The first symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208 are provided on the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the starting port 232. The display is switched in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “decorative display of decorative design”.

  When notifying 15R big hit, 15R special big hit, 16R special big hit, 8R big hit, or 8R special big hit, a combination of symbols (for example, “decorative 1- (Decoration 1 -decoration 1 "," decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot or the 16R special jackpot is explicitly notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying the latent probability change or the small hit, the combination of symbols in which three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed. When notifying the probability change, the symbol combination ("decoration 1-ornament 3-ornament 5") in which three ornament symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol K and the special symbol h, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 60C is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined. However, the player may not know which combination of decorative symbols is which jackpot.

  FIG. 60D shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 60 (d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value for use in a lottery for determining a stop symbol in a special figure variable game Update random number counter. In addition, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a general winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number used for determining whether or not the normal game is changed is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determining random value counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a regular winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two initial value generation random number counters are updated respectively. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 including the above-described inner frame opening sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to detect the detection signal. The presence / absence is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 59, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the normal figure starting opening 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S205, the door provided in the RAM 308 is monitored for the presence or absence of a door opening detection signal output from the dispensing control unit 600 that has received the detection result from the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects opening of the front frame door 106. Store in the detection signal state storage area.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then a special figure determination random number value used in the main control unit 300 is generated. The special figure determining random value counter and the common figure winning random value counter for generating the common winning random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure timer number determining random value counter for generating the special figure timer number determining random value for determining the symbol changing time in the special figure changing game or its initial value is updated. In addition, the value of the random number value counter for determining the general-purpose timer number for generating the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the general-purpose variable game or its initial value is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the value of the number-of-a-number-ball storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole is stored in the RAM 308. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and special figure determination random values in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") is special. 1 is stored in the same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 232 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and random number for determination of special figure in the special figure 2 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 start information") 2 is stored as many as the number of the special figure 2 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired from the general figure winning random number counter as the normal winning random number Store in the usual random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 60 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 60 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332) A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure off flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area A hit determination to be determined is performed, and in the case of winning, a flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number value counter for determining the normal timer number for generating the normal timer number determining random value is obtained as the random number value for determining the normal timer number. Based on the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number, one time for displaying the general-purpose figure on the general-purpose display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as the normal-type variable display time. , It is stored in the usual variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbol related lottery symbols are drawn Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process. The flow of the special figure prefetch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prefetching result storage unit that stores a special figure prefetching result (also referred to as a prior determination result) as a result of executing the special figure prefetching process is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 1 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, there is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 1 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 1 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 1 prefetch result information in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted, the remaining special figure 1 prefetch information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 2 in this example. The RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results of the special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 2 prefetch result information in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 2 prefetching result is deleted, the remaining special figure 2 prefetching information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time. Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), which will be described later, the prefetch result information may be transmitted only in increments, or the prefetch result information for all suspensions may be transmitted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 58 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes flags for a 15R big hit flag, a 16R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, an outlier flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and an ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag. It is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is off and the 16R big hit flag is off When the 8R big hit flag is off, the 2R big hit flag is off, the small hit flag is off, the outlier flag is off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, FIG. Special figure a, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, 8R big hit flag is on, 2R big hit flag is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is off, special figure probability variation flag is on, and Special figure b when the normal probability fluctuation flag is on, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, 8R big hit flag is on, 2R big hit flag is off Is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure c, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off 8R big hit flag is off, 2R big hit flag is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is on, special figure probability variation flag is off, and normal figure probability variation flag is off As shown, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off, and a setting indicating that the special figure 2 is being stopped is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 16R special big hit symbol (special figure a), the 8R special big hit symbol (special figure b), the 8R special big hit symbol (special figure c), and the off symbol (special figure). d) Confirm and display one of the symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1, or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to an opening / closing solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) of the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is also output. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (16 rounds or 8 rounds in the present embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. Here, the short-time state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The control state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric Chu extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state. In addition, a time-short state including a control state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is also shortened is called.

In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.
Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtaining and determining whether or not to make a big hit, determining whether or not to make a big hit using a determination table (not shown), and determining the time from the start of the variable display in FIG. 2 to the stop display Then, determination of a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is performed. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 are not included in the command data. 15R jackpot flag in the case of a symbol variation stop command, including information indicating the flag value, the flag value of the special symbol probability variation flag, and the flag value of each of the common symbol probability variation flags, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process , 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, outlier flag, special figure probability variation flag value, etc., 15R big hit flag (or 15R special big hit) start command Value, number of big hit rounds, special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, etc. In the case of the 16R special jackpot start command, the value of the 16R jackpot flag, the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the short time flag, etc. In the case of a 2R jackpot start command, including the flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number value, etc., in the case of a 2R jackpot start command, the value of the 2R jackpot flag, the number of jackpot rounds, the special figure probability variation flag value, the value of the hourly flag In the case of a jackpot end command, the special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number value, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, the special figure probability In the case of a big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  The prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information stored in the prefetch result storage unit together with the types of special figures 1 and 2 in the command data. The prefetch result information in the prefetch result information command may be only an increment or may include prefetch result information for all suspensions. In the present embodiment, the prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information for all suspensions.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag value, special figure probability variation flag value, special figure 1 stored in the RAM 308 as command data are also shown. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, and the like are set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Set. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224 in FIG. 62) will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the flow of special figure prefetch processing. First, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased (step S251). It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 starting information has increased, the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetching stored in the special figure 2 prefetching number storage area. Compare with the number. The main control unit 300 compares the special figure 2 hold number with the special figure 2 prefetch number, and if the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, the special figure 2 start information is increased. If it is determined that the special figure 2 holding number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number, it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has not increased.

  When it is determined that the special figure 2 start information is increasing, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random number set related to the increased special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information are prefetched. Then, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229), using the pre-read random number for hit determination and the big hit determination table (not shown), the determination of whether or not the hit / failure is a big hit or small Pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S252). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to predetermine a symbol (stopped symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 2 ( Step S252). These pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and the special figure determination table (see FIGS. 66 and 67) used at the time of the success / failure determination. A special determination table is prepared for the prefetching process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-determined special figure 2 variable game stop symbol information as a special figure 2 prefetching result in the preemptive space of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. Store (step S253), and proceed to step S254. If the main control unit 300 determines in step S251 that the special figure 2 start information has not increased, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S254 without executing steps S252 and S253.

  Next, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased (step S254). The determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 starting information has increased is made, for example, in the same manner as in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is performed by comparing the number of special figure 1 look-ahead stored in FIG. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is terminated.

  In step S <b> 255, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not non-electric support is being performed as an undetermined information setting condition. As the undetermined information setting condition, when the pre-reading result notification time is included in the electric support period, it is included in the jackpot game, or the case where the jackpot symbol is pre-determined for the suspension related to the special figure 1 etc. Can be mentioned.

  If the main control unit 300 determines that the undetermined information setting condition is not established, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values related to the increased special figure 1 start information from the special figure 1 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 1 start information are prefetched. Then, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), whether or not the success / failure determination becomes a big hit by using the pre-read random number for hit determination and a big hit determination table (not shown). A pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S256). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to pre-determine a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 1 ( Step S256). These pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and the special figure determination table (see FIGS. 66 and 67) used at the time of the success / failure determination. A special determination table is prepared for the prefetching process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 1 variable game stop symbol as the special figure 1 prefetching result in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. (Step S257), the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S255 that the undetermined information setting condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 does not prefetch the increased special figure 1 start information, and prefetches the "undecided" information for special figure 1 The result is stored in the result storage unit, and the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  FIG. 64 illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. FIG. 64A illustrates a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, and FIG. 64B illustrates the prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. This is an example of the state being performed. FIG. 64C illustrates information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit in the electric support.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas "prefetch results 1" to the number of special figure variable games that can be held. It has “look-ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 1 start information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas "prefetch result 1" to the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. It has “look ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 2 start information storage area.

In FIG. 64A, “prefetch result 1” indicates that the stop symbol “special drawing F” is stored as the prefetch result 1. Similarly, the stop symbol “special diagram F” is stored in “prefetch result 2”, the stop symbol “special diagram A” is stored in “prefetch result 3”, and the stop symbol “special” is stored in “prefetch result 4”. FIG. F ”is stored.
In FIG. 64B, the stop symbol “special drawing d” is stored in “prefetch result 1”, and the state in which stop symbol information is not stored in “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4” is illustrated. Has been. In FIG. 66, a state in which information such as a stop symbol is not stored is expressed as “none”.
In FIG. 64C, “not-read information” is stored in “prefetch result 1” instead of the stop symbol. When undetermined information is stored, it is expressed as “undetermined information”. In “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4”, “none” in which information such as stop symbols is not stored is stored.

  Next, the special figure 1 related lottery process in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes, for example, a special drawing 1 related lottery process based on the flow shown in FIG. The special figure 1 related lottery process is executed, for example, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controls the ROM 306, the RAM 308, and the like.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure 1 related lottery process. As shown in FIG. 65, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or the special electric accessory is operating, that is, whether or not the special figure variable game or the winning game is in progress (step S301). . For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure variable game or the winning game is in progress, the main control unit 300 ends the special figure 1 related lottery process without executing steps S303 to S321 to be described later, and during the special figure variable game or the winning game. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S303.

  In step S303 subsequent to step S301, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball, that is, whether or not a special figure 1 random number set is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 random value pair is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S305, and the special figure 1 random value set stores the special figure 1 holding number storage area. If it is determined that it is not stored in the area, the special drawing 1 related lottery process is terminated without executing steps S305 to S321 described later.

  In step S305, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 probability variation flag is on. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 probability variation flag is on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S307, and if it determines that the flag is not on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S309.

  In step S307, the success / failure determination is executed by using the high / failure determination high probability table [Special Figure 1] for special figure 1 which will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 (b). Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a special figure 2 priority change machine that changes in preference to the special figure 2 over the special figure 1, for example, the main control unit 300 has a special figure 2 reservation number storage area. The special figure 2 random value set stored first is read, and if the special figure 2 random value set is not stored, the special figure 1 random value stored first in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. The pair is read out, and a determination is made with reference to the high probability table for determination as shown in FIG. 66 (b) [Special Figure 1], and the process proceeds to step S311.

  On the other hand, in step S309, the success / failure determination is executed by using the low / probability determination probability table [Special Figure 1] for special figure 1 described later using FIG. 66 (a). The processing in step S309 is the same as that in step S307 except that the table to be referred to in the determination of success / failure is the low probability table for success / failure determination [see FIG. 1] shown in FIG. . When the process of step S309 ends, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S311.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S319. If the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S319, a big hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 applies the special figure determination table for special figure 1 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 1], a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321.

  On the other hand, in step S313, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S317, and if the determination result is not a small hit, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S315.

  In step S317, a small hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 67 (a) for the special figure determination random value in the special figure 1 random value set used for the determination. Then, the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321. In the present embodiment, since there is one small hit symbol, it is determined as “Special E” with a probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, in step S315, a missing symbol is determined. With reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 67A, the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to Step S321. In the present embodiment, since there is only one off symbol, it is determined as “special drawing F” with a probability of 100%.

  In step S321 following step S315, S317, or S319, the variation time is determined according to the symbol. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 68 to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. Since the special drawing 2 related lottery process is the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. The tables shown in FIGS. 66 and 67 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 66 (a) to 66 (d) are used in the success / failure determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2 in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 related lottery process (steps S 229 and S 231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. An example of the success / failure determination table is shown. FIG. 66A shows a table for special figure 1 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 66B shows a table for special figure 1 used during the special figure high probability. FIG. 66 (c) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 66 (d) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability.

  66 (a) and 66 (b), the success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1] includes “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Number Range” in the second column, “Random Number Range” in the third column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 66A indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, a numerical value 10220 to 10383, and a numerical value 10384 to 65535. In the third column, the “results of success / failure determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10384 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. The “small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10220 to 10383.

  “High probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 66 (b) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, a numerical value 12186 to 12349, and a numerical value 12350 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of determination” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 12350 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. , “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 12186 to 12349.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Figure 1]. For example, if the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads out the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special figure low probability state, the low / probability determination low probability table [Special figure 1] shown in FIG. 66 (a) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 66 (c) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 66 (d) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability. 66 (c) and 66 (d), the success / failure determination table [Special Figure 2] includes “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Range” in the second column, “Random Number Range” in the third column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 66C indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, and a numerical value 10220 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10220 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 66 (d) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10,000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, and a numerical value 12186 to 65535. In the third column, “Win / Fail determination result” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to “10000”, “loss” corresponding to the values 12186 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Special Figure 2]. For example, when the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is the special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special figure low probability state, the low / probability determination low probability table [Special figure 2] shown in FIG. 66 (c) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit probability of special figure 2 is set to 0 as one example in which the small hit probability of special figure 2 is lower than the small hit probability of special figure 1. Of course, a special random number range may be set in the special figure 2 as a small hit. Further, the small hit probability of special figure 2 may be the same as or higher than special figure 1.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 1 variable game is selected with the first probability, and the special figure 2 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 2 variable game is obtained by the first probability. Small hits are selected with a lower second probability.

  The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. For this reason, during the electric support, a penalty is given to the player who does not play the game intended by the pachinko machine developer so that the hit is increased, and the game is intended to be played by the pachinko machine developer. There are cases where it is possible. For example, in the case where the special figure 2 starting port is arranged in the right area of the game board 200, the developer intends that the player makes a right turn in the electric support state. In this case, if the player does not make a right strike and makes a left strike different from the intention of the developer, if the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player thinks that it is more advantageous to hit the right. There is a case that can be made. Further, since the small hit probability of the special figure 2 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is low, the small hit in the electric support is often the special figure 1 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by changing the production that can be changed when a predetermined change condition is established, the player is indirectly notified that the special figure 2 starting port 232 has not entered too much, thereby suppressing gambling. May be possible.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by reducing the small hits that are disadvantageous in terms of performance in the special figure 2 variable game, it is possible to highlight that the special figure 2 variable game is more advantageous than the special figure 1 variable game and to improve the interest of the game. There is a case.

  FIG. 67 shows a special figure determination table. FIG. 67A shows a special figure determination table [special figure 1] for special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 67B shows a special figure determination table for special figure 2 [special figure 2]. In FIG. 67 (a), the special figure determination table [special figure 1] is composed of items of “result / no-good determination result”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol” from the left column. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 66 (a) or 66 (b). As a result of the success / failure determination using the special figure success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1], the case where “small hit” is determined is shown. As a result of the determination, a case where it is determined as “disconnected” is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 67A indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of 0-24, numerical values 25-49, numerical values 50-54, and numerical values 55-99, corresponding to the item “big hit” in the left column “results of success / failure determination”, Corresponding to “small hit”, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99, and corresponding to “off”, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 67A represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the range of the design random number corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 24, “special drawing A (15R probability variation)”, the numerical values 25 to 49, “special drawing B (15R)”, Stop symbols of “special drawing C (sudden probability change)” corresponding to numerical values 50 to 54 and “special drawing D (latency probability change)” corresponding to numerical values 55 to 99 are assigned. In addition, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing E (small hit)” corresponding to the value “0” to “99” in the “random hit” range. Further, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing F (missing)” corresponding to “0” and “99” in the range of the symbol random number.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to display any one of the special figures A to F when the determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Whether to stop and display the stop symbol pattern is determined for the acquired special figure determination random value with reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1]. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the stop symbol form of the special figure E on the special figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on the entrance to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a small hit. Decide what to do. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure F when the determination result based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of place. To decide.

  In FIG. 67 (b), the special figure determination table [special figure 2] is composed of items of "result / no-good determination result", "random number range", and "stop symbol" from the left column. In order to facilitate understanding, a “description of symbol” is attached to the right side of the “stop symbol”. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the success / failure determination using the determination table [special figure 2] shown in FIG. 66 (c) or 66 (d). The case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the determination as to whether or not the figure determination table [special drawing 2] is used is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 67B indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. “Random number range” is divided into three values of 0 to 69, 70 to 74, and 75 to 99 corresponding to the item “big hit” in the left column “result of judgment”, and corresponds to “out of” Thus, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 67B represents a stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the range of symbol random numbers corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 69, “special drawing a (16R probability variation)”, and the numerical values 70 to 74 “special symbol b (8R probability variation)”. , Corresponding to the numerical values 75 to 99, the special symbol c (8R) stop symbol form is respectively assigned. Further, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing d (missing)” corresponding to “0” and “99” in the range of the symbol random number.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to display any one of the special figure a to the special figure c when the success / failure determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. Whether to stop and display the stop symbol pattern is determined for the acquired special figure determination random value with reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 2]. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure d when the determination result based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of place. To decide.

  FIG. 68 shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. 68 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 68, the special figure 1 variable display time determination table includes four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 1 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In the present embodiment, the first to fifth sub-tables are provided. The first sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure A or special figure B. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the first sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The second sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure C. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the second sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 30000, a numerical value 30001 to 45000, and a numerical value 45001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, the effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 30001 to 45000, an effect is selected in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super Reach A / Chance stop. . Here, the super reach A miss / chance eye stop is a display for stopping the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach A is missed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of values 45001 to 65535, an effect that the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super reach B / chance stop is selected. . Here, the super reach B miss / chance eye stop is a display in which the chance eye is stopped after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach B is missed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The third sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure D or special figure E. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the third sub-table is divided into two values, a numerical value 0 to 30000 and a numerical value 30001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, the effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of numerical values 30001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is out of the normal reach / chance stop is selected. Here, the normal reach miss / chance eye stop is a display that stops the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the normal reach is missed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The fourth sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure F, the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the non-electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is three. The “random number selection range” in the fourth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 65000, a numerical value 65001 to 65400, a numerical value 65401 to 65500, and a numerical value 65501 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 65000, the effect that the variation time is 3000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shortened is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65400, an effect in which the variation time is 10,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is out of the normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the values 65401 to 65500, an effect in which the variation time is 40000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach A is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is in the range of the numerical values 65501 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach B is selected.

  The fifth sub-table is for the case where the stop symbol is special figure F, the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is non-electric support and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0 to 2, or the game at the time of determination of success / failure It is used when the status is electric support and the number of holds in Fig. 1 is 0-3. The “random number selection range” in the fifth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is off is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, an effect in which the variation time is 10,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is out of normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the variation time is 40000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach A is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach B is selected.

  FIG. 69 shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 69 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 69, the special figure 2 variable display time determination table includes four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 2 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In the present embodiment, there are four sub-tables from first to fourth. The first sub-table is used when the stop symbol is special figure a to special figure c. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the first sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The second sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, and the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 1 to 3. The “random number selection range” in the second sub-table is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of numerical values 0 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 1500 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is extremely short is selected.

  The third sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, and the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the electric support, and the holding number of the special figure 2 is 0. The “random number selection range” in the third sub-table is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 65535, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is off is selected.

  The fourth sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is non-electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0-3. The “random number selection range” in the fourth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is off is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, an effect in which the variation time is 10,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is out of normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the variation time is 40000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach A is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is super-reach B is selected.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S401 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, when it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S413 following step S411, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S403. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S421 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of random numbers for other effects, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S413 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the second decorative symbol display device 209. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input. In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S801 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S803.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 71A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the movable body control process in step S813 of the second sub control unit main process in FIG. 71A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of control processing to the effect movable body 224. In the movable body control process, various processes based on the received command are executed in step S1101. When there is a command to the effect movable body 224 in the control command of the main control unit 300 or the first sub control unit 400 sent via the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500 Based on the command, predetermined data is stored or saved in a storage area in the drive circuit 516, and discarded from the storage area. If the sensor circuit 518 does not detect the predetermined signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 at the time of receiving the command, the operation based on the control command is discarded and the operation to return the effect movable body 224 to the origin position is executed. May be.

  FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body interruption process. The movable body control process is interrupted at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms), and the predetermined process is executed. For example, in step S1201, predetermined data is written in the storage area of the drive circuit (driver) 516. For example, when the drive system is a solenoid, predetermined voltage data for excitation is written in the drive circuit 516, and in the case of a stepping motor or the like, a drive pulse, torque information, or the like is written. In step S1203 following step S1201, the state (ON / OFF) of the signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 is monitored. As described above, when the sensor circuit 518 has not detected the predetermined signal from the effect movable body sensor 424, an operation of returning the effect movable body 224 to the origin position may be executed. In step S1205 following step S1203, the driving data for the rendering movable body 224 stored in the storage area in the driving circuit 516 is updated to new driving data based on the control command.

  Next, effects using the effect movable body 224 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 93. FIG. 73 shows an operation example (part 1) of the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Each of FIGS. 73A to 73E is the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. 73A to 73E show the operations of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order. FIG. 73 illustrates a case where the effect movable body 224 moves along a first path (from the initial position A to the target position B) which will be described later. 74 to 76 respectively describe cases where the effect movable body 224 moves along a second path (from the initial position A to the target position C) described later. 73 and 74, it will be described that the effect movable body 224 can move along two routes, a moving route (first route) in FIG. 73 and a moving route (second route) in FIG. 75 and 76, a modification of FIG. 74 will be described.

  FIG. 73A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position (origin position) A. In the subsequent illustrations, when the position of the effect movable body 224 is indicated, reference numerals A, B, C, and the like indicating the position are attached to the inside of the effect movable body 224. In this case, it is assumed that the symbols A, B, C, etc. are not displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. As shown also in FIG. 58, with the pachinko machine 100 installed in an island facility or the like, the effect movable body 224 is slightly on the right side from the center of the upper side of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208 at the initial position A. The long side below the horizontally long rectangular frame portion of the effect movable body 224 is substantially parallel to the long side above the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the initial position A to the target position B. In FIG. 73 (b), the effect movable body 224 is sometimes referred to as a substantially orthogonal direction (hereinafter referred to as the vertical direction) with respect to the upper side (hereinafter also referred to as the horizontal direction) of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208. A) is moved downward, and the state at the time of straddling the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In the subsequent figures, the black arrow shown in the figure indicates the moving direction of the effect movable body 224, and the frame-shaped portion indicated by a broken line indicates the position before the effect movable body 224 moves to the position shown in the figure (the previous one). The position of the effect movable body 224 shown in the drawing is shown. For example, a frame-shaped portion represented by a broken line in FIG. 73 (c) indicates the same position as the position of the effect movable body 224 in FIG. 73 (b).

  FIG. 73 (c) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has reached the target position B and stopped. FIG. 73 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started moving from the target position B to the initial position A. FIG. 73 (d) shows a state when the effect movable body 224 moves vertically upward with respect to the upper side of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and straddles the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Show. FIG. 73 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 further moves vertically upward, reaches the initial position A, and stops.

  As described above, the movement pattern of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 73 has the same path for moving from the initial position A to the target position B (first path) and the path for returning from the target position B to the initial position A. It has a feature in a certain point.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73, when the target position B is within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208, it stops at the target position B during the movement between the initial position A and the target position B. In the state, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 hides at least a part of the display by the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  73 and 74, the size (area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is the first size, and the size of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is the second size (area). ) The first size is larger than the second size. By doing so, since the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are different in size, there are cases where more various effects can be performed. The first size may be smaller than the second size.

  FIG. 74 shows an operation example (part 2) of the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 74A to 74E respectively show the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. 74A to 74E show the operation of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order.

  74A shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position (origin position) A. FIG. FIG. 74B shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the initial position A to the target position C different from the target position B. FIG. 74B shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has moved in the horizontal left direction and the vertically lower direction, that is, in the oblique lower left direction, and has reached a position straddling the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 74 (c) shows a state where the horizontal moving component disappears from the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) and the effect movable body 224 moves vertically downward to reach the target position C and stop. FIG. 74D shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started moving to return from the target position C to the initial position A. FIG. 74D shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves vertically upward and reaches a position straddling the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 74E shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves in the horizontal right direction and vertically upward, that is, obliquely in the upper right direction, reaches the initial position A, and stops.

  As described above, the movement pattern of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 74 is also the same as the movement pattern shown in FIG. 73, the path moving from the initial position A to the target position C (second path) and the initial position from the target position C. It is characterized in that the route when returning to A is the same.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 74, when the target position C is within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208, it stops at the target position C during the movement between the initial position A and the target position C In the state, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 hides at least a part of the display by the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thus, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing at least the first decorative symbol display device 208 as the first display means capable of displaying at least the display. A second decorative symbol display device 209 as a second display means, wherein the second decorative symbol display device 209 is changed from the initial position A as the first position to the second position. It is possible to move at least to the target position B (hereinafter referred to as the first movement), and the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position A to the target position C as the third position ( Hereinafter, the second movement) can be performed at least, and the first movement is performed at least along the first route (for example, the first route shown in FIG. 73). The second The movement is performed at least along a second path (for example, the second path shown in FIG. 74). The first path is a path different from the second path, and the target position B At least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 209 in FIG. 9 hides at least a part of the display by the first decorative symbol display device 208, and at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 209 at the target position C. Is characterized by hiding at least part of the display by the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the second decorative symbol display device 209 that moves in accordance with the movement of the effect movable body 224 moves along a different route. Since the part is hidden, an unexpected operation can be performed and various effects can be performed. Further, by hiding a part of the display, there are cases where the player can be more focused on the first and / or decorative symbol display device 208 to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 that has performed the first movement by the movable body control process shown in FIG. 72 receives the predetermined command as the first condition from the target position B to the initial position. The second decorative symbol display device 209 that has moved to A and has performed the second movement moves from the target position C to the initial position A when receiving a predetermined command as the second condition. By doing so, it returns to the original position when the condition is satisfied (command reception), so it may be easy to confirm that normal operation is being performed.

Further, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into two, one display region is controlled by the original first decorative symbol display device 208, and the other display region is controlled by a third decorative symbol display device (not shown). You may make it control. In this way, a third decorative symbol display device is provided as third display means capable of executing at least display, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 has a fourth position (for example, a third decorative symbol) from the initial position A. It is possible to move at least to the target position D) in the display area of the symbol display device (hereinafter referred to as third movement), and the third movement is a third route (for example, FIG. 74). And at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 209 at the fourth position hides at least a part of the display by the third decorative symbol display device. It is characterized by being. According to such a pachinko machine 100, the third decorative symbol display device is provided, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 hides a part of the display area of the third decorative symbol display device. May be possible.
The third decorative symbol display device may be a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the third decorative symbol display device may be provided in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 58 separately from the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 75 shows an operation example (part 3) of the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 75 (a) to 75 (f) respectively show the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. 75A to 75F show the operation of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order.

  The operations in FIGS. 75A to 75C are movements from the initial position A to the target position C. However, since the operations are the same as those in FIGS. 74A to 74C, description thereof is omitted. FIG. 75D shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started moving from the target position C to the initial position A. In FIG. 75D, the effect movable body 224 slightly moves vertically upward and relatively greatly moves in the horizontal right direction, and reaches a target position B shown in FIG. 73, for example, vertically below the initial position A. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 75 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves vertically upward from the target position B and reaches a position straddling the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 75F shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 further moves vertically upward, reaches the initial position A, and stops.

  As described above, the operation pattern of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 75 includes a path (second path) for moving from the initial position A to the target position C and a path for returning from the target position C to the initial position A (target position). (Via B) is different.

  FIG. 76 shows an operation example (part 4) of the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 76 (a) to 76 (e) respectively show the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. FIGS. 76A to 76E show the operations of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order.

  The operations in FIGS. 76A to 76C are movements from the initial position A to the target position C, but are the same as the operations in FIGS. FIG. 76 (d) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has started moving from the target position C to the initial position A. In FIG. 76 (d), the effect movable body 224 reaches a position where the upper side of the effect movable body 224 overlaps the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208 in a straight line toward the initial position A, that is, in an oblique upper right direction. Indicates the state. FIG. 76 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 further moves in a straight line toward the initial position A obliquely in the upper right direction, reaches the initial position A, and stops.

  As described above, the movement pattern of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 76 is different in the path for moving from the initial position A to the target position C and the path for returning from the target position C to the initial position A. Also. In the return route shown in FIG. 75, the target position B is passed, but the target position B is not passed and the initial position A is returned.

  Next, Example 1 of the presentation operation | movement by the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated using FIGS. 77-79. FIG. 77 shows Example 1 (part 1) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 77 shows effects performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. 77 (a) to 77 (f) respectively show the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. 77A to 77F are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 77 (a) shows “decoration 4-decoration 8-- in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the rectangular display area of the first ornament symbol display device 208 after the special figure variable game is finished. This shows a state in which the decorative symbol “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the determination result regarding the special figure variable game is out of date. Two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 having two small square display areas are provided in the vicinity of a slightly lower side from the center of the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It has been. The upper square display area is the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 for the special figure 1, and the lower square display area is the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2 for the special figure 2. In the fourth symbol, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color, for example, during the special symbol variation game, and is in a state of being painted in the predetermined color, for example, during the symbol stop display. In this example and the following examples, the square display area of the fourth symbol in the special figure variable game is outlined, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 77 (a), since the special figure variation game of both special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not executed, both of the four fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. Yes. Also, four circular reserved display areas for special figure 1 are arranged so as to be displayed in the vicinity of the left side slightly from the center of the lower long side (horizontal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are always displayed at a fixed position regardless of the gaming state and the type of effect. The special display area for special figure 1 is displayed or hidden depending on the gaming state and the type of effect. The effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A shown in FIG. The second decorative symbol display device 209 in the frame portion of the effect movable body 224 executes an effect including display of a character string “CR Yoshimune”.

  FIG. 77 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which the decorations 1 to 10 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c (indicated by downward arrows in the figure). The display of the decorative pattern is changed. Since the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 is displayed in white in the square display area in the figure, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2, since the special figure 2 variable game is not executed, the square display area is filled with a predetermined color.

  The second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 stopped at the initial position A includes a character string “Leach” that suggests that the special figure variation game will be developed into a reach. The notice display starts when the decorative symbols are changing. The reach notice display is completed during symbol change. The reach notice display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be displayed before the start of the variation of the decorative symbol (however, when the variation of the special symbol is started), and there is at least one decorative symbol. Alternatively, the display may be started in a state where two are stopped, or the display may be started during the fluctuation of fluctuation while three decorative symbols are stopped. In addition, the reach notice display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be completed before the decorative symbol change starts (during the start of the special symbol change), and at least one or two decorative symbols are stopped. The display may be completed in the state, or the display may be completed during the shaking fluctuation in a state where three decorative symbols are stopped. However, when the special figure stops, it may not be displayed.

  FIG. 77 (c) shows a state where the reach effect is executed in the special figure 1 variable game. In the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner by images (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing) in which the ornaments 1 to 10 move sequentially from top to bottom.

  The second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 stopped at the initial position A displays a reach display including the character string “Leach!” Indicating that the reach has been reached in the reach effect. Is done. This reach display is displayed after the left and right decorative symbols are stopped. The reach display may be displayed simultaneously with the stop of the left and right decorative symbols, or may be displayed when one of the left and right decorative symbols stops, and all the decorative symbols change. It may be displayed during display.

  FIG. 77 (d) shows a state where the reach in FIG. 77 (c) has been developed into a reach effect called “Super Reach A”. The reach production related to “Super Reach A” is a story in which two samurai c1 and c2 fight. In the reach effect of “Super Reach A”, a wide portion of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is used as the effect display area 208d, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are displayed as the first decorative symbol display. The device 208 is arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display area. From the state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c as shown in FIG. 77 (c) are displayed in a large area in the center of the display area, the wide part of the display area as shown in FIG. 77 (d). Is switched to the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” used as the effect display area 208d, the screen display shown in FIG. 77 (c) gradually disappears, and the screen display shown in FIG. 77 (d) is gradually displayed. To be done. In the reach effect related to “Super Reach A”, the reserved display area for special figure 1 is not displayed. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched from the screen display shown in FIG. 77 (c) to the screen display shown in FIG. 77 (d).

  On the second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 stopped at the initial position A, the name of the reach effect currently being executed is displayed. The first decorative symbol display device 209 displays a reach display including the character string “super reach A”. The reach display including the character string “super reach A” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is started after the reach effect relating to “super reach A” is started in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The The reach display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be started before the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208. The reach display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be started while the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” is being executed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the reach display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be completed after the first decorative symbol display device 208 displays the image shown in FIG. 77 (d). The second decorative symbol display device 209 may complete the display before the first decorative symbol display device 208 completes the display, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays while the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying. May be completed. During the reach effect, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may perform display other than the name of the reach effect (default display, notice of change, decorative symbol, hold, fourth symbol, black image, etc.). . Also, nothing needs to be displayed. The same applies to reach production in other embodiments.

  FIG. 77 (e) shows a halfway image (showing the middle of the battle) in the reach production of “Super Reach A” started in FIG. 77 (d). FIG. 77 (f) shows that an image suggesting that the battle shown in FIG. 77 (e) has been settled is displayed.

  FIG. 78 shows Example 1 (part 2) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 78 (a) to 78 (f) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 77 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order. In FIG. 78, the effect movable body 224 performs the same operation as the operation example (part 1) of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. FIG. 78 is an effect that may be performed when the determination result is either a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In addition, it may be an effect that is not performed when the result of the determination is a big hit. Further, the result of the determination may be an effect that is performed only with a small hit and / or off. The same applies to the reach effect in which “losing” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 in other embodiments.

  FIG. 78A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the initial position A to the target position B. FIG. 78 (a) shows a point in time when the effect movable body 224 moves downward substantially perpendicularly to the upper side of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and straddles the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state. The second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224 includes the character string “super reach A” after the effect movable body 224 starts to move from the position of FIG. 77 (f) to the position of FIG. 78 (a). The reach display is cleared. Furthermore, after the reach display including the character string “Super Reach A” is erased, the “Lose” character starts to be displayed. Note that the reach display including the character string “Super Reach A” may be gradually displayed with relatively low contrast and then disappear, or may be instantaneously switched to the “Lose” character. Good. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224, the character “losing” is initially displayed with a relatively low contrast, and gradually displayed with a high contrast as the effect movable body 224 moves. The display of the “losing” character may be started in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped, and the display of the “losing” character is started before the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved. Also good.

  The facial expression of samurai c1 in the image shown in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (a) is a display that suggests that the player has “lost” (the loss has been confirmed). That is, the background image is displayed only when losing. In the present embodiment, the image shown in FIG. 78 (a) suggests that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Note that the image shown in FIG. 78A may not indicate that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of date. The moving operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of the character string “losing” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 are started after the expression of the samurai c1 is changed. Note that the moving operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of the character string “losing” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be before the facial expression of the samurai c1 changes or at the same time.

  FIG. 78 (b) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has reached the target position B. FIG. 78 (c) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the target position B. As shown in FIGS. 78B and 78C, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character string “losing” with high contrast at the target position B. In addition, the background image shows a state in which the samurai c1 who has won and lost the samurai c2 has fallen. Further, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is accompanied by fluctuation. Is displayed. In the shaking fluctuation, the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols are displayed as if slightly swinging up and down. The shaking fluctuation state indicates that the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  FIG. 78 (d) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has started moving from the target position B to the initial position A. FIG. 78 (d) shows a state when the effect movable body 224 moves vertically upward with respect to the upper side of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and straddles the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Show. During the movement of the effect movable body 224, the effect that the display of “losing” on the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 209 gradually disappears (fades out) is executed. In addition, the effect of fading out the decorative symbols displayed in a swinging manner in the entire effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is performed. Note that the effect of fading out in the effect display area 208d and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be executed after the effect movable body 224 is moved or before the movement. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched to the next image without fading out.

  FIG. 78 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 further moves vertically upward and reaches the initial position A. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same display (default display) as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77 (a), but other displays (for example, “losing”) Display or background image display), or nothing may be displayed. This display is completed when the second decorative symbol display device 209 reaches the last position (the position where it finally stops). The display may be started while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is operating. Display may be started after the operation. Further, the display may be completed during operation. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c move to the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" fluctuate. Further, since the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” has been completed, the reserved display area for special figure 1 is displayed. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold display that are displayed in such a large fluctuation manner is started during the movement (operation) of the effect movable body 224. In addition, such display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be started before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224 (when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped). In addition, the completion of the display of the decorative symbol and the hold is performed during the operation of the effect movable body 224. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be completed before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224. As described above, in this example, the effect movable body 224 moves to the area including the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the decorative pattern is large in the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Return to the original position before being displayed. The effect movable body 224 may not move to the area including the area where the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, the effect movable body 224 may return to the original position after the display of the large decorative symbol is started, or may return after the display of the large decorative symbol is completed. Note that an image other than the images shown in FIGS. 78D and 78E (for example, an image in which the entire screen is completely white) may be displayed between FIGS. 78D and 78E. .

  FIG. 78 (f) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same display (default display) as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77 (a) to notify that the symbol is confirmed (variation stop). The decorative pattern “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c in the center of the rectangular display area of the first decoration symbol display device 208. It is notified that the winning / failing determination result that is the result of the variable game is out of date. The symbol is determined after the effect movable body 224 is stopped. It should be noted that the symbol may be fixed while the effect movable body 224 is operating or before the operation. In addition, when the display of “losing” displayed in FIG. 78 (b) in FIG. 78 (d) to FIG. 78 (g) is continuously displayed, the display may be returned to the default display simultaneously with the symbol determination. It may be returned to the default display before symbol determination (for example, between FIG. 78 (e) and FIG. 78 (f)), or may be returned to the default display after symbol determination, and the start of the next variation (start of variation of special symbol) ) May be returned to the default display at the same time, or may be returned to the default display after the start of the next change (start of the special figure change). The same applies to the display of “win” to be described later.

  It should be noted that even if the determination result is a win, an operation for “losing” may be performed. In that case, a rebirth effect (a jackpot symbol is displayed until the symbol is determined (for example, between FIG. 78 (e) and FIG. 78 (f), between FIG. 78 (b) and FIG. 78 (c), etc.)). May be performed). In addition, the area covered by the second decorative symbol display device 209 in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 may not display an image or may display an image. In addition, there may be a display (for example, a fourth symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.) that is not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, a display hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209 (decorative symbol, notice (for example, a notice that can suggest the result of the change, a pre-read notice, etc.), a production (a notice that suggests the jackpot reliability of the change, the next time Access to subsequent announcements that suggest jackpot reliability of fluctuations, productions that do not imply success / failure determination results (production explanation display that explains production performed on the game machine (tutorial)), Daitomo, two-dimensional code, etc. described later Image).

  FIG. 79 shows Example 1 (part 3) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 79 (a) to 79 (f) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 77 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order. In FIG. 79, the effect movable body 224 performs the same operation as the operation example (part 2) of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. FIG. 79 shows an effect that may be performed when the determination result is a big hit. It may be performed when the result of the determination is a small hit or miss. In addition, when the result of the determination is a small hit or miss, the effect may not be performed. The same applies to the reach effect in which “win” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 in another embodiment.

  FIG. 79A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the initial position A to the target position C different from the target position B. FIG. 79A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has moved in the horizontal left direction and the vertically lower direction, that is, in the diagonally lower left direction, and has reached a position straddling the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224 includes the character string “super reach A” after the effect movable body 224 starts to move from the position of FIG. 77 (f) to the position of FIG. 79 (a). The reach display is cleared. Further, after the reach display including the character string “super reach A” is erased, the display of the character “win” starts. Note that the reach display including the character string “Super Reach A” may be gradually displayed with relatively low contrast and then be hidden, or may be instantaneously switched to the “win” character. Good. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224, the character “win” is initially displayed with a relatively low contrast, and gradually displayed with a high contrast as the effect movable body 224 moves. The display of the “win” character may be started with the second decorative symbol display device 209 stopped, and the display of the “win” character starts before the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves. Also good.

  The expression of samurai c1 in the image shown in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (a) is a display that suggests that the player has won the battle (win is confirmed). That is, it is a background image that is displayed only when winning. In the present embodiment, the image shown in FIG. 79 (a) suggests that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a win. Note that the image shown in FIG. 79A may not imply that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a win. The moving operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of the character string “win” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 are started after the expression of the samurai c1 is changed. Note that the moving operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of the character string “win” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be before the facial expression of the samurai c1 changes, or at the same time.

  The two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are displayed at positions that are not covered by the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the moving effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, so that the effect movable body 224 is illustrated. When the symbol is moved as described above, the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are variably displayed at positions where at least a part is covered by the moving second decorative symbol display device 209.

  FIG. 79B shows a state where the horizontal moving component disappears from the state shown in FIG. 79A and the effect movable body 224 moves vertically downward to reach the target position C. FIG. 79C shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the target position C. As shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 79 (c), the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character string of “win” at a target position C with high contrast. Further, the background image shows a state in which samurai c2 who has won and lost samurai c1 has fallen. In addition, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is accompanied by fluctuation. Is displayed. In the shaking fluctuation, the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols are displayed as if slightly swinging up and down. The shaking fluctuation state indicates that the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  It should be noted that all the decorative symbols displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 79 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 79 (b). The decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are partially hidden. Further, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a are arranged at positions that are not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, among the “win” and “losing” effects displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, a part of the decorative symbol is hidden on the second decorative symbol display device 209 only in the case of “win”. A part of the decorative design may be hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209 for both the “win” and “losing” effects. You may make it hide a part of.

  For the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209, or the second decorative symbol display device. The decorative symbol may be displayed at a position where a part is hidden in 209, or the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position where all is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, regarding the state in which a plurality of decorative symbols are hidden, there may be two or more symbols that are at least completely hidden, there may be two or more symbols that are at least partially hidden, and there are at least symbols that are not hidden. It may be. Moreover, you may make it be in the state which combined the decorative symbol which is hidden entirely, and the decorative symbol which is partially hidden.

  FIG. 79 (d) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has started moving to return from the target position C to the initial position A. FIG. 79 (d) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has moved vertically upward and has reached a position straddling the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. During the movement of the effect movable body 224, the effect that the display of “win” on the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 209 fades out is executed. In addition, the effect of fading out the decorative symbols displayed in a swinging manner in the entire effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c is performed. Note that the effect of fading out in the effect display area 208d and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be executed after the effect movable body 224 is moved or before the movement. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched to the next image without fading out. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, so that the effect movable body 224 moves as illustrated. Then, the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are variably displayed at positions where at least a part is covered by the moving second decorative symbol display device 209. In this example, after the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 208b are swaying, all of the decorative symbols in the right symbol display area 208c and part of the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden.

  FIG. 79 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has moved to the horizontal right direction and vertically upward, that is, obliquely in the upper right direction, and has reached the initial position A. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same default display as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77 (a). (Image display) may be performed, or nothing may be displayed. This display is completed when the second decorative symbol display device 209 reaches the last position (the position where it finally stops). The display may be started while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is operating. Display may be started after the operation. Further, the display may be completed during operation. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c move to the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” fluctuates. Further, since the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” has been completed, the reserved display area for special figure 1 is displayed. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold display that are displayed in such a large fluctuation manner is started during the movement (operation) of the effect movable body 224. In addition, such display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be started before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224 (when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped). In addition, the completion of the display of the decorative symbol and the hold is performed during the operation of the effect movable body 224. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be completed before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224. As described above, in this example, the effect movable body 224 moves to the area including the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the decorative pattern is large in the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Return to the original position before being displayed. The effect movable body 224 may not move to the area including the area where the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, the effect movable body 224 may return to the original position after the display of the large decorative symbol is started, or may return after the display of the large decorative symbol is completed. Note that an image other than the images shown in FIGS. 79 (d) and 79 (e) (for example, an image in which the entire screen is completely white) may be displayed between FIGS. 79 (d) and 79 (e). .

  FIG. 79 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same default display as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77 (a) to notify that the symbol is confirmed (change stoppage). The decorative pattern “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c in the center of the rectangular display area of the first decoration symbol display device 208. It is notified that the winning / failing determination result that is the result of the variable game is a big hit. The symbol is determined after the effect movable body 224 is stopped. It should be noted that the symbol may be fixed while the effect movable body 224 is operating or before the operation.

  In addition, the area covered by the second decorative symbol display device 209 in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 may not display an image or may display an image. Further, there may be a display (for example, a fourth design, a decorative design, a hold display, etc.) that is not hidden by the second decorative design display device 209. In addition, a display (decoration symbol, notice (for example, a notice that can suggest the result of the change, a pre-read notice, etc.), a production (a notice that suggests the jackpot reliability of the change, the next time, hidden) by the second decorative symbol display device 209 Advance notice that suggests the jackpot reliability of subsequent fluctuations, effects that do not suggest the result of the success / failure determination (effect explanation display (tutorial) that explains the effects performed on the game machine), hold display, Daitomo, which will be described later, two-dimensional There may be an access image such as a code). Moreover, although the said Example was demonstrated using the operation example of the production | presentation movable body shown in FIG.73 and FIG.74, the said specific Example is applicable also about other operation examples, such as FIG.75 and FIG.76.

  FIG. 80 shows an operation example (part 5) of the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Each of FIGS. 80A to 80E is the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. FIGS. 80A to 80E show the operations of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order. FIG. 80 illustrates a case where the effect movable body 224 moves from the initial position A to the target position B on a first route described later. FIG. 81 illustrates a case where the effect movable body 224 moves from the initial position A to the target position B on a second route described later. 82 and 83, a modification of FIG. 80 will be described.

  FIG. 80A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A. FIG. 80B shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the initial position A to the target position B. In FIG. 80B, the effect movable body 224 moves downward in the vertical direction, and the entire second decorative symbol display device 209 extends beyond the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. A state where the display area is entered is shown.

  FIG. 80C shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has reached the target position B and stopped. FIG. 80D shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the target position B back to the initial position A. FIG. 80 (d) shows the state when the effect movable body 224 moves vertically upward with respect to the upper side of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and straddles the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Show. FIG. 80 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 further moves vertically upward and reaches the initial position A and stops.

  As described above, the operation pattern of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 80 is the same as that shown in FIG. 73, and the path from the initial position A to the target position B (first path) and the target position B are the same. The route for returning to the initial position A is the same. The operation of the effect movable body 224 may be such that it moves by a linear motion to reach the target position B and then returns to the initial position A by an oblique linear movement operation, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 81 shows an operation example (part 6) of the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Each of FIGS. 81A to 81E is the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. 81A to 81E show the operations of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order.

  FIG. 81A shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A. FIG. 81B shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the initial position A to the target position B. FIG. 81 (b) shows that the effect movable body 224 moves in the horizontal left direction and the vertical downward direction, that is, in the diagonally lower left direction, so that the entire second decorative symbol display device 209 extends beyond the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The state which entered into the display area of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is shown.

  FIG. 81 (c) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves in the horizontal right direction and vertically downward, that is, obliquely in the lower right direction, reaches the target position B and stops. FIG. 81 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started moving from the target position B to the initial position A. FIG. 81 (d) shows a state when the effect movable body 224 moves in the horizontal left direction and vertically upward, that is, obliquely in the upper left direction, and returns to the position shown in FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves in the horizontal right direction and vertically upward direction, that is, obliquely in the upper right direction, reaches the initial position A, and stops.

  As described above, the operation pattern of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 81 reaches the target position B through a second route different from the route shown in the operation pattern shown in FIG. Further, in the operation pattern of the effect movable body 224, the second path for moving from the initial position A to the target position B and the path for returning from the target position B to the initial position A are the same.

  As described above, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing at least the first decorative symbol display device 208 as the first display means capable of displaying at least. A second decorative symbol display device 209 as a second display means, wherein the second decorative symbol display device 209 is changed from the initial position A as the first position to the second position. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is the same as the second position as the third position from the initial position A. It is possible to move at least to the target position B (hereinafter referred to as the second movement), and the first movement is the first path (for example, the first path shown in FIG. 80). ) Along at least The second movement is performed at least along the second route (for example, the second route shown in FIG. 81), and the first route is the second route. It is another route, and at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 209 at the target position B is characterized in that at least a part of the display by the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the second decorative symbol display device 209 that moves in accordance with the movement of the effect movable body 224 moves along a different route. Since the part is hidden, an unexpected operation can be performed and various effects can be performed. Further, by concealing a part of the display, the player may be more focused on the first and / or second decorative symbol display device 208 to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the second position and the third position are the same position, an unexpected operation can be performed, and the player can be more focused on the display device.
Note that the time required for the first movement and the second movement may be different or the same. In addition, the moving speed of the effect movable body 224 during the first movement and during the second movement may be the same or different.

  FIG. 82 shows an operation example (part 7) of the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Each of FIGS. 82A to 82E is the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. 82A to 82E show the operations of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order.

  The operations in FIGS. 82A to 82C are movements from the initial position A to the target position B. However, the operations are the same as those in FIGS. FIG. 82 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started moving from the target position B to the initial position A. FIG. 82 (d) shows that the effect movable body 224 moves slightly vertically upward and relatively greatly in the horizontal right direction, and reaches the outside of the display area on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 82 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208 and starts moving from outside the display area to the initial position A. FIG. 82E shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves vertically upward and moves in the horizontal left direction, reaches the initial position A, and stops.

  As described above, the operation pattern of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 82 is the same as the operation pattern shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, and the path from the initial position A to the target position B and the target position B to the initial position A. It is characterized in that the route when returning is different.

  82, the second decorative symbol display device 209 provided on the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 82 (d). As described above, at least a part of, for example, a decorative object, an effect movable means, a ball passage, a game area, a game ball, and the like, which are arranged in the area outside the first decorative symbol display device 209, are hidden.

  FIG. 83 shows an operation example (part 8) of the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Each of FIGS. 83A to 83F is the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. 83A to 83F show the operations of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order.

  The operations in FIGS. 83A to 83C are movements from the initial position A to the target position B, but are the same as the operations in FIGS. FIG. 83D shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is rotated 90 ° clockwise at the target position B.

  FIG. 83 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise at the target position B and returned to the original position. FIG. 83 (f) shows a state in which it has moved vertically upward from the target position B, moved greatly, reached the initial position A, and stopped.

As described above, the operation pattern of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 83 is obtained when returning to the initial position A in the path moving from the initial position A to the target position B and the path returning from the target position B to the initial position A. It is characterized in that the effect movable body 224 performs a rotation operation at the target position B.
In this example, one path (outward path) does not rotate, and the other path (return path) rotates. In this example, the forward path and the return path are the same path, but the rotation may be executed even when the path is different in the round trip. In that case, the place where the rotation operation is performed may be the same or different. In addition to the rotating operation, an operation such as turning over or vibrating may be executed.

  In addition, the timing for returning the rotated effect movable body 224 may be before the linear motion, during the linear motion, or after the linear motion. In FIG. 83, after 90 ° forward rotation at the target position B and then 90 ° reverse rotation, it is moved to the initial position A, but the initial position is maintained while maintaining the 90 ° forward rotation state. It may be moved to A and reversely rotated 90 ° at the initial position A to return to the original state.

  Next, Example 2 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 84 shows Example 2 (part 1) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 84 shows the effects executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. 84 (a) to 84 (c) respectively show the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. 84A to 84C are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 84A shows “decoration 4—decoration 8- This shows a state in which the decorative symbol “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the determination regarding the special figure variable game is out of date. Two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 having two small square display areas are provided in the vicinity of a slightly lower side from the center of the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It has been. The upper square display area is the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 for the special figure 1, and the lower square display area is the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2 for the special figure 2. In the fourth symbol, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color, for example, during the special symbol variation game, and is in a state of being painted in the predetermined color, for example, during the symbol stop display. In the state shown in FIG. 84 (a), the special figure variation game of both special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not executed. Yes. Also, four circular reserved display areas for special figure 1 are arranged so as to be displayed in the vicinity of the left side slightly from the center of the lower long side (horizontal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are always displayed at a fixed position regardless of the gaming state and the type of effect. The special display area for special figure 1 is displayed or hidden depending on the gaming state and the type of effect. The effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A shown in FIG. The second decorative symbol display device 209 in the frame portion of the effect movable body 224 executes an effect including display of a character string “CR Yoshimune”.

  FIG. 84 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which the decorations 1 to 10 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c (indicated by downward arrows in the figure). The display of the decorative pattern is changed. Since the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 is displayed in white in the square display area in the figure, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2, since the special figure 2 variable game is not executed, the square display area is filled with a predetermined color.

  The second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 stopped at the initial position A includes a character string “Leach” that suggests that the special figure variation game will be developed into a reach. The notice display starts when the decorative symbols are changing. The reach notice display is completed during the change of the decorative symbol. The reach notice display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be displayed before the start of the variation of the decorative symbol (however, when the variation of the special symbol is started), and there is at least one decorative symbol. Alternatively, the display may be started in a state where two are stopped, or the display may be started during the fluctuation of fluctuation while three decorative symbols are stopped. In addition, the display may be completed before the start of the variation of the decorative symbol (during the start of the variation of the special symbol), or the display may be completed in a state where at least one or two of the decorative symbols are stopped, and there are three decorative symbols. The display may be completed during the fluctuation of shaking in the stopped state. However, when the special figure stops, it may not be displayed.

  FIG. 84 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are reduced and arranged in the lower right of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The center and upper area of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 are used as the effect display area 208d. In the effect display area 208d, there is an effect in which the samurai c1 sits and thinks about whether to select "Intense heat" or "Reach". An image of a fan written as “Intense Heat” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an “Intense Heat” image) is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and written as “Leach”. A book image (hereinafter may be referred to as “reach” image) is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  In order to inform the player that the samurai c1 is contemplating the effect in the effect display area 208d on the second decorative symbol display device 209 disposed on the effect movable body 224 stopped at the initial position A. The display including the character string “Which one do you want?” Is started. The timing at which the second decorative symbol display device 209 changes from the reach notice display “Leach is” shown in FIG. 84B to the “Which one?” Display shown in FIG. 84C is the first decorative symbol display device. The display at 208 may be a symbol variation display (the state of FIG. 84B), and the display at the first decorative symbol display device 208 is the state shown in FIGS. 84B to 84C. Or may be after the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is in the state shown in FIG. 84 (c).

  It should be noted that the image of “Intense heat” and the image of “Leach” are notifications of jackpot announcements, and the reliability of the jackpot is set higher for “Extreme heat” than for “Leach”. The display of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is changed at the timing when the first decorative symbol display device 208 starts the notice of the change. Note that the notice start timing of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be different. The second decorative symbol display device 209 may be earlier or later than the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 85 shows Example 2 (part 2) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 85 (a) to 85 (f) are effects executed following FIG. 84 (c), and are arranged in time series in this order. In FIG. 85, the effect movable body 224 performs the same operation as the operation example (part 6) of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 85A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started moving from the initial position A to the target position B. FIG. 85 (a) shows that the effect movable body 224 moves in the horizontal left direction and the vertical downward direction, that is, in the diagonally lower left direction, so that the entire second decorative symbol display device 209 extends beyond the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The state which entered into the display area of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is shown. In this state, the upper left portion of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. For this reason, the image of “extreme heat” at the upper left of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209, but in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, Then, an image of “Intense heat” similar to the image of “Intense heat” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The image of “Intense heat” in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the effect movable body 224 starts moving from the initial position A and “Intense heat” in the upper left of the display area of the first ornament symbol display device 208 It is displayed until the image of "" is hidden. The same notice display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. When the first decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by at least a part or all of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the image of the area covered by the second decorative symbol display device 209 is at least a part ( For example, an image of an area not covered with the second decorative symbol display device 209) may be displayed, or the image may be hidden. During the movement of the effect movable body 224, nothing may be displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Further, while the effect movable body 224 is moving, an image of “Which one?” May be displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, or a different display such as a background display may be displayed. Good. In addition, an image of “Which way?” May be displayed before the image of “extreme heat” is displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Alternatively, only the “Intense heat” image may be displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, or only the “Which one?” Image may be displayed.

  FIG. 85 (b) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has moved to the right position in the horizontal direction and vertically downward, that is, obliquely in the lower right direction, and has reached the target position B. In the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the position of the second decorative symbol display device 209 shown in FIG. The same image as that of is not displayed. The image of “extreme heat” displayed at the position in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is erased while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is passing. Note that the image of “extreme heat” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 may be erased before or after passing through the second decorative symbol display device 209. Further, it may be displayed as it is. Note that the second decorative symbol display device 209 passes over the image of the notice display “Leach” that has not been selected. In addition, you may make it not pass. In addition, the notice display which has not been selected (the “reach” image) is gradually faded and deleted. It should be noted that the “hot” image may be erased at the same time as the “reach” image, may be erased before the “reach” image, or vice versa. A samurai c1 is displayed relatively large on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The display of this character indicates that an effect indicating the reliability of the jackpot in the special figure variable game has been determined.

  FIG. 85C shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the target position B. As shown in FIG. 85 (c), the fourth symbol display areas b 1 and b 2 and the special symbol 1 hold display areas a 1 to a 4 are displayed at positions not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  FIG. 85 (d) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the target position B back to the initial position A. FIG. 85D shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves in the horizontal left direction and vertically upward, that is, in the diagonally upper left direction and returns to the position shown in FIG. 85A. The timing at which the effect movable body 224 returns to the position shown in FIG. 85A is determined in advance, and may be until, for example, one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. When returning, return with the same route as the route you have traveled. During the movement of the effect movable body 224, an effect is produced in which the “extreme heat” image on the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 209 gradually disappears (fades out). Further, the effect of fading out the entire effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the image of the samurai c1 displayed in the effect display region 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Note that the effect of fading out in the effect display area 208d and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be executed after the effect movable body 224 is moved or before the movement. An effect of fading out simultaneously with the movement of the effect movable body 224 may be performed. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched to the next image without fading out.

  FIG. 85 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has moved to the horizontal right direction and the vertical upward direction, that is, obliquely to the upper right, and has reached the initial position A. The state shown in FIG. 85 (e) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 84 (b). In the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. When the effect movable body 224 reaches the initial position, the decorative display is not displayed on the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 85 (f). It may be in a state of being broken. Since the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 is displayed in white in the square display area in the figure, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2, since the special figure 2 variable game is not executed, the square display area is filled with a predetermined color. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 that has reached the initial position A, an image of “CR Yoshimune” as a default display is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same display (default display) as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77 (a). Display or background image) may be performed, or nothing may be displayed. This display is completed when the second decorative symbol display device 209 reaches the last position (the position where it finally stops). The display may be started while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is operating. Display may be started after the operation. Further, the display may be completed during operation. Further, instead of the image of “CR Yoshimune”, the image of “extreme heat” shown in FIG. 85C may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 85 (f) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A. FIG. 85 (f) shows a state in which the reach effect is executed in the special figure 1 variable game. In the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner by images (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing) in which the ornaments 1 to 10 move sequentially from top to bottom.

  On the second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 stopped at the initial position A, a notice notification effect in which an image including the character string “Intense heat!” Is displayed in the reach effect is executed. Has been. An image including the character string “Intense heat!” Is a notice notification effect with high reliability of jackpot. Further, the notice notification effect is displayed after the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The notice notification effect may be displayed simultaneously with the stop of the left and right decorative symbols, or may be displayed when one of the left and right decorative symbols stops, and all the decorative symbols are displayed. It may be displayed during the variable display. In addition, instead of an image including the character string “Intense heat!”, An image of “Intense heat” shown in FIG. 85D or an image of “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 85E may be continuously displayed. .

  FIG. 86 shows Example 2 (part 3) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 86 (a) to 86 (f) are effects executed following FIG. 84 (c), and are arranged in time series in this order. In FIG. 86, the effect movable body 224 performs the same operation as the operation example (part 5) of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 86A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the initial position A to the target position B. 86 (a), the effect movable body 224 moves downward in the vertical direction, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 as a whole exceeds the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. A state where the display area is entered is shown. In this state, the upper right portion of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. For this reason, the “reach” image in the upper right part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209, but in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, The “reach” image similar to the “reach” image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The image of “reach” in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the effect movable body 224 starts moving from the initial position A and the “reach” in the upper right part of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It is displayed until the image is hidden. The same notice display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. At least a part of the image of the area covered by the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be displayed, or the image may be hidden. During the movement of the effect movable body 224, nothing may be displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Further, an image of “Which one?” May be displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, or a different display such as a background display may be displayed. In addition, the image “Let ’s do it?” May be displayed before the image “Leach” is displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Alternatively, only the “Leach” image may be displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, or only the “Which one?” Image may be displayed.

  FIG. 86B shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has reached the target position B. In the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the position of the “reach” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is located at the position where the second decorative symbol display device 209 shown in FIG. The same image as the image is not displayed. The “reach” image displayed at the position in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is erased while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is passing. The “reach” image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 may be erased before or after passing through the second decorative symbol display device 209. Further, it may be displayed as it is. In addition, the “hot” image is gradually faded and erased. The second decorative symbol display device 209 does not pass over the unselected notice display (“hot heat” image), and the player can visually recognize the deletion of the “hot heat” image. . It should be noted that the second decorative symbol display device 209 may pass over the “hot” image. As shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 86 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 209 passes over the image of the unselected notice display depending on the reliability of the jackpot of the selected notice display. You may or may not. Moreover, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may or may not pass over the image of the unselected notice display regardless of the reliability of the jackpot of the selected notice display. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may pass over the notice display that is not selected regardless of the selected notice, or may not be passed. A samurai c1 is displayed relatively large on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The display of this character indicates that an effect indicating the reliability of the jackpot in the special figure variable game has been determined.

  FIG. 86 (c) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has stopped at the target position B. As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the special symbol 1 hold display areas a1 to a4 are displayed at positions not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  FIG. 86 (d) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the target position B back to the initial position A. FIG. 86 (d) shows when the effect movable body 224 moves vertically upward with respect to the upper side of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is positioned above the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state. The timing at which the effect movable body 224 returns to the position shown in FIG. 86 (a) is determined in advance, and may be until, for example, one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. When returning, return with the same route as the route you have traveled. During the movement of the effect movable body 224, an effect is executed in which the “reach” image on the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 209 gradually disappears (fades out). Further, the effect of fading out the entire effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the image of the samurai c1 displayed in the effect display region 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Note that the effect of fading out in the effect display area 208d and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be executed after the effect movable body 224 is moved or before the movement. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched to the next image without fading out.

  FIG. 86 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has further moved vertically upward to reach the initial position A. The state shown in FIG. 86 (e) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 84 (b). In the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. When the effect movable body 224 reaches the initial position, the decorative display is not displayed on the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 85 (f). It may be in a state of being broken. Since the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 is displayed in white in the square display area in the figure, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2, since the special figure 2 variable game is not executed, the square display area is filled with a predetermined color. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 that has reached the initial position A, an image of “CR Yoshimune” as a default display is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same display (default display) as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77A, but other displays may be performed. . This display is completed when the second decorative symbol display device 209 reaches the last position (the position where it finally stops). The display may be started while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is operating. Display may be started after the operation. Further, the display may be completed during operation. Further, instead of the “CR Yoshimune” image, the “reach” image shown in FIG. 86C may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 86 (f) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A. FIG. 86 (f) shows a state where the reach effect is being executed in the special figure 1 variable game. In the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner by images (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing) in which the ornaments 1 to 10 move sequentially from top to bottom.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 stopped at the initial position A, a notice notification effect in which an image including the character string “reach” is displayed in the reach effect is executed. Yes. An image including the character string “reach” is a notice notification effect with a relatively low reliability of jackpot. Further, the notice notification effect is displayed after the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The notice notification effect may be displayed simultaneously with the stop of the left and right decorative symbols, or may be displayed when one of the left and right decorative symbols stops, and all the decorative symbols are displayed. It may be displayed during the variable display. Further, instead of an image including the character string “reach”, an image of “reach” shown in FIG. 86 (d) or an image of “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 86 (e) may be continuously displayed. 85 (a) to (f) and 86 (a) to (f), the reliability of the jackpot in the special figure variable game is suggested by the operation path of the second decorative symbol display device 209. May be. Note that the reliability of the jackpot in the special figure variable game may not be suggested by the operation path of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Moreover, although the said Example was demonstrated using the operation example of the production | presentation movable body shown to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the said specific Example is applicable also about other operation examples, such as FIG.82 and FIG.83. .

  FIG. 87 shows Example 2 (part 4) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 87 shows effects executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the pachinko machine 100 in the second embodiment. Each of FIGS. 87A to 87F is the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. Is shown. 87 (a) to (f) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 85 (f) or 86 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows a state where the reach in FIG. 85 (f) or 86 (f) has been developed into a reach effect called “super reach A”. The reach production related to “Super Reach A” is a story in which two samurai c1 and c2 fight. In the reach effect of “Super Reach A”, a wide portion of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is used as the effect display area 208d, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are displayed as the first decorative symbol display. The device 208 is arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display area. From the state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c as shown in FIG. 85 (f) or 86 (f) are displayed in a large area at the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 87 (a). 85 (f) or 86 (f) gradually disappears and the screen display shown in FIG. 85 (f) or 86 (f) gradually disappears when switching to the reach effect related to “Super Reach A” in which a wide part of the display area is used as the effect display area 208d. The screen display of FIG. 87 (a) is displayed. In the reach effect related to “Super Reach A”, the reserved display area for special figure 1 is not displayed. The image may be instantaneously switched from the screen display shown in FIG. 85 (f) or 86 (f) to the screen display shown in FIG. 87 (a).

  On the second decorative symbol display device 209 arranged on the effect movable body 224 stopped at the initial position A, the name of the reach effect currently being executed is displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a reach display including the character string “super reach A”. The reach display including the character string “super reach A” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is started after the reach effect relating to “super reach A” is started in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The The reach display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be started before the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208. The reach display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be started while the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” is being executed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the reach display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be completed after the first decorative symbol display device 208 displays the image shown in FIG. The second decorative symbol display device 209 may complete the display before the first decorative symbol display device 208 completes the display, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays while the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying. May be completed.

  FIG. 87 (b) shows a halfway image (showing the middle of the battle) in the reach production of “Super Reach A” started in FIG. 87 (a). FIG. 87 (c) shows that an image suggesting that the battle shown in FIG. 87 (b) has been settled is displayed.

  FIG. 87 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started moving from the initial position A to the target position B. FIG. 87 (d) shows a point in time when the effect movable body 224 moves downward substantially orthogonally to the upper side of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and straddles the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224, the character “losing” is initially displayed with a relatively low contrast, and gradually displayed with a high contrast as the effect movable body 224 moves. The display of the “losing” character may be started in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped, and the display of the “losing” character is started before the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved. Also good.

  The expression of samurai c1 in the image shown in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (d) is a display that suggests that the player has “lost” (defeat is confirmed). That is, the background image is displayed only when losing. In the present embodiment, the image shown in FIG. 87 (d) suggests that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Note that the image shown in FIG. 87 (d) may not indicate that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of date. The moving operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of the character string “losing” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 are started after the expression of the samurai c1 is changed. Note that the moving operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of the character string “losing” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be before the facial expression of the samurai c1 changes or at the same time.

  FIG. 87 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has reached the target position B. FIG. 87 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has stopped at the target position B. As shown in FIGS. 87 (e) and 87 (f), the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character string “losing” with high contrast at the target position B. In addition, the background image shows a state in which the samurai c1 who has won and lost the samurai c2 has fallen. Further, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is accompanied by fluctuation. Is displayed. In the shaking fluctuation, the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols are displayed as if slightly swinging up and down. The shaking fluctuation state indicates that the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  FIG. 88 shows Example 2 (part 5) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 88 (a) to 88 (f) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 87 (f) when the result of the determination is a big hit, and are arranged in time series in this order. In FIG. 78, the effect movable body 224 performs the same operation as the operation example (part 8) of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. An effect that is performed when the result of the determination is a small hit may be used. Further, it may be an effect performed only when the determination result is a big hit.

  FIG. 88A shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has reached the target position B and stopped. As shown in FIG. 88A, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character string “losing” with high contrast at the target position B. In addition, the background image shows a state in which it seems that samurai c1 who has won and lost samurai c2 has fallen. A notice image c3 indicating that the expression of the samurai c2 has changed is displayed around the forehead of the samurai c2. The advance notice image c3 suggests “winning” of the samurai c1, not the samurai c2. That is, it is displayed only when “win” is displayed after displaying “losing” of samurai c1 once. Further, the notice image c3 suggests that the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit. Note that the notice image c3 does not have to indicate that the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit (for example, a big hit may be suggested). Further, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is accompanied by fluctuation. Is displayed. In the shaking fluctuation, the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols are displayed as if slightly swinging up and down. The shaking fluctuation state indicates that the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  FIG. 88B shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is rotated 90 ° clockwise at the target position B and stopped in the state shown in FIG. 88A. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224 that has stopped rotating, an image including the character string “one more time!” Is displayed instead of the “losing” image. The effect movable body 224 is rotated after the notice image c3 is displayed. The effect movable body 224 may perform a rotation operation before the notice notification image c3 is displayed, and the effect movable body 224 may perform a rotation operation when the image is changing to the notice notification image c3. . The second decorative symbol display device 209 gradually erases the “losing” image while the effect movable body 224 is rotating, and gradually starts displaying the “one more!” Image. Then, the display of the “another time!” Image is completed before the effect movable body 224 completes the rotation. It should be noted that the display of an image of “one more time!” From an image of “losing” may be switched instantaneously. It should be noted that the display of the “another time!” Image may be started before the rotation of the second decorative symbol display device 209 or may be started after the rotation is completed. Moreover, the display may be completed before the rotation of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is started, or the display may be completed after the rotation is completed.

  FIG. 88 (c) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise at the target position B and returned to the original position. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224 that has stopped rotating, an image including the character string of “win” is displayed with low contrast instead of the image of “one more time!”. Further, the background image is an image that suggests “winning” of samurai c1 with low contrast. That is, it is displayed only when “win” is displayed after displaying “losing” of samurai c1 once. The return rotation direction of the effect movable body 224 is opposite to the forward rotation direction, but may be rotated in the same direction as the forward rotation direction (for example, by one rotation). 88 (c), the background image shown in FIG. 88 (b) is deleted, and the effect movable body 224 rotates while the background image shown in FIG. 88 (c) is displayed. The effect movable body 224 may rotate while the background image shown in FIG. 88B is displayed, and the effect movable body 224 is displayed while the background image shown in FIG. 88B is gradually erased. May perform a rotation operation, and the effect movable body 224 may perform a rotation operation when the display of the background image shown in FIG. 88 (c) is completed, other than those in FIG. 88 (b) and FIG. The effect movable body 224 may perform a rotating operation when an image is displayed or nothing is displayed. The display of the “win” image is started while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is rotating. The display of the “win” image may be displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 209 rotates, or may be displayed after the rotation. The decorative symbols 208a, 208b, and 208c display a state in which three decorations 3 are displayed while the effect movable body is rotating. In addition, it may be displayed before the effect movable body is rotated, or may be displayed after the effect movable body is rotated. Note that each of the decorative symbols 208a, 208b, and 208c may be switched in display, or the decorative symbol 208b may be switched from the decoration 2 to the decoration 3.

  FIG. 88 (d) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the target position B. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224, an image including the character string “Win” is displayed with high contrast. The background image is a high-contrast image that suggests “winning” of the samurai c1.

  FIG. 88 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started moving from the target position B to the initial position A. FIG. 88D shows a state when the effect movable body 224 moves vertically upward with respect to the upper side of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and straddles the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Show. During the movement of the effect movable body 224, the effect of gradually disappearing (fading out) the display of “win” on the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is executed. In addition, the effect of fading out the decorative symbols displayed in a swinging manner in the entire effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is performed. Note that the effect of fading out in the effect display area 208d and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be executed after the effect movable body 224 is moved or before the movement. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched to the next image without fading out.

  FIG. 88 (f) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 further moves vertically upward and reaches the initial position A. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same display (default display) as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77A, but other displays may be performed. . This display is completed when the second decorative symbol display device 209 reaches the last position (the position where it finally stops). The display may be started while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is operating. Display may be started after the operation. Further, the display may be completed during operation. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c move to the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” fluctuates. Further, since the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” has been completed, the reserved display area for special figure 1 is displayed. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold display that are displayed in such a large fluctuation manner is started during the movement (operation) of the effect movable body 224. In addition, such display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be started before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224 (when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped). In addition, the completion of the display of the decorative symbol and the hold is performed during the operation of the effect movable body 224. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be completed before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224. As described above, in this example, the effect movable body 224 moves to the area including the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the decorative pattern is large in the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Return to the original position before being displayed. The effect movable body 224 may not move to the area including the area where the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, the effect movable body 224 may return to the original position after the display of the large decorative symbol is started, or may return after the display of the large decorative symbol is completed. Note that an image other than the images shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f) (for example, an image in which the entire screen is completely white) may be displayed between FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f). .

  FIG. 89 shows Example 2 (part 6) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 89 (a) to 89 (e) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 87 (c), and are arranged in time series in this order. 89, the effect movable body 224 performs the same operation as the operation example (part 2) of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 89A shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the initial position A to the target position C different from the target position B. FIG. 89A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has moved in the horizontal left direction and the vertically lower direction, that is, in the diagonally lower left direction, and has reached a position straddling the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224, the character “win” is initially displayed with a relatively low contrast, and gradually displayed with a high contrast as the effect movable body 224 moves. The display of the “win” character may be started with the second decorative symbol display device 209 stopped, and the display of the “win” character starts before the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves. Also good.

  The expression of samurai c1 in the image shown in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (a) is a display that suggests that the player has won the battle (win is confirmed). That is, it is a background image that is displayed only when winning. In the present embodiment, the image shown in FIG. 89 (a) suggests that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a win. Note that the image shown in FIG. 89 (a) may not indicate that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a win. The moving operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of the character string “win” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 are started after the expression of the samurai c1 is changed. Note that the moving operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of the character string “win” on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be before the facial expression of the samurai c1 changes, or at the same time.

  The two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are displayed at positions that are not covered by the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the moving effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, so that the effect movable body 224 is illustrated. When the symbol is moved as described above, the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are variably displayed at positions where at least a part is covered by the moving second decorative symbol display device 209. It should be noted that the decorative symbol may not be hidden when displaying the “win” image after displaying the “losing” image on the second decorative symbol display device 209 or “winning” after displaying the “losing” image. The decorative pattern may also be hidden when displaying the image.

  FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which the horizontal moving component disappears from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), and the effect movable body 224 moves vertically downward to reach the target position C. FIG. 89C shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the target position C. As shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c), the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character string of “win” at the target position C with high contrast. Further, the background image shows a state in which samurai c2 who has won and lost samurai c1 has fallen. In addition, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is accompanied by fluctuation. Is displayed. In the shaking fluctuation, the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols are displayed as if slightly swinging up and down. The shaking fluctuation state indicates that the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is completely hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209 between the state shown in FIG. 89 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 89 (b). The decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are partially hidden. Further, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a are arranged at positions that are not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, among the “win” and “losing” effects displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, a part of the decorative symbol is hidden on the second decorative symbol display device 209 only in the case of “win”. A part of the decorative design may be hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209 for both the “win” and “losing” effects. You may make it hide a part of.

  For the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209, or the second decorative symbol display device. The decorative symbol may be displayed at a position where a part is hidden in 209, or the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position where all is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, regarding the state in which a plurality of decorative symbols are hidden, there may be two or more symbols that are at least completely hidden, there may be two or more symbols that are at least partially hidden, and there are at least symbols that are not hidden. It may be. Moreover, you may make it be in the state which combined the decorative symbol which is hidden entirely, and the decorative symbol which is partially hidden.

  FIG. 89 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started moving to return from the target position C to the initial position A. FIG. 89 (d) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has moved vertically upward and has reached a position straddling the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. During the movement of the effect movable body 224, the effect that the display of “win” on the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 209 fades out is executed. In addition, the effect of fading out the decorative symbols displayed in a swinging manner in the entire effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c is performed. Note that the effect of fading out in the effect display area 208d and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be executed after the effect movable body 224 is moved or before the movement. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched to the next image without fading out. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, so that the effect movable body 224 moves as illustrated. Then, the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are variably displayed at positions where at least a part is covered by the moving second decorative symbol display device 209. In this example, after the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 208b are swaying, all of the decorative symbols in the right symbol display area 208c and part of the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden.

  FIG. 89 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 has moved in the horizontal right direction and vertically upward, that is, in the diagonally upper right direction, and has reached the initial position A. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same default display as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77 (a), but other displays may be performed. This display is completed when the second decorative symbol display device 209 reaches the last position (the position where it finally stops). The display may be started while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is operating. Display may be started after the operation. Further, the display may be completed during operation. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c move to the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” fluctuates. Further, since the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” has been completed, the reserved display area for special figure 1 is displayed. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold display that are displayed in such a large fluctuation manner is started during the movement (operation) of the effect movable body 224. In addition, such display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be started before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224 (when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped). In addition, the completion of the display of the decorative symbol and the hold is performed during the operation of the effect movable body 224. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be completed before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224. As described above, in this example, the effect movable body 224 moves to the area including the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the decorative pattern is large in the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Return to the original position before being displayed. The effect movable body 224 may not move to the area including the area where the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, the effect movable body 224 may return to the original position after the display of the large decorative symbol is started, or may return after the display of the large decorative symbol is completed. Note that an image that is not the image shown in FIGS. 89 (d) and 89 (e) (for example, an image in which the entire screen is completely white) may be displayed between FIGS. 89 (d) and 89 (e). .

  FIG. 90 shows Example 2 (part 7) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 90 (a) to 90 (c) are effects executed following FIG. 87 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order. 90A to 90C, the effect movable body 224 performs the same operation as the operation example (part 5) of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 90A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has started to move from the target position B to the initial position A. FIG. 90A shows a state when the effect movable body 224 moves vertically upward with respect to the upper side of the rectangular frame portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and straddles the upper side of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Show. During the movement of the effect movable body 224, the effect that the display of “losing” on the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 209 gradually disappears (fades out) is executed. In addition, the effect of fading out the decorative symbols displayed in a swinging manner in the entire effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c is performed. Note that the effect of fading out in the effect display area 208d and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be executed after the effect movable body 224 is moved or before the movement. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched to the next image without fading out.

  FIG. 90B shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 has further moved vertically upward to reach the initial position A. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same display (default display) as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77A, but other displays may be performed. . This display is completed when the second decorative symbol display device 209 reaches the last position (the position where it finally stops). The display may be started while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is operating. Display may be started after the operation. Further, the display may be completed during operation. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c move to the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" fluctuate. Further, since the reach effect relating to “Super Reach A” has been completed, the reserved display area for special figure 1 is displayed. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold display that are displayed in such a large fluctuation manner is started during the movement (operation) of the effect movable body 224. In addition, such display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be started before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224 (when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped). In addition, the completion of the display of the decorative symbol and the hold is performed during the operation of the effect movable body 224. The display of the decorative symbol and the hold may be completed before or after the operation of the effect movable body 224. As described above, in this example, the effect movable body 224 moves to the area including the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the decorative pattern is large in the center of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Return to the original position before being displayed. The effect movable body 224 may not move to the area including the area where the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, the effect movable body 224 may return to the original position after the display of the large decorative symbol is started, or may return after the display of the large decorative symbol is completed. It should be noted that an image other than the images shown in FIGS. 90A and 90B (for example, an image in which the entire screen is completely white) may be displayed between FIGS. 90A and 90B. . In addition, the restoration effect may be performed after the display of FIG. In that case, FIG. 89 (d) may be displayed after the first decorative symbol display device 208 displays the same display as FIG. 89 (e).

  FIG. 90C shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same display (default display) as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77 (a) to notify that the symbol is confirmed (variation stop). The decorative pattern “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c in the center of the rectangular display area of the first decoration symbol display device 208. It is notified that the winning / failing determination result that is the result of the variable game is out of date. The symbol is determined after the effect movable body 224 is stopped. It should be noted that the symbol may be fixed while the effect movable body 224 is operating or before the operation.

  FIG. 90 (d) is an effect executed following FIG. 88 (f) or FIG. 89 (e). FIG. 90 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 performs the same default display as “CR Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 77 (a) to notify that the symbol is confirmed (change stoppage). The decorative pattern “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c in the center of the rectangular display area of the first decoration symbol display device 208. It is notified that the winning / failing determination result that is the result of the variable game is a big hit. The symbol is determined after the effect movable body 224 is stopped. It should be noted that the symbol may be fixed while the effect movable body 224 is operating or before the operation.

  FIG. 91 shows a second example (part 8) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 91 (a) to 91 (f) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 84 (b), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 91A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are reduced and arranged in the lower right of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The center and upper area of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 are used as the effect display area 208d. In the effect display area 208d, there is an effect in which the samurai c1 sits and thinks about whether to select "Intense heat" or "Reach". An image of a fan written as “Intense Heat” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an “Intense Heat” image) is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and written as “Leach”. A book image (hereinafter may be referred to as “reach” image) is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  Also, the effect movable body 224 moves obliquely downward to the left from the initial position A, and is positioned so as to almost equally straddle both images above the “hot” image and the “reach” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Has reached. The second decorative symbol display device 209 in the frame portion of the effect movable body 224 executes an effect in which the display of the character string “CR Yoshimune” gradually disappears. The operation of deleting the character string “CR Yoshimune” may disappear gradually before the operation of the effect movable body 224 or may disappear gradually after the operation. Note that the display may be switched to the next image instantly.

  FIG. 91 (b) shows that the effect movable body 224 moves vertically downward from the position shown in FIG. 91 (a) to both the “super heat” image and the “reach” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The state which has reached the position straddling substantially evenly is shown. In this state, almost the right half of the “hot” image and the left half of the “reach” image are hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. Note that the second decorative symbol display device 209 may hide only the “extremely hot” image, or may hide only the “reach” image. When the effect movable body 224 starts to move, the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a “hot” image similar to the “hot” image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Is started. In addition, when the operation of the effect movable body 224 in the downward direction is completed, the display of the “super heat” image is displayed lightly. It should be noted that the display of the “extremely hot” image may be started before the operation of the effect movable body 224 or may be started after the operation. Note that when the operation of the effect movable body 224 in the downward direction is completed, the display of the “hot heat” image may be completed. In addition, you may switch to the image displayed next at a stretch.

  91 (c) to 91 (f) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is moved (or vibrated) to the left and right. FIG. 91 (c) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves to the left and hides most of the “hot heat” image on the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the display of the “extreme heat” image is displayed darkly. The display of the “hot heat” image may be completed while moving to the left, may be completed before moving to the left, or may be completed after moving to the left. . FIG. 91 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 that has moved to the left is stopped for a predetermined time and the most part of the “hot” image is being hidden.

  FIG. 91 (e) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 moves to the right and faces the “reach” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the image of “extreme heat” of the second decorative symbol display device 209 gradually becomes thinner.

  In FIG. 91 (f), the effect movable body 224 moves further to the right and reaches a position almost evenly straddling both the “hot” image and the “reach” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state. In this state, almost the right half of the “hot” image and the left half of the “reach” image are hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. When the effect movable body 224 starts to move, the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 starts to gradually switch from the “hot” image to the “reach” image. The display of the “reach” image may be started before the operation of the effect movable body 224 or may be started after the operation. In addition, when the operation of the effect movable body 224 in the right direction is completed, the display of the image of “hot heat” may be completed. In addition, you may switch to the image displayed next at a stretch.

  FIG. 92 shows Example 2 (part 9) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 92 (a) to 92 (e) are effects executed subsequently to FIG. 91 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  92A to 92D show a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves (or vibrates) to the left and right. FIG. 92A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves rightward and hides most of the “reach” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the image of “reach” is displayed lightly. The display of the “reach” image may be completed while moving to the right, may be completed before moving to the right, or may be completed after moving to the right. FIG. 92B shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moved in the right direction is stopped for a predetermined time and the most part of the “reach” image is kept hidden.

  FIG. 92 (c) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves to the left and faces the “hot” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the “reach” image of the second decorative symbol display device 209 gradually fades. It should be noted that the second decorative symbol display device 209 may hide only the “high heat” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208, or may hide only the “reach” image.

  In FIG. 92 (d), the effect movable body 224 moves to the left and reaches a position almost evenly straddling both the “hot” image and the “reach” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state. FIG. 92 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is stopped at a position almost evenly straddling both the “high heat” image and the “reach” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. In this state, the second decorative symbol display device 209 hides almost the right half of the “hot” image and the left half of the “reach” image. When the effect movable body 224 starts to move, the display of the thin “balloon” from the “reach” image is started in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Also, when the operation of the effect movable body 224 in the right direction is completed, the display of the “speech balloon” image is displayed lightly. Note that the display of the “balloon” image may be started before the operation of the effect movable body 224 or may be started after the operation. Note that the display of the “speech balloon” image may be completed when the operation of the effect movable body 224 in the left direction is completed. In addition, you may switch to the image displayed next at a stretch. 92D and 92E may display images other than the “reach” image and the “hot” image, such as a “speech balloon” image, or may not display the image. Good.

  FIG. 93 shows Example 2 (part 10) of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 93 (a) and 93 (b) show effects performed subsequent to FIG. 91 (b).

  In the effect shown in FIG. 93 (a), the effect movable body 224 moves slightly diagonally to the lower right from the position shown in FIG. 91 (b) to cover the entire “reach” image of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Has reached. While the effect movable body 224 is moving, an image “reach” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The display of the “reach” image may be started before the operation of the effect movable body 224 or may be started after the operation. Note that the display of the “reach” image may be completed when the operation of the effect movable body 224 in the slightly lower right direction is completed.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 93 (b), the effect movable body 224 moves slightly diagonally to the lower left from the position shown in FIG. Has reached. While the effect movable body 224 is moving, an image of “Intense heat” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. It should be noted that the display of the “extremely hot” image may be started before the operation of the effect movable body 224 or may be started after the operation. It should be noted that when the operation of the effect movable body 224 in the slightly lower left direction is completed, the display of the “super heat” image may be completed.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 94 to 100 are used only in the description of the third embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment. In the description of FIG. 9, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS. FIG. 94 shows a modification of the game board 200. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the game board 200 as viewed from the upper right. 94 and 95 is characterized in that it has three decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, 705 and a reel 707. An opening is provided between the left decorative symbol display device 701 on the left side relatively to the game board 200 and the right decorative symbol display device 705 on the right side, and a reel 707 is rotatably supported in the opening. Has been. The middle decorative symbol display device 703 is supported so as to be movable in front of the left decorative symbol display device 701, the opening in which the reel 707 is disposed, and the right decorative symbol display device 705.

  In FIG. 94 and FIG. 95 (a), the medium decorative symbol display device 703 is stopped at a position where the opening is blocked to make the reel 707 invisible, while the left and right decorative symbol display devices 703 and 705 are visible. It shows the state. In FIG. 95 (b), the middle decorative symbol display device 703 moves to the left and covers the left decorative symbol display device 703 in an invisible manner, and the reel 707 and the right decorative symbol display device 705 become visible. It shows the state.

  The left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705 are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device is used. Left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705 correspond to the left symbol display region 208a, middle symbol display region 208b, and right symbol display region 208c in the first embodiment, and the left middle right decorative symbol display device. Each of 701, 703, and 705, or a combination thereof, constitutes the effect display area 208d in the first embodiment. The left decorative symbol display device 701, the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and the right decorative symbol display device 705 display different decorative symbols, respectively. The image to be used is displayed. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the left middle right decoration symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705, as long as it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effects and various game information can be displayed. For example, other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. The reel 707 is printed with a left-pointing arrow, a right-pointing arrow, and a letter “V” at substantially equal intervals on a cylindrical surface.

  The middle decorative symbol display device 703 is disposed between the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705, the reel 707 and the front stage 244. The medium decorative symbol display device 703 is fixed to the frame-shaped effect movable body 224. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the effect movable body 224. That is, the effect movable body 224 moves to the left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The effect movable body 224 can be stopped at an arbitrary position, and the medium decorative design display device 703 fixed to the effect movable body 224 blocks the rear image completely invisible, and which decoration the displayed decorative design shows. Only a part of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705 can be shielded so that the player can identify whether the symbol is a symbol. The interior decoration symbol display device 703 may make a part of the rear image visible, or make the rear image translucent so that the player can visually recognize the rear display. In the present embodiment, the medium decorative symbol display device 703 is fixed to the effect movable body 224 and can be moved, but other decorative symbol display devices may be fixed to the effect movable member and movable. Good. In the present embodiment, one decorative symbol display device can be moved by being fixed to the effect movable body. However, a plurality of (one or more) decorative symbol display devices are fixed to the effect movable body. May be movable. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one decorative symbol display device is movable by being fixed to one effect movable body. However, a plurality of (one or more) decorative symbol display devices are provided on one effect movable member. It may be fixed.

  FIG. 96 shows an operation example of the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention. 96 (a) to 96 (l) are respectively the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705, the reel 707, the effect movable body 224, and the medium decorative symbol attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. A display device 703 is shown. 96A to 96F show the operation pattern 1 of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order. 96 (g) to (l) show the operation pattern 2 of the effect movable body 224 in this order in this order.

  In the operation pattern 1, the position where the medium decorative design display device 703 of the effect movable body 224 closes the opening and makes the reel 707 invisible is set as the initial position A (see FIG. 96A). The effect movable body 224 moves to the left toward the left decorative design display device 701 of B (see FIGS. 96B and 96C). By this movement, the left decorative symbol display device 701 is gradually covered with the middle decorative symbol display device 703 from the right side to the left side, while the reel 707 which is completely hidden by the middle decorative symbol display device 703 is on the right side. It becomes visible gradually. The right decorative design display device 705 is always visible in the operation pattern 1. At the stage of FIG. 96 (d), the effect movable body 224 moves to the left end and reaches the target position B, and the left decorative symbol display device 701 is completely shielded by the middle decorative symbol display device 703, while the reel The entire 707 becomes visible.

  Next, the effect movable body 224 moves from the target position B to the right toward the opening where the reel 707 is exposed (see FIG. 96 (e)). As a result of this movement, the left decorative symbol display device 701 that has been completely hidden by the middle decorative symbol display device 703 is gradually exposed from the left side to the right side, while the reel 707 that has been fully visible is provided. It is gradually covered with the medium decorative symbol display device 703 from the left side. At the stage of FIG. 96 (f), the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position A, and the left decorative symbol display device 701 becomes completely visible, while the entire reel 707 is shielded by the middle decorative symbol display device 703. And become invisible.

  In the operation pattern 2, the position where the medium decorative design display device 703 of the effect movable body 224 closes the opening and makes the reel 707 invisible is set as the initial position A (see FIG. 96G), and the target position from the initial position A is set. The effect movable body 224 moves rightward toward the right decorative symbol display device 705 of C (see FIGS. 96 (h) and (i)). By this movement, the right decorative symbol display device 705 is gradually covered with the middle decorative symbol display device 703 from the left side to the right side, while the reel 707 that is completely hidden by the middle decorative symbol display device 703 is left. It becomes visible gradually. The left decorative symbol display device 701 is always visible in the operation pattern 2. At the stage of FIG. 96 (j), the effect movable body 224 moves to the right end and reaches the target position C, and the right decorative symbol display device 705 is completely shielded by the medium decorative symbol display device 703, while the reel The entire 707 becomes visible.

  Next, the effect movable body 224 moves from the target position C to the left toward the opening through which the reel 707 is exposed (see FIG. 96 (k)). By this movement, the right decorative symbol display device 705 which has been entirely hidden by the middle decorative symbol display device 703 is gradually exposed from the right side to the left side. It is gradually covered with the medium decorative symbol display device 703 from the right side. In the stage of FIG. 96 (l), the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position A, and the right decorative symbol display device 705 becomes completely visible, while the entire reel 707 is shielded by the medium decorative symbol display device 703. And become invisible.

  Next, Examples 1-4 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 shows Example 1 of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 97 shows effects performed by the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, 705 and the reel 707 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. 97 (a) to 97 (j) are respectively the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705, the reel 707, the effect movable body 224, and the medium decorative symbol attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. A display device 703 is shown. 97A to 97J are arranged in time order in this order.

  In FIG. 97A, when the special figure changing game is finished, “decoration 4” is displayed on the left decorative symbol display device 701, “decoration 8” is displayed on the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and “decoration 5” is displayed on the right decorative symbol display device 705. ”Is displayed in a stopped state, and it is indicated that the determination result of the special figure variation game is out of date. In the vicinity of the upper right corner of the display area of the medium decorative symbol display device 703, two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 having two small circular display areas are provided above and below. The upper square display area is the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 for the special figure 1, and the lower square display area is the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2 for the special figure 2. In the fourth symbol, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color, for example, during the special symbol variation game, and is in a state of being painted in the predetermined color, for example, during the symbol stop display. In this example and subsequent examples, the fourth symbol in the special figure variable game is white in the square display area, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 97 (a), since the special figure variation game of both special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not executed, both of the four fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. Yes. In this example, the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are always displayed at a fixed position regardless of the gaming state and the type of effect. The effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A shown in FIG. In this example, one decorative symbol may be displayed on each decorative symbol display device (for example, FIGS. 97 (a) to (c), FIGS. 97 (h) to (j)). The decorative symbols may be displayed on the same decorative symbol display device (for example, FIG. 97 (f)). The same applies to the decorative symbol display apparatus in other examples.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. On the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner by images (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing) in which the ornaments 1 to 10 move sequentially from top to bottom. . Since the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 is displayed in white in the square display area in the figure, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2, since the special figure 2 variable game is not executed, the square display area is filled with a predetermined color.

  FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which the reach effect is executed in the special figure 1 variable game. The decoration 3 is stopped and displayed on each of the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705. In addition, the decorative decoration display device 703 displays decorative symbols in an image (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing) in which the decorations 1 to 10 sequentially move from top to bottom.

  FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and arranged in the upper left part of the display area of the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Most of the display area of the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705 is used as an effect display area. The left decorative symbol display device 701 displays a preview image indicating the possibility of selecting “Super Reach A”. The right decorative symbol display device 705 displays a preview image indicating the possibility of selecting “losing”. On the medium decorative symbol display device 703, there is an effect that the samurai c1 sits down and decides "Which one?" To select "Super Reach A" or "Lose". Note that the display shown in FIG. 97 (c) gradually changes to the display shown in FIG. 97 (d). Note that the image shown in FIG. 97 (c) may be instantaneously switched to the display shown in FIG. 97 (d). In this example, after the decoration 3 stopped and displayed on each of the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705 is erased almost simultaneously, the notice image of “Super Reach A” and the notice image of “Lose” are displayed almost simultaneously. The It should be noted that while the decoration 3 is being erased, the notice image of “Super Reach A” and the notice image of “Lose” may be displayed. Also, the erasure timing of the decoration 3 displayed on the left and right decorative design display devices 701 and 705 may not be the same, and the left decorative design display device may be erased before the right decorative design display device, The reverse may be possible. The same applies to the display timing of the “Super Reach A” notice image and the “Lose” notice image. The same applies to the left and right decorative symbol display devices in other examples.

  97 (e) to (i) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 has moved in the operation pattern 1. In FIG. 97 (e), the effect movable body 224 moves to the left and the middle decorative symbol display device 703 gradually hides the image of “super reach A” displayed in the display area of the left decorative symbol display device 701. It shows a state that is going. An image in which the samurai c1 is standing well is displayed lightly on the medium decorative symbol display device 703. This image is an effect that is displayed only when the transition is not made to “super reach A”. It should be noted that an effect may be performed in which the main image is displayed when shifting to “super reach A”. In this case, even if an image (for example, an image of Samurai c1 in FIG. 98 (f) or an image of “Super Reach A” in FIG. 97 (d)) is displayed in which the main image and / or the “out of” image is different. The effect movable body 224 may start to move again, and the display shown in FIG. 98 (f) may be performed. The same applies to the left middle right decorative symbol display device in other examples. While the effect movable body 224 is operating, the image of FIG. 97D is gradually deleted, and the image of FIG. 97E is gradually displayed. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched from the screen display shown in FIG. 97 (d) to the screen display shown in FIG. 97 (e). In FIG. 97 (e), the reel 707 is exposed as the effect movable body 224 moves leftward. The reel 707 rotates and displays a predetermined position (symbol).

  In FIG. 97 (f), the effect movable body 224 moves to the left end and reaches the target position B, and the image of “Super Reach A” on the left decorative symbol display device 701 is completely displayed on the middle decorative symbol display device 703. It shows a shielded state. At this time, the image of “super reach A” on the left decorative symbol display device 701 is gradually erased. On the other hand, the entire reel 707 becomes visible. An image in which the samurai c1 stands up vigorously is displayed darkly on the middle decorative symbol display device 703 that shields the left decorative symbol display device 701. Further, the rotation of the reel 707 is stopped, and a right arrow is stopped and displayed so as to indicate the “losing” image displayed on the right decorative symbol display device 705. Note that the image of “Super Reach A” displayed on the left decorative symbol display device 701 may be erased before or after passing through the medium decorative symbol display device 703. Further, it may be displayed as it is. In addition, although the interior decoration symbol display device 703 passes over the image of the preview display “Super Reach A” that has not been selected, it may not pass. On the middle decorative symbol display device, the left middle right decorative symbol is displayed in a state of fluctuation.

  FIG. 97 (g) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is moving from the target position B toward the initial position A. On the left decorative symbol display device 701 exposed as the effect movable body 224 moves, the decorative symbol in the stopped state can be gradually recognized. On the other hand, the reel 707 gradually becomes invisible as the effect movable body 224 moves. The images on the middle right decorative symbol display devices 703 and 705 gradually fade. When the effect is switched from the state shown in FIG. 97 (f) to the state shown in FIG. 97 (g), the screen display shown in FIG. 97 (f) gradually disappears and the screen shown in FIG. 97 (g) is gradually displayed. It may be performed as follows. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched from the screen display shown in FIG. 97 (f) to the screen display shown in FIG. 97 (g). Further, the display may be started at the same timing as the decorative symbol display of the right middle decorative symbol display devices 703 and 705 without displaying the image on the left decorative symbol display device 701. In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (f), the left decorative symbol is displayed on the left decorative symbol display device in a state of fluctuation fluctuation, and the left, middle and right decorative symbols are displayed on the middle decorative symbol display device in a state of fluctuation fluctuation. It is displayed. Note that the left and right decorative symbols may not be displayed during the operation of the effect movable body. Also, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a swinging manner on the right decorative symbol display device.

  In FIG. 97 (h), the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position A and stops. Reference numeral 705 shows a state in which the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed lightly. The image of “decoration 3” on the left decorative symbol display device 701 gradually changes from a light display to a dark display in accordance with the moving speed of the right decorative symbol display device 705. In other words, the “decoration 3” image of the left decorative symbol display device 701 has a longer time until display completion than the display completion time of the images of the middle right decorative symbol display devices 703 and 705. The display speed of the “decoration 3” image on the left decorative symbol display device 701 is gradually changed from a light display to a dark display in accordance with the moving speed of the right decorative symbol display device 705. That is, for the “decoration 3” image on the left decorative design display device 701, the display completion time is the same as the display completion time of the images on the middle right decorative design display devices 703 and 705, and the left decorative design display device 701 is first displayed. "Decoration 3" may have been displayed. Conversely, the display of “decoration 3” of the left decorative symbol display device 701 may be completed later. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1, since the special figure 1 variable game is in progress, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color. The reel 707 may be in a state where the stop position is maintained as it is, or may be returned to a predetermined reference position (default position).

  In FIG. 97 (i), the decorative pattern “decoration 3” is displayed on the left decorative symbol display device 701, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is displayed on the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is displayed on the right decorative symbol display device 705. It is darkly displayed. The display timing of these decorative symbols is such that three decorative symbols are completely displayed while the right decorative symbol display device 705 is moving, but three or any two may be displayed almost simultaneously. All display completions may be inconsistent, or one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705 may complete the display first. Further, it may be before or after the moving operation of the right decorative symbol display device 705.

  In FIG. 97 (j), the decorative pattern “decoration 3” is stopped on the left decorative symbol display device 701, “decoration 2” is displayed on the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped on the right decorative symbol display device 705. A state in which it is informed that the determination result of the special figure variable game is out of place is shown. The two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color because they are not in the special figure variation game.

  Next, Example 2 of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 shows effects performed by the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, 705 and the reel 707 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. 98 (a) to 98 (j) are respectively the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705, the reel 707, the effect movable body 224, and the medium decorative symbol attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. A display device 703 is shown. 98A to 98J are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 98 (a) shows that after the special figure changing game is finished, “decoration 4” is displayed on the left decorative symbol display device 701, “decoration 8” is displayed on the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and “decoration 5” is displayed on the right decorative symbol display device 705. ”Is displayed in a stopped state, and it is indicated that the determination result of the special figure variation game is out of date. In the vicinity of the upper right corner of the display area of the medium decorative symbol display device 703, two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 having two small circular display areas are provided above and below. The upper square display area is the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 for the special figure 1, and the lower square display area is the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2 for the special figure 2. In the fourth symbol, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color, for example, during the special symbol variation game, and is in a state of being painted in the predetermined color, for example, during the symbol stop display. In the state shown in FIG. 98 (a), since the special figure variation games of both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are not executed, both of the four fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. Yes. In this example, the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are always displayed at a fixed position regardless of the gaming state and the type of effect. The effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A shown in FIG.

  FIG. 98 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. On the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner by images (indicated by downward arrows in the drawing) in which the ornaments 1 to 10 move sequentially from top to bottom. . Since the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 is displayed in white in the square display area in the figure, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2, since the special figure 2 variable game is not executed, the square display area is filled with a predetermined color.

  FIG. 98 (c) shows a state in which the reach effect is executed in the special figure 1 variable game. The decoration 3 is stopped and displayed on each of the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705. In addition, the decorative decoration display device 703 displays decorative symbols in an image (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing) in which the decorations 1 to 10 sequentially move from top to bottom.

  FIG. 98 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and arranged in the upper left part of the display area of the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Most of the display area of the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705 is used as an effect display area. The left decorative symbol display device 701 displays a preview image indicating the possibility of selecting “Super Reach A”. The right decorative symbol display device 705 displays a preview image indicating the possibility of selecting “losing”. On the medium decorative symbol display device 703, there is an effect that the samurai c1 sits down and decides "Which one?" To select "Super Reach A" or "Lose". It should be noted that the display shown in FIG. 98 (d) is gradually changed from the image shown in FIG. 98 (c).

  98 (e) to (i) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 has moved in the operation pattern 2. In FIG. 98 (e), the effect movable body 224 moves to the right, and the middle decorative symbol display device 703 gradually hides the “losing” image displayed in the display area of the right decorative symbol display device 705. Indicates the state. The medium decorative symbol display device 703 displays a light image of the samurai c1 standing well. This image is an effect displayed only when the result of the special figure 1 variable game shifts to “super reach A”. While the effect movable body 224 is operating, the image in FIG. 98D is gradually deleted, and the image in FIG. 98E is gradually displayed. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched from the screen display shown in FIG. 98 (d) to the screen display shown in FIG. 98 (e). In FIG. 98 (e), the reel 707 is exposed as the effect movable body 224 moves in the right direction. The reel 707 rotates and displays a predetermined position (symbol).

  In FIG. 98 (f), the effect movable body 224 moves to the right end and reaches the target position C, and the image of “losing” on the right decorative design display device 705 is completely shielded by the middle decorative design display device 703. Shows the state. At this time, the “lost” image of the right decorative design display device 705 is gradually deleted. On the other hand, the entire reel 707 becomes visible. An image in which the samurai c1 stands up vigorously is displayed darkly on the middle decorative symbol display device 703 that shields the right decorative symbol display device 705. Further, the rotation of the reel 707 stops and the left arrow is stopped and displayed so as to indicate the “super reach A” image displayed on the left decorative symbol display device 701. Note that the “losing” image displayed on the right decorative symbol display device 705 may be erased before or after passing through the middle decorative symbol display device 703. Further, it may be displayed as it is. It should be noted that the medium decorative symbol display device 703 passes over the image of the notice display “lost” that has not been selected, but it may not pass.

  FIG. 98G shows a state where the effect movable body 224 is moving from the target position C toward the initial position A. A state in which no image is displayed on the right decorative symbol display device 705 exposed as the effect movable body 224 moves is visible. On the other hand, the reel 707 gradually becomes invisible as the effect movable body 224 moves. The images on the left middle decorative symbol display devices 701 and 703 gradually fade. When the effect is switched from the state shown in FIG. 98 (f) to the state shown in FIG. 98 (g), the screen display shown in FIG. 98 (f) gradually disappears and the screen display shown in FIG. 98 (g) is gradually displayed. It may be performed as follows. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched from the screen display shown in FIG. 98 (f) to the screen display shown in FIG. 98 (g). Alternatively, the display may be started at the same timing as the image display of the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 703 without displaying the image on the right decorative symbol display device 705.

  In FIG. 98 (h), the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position A and stops, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705 function as one effect display area. On the left decorative design display device 701, a samurai c1 holds a sword and stares rightward, and on the right decorative design display device 705, the samurai c2 pulls out a sword and stares leftward. An image including the character string “Yoshimune vs Kengou” is displayed in a thin state on the central medium decorative symbol display device 703. These effects are gradually displayed immediately after the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position A. The decorative symbol and the fourth symbol which are changing in the middle decorative symbol display device 703 are darkly displayed from the beginning. FIG. 98 (i) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position A and the image starting from FIG. 98 (h) is gradually darkened and completed as a clear image.

  In FIG. 98 (j), an effect in which a battle between two samurai c1 and c2 is started using the full screen of the left, middle and right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703 and 705 is executed. In this example, a state where one samurai c1 is proceeding to the right is displayed using two display areas of the left middle decorative symbol display devices 701 and 703. In addition, the image of the samurai c2 displayed on the right decorative design display device 705 may be displayed when the image of the samurai c1 is displayed on the left decorative design display device 701. The image of the samurai c2 displayed on the right decorative design display device 705 may be displayed when the image of the samurai c1 is displayed on the medium decorative design display device 703. In this case, each decorative symbol display device is surrounded by a frame, but may be in a state where at least a part or all of the decorative symbol display device is not surrounded. In this case, the images displayed in the two display areas of the left middle decorative symbol display devices 701 and 703 do not overlap. It should be noted that an image at least partially overlapping may be displayed in the two display areas of the left middle decorative symbol display devices 701 and 703. The same applies to the other embodiments.

  Next, Example 3 of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 shows the effects executed by the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, 705 and the reel 707 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment. 99 (a) to 99 (i) are respectively the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705, the reel 707, the effect movable body 224, and the medium decorative symbol attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. A display device 703 is shown. 99 (a) to 99 (i) are effects executed subsequently to FIG. 98 (j), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  In FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (d), a battle effect by two samurai c1 and c2 is executed using the full screen of the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705. In FIG. 99 (a), a state in which the samurai c1 is displayed in the display area of the medium decorative symbol display device 701 and further proceeds to the right is displayed. A notice image c3 indicating that the expression of the samurai c2 has changed is displayed around the forehead of the samurai c2. The advance notice image c3 suggests “winning” of the samurai c1, not the samurai c2.

  In FIG. 99 (b), an effect image representing the collision between the sword and the sword is displayed using the full screen of the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705. In FIG. 99 (c), a state where the image of the samurai x2 is displayed in the display area of the left decorative symbol display device 701 after the battle is over and the image of the samurai c1 is displayed in the display region of the right decorative symbol display device 705 is shown. Show. An image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed on the medium decorative symbol display device 703. As an image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136, a meter image indicating a pressing reception period is displayed in the display area of the interior decoration symbol display device 703 together with the image of the chance button 136. The remaining period of the reception period is indicated by the length of the horizontal bar in the meter. The shorter the horizontal bar length, the shorter the remaining period. In FIG. 99 (d), a display is displayed in which the remaining period is no longer displayed on the meter after the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 136 started in FIG. 99 (c) ends.

  99 (e) to 99 (i) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 has moved in the operation pattern 1. FIG. The moving operation of the effect movable body 224 is started when either the depression of the chance button 136 by the player or the end of the reception period is satisfied. FIG. 99 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 moves to the left, and the middle decorative symbol display device 703 gradually hides the image in the display area of the left decorative symbol display device 701. The image of samurai c2 on the left decorative symbol display device 701 gradually fades and disappears as the effect movable body 224 moves to the left, and the image of the samurai c2 on the center ornament symbol display device 703 appears on the left side of the effect movable body 224. It gradually darkens as you move in the direction. The image of samurai c2 is also displayed lightly on the medium decorative symbol display device 703. In FIG. 99 (e), the reel 707 is exposed as the effect movable body 224 moves leftward. The reel 707 has already stopped rotating, and an image of the letter “V” reminding of victory can be visually recognized. This image is displayed only when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the image of samurai c1 is displayed lightly on the right decorative symbol display device 705.

  In FIG. 99 (f), the effect movable body 224 moves to the left end and reaches the target position B, and the image of the samurai c2 of the left decorative symbol display device 701 is completely shielded by the middle decorative symbol display device 703. Indicates the state. On the other hand, the entire reel 707 becomes visible. An image of the samurai c2 standing in a state where the samurai c2 is likely to fall is displayed darkly on the middle decorative symbol display device 703 that shields the left decorative symbol display device 701. Further, the “V” -shaped image of the reel 707 is completely exposed. In addition, the image of samurai c1 is displayed darkly on the right decorative design display device 705. The left and right middle decorative symbols are displayed in a swinging manner by the decoration 3 respectively.

  In FIG. 99 (g), the effect movable body 224 moves to the left end and reaches the target position B, and the image of the left decorative symbol display device 701 is completely shielded by the middle decorative symbol display device 703. Is shown. An image in which the samurai c2 is tilted is displayed darkly on the middle decorative symbol display device 703 that shields the left decorative symbol display device 701. Further, the “V” -shaped image of the reel 707 is completely exposed. In addition, the image of the winning samurai c1 is displayed darkly on the right decorative symbol display device 705. The left and right middle decorative symbols are displayed in a swinging manner by the decoration 3 respectively.

  FIG. 99 (h) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is moving from the target position B toward the initial position A. On the left decorative design display device 701 that is exposed as the effect movable body 224 moves, the decorative design in the state of fluctuation can be gradually recognized. On the other hand, the reel 707 gradually becomes invisible as the effect movable body 224 moves. The images of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705 are gradually faded. When the effect is switched from the state shown in FIG. 99 (g) to the state shown in FIG. 99 (h), the screen display shown in FIG. 99 (g) gradually disappears, and the screen display shown in FIG. It may be performed as follows. Note that the image may be instantaneously switched from the screen display shown in FIG. 99 (g) to the screen display shown in FIG. 99 (h). Further, the display may be started at the same timing as the decorative symbol display of the right middle decorative symbol display devices 703 and 705 without displaying the image on the left decorative symbol display device 701.

  In FIG. 99 (i), the decorative pattern of “decoration 3” on the left decorative symbol display device 701, “decoration 3” on the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and “decorative 3” on the right decorative symbol display device 705 are in a swinging state. Indicates the displayed state. The image of “decoration 3” on the left decorative symbol display device 701 gradually changes from a light display to a dark display in accordance with the moving speed of the right decorative symbol display device 705. In other words, the “decoration 3” image of the left decorative symbol display device 701 has a longer time until display completion than the display completion time of the images of the middle right decorative symbol display devices 703 and 705. The display speed of the “decoration 3” image on the left decorative symbol display device 701 is gradually changed from a light display to a dark display in accordance with the moving speed of the right decorative symbol display device 705. That is, for the “decoration 3” image on the left decorative design display device 701, the display completion time is the same as the display completion time of the images on the middle right decorative design display devices 703 and 705, and the left decorative design display device 701 is first displayed. "Decoration 3" may have been displayed. Conversely, the display of “decoration 3” of the left decorative symbol display device 701 may be completed later. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1, since the special figure 1 variable game is in progress, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color. The reel 707 may be in a state where the stop position is maintained as it is, or may be returned to a predetermined reference position (default position).

  Next, Example 4 of a specific effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 shows effects performed by the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, 705 and the reel 707 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment. 100 (a) to 100 (g) are the left and right decorative symbol display devices 701 and 705, the reel 707, the effect movable body 224, and the medium decorative symbol attached to the effect movable body 224 in the game board 200 shown in FIG. A display device 703 is shown. FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 99 (i), and are arranged in time series in this order. 100 (c) to 100 (g) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 99 (d), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  In FIG. 100A, the decorative pattern “decoration 3” is displayed on the left decorative symbol display device 701, “decoration 3” is displayed on the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and “decoration 3” is displayed on the right decorative symbol display device 705. It is darkly displayed. The display timing of these decorative symbols is such that three decorative symbols are completely displayed while the right decorative symbol display device 705 is moving, but three or any two may be displayed almost simultaneously. All display completions may be inconsistent, or one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705 may complete the display first. Further, it may be before or after the moving operation of the right decorative symbol display device 705.

  In FIG. 98B, the decorative pattern “decoration 3” is stopped on the left decorative symbol display device 701, “decoration 3” is displayed on the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped on the right decorative symbol display device 705. A state in which it is informed that the determination result of the special figure variable game is a big hit is shown. The two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color because they are not in the special figure variation game.

  In FIG. 100C, the image of the samurai c2 is displayed lightly on the left decorative design display device 701, and the image of the samurai c1 is displayed lightly on the right decorative design display device 705. In the middle decorative symbol display device 703, only the variable display of the reduced decorative symbol and the fourth symbol are displayed. Note that another image display (for example, “losing”) may be displayed. Samurai c1's expression suggests losing. Further, the effect movable body 224 stops at the initial position A and does not operate. For this reason, the reel 707 cannot be visually recognized. FIG. 100 (d) shows a state where the image shown in FIG. 100 (c) is gradually darkened. In addition, “decoration 2” is stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b that has been fluctuating, and the left and right middle ornament symbols are displayed in a swinging manner. The effect movable body 224 may be operated.

  In FIG. 100 (e), an image of the samurai c2 who has won the game is displayed on the left decorative symbol display device 701, and an image of the samurai c1 who has been defeated by the game is displayed on the right decorative symbol display device 705. . On the medium decorative symbol display device 703, only the fluctuation variation display of the reduced decorative symbol and the fourth symbol are displayed.

In FIG. 100 (f), the decoration pattern of “decoration 3” on the left decoration symbol display device 701, “decoration 2” on the middle ornament symbol display device 703, and “decoration 3” on the right ornament symbol display device 705 are in a swinging state. It is darkly displayed. The display timing of these decorative symbols is such that three decorative symbols are completely displayed while the right decorative symbol display device 705 is moving, but three or any two may be displayed almost simultaneously. All display completions may be inconsistent, or one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display devices 701, 703, and 705 may complete the display first. Further, it may be before or after the moving operation of the right decorative symbol display device 705.
It should be noted that even if the determination result is a win, an operation for “losing” may be performed. In that case, you may make it perform a resurrection effect (effect in which a big hit symbol aligns) until a symbol is decided (for example, between FIG. 100 (e) and FIG. 100 (f) etc.).

  In FIG. 100 (g), the decorative pattern “decoration 3” is displayed on the left decorative symbol display device 701, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is displayed on the middle decorative symbol display device 703, and the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is displayed on the right decorative symbol display device 705. A state in which it is informed that the determination result of the special figure variable game is out of place is shown. The two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color because they are not in the special figure variation game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 101 to 104 are used only in the description of the fourth embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment. In the explanation of Fig. 10, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs. FIG. 101 shows a modification of the game board 200. 102 to 104 are perspective views of the game board 200 as viewed from the upper right. 101 and 102 is characterized in that it has one decorative symbol display device 713 and three reels 711, 717, and 715. The effect device 206 of the game board 200 is provided with a laterally long opening, and three reels 711, 717, and 715 are rotatably supported in the opening. The decorative symbol display device 713 is supported so as to be movable in front of the opening in which the reels 711, 717, and 715 are disposed.

  101 and 102 (a) show a state in which the decorative symbol display device 713 is stopped at a position where the front surface of the middle reel 717 is blocked, and the middle reel 717 is not visible. On the other hand, the left and right reels 711 and 715 are visible. FIG. 102B shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 713 moves to the left to cover the left reel 713 in an invisible manner, and the middle right reels 717 and 715 are visible. .

  The left middle right reels 711, 717, and 715 are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, a reel (drum) type display device is used. Each of the left middle right reels 711, 717, and 715 has a decorative pattern of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” and a design for presentation such as a left-pointing arrow, a right-pointing arrow, and a letter “V” on the cylindrical surface. Printed at even intervals.

  As the decorative symbol display device 713, for example, a liquid crystal display device is used, and is arranged between the left middle right reels 711, 717, 715 and the front stage 244. The decorative symbol display device 713 is fixed to the frame-shaped effect movable body 224. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the effect movable body 224. That is, the effect movable body 224 moves to the left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The effect movable body 224 can be stopped at an arbitrary position, and the decorative design display device 713 fixed to the effect movable body 224 shields the rear image completely invisible or which decorative design is displayed. It is possible to block only a part of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the left middle right reels 711, 717, and 715 to such an extent that the player can identify whether or not. Note that the decorative symbol display device 713 may make a part of the rear image visible, or make the rear image semi-transparent so that the player can visually recognize the rear display.

  The effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 103 is characterized in that it has one decorative symbol display device 713 and two reels 711 and 715. The effect device 206 of the game board 200 is provided with two openings in the horizontal direction, and left and right reels 711 and 715 are rotatably supported in the two openings, respectively. The decorative symbol display device 713 is supported so as to be movable in front of the opening where the left and right reels 711 and 715 are arranged.

  FIG. 103A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 713 is stopped at a position where it covers the front surface of the area between the left and right reels 711 and 715. On the other hand, the left and right reels 711 and 715 are visible. In FIG. 103 (b), the decorative symbol display device 713 moves to the left to cover the left reel 713 in an invisible manner, and the area between the left and right reels 711 and 715 and the right reel 715 become visible. It shows the state.

  The left and right reels 711 and 715 are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, reel (drum) type display devices are used. On each of the left and right reels 711 and 715, decorative designs of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”, left-pointing arrows, right-pointing arrows, and “V” -shaped effects symbols are printed at substantially equal intervals on the cylindrical surface. Has been.

  For example, a 7-segment display device is used as the decorative symbol display device 713 and is disposed between the left and right reels 711 and 715 and the front stage 244. The decorative symbol display device 713 is fixed to the frame-shaped effect movable body 224. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the effect movable body 224. That is, the effect movable body 224 moves to the left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The effect movable body 224 can be stopped at an arbitrary position, and the decorative design display device 713 fixed to the effect movable body 224 shields the rear image completely invisible, and which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. It is possible to block only a part of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the left and right reels 711 and 715 to the extent that the player can identify whether or not. Note that the decorative symbol display device 713 may make a part of the rear image visible, or make the rear image semi-transparent so that the player can visually recognize the rear display. In addition, behind the decorative symbol display device 713, a display device such as a decorative portion, a wall portion, or a liquid crystal may be provided.

  104 has a feature in that it has three left middle right decorative symbol display devices 721, 723, and 725 and two left and right reels 727 and 728. . The effect device 206 of the game board 200 has two openings in the horizontal direction, and left and right reels 727 and 728 are rotatably supported in the two openings, respectively. The left decorative symbol display device 721 is supported so as to be movable in the left direction in front of the opening where the left reel 727 is disposed. The right decorative symbol display device 725 is supported so as to be movable in the right direction in front of the opening where the right reel 728 is disposed. The interior decoration symbol display device 723 is fixedly disposed between the openings in which the left reel 727 and the right reel 728 are disposed.

  FIG. 104A shows a state in which the left and right decorative symbol display devices 721 and 725 are stopped at positions where they cover the front surface of the area between the left and right reels 727 and 728, respectively. In FIG. 104B, the left decorative symbol display device 721 moves to the left and the left reel 727 becomes visible, and the right decorative symbol display device 725 moves to the right and the right reel 728 becomes visible. It shows the state.

  The left and right reels 727 and 728 are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, reel (drum) type display devices are used. Each of the left and right reels 727 and 728 is printed with a decoration pattern of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”, a left-pointing arrow, a right-pointing arrow, and a “V” character on the cylindrical surface at almost equal intervals. Has been.

For example, a 7-segment display device is used as the left middle right decorative symbol display devices 721, 723, and 725. The left and right decorative symbol display devices 721 and 725 are disposed between the left and right reels and the front stage 244. The left decorative symbol display device 721 is fixed to a frame-shaped effect movable body 224a. The right decorative symbol display device 725 is fixed to the frame-shaped effect movable body 224b. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the effect movable bodies 224a and 224b. That is, each of the effect movable bodies 224a and 224b moves to the left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. Each of the effect movable bodies 224a and 224b can be stopped at an arbitrary position, and the left and right decorative symbol display devices 721 and 725 fixed to each of the effect movable bodies 224a and 224b shield the rear image completely invisible. It is possible to block only a part of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the left and right reels 727 and 728 to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is.
The reel described in the third and fourth embodiments may be a decorative symbol display device or a display device such as a liquid crystal display.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second to fourth embodiments described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 49 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A first display means (for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least display;
A second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209) capable of at least performing display;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is capable of at least moving from the first position (for example, the initial position A) to the second position (for example, the target position B) (hereinafter referred to as the first movement). And
The second display means is capable of at least moving from the first position to a third position (for example, a target position C) (hereinafter referred to as second movement),
The first movement is performed at least along a first route (for example, the first route shown in FIG. 73),
The second movement is performed at least along a second route (for example, the second route shown in FIG. 74),
The first route is a route different from the second route,
At least a part of the second display means in the second position hides at least a part of the display by the first display means;
At least a part of the second display means in the third position is for hiding at least a part of the display by the first display means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the second display device moves along a different route, and after the movement, a part of the display of the first display device is hidden, so that an unexpected operation can be performed. In some cases, a variety of effects can be performed. Further, by hiding a part of the display, the player may be more focused on the display device, and the interest of the game may be improved.
Here, the hidden display includes a decorative symbol, a notice display (such as a notice of the change, a pre-read notice, a normal figure change display, etc.), a hold display, and the like.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second position and the third position are the same position (for example, the target position B shown in FIGS. 80 and 81).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the second position and the third position are the same position, an unexpected operation can be performed, and the player may be more focused on the display device.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
Provided with a third display means (for example, a third decorative symbol display device) capable of executing at least display;
The second display means at least moves from the first position to a fourth position (for example, a target position D in the display area of the third decorative symbol display device) (hereinafter referred to as a third movement). Is something that can be done,
The third movement is through a third route (for example, the same as the second route shown in FIG. 74),
At least a part of the second display unit at the fourth position is configured to hide at least a part of the display by the third display unit.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the third display device is provided and the second display device hides a part thereof, there are cases where more various effects can be performed.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The size of the first display means is the first size,
The size of the second display means is the second size,
The first size is different from the second size.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the sizes of the first display unit and the second display unit are different, there are cases where more various effects can be performed.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second display means that has performed the first movement moves from the second position to the first position when a first condition (for example, reception of a predetermined command) is satisfied. And
The second display means that has performed the second movement moves from the third position to the first position when a second condition (for example, reception of a predetermined command) is satisfied. It is characterized by being.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, when the condition is satisfied (command reception), the original position is restored, so that it may be easy to confirm that normal operation is being performed.

In the pachinko machine 100,
The first condition and the second condition may be the same (the conditions for returning depending on the route are the same), and the first condition and the second condition are different (the conditions for returning depending on the route are different). ). Examples of the return command include a change start command, a change stop command, and a control command for returning to the initial position. By doing so, it returns to the original position when the condition is satisfied (command reception), so it may be easy to confirm that normal operation is being performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the first display of the display by the first display unit may be displayed at a position not hidden by the second display unit. As the first display, there are a fourth symbol, a decorative symbol, a hold display (hold icon, variable icon) and the like. Since the first display is not hidden by the second display means, it may be possible to prevent the player from having trouble.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the initial position of the second display means may be a first position, and the second position may be a position after movement. By doing so, when the initial position moves to the second position as the first position, it is possible to operate on different routes, and thus various effects may be performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the initial position of the second display means may be the second position or the third position. The first position is the position after the movement, and the initial position is the second position or the third position, and when returning from the first position, the first position can be operated. For this reason, there are cases where various effects can be performed.

The first display unit and the second display unit may be operable at least. In addition, at least the second display means may be operable at least. Further, the first display means may not operate, and only the second display means may be operable. Furthermore, there may be a plurality of (two or more) operable display means. When there are a plurality of display means, it is sufficient that there is at least one display means that does not operate.
Note that the upper end of the first display unit and the lower end of the second display unit may not be provided in parallel. The first route may be a part of the second route. The first route may be a part of the second route.
The first route may not be included in a part of the second route. The second route may not be included in a part of the first route.
Note that the movable body (the production movable body 224 and other production movable bodies) may be provided at a position where at least some of the plurality of display means are hidden, and can be moved to a position where at least some of the plurality of display means are hidden. There may be.
Note that “cover” in this case may mean “hide”. The reverse is also possible.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 105 to 113 are used only in the description of the fifth embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment is used. In the explanation of Fig. 10, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs. FIG. 105 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 105 is equipped with an effect movable body 224 having a moving operation different from that of the effect movable body 224 in the second to fourth embodiments. Since the constituent elements other than the effect movable body 224 are the same as the constituent elements of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 58, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted. Although not shown in FIG. 105, a shutter 246 is also provided.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the present embodiment are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and are configured by a liquid crystal display device. The first decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area. 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, and 208 d can be freely changed within, for example, a horizontally-long rectangular display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it is comprised so that various effects and various game information can be displayed. For example, other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. .

  In this example, the first decorative symbol display device 208 is fixed to the game board 200 so as not to move, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is fixed to be movable. The display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 has a larger area than the display region of the second decorative symbol display device 209. In the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area b is arranged near the center of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol is displayed at a position not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, a holding display area a is arranged near the lower right corner of the rectangular display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  The effect movable body 224 has a configuration in which a second decorative symbol display device 209 is arranged inside a horizontally long rectangular frame-shaped portion. In the initial state, the effect movable body 224 has its frame-like portion stopped at an initial position (origin position) above and outside the first decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 105, the effect movable body 224 moves slightly downward, and the lower long side portion of the rectangular frame-like portion enters the display area from the upper long side of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state of being out. Here, the initial position of the effect movable body 224 may be a position that does not overlap with a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208, or may be a position that partially overlaps as shown in FIG. Good. The initial position here refers to a position that is set when no change is made after the power is turned on, for example.

  The effect movable body 224 is a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208 by a predetermined drive system (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a display screen front plane). It can move in the vertical direction. Although the drive system of the production movable body 224 can take various configurations, the drive system of this example includes a movement guide groove 224b provided to face the vertical direction when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in an island facility. And a moving part 224a that is guided by the moving guide groove 224b and is movable in the vertical direction. The movement guide groove 224b has one end of the groove located near the upper long side of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and is equal to or more than the distance between the upper and lower long sides of the rectangular frame portion of the effect movable body 224. The other end is located at a location vertically apart by the length. The effect movable body 224 has a frame-like portion on the back side connected to the moving portion 224a. The moving part 224a can be moved to an arbitrary position of the moving guide groove 224b by a driving mechanism (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 200. When the moving unit 224a is positioned at the other end of the moving guide groove 224b, the second decorative symbol display device 209 can be positioned outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the moving unit 224a is moved to the moving guide groove. When positioned at one end of 224b, the entire second decorative symbol display device 209 can be positioned within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, Example 1 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing. In this example, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 perform a notice notification effect of the determination result of the special figure variation game. FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b) show a notification notification effect with a low jackpot reliability, and FIGS. 106 (c) and 106 (d) show a notification notification effect with a high jackpot reliability.

  FIG. 106 (a) shows a state where the reach effect is started during the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a battle between the samurai c1 and the samurai c2 is performed as a background effect. “Decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, a decorative symbol variation display (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is performed. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped at a position outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and above the display region (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an initial position). In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image including the character string “reach” is displayed.

  FIG. 106 (b) also shows a state in which the reach effect is started during the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a battle between the samurai c1 and the samurai c2 is performed as a background effect. “Decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but an image including the character string “reach” is displayed, and the variation indication is not visible to the player. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped at the initial position. Black is displayed on the entire display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. When the second decorative symbol display device 209 is not moved, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is not displayed or an inconspicuous image is displayed in order to make the first decorative symbol display device 208 stand out. You may do it. In addition, a specific image (an image including a character string “reach” in this example) may be displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 209 or may be displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208. However, the specific image may be displayed on both the second decorative symbol display device 209 and the first decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time, or the second decorative symbol display device 209 and It may be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped at the initial position above the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of reach production. The notice notification that does not hide the display area of the one decorative design display device 208 is performed when the second decorative design display device 209 displays at least one of the display areas of the first decorative design display device 208 in the case of a reach effect as exemplified below. The big hit reliability is lower than the notice to hide the part.

  FIG. 106 (c) shows a state in which the reach effect is started during the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a battle between the samurai c1 and the samurai c2 is performed as a background effect. “Decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, but part of it is hidden by the effect image zz. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In addition, a hold display is displayed in the hold display areas a1 to a4. The hold display is displayed in front of the effect image zz. Furthermore, when the moving part 224a moves to one end of the moving guide groove 224b, the effect movable body 224 moves to the front of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 becomes the first one. It is located in front of the display area of one decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, this position may be referred to as a target position). For this reason, the second decorative symbol display device 209 partially hides the image in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image including the character string “Katsuatsu” is displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 106 (c), the display of the hold display area a may be hidden by an image including the character string “Gekiatsu”, and vice versa. The image including the character string “” may be hidden. The effect image zz may be displayed in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209. By the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice display regarding the change may be hidden. In addition, although a part of the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209 and the effect image zz, in an area that is not hidden by them, FIG. A display similar to the pattern in which the second decorative symbol display device 209 shown in b) does not move may be performed.

  FIG. 106 (d) also shows a state in which the reach effect is started during the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a battle between the samurai c1 and the samurai c2 is performed as a background effect. “Decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. Furthermore, when the moving part 224a moves to one end of the moving guide groove 224b, the effect movable body 224 moves to the front of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is the target. Moving to the position, the second decorative symbol display device 209 partially hides the image in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image including the character string “reach” is displayed. As described above, even when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved, the same display as that when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is not moved may be performed. By doing so, a difference in the jackpot reliability may be provided only by whether or not the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved.

  As shown in FIGS. 106 (c) and 106 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves into the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 during the reach effect, and the first decorative symbol display device 208 is moved. The notice notification that hides a part of the display area of the is a big hit reliability. Thus, in this embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player when the second decorative symbol display device 209 overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208 than when it does not overlap the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, Example 2 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing. In this example, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 perform a notice notification effect of the determination result of the special figure variation game.

  In FIG. 107 (a), “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” fluctuates and fluctuates in the left middle right symbol display devices 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornament symbol display device 208 due to the reach effect during the special figure fluctuation game. It shows the state. In the effect display area 208d, an image including a character string “Push your mind and press the button!” Is displayed. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image including the character string “promotion challenge” is displayed.

  107 (b) and (c) show the first decorative symbol display device when the player presses the chance button 136 from the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) or when the chance button pressing permission period elapses. An effect by 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is shown. In the effect shown in FIG. 107 (b), an effect image zz is displayed that hides the entire decorative pattern during fluctuation. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 209 continues to be stopped at the initial position, and an image including the character string “promotion challenge” same as that in FIG. 107A is displayed in the display area.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 107 (c), an effect image zz that hides the entire decorative pattern during fluctuation of fluctuation is displayed. Alternatively, the display itself of the decorative symbol during fluctuation is interrupted at the timing of displaying the effect image zz. Although not shown, the display of the decorative design may not be interrupted, but may be reduced, for example, and displayed in a position that does not interfere with the display of the effect image zz. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. Further, the moving part 224a moves to one end of the guide groove 224b for movement and descends to the front of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, so that the second decorative symbol display device 209 becomes the first decorative symbol display device. It stops at the front target position in the display area 208. Thereby, the image in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is partially hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image including the character string “Ohban behavior” is displayed.

  When the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 cooperate to give a notice of the determination result of the special figure variable game, the second decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 107 (c). The effect that accompanies the movement of the display device 209 is a notice notification with higher reliability of the big hit than the effect that does not accompany the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209 as shown in FIG. 107 (b).

  107 (d), (e), and (f) show a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the left middle right symbol display devices 208a, 208b, and 208c after the special figure variable game is finished. FIGS. 107 (d) and (e) show a state shifted from the notice notification effect shown in FIG. 107 (b). FIG. 107 (f) shows a state shifted from the notice notification effect shown in FIG. 107 (c). The state shown in FIG. 107 (d) is a state in which the fluctuation of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” shown in FIG. Is shown. The state shown in FIG. 107 (e) is a state in which “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5” is confirmed and displayed after being promoted from the fluctuation of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4” shown in FIG. 107 (a). Is shown. The state shown in FIG. 107 (f) is a state in which “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed after being promoted from the fluctuation of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” shown in FIG. 107 (a). Is shown. Thus, the probability variation 16R (round) big hit is confirmed when the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves. That is, it is more advantageous for the player when the second decorative symbol display device 209 overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208 than when it does not overlap the first decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), even if the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not move, probability variation and a big hit with a large R number may occur. In addition, it may be more advantageous than the case where the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not move when the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves, and may not necessarily be advantageous.

  As described above, it is more advantageous for the player when the second decorative symbol display device 209 overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208 than when it does not overlap the first decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the same image may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 regardless of whether the second decorative symbol display device 209 has moved, or different images may be displayed.

  Next, Example 3 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 shows effects performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing. In this example, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 perform a pre-read notice notification effect.

  FIG. 108 (a) shows a state during the special figure variable game. In each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is performed. In the effect display area 208d, a battle between the samurai c1 and the samurai c2 is performed as a background effect. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. Moreover, it is shown that there are four holds in FIG. 1 in the hold display areas a1 to a4. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image including the character string “chance!” Is displayed together with the image “princess”. In addition, in the hold display area a, there are four holds in FIG. 1 and there is no hold in FIG.

  FIG. 108 (b) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 209 starts to move downward due to the moving operation of the effect movable body 224 during the special figure variation game. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are reduced and displayed in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The reduced display is displayed at a position that is not hidden even when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved to the target position. In the effect display area 208d, an effect image zz is displayed in addition to the image of the battle between the two samurai c1 and c2. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an effect image similar to the effect image zz displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In addition, in the hold display area a, there are four holds in FIG. 1 and there is no hold in FIG.

  FIG. 108 (c) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 108 (b) during the special figure variation game. The effect image zz displayed on both the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed with a larger size.

  FIG. 108 (d) shows a state in which a special figure variation game is in progress, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 has further moved down and reached the target position from the state shown in FIG. 108 (c). The effect image zz displayed on both the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed with a larger size. Most of the four hold displays a1 to a4 that are not hidden even when the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the target position are hidden by the effect image zz.

  FIG. 108 (e) shows a state in which the special symbol variation game is in progress and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped at the target position. The effect image zz displayed on both the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 disappears, and two samurai c1 and c2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The effect that is fighting is displayed, and the four hold displays a1 to a4 are also displayed again. However, the display mode of the hold display a3 is changed, and a pre-reading notice is made. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not display a background. Thus, the pre-reading notice in this embodiment is such that the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves so as to hide part of the front surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and then the first decorative symbol display device 208 The mode of the hold display displayed in the area where the second decorative symbol display device 209 is not hidden in the display area is changed in accordance with the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Thus, the prefetch notification mode in the hold display a3 accompanied by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is a prefetch notice hold icon having a higher hit reliability than the other modes. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the target position, the pre-read notification mode may be changed to a mode with higher jackpot reliability than before the movement, or it moves more than when it does not move. It may be easier to change if you do.

FIG. 108 (f) shows a state in which the special symbol variation game is in progress and the second decorative symbol display device 209 starts the operation of returning from the target position to the initial position while maintaining the display shown in FIG. 107 (e). ing. In addition to the prefetch notice notification mode of this example, a prefetch notice notification mode in which the mode of the hold icon changes without the movement of the two-decorated symbol display device 209 may be provided.
In this example, after the effect image zz is displayed on each of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 in FIG. 108 (b), the first decorative symbol is displayed in FIG. 108 (d). The display device 208 displays the entire effect image zz, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays only a part of the effect image zz, but this is not restrictive.

  Next, Example 4 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing. In this example, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 perform a notice notification effect of the determination result of the special figure variation game.

  FIG. 109 (a) shows a state during the special figure variable game. In this example, image display of background effects on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is omitted. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an animation display is performed in which the image of the thick arrow c3 advances linearly from the upper left to the lower right of the display area.

  FIG. 109 (b) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 109 (a). In the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the arrow from the upper side of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is synchronized with the moving direction and moving speed of the arrow c3 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. An animation display in which an image of an arrow c4 having the same shape as c3 enters is performed. In FIG. 109 (b), the tail part of the arrow c3 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, the arrow head of the arrow c4 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and one arrow indicates the second decorative symbol display. It is visually recognized as an animation that moves from the display area of the device 209 to the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when performing display across a plurality of display devices in this way, the same display as the content displayed on the display device arranged in front may be performed on the display device arranged on the back surface, You don't have to go.

  FIG. 109 (c) shows a state in which a special figure variation game is being carried out following FIG. 109 (b), and one arrow passes through the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 and the first decoration. A state in which the symbol display device 208 is completely moved into the display area is shown. As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c), in the special figure changing game, one image is displayed across the display areas of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. The notice notification effect of the determination result is performed. In this example, even if the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not move, an image is displayed across the display areas of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. It is more advantageous for the player than when an image is displayed only in one display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, a first image (in this example, arrow c4) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and a second image (in this example, arrow c3) is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Thus, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 form one image. Note that the display positions of the first image and the second image may be slightly shifted. Rather, there are cases where it is possible to draw attention by giving the player a sense of incongruity by intentionally shifting the display.

  FIG. 109 (d) shows a state during the special figure variable game. In this example, image display of background effects on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is omitted. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In this example, the effect movable body 224 is moving, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 shows a state where the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is gradually hidden. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an animation display is performed in which the image of the thick arrow c3 advances linearly from the upper left to the lower right of the display area.

  FIG. 109 (e) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 109 (d). The effect movable body 224 shows a state in which the movement reaches the target position and the second decorative symbol display device 209 partially hides the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an animation is displayed in which the arrow c4 advances linearly along the route indicated by the arrow c3 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. In FIG. 109 (e), the tail part of the arrow c3 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, the arrow head of the arrow c4 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and one arrow indicates the second decorative symbol display. It is visually recognized as an animation that moves from the display area of the device 209 to the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 109 (f) shows a state in which a special figure variation game is being carried out following FIG. 109 (e), and one arrow passes through the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 and the first decoration. A state in which the symbol display device 208 is completely moved into the display area is shown. As shown in FIGS. 109 (d) to 109 (f), one moving across the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is accompanied by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209. The notice notification effect of the determination result of the success / failure in the special figure variation game is performed by the effect of displaying the image. In this example in which the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves and an image is displayed across the display areas of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209, the second decorative symbol display device 209 It is more advantageous for the player than when it does not move. That is, the case where the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved and an image straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed is most advantageous for the most advantageous person as in this example. Become.

  Next, Example 5 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing. In this example, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 perform a notice notification effect as to whether or not the result of the special figure variable game is a transition to a certain change state. In this example, the effect movable body 224 is disposed on the right vertical side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and moves from the right direction to the left direction, whereby the second decorative symbol display device 209 is changed to the first decorative symbol display device. It is designed to move within the 208 display area.

  FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which the effect of notifying the transition to probability change is started during the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, as a background effect, an image including the character strings “~ Entry into the fighting mode! ing. In the lower left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the reduced left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and a small hit or latent It is a symbol combination that is probable. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped at a position outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and to the right of the display region (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an initial position). An image including a character image of “Yoshimune” is displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  Each of FIGS. 110B to 110D shows an effect that is performed over a predetermined period after the symbol combination shown in FIG. 110A is displayed. The period in which the effect is executed is longer in the case where the gaming state is in the probability changing state than in the case where the gaming state is not in the probability changing state, and the movement amount of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is also increased. That is, it becomes easier for the player to increase the area for hiding the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 on the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, the predetermined period may be, for example, performed over a plurality of symbol variations from a small hit or latent probability variation big hit, or the small hit or latent probability variation big hit state (the attacker opens multiple times). During the period).

  In the effect shown in FIG. 110 (b), as a background effect in the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a character string “if fight can be pushed out” and “if it is possible to push out the sect? An image of a Samurai warrior who is holding his hand in the right direction is displayed. In the lower left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped at the initial position. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image in which the character string “inferior” and “Yoshimune” are reaching in the left direction is displayed. The hands of “Yoshimune” and “Misamune” face each other across the frame of the frame-shaped portion of the directing movable body 224. In addition, it is displayed that there are holds in the four hold display areas a1 to a4, and among them, the display mode of the hold display a3 is changed, and a prefetch notice is made. In the example shown in FIG. 110 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 209 has a small amount of movement (in this example, the movement amount is zero because it is stopped at the initial position), and the expected variation degree is shown. Is low.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 110 (c), as a background effect in the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a character string of “Fighting and fighting mode” and “~ If you can push out the sect?” An image of a Samurai warrior who is holding his hand in the right direction is displayed. In the lower left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In addition, it is displayed that there are holds in the four hold display areas a1 to a4, and among them, the display mode of the hold display a3 is changed, and a prefetch notice is made. Due to the movement of the effect movable body 224, the second decorative symbol display device 209 stops at a position where the hold display areas a3 and a4 are hidden in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. For this reason, the prefetch notice is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208 and cannot be visually recognized. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image in which the character string “balance” and “Yoshimune” are reaching in the left direction is displayed. The hands of “Yoshimune” and “Misamune” face each other across the frame of the frame-shaped portion of the directing movable body 224. In the example shown in FIG. 110 (c), the second decorative symbol display device 209 has a medium amount of movement and notifies that the probability variation probability is medium. As shown in FIG. 110 (c), several displays in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 are hidden by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209 for representing the advantage of the gaming state. For example, a notice regarding the change may be hidden. Further, various notices may be hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209 as advantageous to the player. Alternatively, the notice may be easily hidden, or the area where the notice is hidden may be increased. Moreover, the display about a lottery, such as a holding | maintenance and a decoration symbol, may be hidden by the movement of the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209. FIG.

In the effect shown in FIG. 110 (d), most of the second decorative symbol display device 209 enters the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 due to the movement of the effect movable body 224. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image in which the character strings “extruded” and “success” and “Yoshimune” are reaching in the left direction is displayed. As a background effect in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the character string “Kenshi Mikoshi mode” and “-if you can push out the bad sect?” And the samurai “bad sect” are “Yoshimune” The image of the form which flies upside down by "pushing out" of is displayed. In the lower left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In addition, it is displayed that there are holds in the four hold display areas a1 to a4, and among them, the display mode of the hold display a3 is changed, and a prefetch notice is made. The second decorative symbol display device 209 stops at a position where the on-hold display regions a1 to a4 are substantially hidden within the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208. For this reason, the prefetch notice is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208 and cannot be visually recognized. In the example shown in FIG. 110 (d), the amount of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209 indicates a large effect mode, and it is informed that the expected change probability is large (or confirmed). Even after clearly informing that the state is advantageous, a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 may be kept hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. The decorative symbol display device 209 may be returned to the initial position where the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is not hidden.
Note that the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be moved left and right when the effect of this example is executed across a plurality of variations. In such a case, the display position of “bad sect” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed corresponding to the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209. That is, the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208 that cannot be moved may be switched in accordance with the movement of the movable second decorative symbol display device 209. In such a case, part or all of the display of the movable second decorative symbol display device 209 may be moved without being changed before and after the movement. In this example, the display position and display mode of “Yoshimune” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 are not changed.

  Next, Example 6 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113 are executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. The production is shown. In this example, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 perform a notice notification effect of the determination result of the special figure variation game.

  FIG. 111 (a) shows a state during the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an image including a character string of “transformation challenge” and “˜chance if possible to transform” is displayed. In the lower right corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region.

  FIG. 111 (b) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 111 (a). A whole-body image in which “Yoshimune” stands is displayed in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower right corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 209 performs a rolling operation that swings up and down at the initial position (in the drawing, the rolling operation is indicated by the upper left and lower right wavy lines). The hitting operation is performed in common regardless of whether the big hit reliability is high or low. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image of “兜” is displayed.

  FIG. 111 (c) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 111 (b). The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an animation display in which the image of “兜” descends vertically downward is performed. On the other hand, in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the upper side of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is synchronized with the descending speed of the image of “兜” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The animation display of the image of “ア ニ メ ー シ ョ ン” descending vertically downward is performed. In FIG. 111 (c), the upper part of “表示” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the portion other than the upper portion of “兜” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. It is visually recognized as an animation that moves downward from the display area of the symbol display device 209 to the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (d) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 111 (c). The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image zz is displayed on almost the entire surface to hide the entire image of “Yoshimune”. A character string “docker” is displayed in front of the effect image zz.

  FIG. 111 (e) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 111 (d). When the effect image zz disappears, a character string of “Yatsushiro Shogun” and an image of Yoshimune wearing a spear appear. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 at the initial position, an image including the character string “chance!” Is displayed. This image is displayed only when an image straddling a plurality of display devices as shown in FIG. 79 described later is not displayed, and is displayed only when the reliability of the big hit is low.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 111, the second decorative symbol display device 209 stays at the initial position and does not move, but in the effect shown in FIG. 112, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position and moves to the first decoration. A part of the display area of the symbol display device 208 is hidden. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state during the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an image including a character string of “transformation challenge” and “˜chance if possible to transform” is displayed. In the lower right corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region.

  FIG. 112 (b) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 112 (a). A whole-body image in which “Yoshimune” stands is displayed in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower right corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 209 performs a rolling operation that swings up and down at the initial position (in the drawing, the rolling operation is indicated by the upper left and lower right wavy lines). The hitting operation is performed in common regardless of whether the big hit reliability is high or low. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image of “兜” is displayed.

  FIG. 112 (c) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 112 (b). By the moving operation of the effect movable body 224, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves into the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and gradually hides the image of “Yoshimune” from its head. In synchronization with this, in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an animation display in which the head of “Yoshimune” gradually appears from the lower side of the display area is performed. In FIG. 112 (c), the head of “Yoshimune” appears from below “兜” on the second decorative symbol display device 209, and is visually recognized as if the head of “Yoshimune” is covered with “兜”. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG.112 (c), the decoration may be provided in the position which cannot be visually recognized unless the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209 moves. In this example, the character “Yoshimune” appears as a decoration. This decoration is a decoration that cannot be visually recognized in the performance pattern with low jackpot reliability shown in FIG.

  FIG. 112 (d) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 112 (c). The second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped at the target position and partially hides the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image zz is displayed on almost the entire surface to hide the entire image of “Yoshimune”. A part of the effect image zz corresponding to the effect image zz of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. As a result, the player can visually recognize a single effect image zz even when the second decorative symbol display device 209 covers the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. A character string “docker” is displayed in front of the effect image zz. In this way, a display similar to the display image of the first decorative symbol display device 208 when the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not overlap the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is performed. However, the frame portion of the effect movable body 224, the frame area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, or the drive system does not interfere with the visual recognition of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The displayable area is reduced. Considering this, the jackpot reliability of the production is increased, and the appearance frequency of the production is lowered. Further, since the frequency of driving the effect movable body 224 can be reduced by lowering the appearance frequency, the durability of the drive system (the moving portion 224a, the movement guide groove 224b, and other drive systems) of the effect movable body 224 is improved. There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 112 (e) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 112 (d). When the effect image zz disappears, the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the display region of the second decorative symbol display device 209 cooperate to form a character image of “Yatsushiro Shogun” and the The image of Yoshimune who suffered from is displayed. The displayed “Yoshimune” has been changed to an image with an eye patch on one eye. At least a part of the image may be hidden by the frame portion of the effect movable body 224 or the frame area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. After the second decorative symbol display device 209 has moved to the initial position or the like, “Yoshimune with a cicada” may be displayed. Further, it is not necessary that the image is exactly the same as the image shown in FIG. 111 (e), and it is sufficient that at least one of the plurality of images is displayed, and it is not necessary to display the same image. For example, the Yoshimune shown in FIG. 111 (e) has clear eyes, whereas the Yoshimune shown in FIG. 112 (e) has an eye patch on the right eye. In this way, the notice notification effect in which an image including at least the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is more reliable in the big hit reliability. The degree is getting higher.

  FIG. 112 (f) shows the first decorative symbol display device 208 and its surroundings by removing the effect movable body 224 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 in the state shown in FIG. 112 (e). As shown in FIG. 112 (f), when the player changes the viewpoint by displaying on the first decorative symbol display device 208 even if it is an area hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. Therefore, an image of an area hidden in the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed. As described above, the same image may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the second decorative symbol display device 209. Conversely, it is not necessary to perform display across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

FIG. 113 shows a state in which a special figure variable game is being performed following FIG. 112 (d), as shown in FIG. 112 (e). When the effect image zz disappears, the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the display region of the second decorative symbol display device 209 cooperate to form a character image of “Yatsushiro Shogun” and the The image of Yoshimune who suffered from is displayed. The displayed “Yoshimune” has been changed to an image with an eye patch on one eye. Furthermore, although the eye patch shown in FIG. 112 (e) is a solid black, in this example, the character “T” is displayed on the black ground. As described above, there may be a plurality of types of modes in the display straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. Moreover, even if all of these multiple aspects have a higher hit reliability than a display that does not straddle between the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 as shown in FIG. Good. For example, a mode of displaying the “right” character as shown in FIG. 113 may be a notification mode in which the big hit is determined.
Further, for example, when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is not moved to the target position, it can be visually recognized. When the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved to the target position, the second decorative symbol display device 209 can An image to be hidden may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, that is, the big hit reliability is low when the image is visible, and the high hit reliability is high when the image is not visible. Such an image may be displayed. The image may be an image related to a lottery result such as a preview image or a decorative design, or may be an image that is displayed in common with a plurality of fluctuations regardless of the lottery result such as display of a background or a frame. Good.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 113 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A first display means (for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least display;
A second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209) capable of at least performing display;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is at least movable from a first position (for example, an initial position) to a second position (for example, a target position),
The second display means hides at least a part of the display by the first display means when in the second position;
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a first image (for example, a decorative pattern variation display),
The first image is displayed on the first display means when the second display means is in the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
The first image is displayed on the first display means when the second display means is at the second position (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The second gaming state after the second display (for example, jackpot gaming state, special figure high probability state, electric support state, etc.) is the first gaming state after the first display (for example, normal gaming state). , Special game low probability state, non-electric support state, etc.)
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, an effect accompanied by movement of the display means is more advantageous, and a common image is displayed regardless of whether the display means can be moved, and the common image is displayed on a display means that does not move. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100, an image can be displayed in various modes, and the interest of the game table can be improved. In addition, by narrowing the area that the player should pay attention to, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the game state after the narrowing becomes advantageous. Further, since the area near the first image or the area where the first image is displayed is hidden by the second display means, it is easy to notice that the second display means has moved, thereby In some cases, it can be surely communicated that it has become advantageous to the person. In particular, a player who has focused on the first image may be surprised.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a third image (for example, an arrow c4),
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a second image (for example, an arrow c3),
By the third image displayed on the first display means and the second image displayed on the second display means, an image that appears to be visually apparent (for example, an image of one arrow) Configure,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 described above, there are cases where the player can be focused on each of the plurality of images by displaying the images straddling the plurality of display means. In particular, when at least a part of the display by the first display means is hidden by the second display means, the plurality of display means are closer to each other, so that the player is more likely to pay attention There is. In addition, by displaying an image straddling a plurality of display means, an image having a size that cannot be displayed by one display means may be displayed.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a fourth image (for example, an image of the whole body of “Yoshimune” wearing “兜”),
The second image (for example, the image of the head of “Yoshimune” wearing “被”) is displayed on the second display means when the second display means is in the second position. Is,
The third image (for example, an image other than the head of “Yoshimune” wearing “を”) is displayed on the first display means when the second display means is in the second position. Is displayed,
The fourth image is displayed on the first display means when the second display means is in the first position,
The second image is an image that may be displayed while the third image is displayed,
The appearance of the second image and the third image is the same as the appearance of the fourth image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, by making the appearance of the image displayed across the plurality of display means and the image displayed on the single display means the same, depending on the case of being displayed across the plurality of display means It may be possible to surprise the player. In particular, when the second display means moves and an image straddling a plurality of display means is displayed in a state where at least a part of the display by the first display means is hidden, it is displayed on the first display means alone. In some cases, it is possible to emphasize whether or not the second display means can be moved by making the appearance of the images the same. Even if the appearance is the same, the portion (second image) displayed on the second display means is displayed in front of the other portions, so that the player can be noticed by the portion. Even if the appearance is the same, there are cases where the advantage can be switched depending on whether or not the display means can be moved and whether or not the display means straddles a plurality of display means.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second display means hides at least a part of the display by the first display means when in the first position;
The second display means largely hides the display by the first display means when it is in the second position than when it is in the first position.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the larger the area hidden by the movable second display means, the more advantageous to the player. In addition, there are cases where the player can be focused not only on whether the second display means can move, but also on the mode of movement. Further, contrary to the conventional theory of “large display is advantageous”, “small display is advantageous”, it is possible to improve the interest while surprised the player. Further, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to provide an excessively large display means.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a fifth image;
The fifth image is displayed on the second display means when the second display means is in the first position,
The fifth image is not displayed on the second display means when the second display means is in the second position;
The fifth image is not displayed on the first display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the dedicated display may be performed on the display means that has not moved, the player may not be discouraged even if the display means has not moved. In addition to whether or not the display means can be moved and the movement mode, the player may be able to concentrate on the game by paying attention to the display mode of the display means when the display means does not move.

  Conventionally, the display by the display means tends to be monotonous, and the player may get bored. In addition, since the size of the display means mounted on the game table has been increasing year by year, the price of the game table has risen and the space for placing other components has become a problem. In addition, there is a problem that during the game, the display means itself that the player keeps gazing for a long time does not operate, so that the viewpoint tends to concentrate on one point and eyes are tired and tired easily. In particular, since the viewpoint does not move in the front-rear direction, the movement of the eye muscles is lost, and the eyes may be deteriorated. ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game stand which can display an image in a various aspect can be provided.

  Note that the shielding of the display means using the shutter used in the prior art may be similar to the present invention in that at least a part of the display by the display means displaying a predetermined image is hidden, The present invention is different in that a new display can be performed in front of the hidden area by hiding the other display means by the display means. Furthermore, since it is the display means that is concealed, it is possible to display in various modes even during the concealment by switching the display contents.

  In addition, the advantageous gaming state is that the reliability of jackpot is high (notice in advance of the change, look-ahead notice, etc.), the expectation of latent probability change is high, and the profit to be given is likely to increase (round promotion, probability change promotion, short-time grant) And the like, the size of the payout profit obtained by the player as a whole is likely to increase), and it indicates a gaming state in which it is possible to see rare images and rare effects with low appearance frequency.

  Regarding the size relationship of the display means and the area hidden when overlapping, the display means having a relatively large display area may be hidden by moving the display means having a small display area. Further, the display area of the display means having a relatively small display area may be hidden by moving the display means having a large display area. Further, even in a hidden state, at least a part of the display area may be visible to the player. In the hidden state, the player may not be able to visually recognize the display area. Further, at any position in the movable region, the movable display means may hide at least a part of the display by the other display means. Further, at a predetermined position in the movable area, the movable display means may not hide the display by the other display means. In addition, the movable display means that can move may hide at least a part of the display means that cannot be moved by movement, and the movable display means that can move, on the contrary, moves at least a part of itself by movement. You may move to the position hidden by the impossible display means.

  In addition, in the first positional relationship (when the display means do not overlap each other), no image is displayed across the plurality of display means, and the second positional relationship (one display means overlaps the other display means) In the state), an image straddling a plurality of display means may be displayed. Further, the time required for the effect performed when the display means moves may be the same as the time required for the effect performed when the display means does not move. Further, as described in the fourth embodiment, some effects are shared between the case where the display unit moves and at least a part of the display by the other display unit is hidden and the case where the display unit does not move. It may be. Also, the execution time (production timer) of the production may be made common in the case of moving and the case of movement, and whether or not the display means can be moved is determined by lottery on the sub side even with the same lottery result and the same production timer.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 114 to 120 are used only in the description of the sixth embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, this embodiment In the description of FIG. FIG. 114 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 114 is equipped with a production movable body 224 capable of performing a movement operation including the movement operation similar to the production movable body 224 of the fifth embodiment. Since the constituent elements other than the effect movable body 224 are the same as the constituent elements of the game board 200 shown in FIG. Further, only the extended portion of the drive system of the effect movable body 224 will be described.

  The effect movable body 224 can be moved in the vertical direction and the vertical direction in the front plane of the display screen by a predetermined drive system. In the drive system of this example, the guide groove in the fifth embodiment is guided by the movement guide groove 224b extended along the upper side and the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement guide groove 224b. The movable part 224a is movable. The first guide part of the groove is located in the vicinity of the upper long side of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the guide groove for movement 224b is located above and below the rectangular frame part of the effect movable body 224. One end is located at a location vertically upward by the distance between the long sides. The movement guide groove 224b has a second curved portion located in the vicinity of the outer corner of the upper long side and the right short side of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and vertically downward from the second curved portion. The other end is located near the outside on the right short side center. The effect movable body 224 has a frame-like portion on the back side connected to the moving portion 224a. Further, the effect movable body 224 is fixed to the moving unit 224a so as to be rotatable within the plane in front of the display screen. The moving part 224a can be moved to an arbitrary position of the moving guide groove 224b by a driving mechanism (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 200. When the moving unit 224a is positioned at one end of the moving guide groove 224b, the second decorative symbol display device 209 can be positioned outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the moving unit 224a is moved to the moving guide groove 224b. The second decorative symbol display device 209 as a whole can be positioned within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when the moving part 224a is moved from the first curved part of the moving guide groove 224b to the second curved part and further to the other end, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. It can be located in the region.

  Next, Example 1 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows a state during the special figure variable game. In the first decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display area is used for production. In each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, a decorative symbol change display (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is performed. In the effect display area 208d, an effect is displayed in which a character string “Is it a chance?” Is displayed on a black background. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image including a “princess” image and a character “?” Is displayed. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In the hold display area a, it is shown that there are two special figure 1 hold and no special figure 2 hold.

  In the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 115A, the entire display area (horizontal length = X1, vertical length = Y1) of the first decorative symbol display device 208, that is, the first decorative symbol display device 208. The production is performed in the area S1 = X1 × Y1 of the entire display area. Further, the entire area of the display area (horizontal length = X2, vertical length = Y2) of the second decorative symbol display device 209, that is, the entire area S2 = X2 × the entire display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. The production is performed at Y2.

  FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which a special figure variation game is in progress and a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is used for production. For example, a region (X1 ′ × Y1) in which the width in the horizontal direction is X1 ′ narrower than X1 and the height is Y1 at the center of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208 (X1 ′ × Y1) is the effect region. Yes. “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, which are reduced and displayed above the effect area, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the middle symbol display device 208b. Has been done. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image including a “princess” image and a character “So!” Is displayed. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “▲” indicating that the reach effect is being performed is displayed. In the hold display area a, it is shown that there are two special figure 1 hold and no special figure 2 hold.

  In the special figure variation game shown in FIG. 115 (b), a partial area S2 = X1 ′ × Y1 of the display area (horizontal length = X1, vertical length = Y1) of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Production is being performed. In addition, the effect is performed in the area S2 = X2 × Y2 of the entire area of the display area (horizontal length = X2, vertical length = Y2) of the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the ratio of the area in which the image is displayed changes when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special figure variable game. In this way, even when the width of the area where the image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is changed, the image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 (in this embodiment, the princess By maintaining the size of the image), the player's attention may be attracted relatively to the image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 in some cases. Note that by not displaying an image or displaying a single color image such as black or white, the area where the image is displayed can be narrowed. This makes it possible to make the second decorative symbol display device 209, which has not been conspicuous, more conspicuous than the first decorative symbol display device 208, which has been conspicuous until now. In the present embodiment, the player is made to pay attention to the second decorative symbol display device 209 by making the horizontal width for production of the first decorative symbol display device 208 smaller than the horizontal width of the second decorative symbol display device 209. However, for example, the vertical width may be reduced, or both may be reduced. In addition, there is a case where the player pays attention to the location of the player's attention only by changing the size without reversing the size relationship. In addition, the width may be changed and a display that causes the second decorative symbol display device 209 to be noted may be performed. For example, effects such as a character image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 pointing in the direction of the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be performed. In the above description, if the ratio of the effect area on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced, the game state is advantageous to the player. Of course, the total area of the effect display area of the two-decorated symbol display device 209 may be made so narrow that it is advantageous to the player.

  Next, Example 2 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows a state during the special figure variable game. In the first decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display area is used for production. In each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, a decorative symbol change display (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is performed. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the fourth symbol display area b of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image indicating "-" indicating that a special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In the hold display area a, it is shown that there are two special figure 1 hold and no special figure 2 hold.

  In the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 116 (a), the entire display area (horizontal length = X1, vertical length = Y1) of the first decorative symbol display device 208, that is, the first decorative symbol display device 208. The production is performed in the area S1 = X1 × Y1 of the entire display area. Further, the entire area of the display area (horizontal length = X2, vertical length = Y2) of the second decorative symbol display device 209, that is, the entire area S2 = X2 × the entire display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. The production is performed at Y2.

  FIG. 116 (b) shows a state during the special figure variation game, where a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is shielded by the shutter 246, and the remaining display area is used for production. It shows the state. In this example, the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shutter 246 narrow the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 almost equally from the left and right, and in the horizontal direction at the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 The area (X1 ′ × Y1) where the width of X1 ′ is narrower than X1 and the height is Y1 is the rendering area. An image including a character string “Push back the approaching wall!” Is displayed above the production area. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display regions 208 a and 208 c, and the decorative symbol variable display is performed on the middle symbol display device 208 b, thereby achieving reach production. Has been done. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “▲” indicating that the reach effect is being performed is displayed. In the hold display area a, it is shown that there are two special figure 1 hold and no special figure 2 hold.

  In the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 116 (b), a partial area S2 = X1 ′ × Y1 of the display area (horizontal length = X1, vertical length = Y1) of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Production is being performed. In addition, the effect is performed in the area S2 = X2 × Y2 of the entire area of the display area (horizontal length = X2, vertical length = Y2) of the second decorative symbol display device 209.

As described above, in this embodiment, the ratio of the area in which the image is displayed changes when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special figure variable game. By doing so, the size of the image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is maintained even when the width of the area where the image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is changed. Thus, in some cases, the player's attention can be attracted to the image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 relatively. In the present embodiment, the player is made to pay attention to the second decorative symbol display device 209 by making the horizontal width for production of the first decorative symbol display device 208 smaller than the horizontal width of the second decorative symbol display device 209. However, for example, the vertical width may be reduced, or both may be reduced. In addition, the width may be changed and a display that causes the second decorative symbol display device 209 to be noted may be performed. For example, effects such as a character image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 pointing in the direction of the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be performed. In the above description, if the ratio of the effect area on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced, the game state is advantageous to the player. Of course, the total area of the effect display area of the two-decorated symbol display device 209 may be made so narrow that it is advantageous to the player.
Note that the shutter 246 (the left door 246a and the right door 246b) in this example is configured such that the entire overlapped area cannot be visually recognized, but is not limited thereto. It may be provided and the back surface may be visible, or the shutter 246 itself may be transmissive so that the back surface may be visible.

  In the present embodiment, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is narrowed by closing the shutter 246 disposed in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208. When the shutter 246 is closed, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The timing for displaying the decorative symbol on the second display device may be only the narrowed timing, or may be configured to be displayed even when other conditions are satisfied. The shutter 246 can block the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, but cannot block the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  Next, Example 3 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing.

  FIG. 117 (a) shows a state during the special figure variable game. In the first decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display area is used for production. In each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, a decorative symbol change display (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is performed. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped at an initial position above the display region. In the fourth symbol display area b of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image indicating "-" indicating that a special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In the hold display area a, it is shown that there are two special figure 1 hold and no special figure 2 hold.

  In the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 117 (a), the entire display area (horizontal length = X1, vertical length = Y1) of the first decorative symbol display device 208, that is, the first decorative symbol display device 208. The effect is performed in the area S1 = X1 × Y1 of the entire display area. Further, the entire area of the display area (horizontal length = X2, vertical length = Y2) of the second decorative symbol display device 209, that is, the entire area S2 = X2 × the entire display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. The production is performed at Y2.

  FIG. 117 (b) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is in progress. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is lowered by the operation of the effect movable body 224, and a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It shows a shielded state. As a result, the effect is performed in the area S2 = X2 × Y2 of the entire display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, whereas the area S1 ′ = X1 × in the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208. An effect is performed at Y1-X2 × Y2.

  FIG. 117 (c) shows a state during the special figure variation game, in which the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved to the right by the operation of the effect movable body 224, and further rotated 45 ° clockwise, The state where the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shielded is shown. The display in which the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moving may be in a mode in which the player cannot visually recognize it correctly (such as the display being slanted). At the same time, the display may be continuously changed.

FIG. 117 (d) shows a state during the special figure variation game, in which the second decorative symbol display device 209 is lowered by the operation of the effect movable body 224, and further rotated 45 ° clockwise, so that the first decorative symbol is displayed. The right side part of the display area of the display device 208 is shielded. As a result, the effect is performed in the area S2 = X2 × Y2 of the entire display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, whereas the area S1 ′ = X1 × in the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208. An effect is performed at Y1-X2 × Y2. As shown in the figure, in this example, the image displayed in accordance with the rotation of the second decorative symbol display device 209 itself is also rotated and displayed. In this way, the second decorative symbol display device 209 overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208, thereby changing the ratio of the display areas of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. Various displays can be performed while maintaining the ratio of the display areas of the one decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. 117 (b) to 117 (c), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Has been done.
In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is rotated around the virtual axis passing through the front-rear direction of the game table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, rotating around the virtual axis passing through the vertical direction of the game table. Also good. Further, the display surface of the special decorative symbol display device 209 may face the back direction of the game table. Furthermore, the decoration etc. which were provided in the back surface of the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209 at this time may be visible from a player.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 117 (d), the display content itself of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is switched in accordance with the rotation of the second decorative symbol display device 209 itself (the hold display area a or For example, after the second decorative symbol display device 209 itself has rotated, the same display as before rotation may be continued, or conversely, the second decorative symbol display area b may be switched. The display may be rotated even though the display device 209 itself is not rotated.

  Next, Example 4 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which a special figure variable game is in progress. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is lowered by the operation of the effect movable body 224, and a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It shows a shielded state. Thereby, while the effect is performed in the entire display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the frame portion of the effect movable body 224 and the second decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The effect is performed in an area that is smaller by the area of the display device 209. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c displayed in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In the fourth symbol display area b in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image indicating “-” indicating that a special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In the hold display area a, it is shown that there are two special figure 1 hold and no special figure 2 hold.

  FIG. 118B shows a state in which a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is shielded by the shutter 246 and the remaining display area is used for production. In this example, the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shutter 246 narrow the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 from the left and right sides almost uniformly from the initial position, and the left and right vertical direction of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is reduced. It stops at the target position where the ends of the doors 246a and 246b are located outside the side, and only the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect area.

  FIG. 118 (c) shows a state in which most of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is shielded by the shutter 246, and the remaining display area is used for production. In this example, the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shutter 246 narrow the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 substantially equally from the left and right, and the inside of the left and right vertical sides of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Thus, the ends of the doors 246a and 246b are located and stopped, and only the central portion of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect area.

FIG. 118 (d) shows a state in which the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is completely closed by the shutter 246. In this way, in this embodiment, first, the second decorative symbol display device 209 overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208, so that the ratio of the display areas of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is set. It is changing. Then, in a state where the display by the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the first decorative symbol display device is further moved by the movement of another configuration (shutter 246 in this example). The display by 208 is hidden.
In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 has moved and the shutter 246 has moved in a state where a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden, and the first decorative symbol display device 208 is completely hidden. However, for example, the shutter 246 hides all of the first decorative symbol display device 208 while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is positioned at the initial position, so that the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed. You may make it conspicuous, and the operation | movement which conceals the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 by the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209 and the shutter 246 may be performed simultaneously.

  Next, Example 5 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 shows effects executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows a state during the special figure variation game, where the second decorative symbol display device 209 is lowered by the operation of the effect movable body 224, and a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It shows a shielded state. Thereby, while the effect is performed in the entire display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the frame portion of the effect movable body 224 and the second decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. A region narrowed by the area of the display device 209 is used for production. In addition, a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is shielded by the shutter 246, and the remaining display area is used for production. In this example, the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shutter 246 narrow the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 substantially equally from the left and right, and are approximately on the left and right vertical sides of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. The ends of the doors 246a and 246b are stopped at the matching position. By arranging the shutter 246 in this way, the display areas of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 can be visually recognized as one band extending vertically, so there is one unity. It will be possible to produce. In the upper and lower strip-shaped display areas, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c displayed relatively small on both sides of the center of the effect area of the first decorative symbol display device 209. In the symbol display area 208b, a variable display is performed in which a relatively large decorative symbol ("decoration 1" to "decoration 10") moves from top to bottom across the center of the strip-shaped display area. In the fourth symbol display area b in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image indicating “-” indicating that a special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In the hold display area a, it is shown that there are two special figure 1 hold and no special figure 2 hold.

In FIG. 119 (b), the effect movable body 224 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 119 (a), and the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves upward from the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, a state is shown in which one strip-like display area extending vertically by the display areas of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is visually recognized as if it extended upward. Here, when the display widths of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are matched, the frames (edges) of the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be taken into consideration. It ’s okay or you do n’t have to. Thus, according to the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are matched with the vertical or horizontal width of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. It is possible to make it appear as if the display area 209 is combined into one display area. Further, by moving the second decorative symbol display device 209 away from the first decorative symbol display device 208 from the combined state, it is possible to make the display area appear to be separated. In addition, since the first decorative symbol display device 208 that has been shielded by the second decorative symbol display device 209 can be visually recognized, the display area itself can be seen as if it is extended. Conventionally, if the vertical or horizontal widths of the plurality of display areas are not matched, the player can easily recognize that a plurality of display devices are stacked, so FIG. ), The player could not be surprised by performing the same operation, but according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved.
As described in this example, when a plurality of display devices are provided, the presentation may be performed in a state where the display area of one display device is hidden by a configuration other than the display device.

  Next, Example 6 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention and the second decorative symbol display device 209 fixed to the effect movable body 224. ing.

  The shutter 246 shown in FIG. 120 is not only positioned in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208 but also disposed in front of the second decorative symbol display device 209. As shown in FIG. 120 (a), the height of the shutter 246 exceeds the height of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is higher than the height of the second decorative symbol display device 209. FIG. 120B shows a state in which the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 are partially shielded by the shutter 246. The shutter 246 simultaneously hides the plurality of display units, so that the horizontal widths of the regions where the display by the plurality of display units is visible are the same. Note that the fourth symbol and the hold display may be hidden by the shutter 246. However, the time for hiding such a systematic display should be as short as possible. In particular, it is better not to hide during the symbol stop display period.

FIG. 120C shows a modification of the shutter 246. The shapes of the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shutter 246 shown in FIG. 120 (c) are both parallelograms. positioned. In FIG. 120 (c), the left door 246a and the right door 246b are stopped at the positions where the respective lower sides are in contact with each other and become V-shaped as a whole, and are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. A state where a part of the region is shielded is shown. The shape of the shutter 246 that blocks a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is arbitrary. In addition, the left and right doors 246a and 246b of the shutter 246 are provided with holes or devised in shape so that a part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is hidden. However, a part of the display may be visible.
As shown in FIG. 120 (c), even if the shutter 246 cannot hide the entire area of one or both of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. Alternatively, the entire area may be hidden as described above.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A first display means (for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least display;
A second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209) capable of at least performing display;
A game machine equipped with
The size of the area in which the display by the second display means can be visually recognized in the first period (for example, the period of the special figure variable game (exclusive reach period)) is the first size (for example, the entire display area) ) And
The size of the area where the display by the first display means in the first period can be visually recognized is a second size (for example, the entire display area),
The size of the area where the display by the second display means can be visually recognized in the second period (for example, the reach effect period) is the third size (for example, the entire display area),
The size of the area in which the display by the first display means in the second period can be visually recognized is a fourth size (for example, a part of the display area),
The second size is at least different from the fourth size (for example, the second size is larger than the fourth size).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since a plurality of display means are provided and the ratio of the area in which the image can be displayed is changed, the image can be displayed in various modes, and the fun of the game table can be improved. There is a case. Moreover, the display means to which a player pays attention for every period can be changed by changing the magnitude | size which can visually recognize the display in a some display means. In some cases, the degree of attention can be finely changed for each display means.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
A concealing means (for example, a shutter 246) that is movable at least from a first position (for example, an initial position) to a second position (for example, a target position);
The concealing means is at least movable to the second position in the second period;
The concealing means is for concealing at least a part of the display by the second display means at the second position.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the size of the display area is changed by being physically hidden, and there is a case where the back display can be seen when looking into the game. . Further, there are cases where the player's viewpoint can be moved in the front-rear direction by hiding the display with an actual movable object.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The concealing means comprises the second display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since one display means moves, the display of the other display means is hidden and the display area is changed. In some cases, the player can be made to pay attention to the new display.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a first image (for example, a decorative pattern variation display),
The first image is displayed in the first size on the first display means in the first period,
The first image is displayed in the second size on the first display means in the second period,
The first size is the same size as the second size.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, there is an image that maintains the ratio without changing the size even if the size of the display means is changed, and it is the same as before the size is reduced although the displayed area is reduced. By continuing to display the image with the size, the image can be relatively conspicuous and the player can be noticed in some cases. In addition, when there is an image that is displayed in a small size in accordance with the reduction of the displayed area, the image may be more conspicuous.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The magnitude relationship between the first size and the second size is opposite to the size relationship between the third size and the fourth size.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the magnitude relationship of the ratios is reversed before and after the change, so that the player's attention concentrated on one display means may be concentrated on the other display means. In particular, when only the display by the other display means is reduced without changing the display size by one display means, the display size can be relatively conspicuous even though the display size is not changed. There are cases where it is possible.

  In the prior art, the display by the display means tends to be monotonous and the player may get bored. However, according to the present invention, images can be displayed in various modes.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 117, it is possible to realize a gaming machine in which the hidden display changes while the area ratio is maintained. In the state where the display of the first display means is hidden by the first positional relationship (FIG. 117 (b)) and the state hidden by the second positional relationship {FIG. 117 (d)} Although the ratio does not change, the area where the display of the first display means is hidden is different. The notice displayed on the first display means is hidden in the first positional relationship, but the notice displayed on the first display means is not hidden in the second positional relation.

  A plurality of display means may have the same display elements. For example, the vertical size (width) may be the same for a plurality of display means, the horizontal size (width) may be the same for a plurality of display means, or the size of the display area The plurality of display means may be the same. By aligning the width and the size of the display area, it may be possible to make an illusion that a plurality of display means arranged separately are one display means.

  When the display means are arranged in the vertical direction, it is possible to make a plurality of display means appear integrally by adjusting the horizontal width, and when the display means are arranged in the horizontal direction, adjust the vertical width. In some cases, a plurality of display means can be shown integrally. The width may be adjusted to a position parallel to an imaginary line connecting the centers of the plurality of display means.

  Further, the region that can display an image may be reduced in a state that is more advantageous to the player. One display means may be completely hidden. The display by one display means may be hidden by a plurality of movable objects. It may be hidden simultaneously by the movement of a plurality of movable objects, or after the display by the first display means is hidden by the movement of the first movable object, the display by the first display means is further performed by the movement of the second movable object. May be hidden. A movable object that hides the first display means may be provided with slits or holes so that part of the hidden display can be visually recognized.

further,
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A first display means capable of executing at least display;
A second display means capable of executing at least display;
A game machine equipped with
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a first image;
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a second image,
The second display means is at least movable from the first position to the second position,
The second display means hides at least a part of the display by the first display means when in the second position;
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the first image when the second display means is at the second position;
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the second image when the second display means is in the second position.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the immovable display means on which the first image is displayed is hidden by the movable display means on which the second image is displayed, the image can be displayed in various modes. The fun of the game stand can be improved. In some cases, the second image displayed in front of the first image can stand out. In particular, the viewpoint can be moved in the front-rear direction by moving the viewpoint from the first image to the second image. Also, if the player is paying attention to the first display means before the second display means moves, the player's viewpoint is displayed on the second display means without moving in the horizontal and vertical directions. In some cases, attention may be paid to the second image. In particular, when the second display unit hides at least a part of the first image displayed on the first display unit, the player may be able to focus more attention on the second display unit. .

(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first display means can display at least a third image different from the first image,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the third image when the second display means is at the first position;
The second display means largely hides the display by the first display means when the second display means is at the second position than when the second display means is at the first position.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the second display means hides the display more largely when the third image is displayed than when the first image is displayed. Even if the condition that the means hides the first display means is the same, the third image may be more conspicuous than the first image.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
When the second display means is in the second position, the display by the first display means is not hidden.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the second display unit does not hide the first display unit while the third image is displayed, the player can surely view the third image. There are cases where it is possible.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100,
A symbol display means capable of stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure after performing symbol variation display,
The first display means is capable of stopping and displaying a decorative design aspect according to the result of the determination of success / failure after performing a variable display of a decorative design,
The first image is the decorative design during the variation display,
The third image is the decorative design during the stop display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the second display means displays the display by the first display means when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, rather than when the decorative symbols are confirmed. If the lottery result is informed while the game is excited by various displays during the change, the lottery result may be surely notified to the player. During the stop display, the movable display means is not operated regardless of whether or not it is hidden. The movable display means is not moved during a predetermined period after the symbol is stopped and displayed.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a fourth image;
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the fourth image when the second display means is at the first position;
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the fourth image when the second display means is at the second position;
The second display means hides at least a part of the fourth image displayed on the first display means when the second display means is at the second position;
The fourth image is an error image;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, an error image, which is important information, is displayed regardless of the position of the second display means, so that the player or the store clerk can be informed promptly that an error has occurred. There are cases where it is possible. By displaying the error image with the first display means in which at least a part of the display is hidden by the second display means, it is possible to further emphasize that an error has occurred. By hiding part of the display means, the player may be misled as if a serious error has occurred.

  Further, according to the present invention, since at least a part of the display device on which the image is displayed is shielded from the player by the shield means with decoration, it is more difficult to see than the image displayed by the shield. In addition to making the front decoration stand out, there are cases where more various displays can be performed by using the display means. By displaying the same image as the image displayed in the area hidden by the display unit on the display unit, a mysterious display in which an image that should have been actually shielded can be visually recognized may be possible.

  Moreover, the 1st display means in which a display is hidden by the movement of a 2nd display means may be provided so that a movement is possible. In that case, when the first display means is at the third position, the display is hidden by the second display means at the second position, and the first display means is at the fourth position. In this case, the display is not hidden by the second display means at the second position. The first image is at least partially hidden when the second display means is at the second position. All may be hidden. The third image is displayed at a position that is not hidden when the second display means is at the second position. The second display means hides at least a part of the display by the first display means even at the first position. The second display means may further hide an area including the area hidden at the first position in the second position, or another area not including the area hidden at the first position. The structure which hides may be sufficient. The first position where the second display means can move may be an initial position set when the power is turned on. The second display means is movable to a third position different from the first and second positions, and the size of the area for hiding the first display means at the third position is the first and second positions. The size of the area for hiding the first display means at the position may be different.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 121 to 130 are used only in the description of the seventh embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment. In the explanation of Fig. 1, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs. FIG. 121 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. FIG. 121 shows a modification of the game board 200. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 121 is equipped with an effect movable body 224 having a moving operation different from that of the effect movable body 224 in the second to fourth embodiments. Since the constituent elements other than the effect movable body 224 are the same as the constituent elements of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 58, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted. Although not shown in FIG. 121, a shutter 246 is also provided.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the present embodiment are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and are configured by a liquid crystal display device. The first decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area. 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, and 208 d can be freely changed within, for example, a horizontally-long rectangular display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The second decorative symbol display device 209 forms a circular display area by processing the periphery. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it is comprised so that various effects and various game information can be displayed. For example, other display devices including a dot matrix display device, an organic EL display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  In this example, the first decorative symbol display device 208 is fixed to the game board 200 so as not to move, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is fixed to be movable. The display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209. In the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area b is arranged near the center of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol is displayed at a position not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  The effect movable body 224 has a configuration in which a second decorative symbol display device 209 is disposed inside a substantially square frame-shaped portion. As shown in FIG. 121, the effect movable body 224 has its frame-like portion stopped at the initial position (origin position) on the upper right outside the first decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial state. The initial position is a position after the initial position setting operation at power-on is performed. In addition, you may have the structure which further hides the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209 which can hide the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. In FIG. 121, a part is hidden, but the second decorative symbol display device 209 in the initial position may be entirely hidden. At this time, the structure which hides the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209 may be the game board on which a game ball rolls. That is, the game ball may be configured to roll in front of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Moreover, the member arrange | positioned in front of the 2nd decorative design display apparatus 209 may have transparency, and the 2nd decorative design display apparatus 209 in an initial position may be visually recognizable from a player.

  FIG. 122 shows the structure of the drive unit of the effect movable body 224 according to this embodiment. The orthogonal coordinate system shown in FIG. 122 takes the x axis (the left direction is the positive direction) parallel to the long side of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 (horizontal direction). The y axis (downward is the positive direction) is parallel to the short side of the rectangular display area (vertical direction), and the z axis (the direction toward the player is the positive direction) is normal to the board surface of the game board 200. Although not described in this example, it goes without saying that it may be movable in the z-axis direction.

  The drive unit has an elongated cylindrical shape having a central axis parallel to the y-axis, an x-direction moving member 224x1 that can move in the x-axis direction within the xy plane while maintaining a parallel state with the y-axis, and parallel to the x-axis. And a y-direction moving member 224y1 that has an elongated cylindrical shape having a central axis and is movable in the y-axis direction within the xy plane while maintaining a parallel state with the x-axis. To prevent the x-direction moving member 224x1 and the y-direction moving member 224y1 from interfering with each other during the movement, the xy plane on which the y-direction moving member 224y1 moves is in the z-axis direction with respect to the xy plane on which the x-direction moving member 224x1 moves. For example, the x-direction moving member 224x1 is displaced from the y-direction moving member 224y1 in the + z direction so as to be shifted by a predetermined amount.

  A hollow cylindrical x-direction sliding ring 224x2 that is slidable in the x-axis direction on the y-direction moving member 224y1 through the elongated cylindrical y-direction moving member 224y1 at the center of the upper side of the effect movable body 224. It is fixed. In addition, a hollow cylindrical y-direction sliding ring that is slidable in the y-axis direction on the x-direction moving member 224x1 by inserting an elongated cylindrical x-direction moving member 224x1 into the center of the right side of the effect movable body 224. 224y2 is fixed.

  Both end portions 224x3 and 224x4 of the elongated cylindrical x-direction moving member 224x1 are connected to a drive system (not shown) so that they can move with the same amount of movement in the x direction. Both end portions 224y3 and 224y4 of the elongated cylindrical y-direction moving member 224y1 are connected to a drive system (not shown) so that they can move with the same amount of movement in the y direction.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the moving range in the x-axis direction of the x-direction moving member 224x1 is longer than the sum of the length of the long side of the first decorative symbol display device and the length of the upper (lower) side of the effect movable body 224. ing. The moving range in the y-axis direction of the y-direction moving member 224y1 is longer than the sum of the short side length of the first decorative symbol display device and the left (right) side length of the effect movable body 224. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 122, the effect movable body 224 can be positioned outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 at the initial position, and an arbitrary region within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 can be displayed. The target position can be determined so as to be hidden.

  When the x-direction moving member 224x1 is moved with the target position determined, the y-direction sliding ring 224y2 inserted through the x-direction moving member 224x1 also moves integrally with the x-direction moving member 224x1. On the other hand, the x-direction sliding ring 224x2 inserted through the y-direction moving member 224y1 slides on the y-direction moving member 224y1. Thereby, the effect movable body 224 can be moved by a desired amount in the x-axis direction. Similarly, when the y-direction moving member 224y1 is moved, the x-direction sliding ring 224x2 inserted through the y-direction moving member 224y1 also moves integrally with the y-direction moving member 224y1. On the other hand, the y-direction sliding ring 224y2 inserted through the x-direction moving member 224x1 slides on the x-direction moving member 224x1. Thereby, the effect movable body 224 can be moved by a desired amount in the y-axis direction. When the moving operations in the x-axis direction and the y-axis direction are combined, the effect movable body 224 can be moved two-dimensionally in the xy plane. The second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 is configured to be movable in front of the fourth symbol and may move while concealing, but does not stop in a concealed state.

  Next, Example 1 of the presentation operation | movement by the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated using FIGS. 123-125. 123 to 125 show effects executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 123 (a) to (c), FIGS. 124 (a) to (c), and FIG. 125 respectively show the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the effect movable body shown in FIGS. 121 and 122. A second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to 224 is shown.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows the reach effect executed during the special figure variable game. The decoration symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c at the center of the rectangular display area of the first decoration symbol display device 208, and decorations 1 to 10 are displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b from above. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the images that move sequentially downward (indicated by downward arrows in the figure). An image including the character string “reach” is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the vicinity of the center of the left short side (longitudinal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol display area b having a small square display area is provided. In the fourth symbol, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color, for example, during the special symbol variation game, and is in a state of being painted in the predetermined color, for example, during the symbol stop display. In this example and subsequent examples, the square display area of the 4th symbol during the special figure variation game indicates a blinking state with “-”, and the square display area of the 4th symbol during the symbol stop display indicates “○”. The fill state is indicated by or “×”. In this example, the fourth symbol display area b is always displayed at a fixed position regardless of the gaming state and the type of effect.

  The effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 having a circular display region is located outside the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image of the sitting samurai c1 and a character string “Is it a chance?” Are displayed.

  In FIG. 123 (b), “decoration 4” temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” fluctuates in the left middle right symbol table display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped state. The effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position, and in the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image of the samurai c1 standing up and hanging down and a character string “Zanen” are displayed.

FIG. 123 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in a swinging variation state in the left middle right symbol table display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Also, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 123 (c), the effect movable body 224 starts moving from the initial position toward the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper right of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The part is partially hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In the circular display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the frame-shaped portion of the effect movable body 224, the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is displayed. Thus, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not display the decorative symbol at the initial position, and when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is slightly moved, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves. The display of an image (in this example, an image of a decorative pattern) displayed when is completed is started. That is, the display of the image when the movement is completed is started before the movement is completed.
As shown in FIG. 123 (c), the fluctuation variation display may not be performed for the decoration symbol “decoration 3” displayed on the moving second decoration symbol display device 209. You may have done.

  FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in a swinging variation state in the left middle right symbol table display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Also, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 124 (a), the effect movable body 224 is further moved so that a large part of the right symbol display area 208c in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display device. The state hidden at 209 is shown. An effect image is displayed in the effect display area 208d as a background image of the left middle right symbol table display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. In the circular display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the effect movable body 224, the same color as that used in the effect image is used as the background color together with the decorative symbol “decoration 3”. In this way, the effect image that can be matched after the movement is completed is displayed on both the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moving. In addition, a character decoration 730 of “large board behavior” is applied to the initial position of the effect movable body 224. This character decoration 730 becomes visible only when the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves. The character decoration 730 is preferably a game machine title of the pachinko machine 100, a nickname of a character image, or the like, which is not directly related to the result of determining whether the special figure variation game is successful. A mechanism for changing the contents of the character decoration 730 may be provided.

  FIG. 124 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in a swinging fluctuation state in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, respectively. An effect image is displayed in the effect display area 208d as a background image. Further, in front of the middle symbol display area 208b, the second decorative symbol display device 209 in which “decoration 3” fluctuates with the same background color as the effect image is stopped. The image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 stopped at the target position are visually recognized as one united image. When the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is completed, the effect images are matched. When the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the same symbol (in this example, “decoration 3”) as the decorative symbol displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, it is arranged in front. In the second decorative symbol display device 209, the size of the decorative symbol may be reduced and displayed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the same size despite being in front. The decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is also fluctuated. Further, the symbol combination that is a big hit is displayed across a plurality of display devices during fluctuation fluctuation, but the definite display is always performed only on one display device. It should be noted that “decoration 4”, which is a missing symbol, may be displayed on the back surface of the second decorative symbol display device 209, or “decoration 3,” which is a hit symbol, may be displayed.

  FIG. 124 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in a swinging fluctuation state in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. The effect movable body 224 has started moving from the target position to the initial position. FIG. 124C shows a state in which “decoration 3” fluctuates while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moving, partially hiding the middle symbol display area 208b. The “decoration 3” that fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b and the “decoration 3” that fluctuates in the moving second ornament symbol display device 209 are visually recognized as a single image. The second decorative symbol display device 209 may hide the decorative symbol, but does not hide the special symbol display device.

  FIG. 125 shows a state in which “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. The square display area of the fourth symbol during the symbol stop display is filled. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image of the standing samurai c1 and a character string of “big hit” are displayed. During the period in which the special figure confirmation display is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is always positioned at the initial position. Thus, in the effect according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 only when the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves.

  Next, Example 2 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128. 126 to 128 show effects performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. FIG. 126 (a) to (c), 127 (a) to (c), and FIG. 128 (a), respectively, are the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the movable movable body 224 shown in FIGS. A second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the effect movable body 224 is shown. 127 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 128 (a) to (c) are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 126 (a) shows the reach effect executed during the special figure variable game. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are reduced and displayed near the upper right corner of the rectangular display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. An image in which the decoration symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, respectively, and the decorations 1 to 10 are sequentially moved from top to bottom in the middle symbol display area 208b (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). ) Is used to display decorative symbols. In the effect display area 208d, an image of a black target (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first image) that can be seen in a window on the top floor of the building, and an image including a character string “(command) snip the target!” Is displayed. In the vicinity of the center of the left short side (longitudinal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol display area b having a small square display area is provided. Since the special figure variation game is in progress, the square display area of the fourth symbol is blinked.

  The effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 having a circular display region is located outside the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image when viewed through an sight (scope) attached to a sniper gun (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a scope image) is displayed. At the initial position, only the aiming scale is displayed on the scope image.

  FIG. 126 (b) shows that the effect movable body 224 starts moving from the initial position toward the first decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced in the upper right portion of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Of the middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, the left middle symbol display areas 208a and 208b are hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In the circular display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209 attached to the frame portion of the effect movable body 224, an image in which the corner of the top floor of the building is enlarged is displayed at the lower left of the aiming scale. Yes. Even though the corner of the building superimposed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, the second decorative symbol display device is used for the decorative symbol superimposed in the same manner. 209 is not displayed. There is an image that is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 even when it is superimposed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. For example, the display relating to the determination result of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the hold is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 even if the second decorative symbol display device 209 is overlapped. In the present embodiment, an image obtained by enlarging the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be an actually enlarged image or an image provided so as to appear enlarged in advance.

  In FIG. 126 (c), the effect movable body 224 further moves, and the first decorative symbol display device 209 displays the first image displayed in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and seen in the window on the top floor of the building. The hidden state is shown. In the circular display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an enlarged image of the first image in the window (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second image) is displayed at substantially the center of the aiming scale. The first decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the first image even after the second decorative symbol display device 209 is overlaid. Therefore, the first image can be seen when the player looks into the game board 200 obliquely from behind the second decorative symbol display device 209. When the first image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209, the second image is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The second image is related to the first image. Here, as an example of the “related” image, when the first image and the second image are images of the same character, when the first image and the second image are similar and similar images, When the contours of the first image and the second image are similar, the second image is an image showing details of at least a part of the first image. For example, when the second decorative symbol display device 209 hides the image. Further, since the second decorative symbol display device 209 is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the surface on which the second image is displayed is in front of the surface on which the first image is displayed. For this reason, attention to the second image can be further enhanced by providing a three-dimensional effect.

  FIG. 127 (a) shows an effect in which the sniper fails. The character “sniper failure” is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position and stops. As shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the shielding by the second decorative symbol display device 209 is released, a second image (or an image related to the second image) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. It may be displayed.

  FIG. 127 (b) shows an example of effects performed up to FIG. 126 (c) following FIG. 126 (b). As shown in FIG. 127 (b), after the first image is displayed at substantially the center of the aiming scale, the aim of the aiming scale of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is shown in FIG. 126 (c). The second image may be displayed substantially at the center. The enlargement / reduction may be changeable based on the player's operation, and only after the display of FIG. 127 (b) is detected that the player has pressed the chance button, FIG. An enlarged display as shown in (c) may be performed.

  In FIG. 127C, the first movable image 224 moves and the first image displayed in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and seen in the window on the top floor of the building is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. It shows a hidden state. In the circular display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an enlarged image (hereinafter referred to as a third image) of the first image (assumed to be a panda image in this example) is located approximately at the center of the aiming scale. May be displayed). The first decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the first image even after the second decorative symbol display device 209 is overlaid. For this reason, when the player looks into the game board 200 obliquely from behind the second decorative symbol display device 209, the third image can be seen. When the first image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209, the third image is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The third image is related to the first image. Further, since the second decorative symbol display device 209 is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the surface on which the third image is displayed is in front of the surface on which the first image is displayed. For this reason, attention to the third image can be further enhanced by providing a three-dimensional effect. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved and superimposed before the first image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, the second image is displayed as shown in FIG. 126 (c). And a third image may be displayed as shown in FIG. 127 (c). Further, which image is displayed may be selected according to the determination result of the special figure variation game, or a dedicated lottery may be performed separately from the determination result. When one image is displayed, the big hit reliability may be set higher than when the other image is displayed. Also, the big hit reliability when one image is displayed may be 100%.

FIG. 128A shows a case where a first image (for example, an image on the roof of a building) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 hides the first image. 2 shows a state in which the first decorative image display device 209 displays a first image and a third image (for example, a character image) different from the first image. The third image is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 only when the second decorative symbol display device 209 hides the first decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the third image may or may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, but when the third image is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The first decorative symbol display device 208 does not display at least the third image.
Further, the player may be able to specify the position where the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves. For example, a cross key may be provided as an operation means for production, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be moved freely by operating the cross key during a predetermined period. Further, the display content of the second decorative symbol display device 209 and the display content of the first decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed as appropriate in accordance with the movement.

  FIG. 128 (b) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are not shown in the state shown in FIG. 128 (a). No image related to the third image is displayed in the area hidden in the second decorative symbol display device 209. That is, the first image described above may be an image that is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 209 and not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, Example 3 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 shows an effect executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 129 (a) is an effect during the special figure variation game, and an image including the characters “(Humanity Chance) Princess is Reach?” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. The effect movable body 224 moves to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and stops, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 hides the central portion of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. A silhouette image from the neck of the person to the bottom is displayed from the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 to the bottom. The image above the neck is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. In the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 209, a silhouette image above the neck is displayed together with a character “?”.

  The result can be estimated to some extent from the silhouette above the neck displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. For example, when four types of images “Yoshimune, princess, fox, and eagle” are displayed as the result display, the shadow displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 has a Kanzashi, You may be able to guess that. Moreover, even if there is a kansai in the shade, Yoshimune or Aoi may be displayed. Further, the result may not be predicted at all from the image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The color of the shadow may be changed or the character of “?” May be changed according to the reach or the big hit expectation. The display of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is changed while being hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 209. The player may be able to enjoy this effect in the hope that an image of a “princess” that is likely to develop the special figure variation game into a reach effect will appear.

  FIG. 129 (b) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are omitted in the state shown in FIG. 129 (a). The first decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image above the neck as well as a silhouette image below the person's neck. In this example, an image of the face “婆” is displayed. Thus, the resulting image may be displayed on the back of the second decorative symbol display device 209. Since there is always a gap between the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the back surface of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the player can look into it. Further, the effect movable body 224 may be attached so as to provide an angle that cannot be discriminated when looking into it. Further, when the player is prompted to operate the chance button 136 and the operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved, and at least an image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is moved. An effect that allows only a part of the image to be seen (an effect that allows an image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 to be estimated) may be performed. In addition, it is sufficient that at least a part of an image corresponding to the black image displayed in FIG.

FIG. 129 (c) shows a state where the effect shown in FIG. 129 (a) is finished and the special figure variable game is finished. The effect movable body 224 has moved outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. The second decorative symbol display device 209 does not display an image. On the other hand, in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an image of an actual bag is displayed instead of the character string “Sorry ... it was a bag” and a silhouette display. It is notified that “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c displayed in a reduced scale, and the determination result is incorrect.
In addition to the above, when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved (in the state shown in FIG. 129 (a)), “婆” is played when the back of the second decorative symbol display device 209 is looked into. Even when “婆” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 so that the user can see it, the “婆” display is displayed as “princess” in conjunction with the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209. You may change it to surprise the player. In some cases, the player can look at the second decorative symbol display device 209 and visually recognize the display of “婆” to surprise the player who has been discouraged.

  Next, Example 4 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 shows effects performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 130A includes the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the reach effect is started during the special figure variable game. “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, a decorative symbol variation display (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is performed. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. The entire second decorative symbol display device 209 is stopped at an initial position outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Also, three hold displays a1 to a3 are made in the hold display area below the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the lower right corner of the rectangular display region of the second decorative symbol display device 209 The hold display is performed in the nearby hold display areas a1 to a3.

  FIG. 130 (b) shows “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the display area of the second ornament symbol display device 209 in the reach effect during the special figure variable game. "" Shows a state of fluctuation. In the effect display area 208d of the second decorative symbol display device 209, an effect image zz is displayed as a background effect. The display of the hold display area a is not hidden by the effect image zz. The moving unit 224a moves to one end of the moving guide groove 224b, the effect movable body 224 moves to the front of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the first decorative symbol. The display device 208 is stopped at the front target position in the display area. For this reason, the second decorative symbol display device 209 partially hides the image in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the same image display as the image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is performed, and the same effect image zz as the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed. The effect image of the shape is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the fourth symbol display area b, an image indicating “-” indicating that the special figure variable game is being displayed is displayed. In addition, a hold display is displayed in the hold display areas a1 to a3. The hold display is displayed in front of the effect image zz.

  FIG. 130 (c) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are omitted from FIG. 130 (b). In the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image zz and the reserved display areas a1 to a3 are displayed on hold, but the decorative design that fluctuates is not displayed. In this embodiment, when the second decorative symbol display device 209 partially hides the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, at least a part of the image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed. It is characterized in that it is displayed in the display area of one decorative symbol display device 208. Note that it is not necessary to display the exact same image, and it is sufficient that at least one identical image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 that are in an overlapping relationship. Also, the images need not be exactly the same as long as they look the same.

Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 130 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A first display means (for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least display;
A second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209) capable of at least performing display;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is at least movable from a first position (for example, an initial position) to a second position (for example, a target position),
The second display means hides at least a part of the display by the first display means when in the second position;
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a first image (for example, an image of a decorative design),
The first image is not displayed on the second display means at the first position;
The first image is displayed on the second display means at the second position.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the first image displayed on the movable display means is displayed when the movable display means is superimposed on the front of the other display means, and the movable display means is in front of the other display means. Since the image is not displayed when it is not overlaid, the image can be displayed in various ways, and the fun of the game stand can be improved. In addition, when the first image is displayed on the conspicuous second display means by hiding at least a part of the display by the first display means by movement, the first image can be made conspicuous There is. A player who notices that the first image is displayed can at the same time notice that at least a part of the display by the first display means is hidden, and shows the player to the hidden display. Sometimes it can be noticed. In some cases, it can be made conspicuous that the first display means and the second display means have an integral shape. Note that whether or not the second display unit hides at least a part of the image displayed on the first display unit at the first position may or may not be hidden. Further, in the case of hiding, it is sufficient that the area hidden in the second position is larger than that in the first position.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first display means can display at least a second image (for example, a black target image) at a second display position (for example, a position of a building image window),
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the second image when the second display means is at the first position;
The second display position is a position that is at least partially hidden by the first display means in the second position,
The display mode of the second image is a display mode related to the display mode of the first image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the first image is an image related to the second image displayed on the first display means, and appears to be hidden by the movement of the second display means. By displaying the first image related to the second image on the second display means, it may be possible to surprise the player (if it is not actually hidden, it may only look like that). Since the second display means is arranged on the player side (front side) than the first display means, the second display means displayed on the first display means when the display is performed. In some cases, the player can make an illusion as if the image jumped forward. After the second image is displayed on the first display unit, the second display unit is moved by moving the second display unit and displaying the first image on the second display unit. It may be possible to make an illusion of the player as if it were. Thereby, there are cases where the player can be more focused on the second display means.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a third image (for example, a scope image having only an aiming scale),
The third image is displayed on the second display means at the first position,
The third image is displayed on the second display means at the second position.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since there is an image that can be displayed on the second display means or not, a part of the second display means in the second position (first In some cases, it is possible to make the player have an illusion as if only the region where the image of (1) is displayed is transmitted. In addition, by performing important display such as an error notification image or a hold image as the third image, the player can visually recognize the important display no matter how the second display means moves. There is. In particular, when the important display is performed by the first display means, it may be hidden depending on the position where the second display means moves. It is better to display on

(4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a fourth image;
The fourth image is displayed on the second display means at the first position;
The fourth image is not displayed on the second display means in the second position;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the second display means is not moved by displaying the fourth image, and the display by the first display means is not hidden by the second display means. May be more clearly communicated to the player.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second display means hides at least a part of the display by the first display means when in the first position;
The second display means largely hides the display by the second display means when it is at the first position than when it is at the first position.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the second display means hides the first display means in the second position because the second position is larger than the first position. In some cases, the first image can be made more conspicuous by displaying the first image when the display by is largely hidden. Further, when the second display means largely hides the display by the first display means, the first image can be displayed larger.

  Conventionally, there has been a display over a plurality of liquid crystals, but since it is one liquid crystal display device having a large display area and a large difference in display mode cannot be provided, the player is bored. In addition, there is a problem that during the game, the display means itself that the player keeps gazing for a long time does not operate, so that the viewpoint easily concentrates on one point and eyes are tired and tired. In particular, since the viewpoint does not move in the front-rear direction, the movement of the eye muscles is lost, and the eyes may be deteriorated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, when the display unit is overlapped in the front-rear direction, the viewpoint can be moved in the front-rear direction, and the image can be displayed in various modes.

  In the prior art, for example, after an image of a curtain is displayed, an image such as a scope is displayed in front of it, and there is an effect that the expression is as if the curtain is seen through the scope. In contrast, in the present invention, since the second display means is actually moved in front of the first display means, the second display means hides the display by the first display means. Even if it is in the middle, it is characterized in that the display by the first display means may be visible by changing the posture and looking into it.

  Regarding the “relationship” between the first image and the second image, the first image and the second image may be the same image. The first image may be an image similar to the second image. The first image may be an image obtained by adding another image to the second image. What is necessary is just to include at least the second image. The first image may be an image including at least a part of the second image. The first image may be an image obtained by enlarging and displaying at least a part of the second image. The first image may be an image having the same character / motif as the second image. The first image may be an image of a different color from the second image. The first image may be an image having a similar outer shape and outline of the second image. The first image may be an image obtained by obscuring the second image. By having these relations, the closer the display mode of the first image and the second image is, the more the player can have an illusion as if the second display means is transmitting. In some cases, the second display means can be an illusion instead of just a liquid crystal display device. The effects related to each other include not only the display but also the state in which the display means moves and overlaps.

  In addition, the decorative display of the decorative symbol may not be performed on the second display unit, and the final display of the decorative symbol may be performed only on the first display unit. The decoration pattern fluctuation display (temporary stop display) may be performed on both the first and second display means. The first image and the second image may be made of the same decorative design. The first image may be a display of fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol, and the second image may be a stop display of the decorative symbol. The first image may be made of a decorative design that is more advantageous than the second image. By doing so, there is a possibility that the symbol cannot be stopped and displayed at the correct position when the moving mechanism breaks down, so that the second display means can prevent the symbol from being confirmed. Further, by moving the second display means, it may be possible to produce an effect as if an unfavorable decorative symbol displayed on the back side was overwritten with an advantageous decorative symbol displayed on the near side. .

  Further, the size of the first image is smaller than the size of the display by the first display means hidden by the second display means at the second position. By doing so, there are cases where the player's attention can be gathered step by step by hiding and displaying small. Further, the size of the display area of the second display means may be the same as or larger than the size of the display area of the first display means. The second display means is switched between movement and display according to the lottery result, game result, and the like. In particular, when the player is advantageous, the movement and the display are easily switched. The display position of the first image and the display position of the second image may not completely match. From the viewpoint of the player, it is only necessary that they are generally the same. The error image displayed on the second display means is displayed in the same manner on the second display means regardless of whether the second display means is at the first position or the second position. The second display means is movably provided in front of the area where the decorative display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the first display means, and the area is displayed during the period when the fixed display of the decorative symbol is performed in the area. Do not move in front of. Alternatively, at least a part of the display by the first display means is not hidden during the period in which the decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in the area. Alternatively, the second display means is moved to the initial position during the period in which the decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in the area. Even if the ratio between the display areas changes, the ratio between the images displayed on each display means does not change. One of the multi-reach displayed on the large display means may be smaller than the reach displayed on the small display means. In the present invention, the size of the display area may not be equal to the size of the area where the image is displayed, and the size relationship between the areas where the image is displayed may be changed. The movable display means may be configured such that the stationary display means hides its own display by moving to the back of the stationary display means.

[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 182. First, the game board 200 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 131 to 182 are used only in the description of the eighth embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment. In the explanation of Fig. 1, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs.

  FIG. 131 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from the top of the effect device 206 to the right, and a game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper portion of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. In other words, the game area 124 has a first flow path on the left side across the effect device 206 as a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down, and a decoration member as a path for the fired game ball to flow down. And a second flow path on the right side. Hereinafter, hitting a game ball on the first downstream path may be referred to as “left-handed”, and hitting a game ball on the second downstream path may be referred to as “right-handed”.

  In the effect device 206, a first decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially in the center, and an effect movable body 224 including the second decorative symbol display device 209 is disposed with the upper position being an initial position (origin return position). ing. The size of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the size of the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  Also, on the lower right side outside the game area 124, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol. A holding lamp 218 and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). To do. The first decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area. 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, and 208 d can be freely changed within, for example, a horizontally-long rectangular display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it is comprised so that various effects and various game information can be displayed. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and other display devices including a projector are adopted. May be.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general figure variable game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a high-probability medium lamp (not shown) in the game board 200. The high-probability ramp is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state where a big hit is likely to occur or a high-probability state. Turns on when switching to a state, and turns off when switching from a high probability state to a low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a first general figure starting port 227, a second general figure starting port 229, and a special figure 1 starting port 230, around the rendering device 206. A special figure 2 starting port 232 and a variable winning port 234 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The first general map start port 227 and the second general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. . In the present embodiment, the first general start port 227 is arranged in the first downstream path on the left side with the rendering device 206 in between, and the second universal channel in the second downstream path on the right side with the rendering device 206 in between. A starting port 229 is disposed. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball can pass through the first general figure starting port 227 by left-handing, and the game ball can pass through the second general figure starting port 229 by right-handing. A ball that has passed through the first general start port 227 or the second general start port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side, unlike a ball that has entered the general winning port 226. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first general map start port 227 and the second general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210. . In addition, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the first normal start port 227 during a period other than a predetermined period (for example, during the electric support state, during the execution of the super reach effect, or during the big hit game) The pachinko machine 100 uses the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 to execute a general symbol decorative symbol variation game (details will be described later) with a predetermined probability.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew). In the present embodiment, only one starting port 232 is arranged below the second general-purpose starting port 229. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Since the second general map start port 229 and the special figure 2 start port 232 below the second general map start port 229 are in the second flow path on the right side across the effect device 206, the first flow down path on the left side across the effect device 206 The game ball that has advanced to does not pass through the second general start port 229 or enter the special view 2 start port 232. In addition, since the first general map start port 229 and the special figure 1 start port 230 are in the first downflow path on the left side with the effect device 206 in between, the first general start port 229 and the special figure 1 start port 230 are in the second downflow path on the right side with the effect device 206 in between. The advanced game ball does not pass through the first ordinary start port 227 or enter the special view 1 start port 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the special figure 1 starting opening 230 of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) or without winning any winning port or start port, or the first general start port 227, the second general start port 229 It reaches the out port 240 only by passing.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the production device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a region where the game ball can roll, and a second decorative symbol display device 209 is provided in the region where the game ball cannot roll. A movable body 224 is provided. A first decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device (not shown) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device (not shown) are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp entrance (not shown) provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp exit (not shown). The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball passes to the special opening 1 230 in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  The effect movable body 224 has a configuration in which a second decorative symbol display device 209 is arranged inside a horizontally long rectangular frame-shaped portion. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device. In the initial state, the effect movable body 224 has its frame-like portion stopped at an initial position (origin position) above the outside of the first decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG.

  The effect movable body 224 is a front plane of the first decorative symbol display device 208 that is substantially parallel to the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as a display screen front plane) by a drive system (not shown). ) Can be moved two-dimensionally. The drive system for the effect movable body 224 can have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a plurality of effectable conductors that operate when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the types of special maps and general maps that are stopped and displayed by special map display device 212, special map display device 214, and general map display device 210 of pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. explain. FIG. 132 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present embodiment) elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the start of the variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special illustration 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 132 (a) shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 132 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbols, and “Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D” are 15R jackpot symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to an electric support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). Although the electric support state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the electric support state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the electric support state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”, which are 15R special jackpot symbols, are the special figure high-probability ordinary figure high-probability state, and “Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D”, which are 15R jackpot symbols, are special It is a low probability normal figure high probability state. These “special chart A”, “special chart B”, “special chart C”, and “special chart D” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called sudden change. Sudden probability change will be in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game, like the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called hidden probability change. The hidden probability change becomes a special figure high probability low probability state (latent probability change state) after the big hit game ends. The hidden probability change basically does not shift to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. However, if the normal gaming state at the time of a big hit is a normal high probability state, the game shifts to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. This embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and the special figure 2 is a big hit symbol, and "Special figure F" is not selected (see FIG. 135), but the special figure 1 fluctuates in the electric support state. It may happen if you do.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small bonus symbol. After the small hit game ends, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (which may be referred to as a normal state or a normal game state) is obtained. In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as “Special Figure E” and “Special Figure F” (in this embodiment, twice).

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs a lottery to determine whether or not the winning determination is a big hit, and thereafter, after displaying the symbol variation based on the determination result, the “special drawing A” is displayed. ~ "Special Figure J" is configured to determine whether to stop display on Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 display devices 212 and 214. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display, so that the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game (for example, the special figure certain change state) The presence / absence of the power supply and the presence / absence of the electric support state are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this. For example, apart from the determination of the stop symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game may be determined by lottery. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the stop symbol is determined, for example, while determining the profit state after the jackpot game by lottery, The profit status may be appropriately associated.

  FIG. 132 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 The first symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208 are provided on the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the starting port 232. The display is switched in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “decorative display of decorative design”.

  When notifying 15R big hit and 15R special big hit, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 2-decoration”). 2-decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When explicitly alerting the 15R special jackpot, stop the combination of three identical decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). indicate.

  In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing F” and the small hit of “special drawing G” and “special drawing H”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped. indicate. Further, when a 2R jackpot called “sudden change of“ special drawing E ”is notified,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of notifying the special symbol I and the special symbol J, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 132B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined. However, the player may not know which combination of decorative symbols is which jackpot.

  FIG. 132 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stoppage display modes: “general symbol A”, which is a winning symbol 1, “general symbol B”, which is a winning symbol 2, and “general symbol C” which is an outlier symbol. is there. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not to win and determination of a stop symbol in a general variable game are performed by lottery of software random numbers. As will be described later, hit patterns 1 and 2 in this example are different in the opening pattern of special figure 2 starting port 232 (electric Chu). Based on the detection of the above-mentioned gate sensor that the sphere has passed through the first general map start port 227 or the second general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 is configured to turn on all seven segments, The “variable display of the usual map” is performed by repeatedly lighting one segment in the center. Then, when notifying the winning of the usual figure variable game, the "usual figure A" or "common figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the usual figure variable game, the "normal figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 132 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  FIG. 132 (d) shows an example of a decorative pattern for normal symbols. There are three types of decorative symbols for ordinary symbols in the present embodiment: “common figure decoration 1”, “common figure decoration 2”, and “common figure decoration 3”. On condition that a predetermined ball detection sensor has detected that a ball has passed through the first normal opening 227 except for a predetermined period (for example, during the electric support state, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the big hit game) The general decorative pattern display is switched to the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 in the order of “normal decoration 1” → “normal decoration 2” → “normal decoration 3”. A variable game is played with a predetermined probability.

  In order to notify the hit of “common figure A”, the “normal figure decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. In the case of notification of the hit of “normal figure B”, the “normal figure decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying the deviation of “general map C”, “general map decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S2001, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S2003 following step S2001, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S2005 following step S2003, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 including the above-described inner frame opening sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to detect the detection signal. The presence / absence is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S2005, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S2005, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 59, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S2005, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). Or the first prize opening 227 or the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, It is determined that there has been a passage through the second ordinary start port 229. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 226 and 234 and these starting openings 230, 232, 227, and 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S2005, the door provided in the RAM 308 is monitored for the presence or absence of a door opening detection signal output from the payout control unit 600 that has received the detection result from the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. Store in the detection signal state storage area.

  In step S2007 and step S2009 subsequent to step S2005, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 of the main process shown in FIG. 61 is updated. In the initial value generation random number in the main process of the main control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the random number value for determining the general symbol used in the normal symbol determination lottery (see the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 146) The initial value generation random number counter for generating the initial value of the random number counter for updating is updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as random numbers for determining a custom is from 0 to 99, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random value for determining a normal map provided in the RAM 308. Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  Further, in the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process, a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value used in the main control unit 300, and a common figure for generating a normal winning random number value are used. The winning random number counter and the universal determination random number counter for generating the universal determination random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  Also, for example, if a numerical value range that can be taken as a normal winning random number value is 0 to 65535, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is set to 1. Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 65536, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 65535, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the normal number winning random number value, and the normal number winning random number value is generated. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number value has made one round next.

  Also, for example, if a numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value for determining a normal map is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for determining a normal map provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value 1 is added to and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number for determining a customary figure that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the stored initial value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the general purpose determination random number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating random numbers for general-purpose determination next makes one round. Keep it.

  In step S2011 following step S2009, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure fluctuation time determination random value counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time determination random value value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the special figure fluctuation game or the initial value thereof is updated. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the usual figure variable game is 20000 ms in the usual figure low probability state and 1000 ms in the usual figure high probability state. The pachinko machine 100 may determine the fluctuation time of the usual figure variable game by a lottery using a predetermined table. In step S2011, the pachinko machine 100 determines the fluctuation time of the usual figure fluctuation time for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the usual figure variable game. You may update the value of the random number counter for normal figure fluctuation | variation time determination which produces | generates a numerical value, or its initial value.

  In step S2013 following step S2011, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S2015 subsequent to step S2013, winning prize counter updating processing is performed. In this winning hole counter updating process, when winning holes 226 and 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 227, and 229 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S2017 following step S2015, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the first general figure starting port 227, the second general figure starting port 229, and the variable winning port 234. . Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S2005.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and special figure determination random values in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") is special. 1 is stored in the same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 232 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and random number for determination of special figure in the special figure 2 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 start information") 2 is stored as many as the number of the special figure 2 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  When there is a prize at the first general map start port 227 or the second general map start port 229 and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 (in this example, the hold number 4 is full) If not, the value is acquired from the normal winning random number counter as a normal winning random value and stored in the corresponding normal random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S2019 subsequent to step S2017, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S2021 following step S2019, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general chart state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the flag for the first normal map is ON, When the second common symbol flag is turned on so that the display mode of symbol 1 (common figure A) is turned on, when the outlier flag is turned on so as to be displayed on the winning symbol 2 (common figure B). The 7-segment LED composing the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the display pattern of the extraordinary symbol (common figure C) is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in the display mode. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the common symbol display device 210 displays the symbol on one of the winning symbol 1 (common symbol A), the winning symbol 2 (common symbol B), and the off symbol (common symbol C). Do. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a win, either the first ordinary figure hit flag or the second ordinary figure hit flag is turned on based on the usual figure determination result. When the flag for the first and second maps is on, the diagram status update at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the diagram stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the processing, a normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) (part of various solenoids 332). ), A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure off flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S2023.

  In step S2023, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is equal to or greater than 1, the result of the general-purpose variable game is determined by the random lottery based on the general-purpose winning random number value stored in the above-described general-purpose random number value storage area and a table shown in FIG. A hit determination (determining whether or not to change the ordinary game) is performed to determine whether to win or not. When the result of the hit determination is a win, the symbol is determined by random number lottery based on the common random number value stored in the random value storage area (see the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 146). When the universal symbol determination result is the winning symbol 1, the first universal symbol flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and when the universal symbol determination result is the winning symbol 2, the second universal symbol provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set the hit flag on. When the result of the hit determination is out of place, the usual off-set flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time in the normal high probability state is 1000 ms, and the normal symbol variation time in the normal low probability state is 20000 ms. When determining the symbol variation time of the usual figure by lottery, obtain the value of the random number value counter for determining the ordinary diagram variation time for generating the random value for determining the ordinary diagram variation time as the random value for determining the ordinary diagram variation time, Based on the acquired random number value for determining the normal map change time, one time for displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is selected as the normal map change display time. Is stored in a normal variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S2024 following step S2023, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbol related lottery symbols are drawn Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process. The flow of the special figure prefetch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prefetching result storage unit that stores a special figure prefetching result (also referred to as a prior determination result) as a result of executing the special figure prefetching process is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 1 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, there is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 1 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 1 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 1 prefetch result information in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted, the remaining special figure 1 prefetch information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 2 in this example. The RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results of the special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 2 prefetch result information in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 2 prefetching result is deleted, the remaining special figure 2 prefetching information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time. Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S2033) to be described later, the prefetch result information may be transmitted only for the increment, or the prefetch result information for all suspensions may be transmitted.

  Subsequently, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S2025). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 131 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A or special figure B, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 132 (a) is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is When ON, the special figure C or special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is off and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H When the first off flag is on, the special figure I When the second misalignment flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off to control the special figure J so that the special figure 2 is displayed. Set to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A, special figure B), a 15R jackpot symbol (special figure C, special figure D), and a sudden probability change symbol (special figure E). , Hidden probability variation (special figure F), first small hit symbol (special figure G), second small hit symbol (special figure H), first off symbol (special symbol I), and second off symbol (special symbol) J) Confirm the display of any one of the symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1, or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S2033) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S2033) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S2033) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to an opening / closing solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) of the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is also output. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S2033) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is repeated at predetermined times (15 rounds in the present embodiment) for the opening / closing control of the door member and is started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative pattern Information indicating the effect standby period in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. Here, the short-time state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Further, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232 is likely to be long (electric chew extension or electric tulong). Open). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The control state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric Chu extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state. In addition, a time-short state including a control state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is also shortened is called.

In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.
Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S2033) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S2027.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S2027). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S2025 and step S2027 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for special figure 2 is performed first (step S2029), and then the special figure related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). (Step S2031). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S2029), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is stored from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtain and start determination of whether or not to make a big hit, determination of whether or not to make a small hit, determination of whether or not to lose, and display of fluctuation in FIG. 2 using the determination table shown in FIG. Then, the time until the stop display is determined, and the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is determined. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  In step S2033 following step S2031, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the second small hit flag, which are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 are included in the command data. It includes information indicating the flag value of each of the 1 off flag, the 2 off flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a change stop command, the value of 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first off flag, second off flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of a 15R jackpot (or 15R special jackpot) start command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the number of jackpot rounds, the special figure probability fluctuation flag In the case of a big hit end command, the special figure probability variation flag value, the hourly flag value, the power support count value, etc. are included, and in the case of a 2R big hit start command, 2R Includes jackpot flag value, number of jackpot rounds, special figure probability fluctuation flag value, hourly flag value, etc. For jackpot end command, special figure probability fluctuation flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number, etc. In the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, it includes the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of jackpot rounds Etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  The prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information stored in the prefetch result storage unit together with the types of special figures 1 and 2 in the command data. The prefetch result information in the prefetch result information command may be only an increment or may include prefetch result information for all suspensions. In the present embodiment, the prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information for all suspensions.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag value, special figure probability variation flag value, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the variation time of the special figure 2 variable game selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S2033, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S2035 following step S2033, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S2037 following step S2035, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S2005 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full pan error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S2039 following step S2037, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S2043. If the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2041. In step S2041, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S2043, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, a special figure variation game or the like in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 182. First, the success / failure determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The data table shown in FIG. 134 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. FIG. 134 (a) and FIG. 134 (b) show the success / failure determination process of special figure 2 or special figure 1 in the special figure 2 or special figure 1 related lottery process (steps S2029 and S2031) of the main control unit timer interruption process. An example of the use determination table used is shown. FIG. 134 (a) shows a table used during the special figure high probability, and FIG. 134 (b) shows a table used during the special figure low probability. FIG. 134 (c) shows a small hit determination table used in the small hit determination when “off” is selected in the lottery using FIG. 134 (a) or 134 (b). .

  In the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 134 (a) and FIG. 134 (b), items of “special figure probability” in the first column from the left, “random number range” in the second column, and “result of success / failure” in the third column. It consists of The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 134 (a) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 11638, and a numerical value 11639 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “out” is assigned to the values 11639 to 65535, and “big hit” is assigned to the values 10001 to 11638. Yes.

  The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 134 (b) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10162, and a numerical value 10163 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10163 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10162. Yes.

  The table for determining small hits shown in FIG. 134 (c) is composed of items of “special drawing type” in the first column from the left, “random number range” in the second column, and “result of success / failure” in the third column. Yes. “Special figure 1” in the “special figure type” in the first column shown in FIG. 134 (c) indicates that it is a special figure 1 variable game. In the present embodiment, no small hit is provided in the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, only when the lottery using the table of FIG. 134 (a) or FIG. The lottery for the small hit determination using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 variable game success / failure determination, if the lottery using the table of FIG. 134 (a) or FIG. 134 (b) results in “out of”, the result of the success / failure determination is out of place.

  “Random number range” in the second column of the table of FIG. 134 (c) indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired small hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into two values, a numerical value 0-12999 and a numerical value 13000-65535. In the third column, “Success / Failure result” is assigned “special figure 1” and “small hit” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 12999, and “off” corresponding to the numerical values 13000 to 65535.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the acquired hit determination for determining whether the result of the floating game in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 is to be won (big hit) or not to be won (missed). Whether or not the random number is determined is determined by referring to the determination table. For example, when the gaming state at the time of winning / failing determination is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads out the winning probability high probability table shown in FIG. In the case of the low probability state shown in FIG. 134, the low / probability determination probability table shown in FIG. 134 (b) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to. Further, in the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination, when the lottery using the table of FIG. 134 (a) or FIG. 134 (b) results in “out”, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 134 (c). The lottery of the small hit judgment using is performed.

  FIG. 135 shows a special figure determination table used for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed after completion of symbol variation. 135. The special figure determination table shown in FIG. 135 has a “result of determination” in the first column from the left, a “special figure 1 random number range” in the second column, a “special figure 2 random number range” in the third column, and a fourth column. It is composed of items of “stop symbols”. The “Win / Fail determination result” in the first column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where “big hit” is determined as a result of the hit determination using the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 134 (a) or 134 (b), and “small hit” is shown in FIG. As a result of the success / failure determination shown in c), the case where it is determined as “small hit” is shown, and “out of” indicates the result of the determination of success / failure of the special figure 1 variable game using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. , If it is determined as “out of”, or as a result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful using the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 134 (a) or 134 (b), it is determined as “out of”. Shows the case.

  The item “Special Figure 1 Random Range” in the second column indicates the numerical value range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special figure for hit 1 or the random number value for determining the off symbol. “Special figure 1 random number range” corresponds to the item “big hit” of the “Win / Fail determination result” in the first column, the numerical value 0-19, the numerical value 20-29, the numerical value 30-39, the numerical value 40-49, the numerical value 50 To 69 and numerical values 70 to 99, corresponding to “small hit”, divided into two numerical values 0 to 79 and 80 to 99, and corresponding to “out”, numerical values 0 to 96 and numerical values 97-99.

  The item “Special Figure 2 Random Number Range” in the third column indicates a numerical value range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special figure for hit 2 or the random number value for determining the off symbol. The “special figure 2 random number range” corresponds to the item “big hit” of the “result determination” in the first column, the numerical values 0 to 49, the numerical values 50 to 69, the numerical values 70 to 79, the numerical values 80 to 89, and the numerical value 90. The numerical value is not assigned to “small hit”, and is divided into two values of 0 to 96 and 97 to 99 corresponding to “out of”.

  The item “stop symbol” in the fourth column represents a stop symbol in the special figure variable game. “Stop symbol” corresponds to “Big Bonus” and the special figure 1 random number range corresponds to the numerical value 0-19, “Special figure A”, the numerical value 20-29 corresponds to “Special figure B”, and the numerical value 30-39. "Special Figure C", "Special Figure D" corresponding to numerical values 40-49, "Special Figure E" corresponding to numerical values 50-69, "Special Figure F" corresponding to numerical values 70-99 Each stop symbol pattern is assigned. Further, the “stop symbol” is “stop symbol” and the special symbol 1 random number range corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 79, “special diagram G”, and the special symbol H corresponds to the numerical values 80 to 99, “stop symbol”. Are assigned to each. Furthermore, the “stop symbol” has “stop” and the special symbol 1 random number range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 96 is “special diagram I”, and the special symbol J is corresponding to the numerical values 97 to 99. Each is assigned.

  The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the special figure 2 random number range corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 49, “special figure A”, the numerical values 50 to 69 correspond to “special figure B”, and the numerical values 70 to 79. "Special figure C", "Special figure D" corresponding to numerical values 80 to 89, and "Special figure E" stop symbol forms corresponding to numerical values 90 to 99, respectively. In addition, the big hit and the small hit of special figure F are not provided in the determination result of special figure 2 variable game. For this reason, the special figure 2 random number range is not assigned to “special figure F” and “small hit”. Furthermore, the “stop symbol” has “stop” and the special symbol 2 random number range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 96 is “special symbol I”, and the special symbol J is corresponding to the numerical values 97 to 99. Each is assigned. Note that in the tables shown in FIG. 135 and subsequent figures, “-” is displayed in places where numerical values are not assigned.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure” on the Special Figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on the ball entering the Special Figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Which stop symbol form of “F” is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure determining table with respect to the acquired random number for determining the special figure for hitting.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “Special Figure G” or “Special Figure H” on the Special Figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on the ball entering the Special Figure 1 starting port 230 is a small hit. Which stop symbol form of “” is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for determining the special figure for hitting.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “special drawing I” or “special drawing J” on the special figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of place. Which stop symbol pattern is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special symbol determination table with respect to the acquired random symbol value for determining the error symbol. Note that the random symbol value for losing symbol determination is acquired from the random symbol counter for losing symbol determination provided in the RAM 308 when determining the symbol for stopping detachment.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “special drawing A” to “special drawing E” on the special figure 2 display device 214 when the success / failure determination result based on the entrance to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. Which stop symbol pattern is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special figure 2 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for determining the special figure for hitting. In addition, as shown in FIG. 135, the “stop symbol” is not assigned to “special drawing F” in the random number value in “special drawing 2 random number range” in the case where the “win / fail judgment result” is “big hit”. For this reason, in the special figure 2 variable game, the stop symbol in the case where the determination result is a big hit is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E”, and “Special Figure F” is not selected. It has become. After the big hit game of “Special Figure F” ends, the gaming state becomes a normal low probability state. On the other hand, after the big hit games of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are finished, the gaming state becomes a normal high probability state. The special symbol 2 variable game jackpot game is the special symbol 2 variable game jackpot game because the stop symbols in the case of the special figure 2 variable game success / failure determination result are “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E”. It is set more advantageous for the player than Further, in the present embodiment, although a small hit is not provided in the result of the winning / failure determination based on the entrance to the special figure 2 starting port 232, the result of the outcome determining based on the entrance to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is small. A hit may be provided.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays “special drawing I” and “special drawing J” on the special figure 2 display device 214 when the determination result based on winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of place. Which stop symbol pattern is to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the special symbol determination table for the acquired random symbol value for determining the loss symbol. Note that the random symbol value for losing symbol determination is acquired from the random symbol counter for losing symbol determination provided in the RAM 308 when determining the symbol for stopping detachment.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the distribution of random numbers of “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”, which are 15R special jackpots, has a larger distribution width in the Special Figure 2 random number range than in the Special Figure 1 random number range. ing. For this reason, the special figure 2 variable game has a higher probability of winning the 15R special jackpot than the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 136 shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S2031) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table shown in FIG. 136 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 136, the special figure 1 variable display time determination table includes “stop symbol”, “table”, “random number selection range”, “variable time” and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It consists of five items.

  The “stop symbol” in the left column is a stop symbol determined using the special figure determination table in FIG. 135, and is “special figure A to special figure D (common with or without electric support)”, “special figure E”. ~ Special figure H (common with and without electric support) "," Special figure I and special figure J (no electric support: hold 3) ", and" Special figure I and special figure J (no electric support: hold 0-2, Or, electric support is available: hold 0-3) ”. When the “stop symbol” is “special chart A to special chart D”, whether or not the game state at the time of variation determination is the electric support state (whether or not the electric support is present) and the number of the special figure 1 variable game being held are determined. First, the table “1” is selected. Further, when the “stop symbol” is “special drawing E to special diagram H”, the table “2” is selected regardless of the presence / absence of electric support at the time of determination of the variation time and the number of suspension of the special diagram 1 variation game.

  When “Stop Symbol” is “Special Figure I / Special Figure J”, the table “3” or the table “4” is selected according to the presence / absence of electric support when the variable time is determined and the number of special figure 1 variable games held. It has come to be. If the special symbol I or J is determined as the stop symbol, there is no electric support and the number of special figure 1 variable games held is 3, the table “3” is selected and there is no electric support and the hold When the number is 0 to 2 or when there is electric support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table “4” is selected.

  “Random number selection range” on the right side of the “table” in the figure indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. The random number value for determining the special figure variation time is acquired, for example, at the same time as the start information acquisition of the special figure 1 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read out from the predetermined storage area when the variable display time of the special figure 1 is determined. It has become. In the table “1”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. In the table “2”, the “random number selection range” is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table “3”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 65000, a numerical value 65001 to 65400, a numerical value 65401 to 65500, and a numerical value 65501 to 65535. In the table “4”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535.

  “Variation time” on the right side of the “Random number selection range” indicates the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game. The “variable time” is “15000 ms” corresponding to the table “1” and the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1000, “45000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 1001 to 20000, and “65000 ms corresponding to the numerical values 20001 to 65535. "Is assigned to each. “Variation time” is assigned with “12000 ms” corresponding to the table “2” and the random number selection range corresponding to all the numerical values 0 to 65535. The “variation time” corresponds to the table “3”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 65000, “3000 ms”, the numerical values 65001 to 65400, “10000 ms”, and the numerical values 65401 to 65500. “60000 ms” and “60000 ms” are assigned to the numerical values 65501 to 65535, respectively. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “4”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 50000, “7000 ms”, the numerical value 50001 to 60000 corresponding to “10000 ms”, and the numerical value 60001 to 65000. “60000 ms” and “60000 ms” are respectively assigned to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” to the right of the “variable time” diagram is the first decorative symbol display in the special diagram 1 variable game corresponding to the combination of the “stop symbol” and the selected “variable time”. The effect aspect performed with the apparatus 208 and the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209 is shown. The “effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” corresponds to the “stop symbol” corresponding to “special A to D”, the variable time “1500 ms”, “normal reach”, and the variable time “45000 ms”. “Per reach A” and “per reach B” corresponding to the fluctuation time “65000 ms”. In addition, in the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “stop chance” is assigned “special E to special H” and “variable time“ 12000 ms ”is assigned“ all chance stop ”. Also, the “effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” is “stop symbol” corresponding to “special drawing I / special drawing J”, “variable shortening” corresponding to the variable time “3000 ms”, and variable time “7000 ms”. Correspondingly, “out of”, “variable reach out” corresponding to fluctuation time “10000 ms”, “reach out of reach A” corresponding to fluctuation time “40000 ms”, “reach out of reach B” corresponding to fluctuation time “60000 ms” Are assigned to each.

  FIG. 137 shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S2029) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table shown in FIG. 137 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 137, the special figure 2 variable display time determination table is “stop symbol”, “table”, “random number selection range”, “variable time” and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It consists of five items.

  The “stop symbol” in the left column is a stop symbol determined using the special figure determination table of FIG. 135, and is “special figure A to special figure D (no electric support)”, “special figure A to special figure”. Figure D (No Electric Support: Hold 1-3), "Special Figure A-Special D (Electric Support: Hold 0)", "Special E (Electric Support: Hold 1-3) (Special Figure High) "Probability)", "Special Figure E (state other than Table 8)", "Special Figure I / Special Figure J (With Electric Support: Hold 1-3)", "Special Figure I / Special Figure J (With Electric Support: There are eight categories: “hold 0)” and “special map I / special map J (no electric support: hold 0 to 3)”. When “stop symbol” is “special chart A to special chart D”, any of the tables “5” to “7” is selected depending on the presence or absence of electric support at the time of determining the variation time or the number of special figure 2 variable games held. Is selected. When the “stop symbol” is “special drawing A to special diagram D (no electric support)”, the table “5” is selected. When the “stop symbol” is “special diagram A to special diagram D (with electric support: hold 1 to 3)”, the table “6” is selected. When the “stop symbol” is “special diagram A to special diagram D (with electric support: hold 0)”, the table “7” is selected.

  Further, when the “stop symbol” is “special diagram E (with electric support: hold 1 to 3) (special diagram high probability)”, the table “8” is selected. Further, when the “stop symbol” is “special drawing E (a state other than the table 8)”, the table “9” is selected. Here, the states other than the table 8 are: electric support is present: state of special figure high probability of hold 0, no electric support: state of hold 0-3, or electric support: special figure low of hold 0-3 It is in a state where the probability is normal and the probability is high (short time).

  When “Stop Symbol” is “Special Figure I / Special Figure J”, one of the tables “10” to “12” depending on the presence of electric support at the time of variable time determination and the number of special figure 2 variable games held Is selected. When the “stop symbol” is “special diagram I / special diagram J (with electric support: hold 1 to 3)”, the table “10” is selected. When the “stop symbol” is “special diagram I / special diagram J (with electric support: hold 0)”, the table “11” is selected. When the “stop symbol” is “special diagram I / special diagram J (no electric support: hold 0 to 3)”, the table “12” is selected.

  “Random number selection range” on the right side of the “table” in the figure indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. The random number value for determining the special figure variation time is acquired, for example, simultaneously with the acquisition of the start information of FIG. It has become. In the table “5”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. In the table “6”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. In the table “7”, the “random number selection range” is divided into a numerical value 0 to 20000 and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. In each of the tables “8” and “9”, the “random number selection range” is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table “10”, the “random number selection range” is divided into a numerical value 0 to 65500 and a numerical value 65501 to 65535. In the table “11”, the “random number selection range” is divided into two values of a numerical value 0 to 65500 and a numerical value 65501 to 65535. In the table “12”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535.

  “Variation time” on the right side of the “Random number selection range” indicates the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. “Variation time” is “55000” corresponding to the table “5”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1000, “45000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 1001 to 20000, and “65000 ms corresponding to the numerical values 20001 to 65535. "Is assigned to each. The “variation time” corresponds to the table “6”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1000 “1000 ms”, the numerical values 1001 to 20000 corresponding to “15000 ms”, and the numerical values 20001 to 65535. “45000 ms” is assigned. “Variation time” has a table “7”, and the random number selection range is assigned “15000 ms” corresponding to numerical values 0 to 20000, and “45000 ms” corresponding to numerical values 20001 to 65535, respectively. “Variation time” is assigned “1000 ms” corresponding to the table “8” and the random number selection range corresponding to all numerical values 0 to 65535. Further, “12000 ms” is assigned to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “9” and the random number selection range corresponding to all numerical values 0 to 65535. The “variable time” is assigned with a table “10” and a random number selection range of “1000 ms” corresponding to numerical values 0 to 65500 and “40000 ms” corresponding to numerical values 65001 to 65535. “Variation time” has a table “11”, and the random number selection range is assigned “7000 ms” corresponding to numerical values 0 to 65500, and “40000 ms” corresponding to numerical values 65001 to 65535, respectively. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “12”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 50000, “7000 ms”, the numerical values 50001 to 60000 corresponding to “10000 ms”, and the numerical values 60001 to 65000. “60000 ms” and “60000 ms” are respectively assigned to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” diagram is the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure 2 variable game corresponding to the combination of the “stop symbol” and the selected “variable time”. The production | generation aspect performed by is shown. "Decoration mode on decoration design display device" corresponds to "stop pattern" is "Special Figure A to Special Figure D (no electric support)", corresponding to a fluctuation time of 15000ms, "per normal reach", and a fluctuation time of 45000ms Then, “per reach A” and “per reach B” are assigned corresponding to the fluctuation time of 65000 ms. In addition, the “appearance mode on the decorative symbol display device” is “stop symbol” is “special diagram A to special diagram D (with electric support: on hold 1 to 3)” and the fluctuation time is 1000 ms. “Per normal reach” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 15000 ms, and “per reach A” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 45000 ms. In addition, the “appearance mode on the decorative symbol display device” is “super-design” corresponding to the “stop symbol” is “special E (electric support: with hold 1 to 3) (special symbol high probability)” and the fluctuation time is 1000 ms. "Shortening fluctuation" is assigned. In addition, in the “appearance mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “stop symbol” is assigned as “special symbol E (a state other than the table 8)” and “all chance stop” corresponding to the fluctuation time of 12000 ms. . In addition, the “effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” is “super-shortened” corresponding to the “stop symbol” is “special symbol I / special symbol J (with electric support: hold 1 to 3)” and the fluctuation time is 1000 ms. "Reach A loss" is assigned in correspondence with the fluctuation time of 40,000 ms. In addition, the “appearance mode on the decorative symbol display device” has “stop symbol” corresponding to “special diagram I / special diagram J (with electric support: 0 hold)” and fluctuating time of 7000 ms. Corresponding to 40000 ms, “reach A loss” is assigned. Furthermore, the “effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” is “out of symbol” corresponding to the “stop symbol” is “special symbol I / special symbol J (no electric support: 0-3 on hold)” and the variation time is 7000 ms. “Normal reach losing” is assigned corresponding to the fluctuation time 10000 ms, “reach A losing” is assigned to the changing time 40000 ms, and “reach B losing” is assigned corresponding to the changing time 60000 ms.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the special drawing 2 variable display time determination lottery using the table of FIG. 137, the stop symbol “special drawing E” is selected, and the special drawing high probability state and the general drawing high probability state are selected. When the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0 (during electric support) and the special figure 2 priority game machine digests the newly increased special figure 2 variable game at high speed, special figure 1 Since there is a possibility of starting a variable game, in order to provide a time for a new game ball to win in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the effect of “stop all chances” is performed, and the fluctuation of “12000 ms” Therefore, the table “9” is selected.

  In addition, when the stop symbol “Special E” is selected, and the special figure low probability state and the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support), the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0-3, the special figure high In order to make the player expect to shift to the probability state, an effect of “stop all chances” is performed and a fluctuation of “12000 ms” is performed.

  In addition, when the stop symbol “Special Figure E” is selected, and the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0 to 3 in the special figure low probability state and the normal figure low probability state, transition to the special figure high probability state. In order to make the player expect the game, the effect of “stop chance chance” is performed, and the fluctuation of “12000 ms” is performed.

  Next, FIG. 138 shows a hold change notice lottery table that is referred to when drawing whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display image (hold icon) (details will be described later) displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Will be described. FIG. 138 shows a pending change advance notice lottery table (prefetching advance notice: at start-up winning) referred to in the pending change advance notice lottery for drawing whether to change the display mode of the held display image. The hold change notice lottery table is used in step S2301 (hold change lottery 1) in the first sub-control unit look-ahead notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition described later. The pending change lottery table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example.

  138 shows the change change notice lottery table shown in the left column, “Fluctuation time”, “Rendering mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “Normal”, “A”, “B”, “Communication → A” and “Communication”. → B ”. “Variation time” is “variation time” determined using the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 136 or the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. In the command setting transmission process (step S2033) in the control unit timer interrupt process, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms”, and “65000 ms”.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” diagram indicates the effect mode on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 in the special symbol variable game. . The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” is the “variable time” and “decorative symbol display device” in the special figure 1 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 136 or the special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. It is associated with “variation time” so as to be the same as the association with “effect mode”. “10000 ms” is “normal reach miss”, “40000 ms” is “reach A miss”, “60000 ms” is “reach B miss”, “15000 ms” is “normal reach”, and “45000 ms” is “per reach A”. And “65,000 ms” is “per reach B”.

  “Normal” on the right side of the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” is the default display (without changing the display mode of the hold display image shown as “normal hold” in FIG. 139A described later). For example, the white circle hold display) indicates that the special figure variable game hold is displayed, and the “A” on the right side of the “A” indicates the “boat eye” shown as “hold A” in FIG. "Panda of no" shows that the pre-reading notice of the special figure variable game is executed in the display mode of the character image, and "hold B" on the right side thereof is shown as "hold B" in FIG. 139 (c) described later. In the display mode of the character image of “Bancho”, it indicates that the pre-reading notice of the special figure variable game is executed, and “communication → A” on the right is determined by a lottery using a table shown in FIG. 141 described later. The hold display image changes from normal hold to hold A at the timing. “B → B” on the right side of this indicates that the hold display image changes from normal hold to hold B at the timing determined by lottery using the table shown in FIG. 141 described later. . “Normal”, “A”, “B”, “communication → A”, and “communication → B” correspond to the “variation time” and the numerical value range of random numbers (0 to 0) to be compared with the random number value for holding change lottery. 99). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a random number value for holding change lottery from a random number counter for holding change lottery provided in the RAM 408.

  When the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, the numerical value 0 to 98 is assigned to “normal”, the numerical value 99 is assigned to “A”, and “B”, “communication → A”, and “communication → B”. No numeric value is assigned to. When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical value 0 to 89 is assigned to “normal”, the numerical value 90 is assigned to “A”, the numerical value 91 is assigned to “B”, and “communication → A”. Numerical values 92 to 97 are assigned to “B”, and numerical values 98 to 99 are assigned to “communication → B”. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, a numerical value 0 to 89 is assigned to “normal”, a numerical value 90 is assigned to “A”, a numerical value 91 is assigned to “B”, and “communication → A”. Numerical values 92 to 97 are assigned to “B”, and numerical values 98 to 99 are assigned to “communication → B”. When “Variation time” is “15000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 69 are assigned to “normal”, numerical values 70 to 77 are assigned to “A”, and numerical values 78 to 79 are assigned to “B”. A numerical value 80 to 98 is assigned to “communication → A”, and a numerical value 99 is assigned to “communication → B”. When “Fluctuation time” is “45000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to “normal”, numerical values 30 to 69 are assigned to “A”, and numerical values 70 to 85 are assigned to “B”. Numerical values 86 to 94 are assigned to “A → A”, and numerical values 85 to 99 are assigned to “A → B”. When “variation time” is “65000 ms”, numerical values 0 to 19 are assigned to “normal”, numerical values 20 to 39 are assigned to “A”, and numerical values 40 to 69 are assigned to “B”. Numerical values 70 to 83 are assigned to “A → A”, and numerical values 84 to 99 are assigned to “A → B”.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of suggesting a reliability that is high or low in the possibility of deriving a specific success / failure determination result (for example, a big hit) in the pre-reading notice effect due to the pending change. . Although detailed explanation is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reading notice effect due to the hold change is the probability of winning or losing, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined hold mode, etc. To be determined. In the present embodiment, “A”, “B”, “communication → A”, and “communication → B” have higher reliability than “normal”, so that “A”, “B”, “communication → ”A” and “communication → B” are compared to “normal” in the case of reach production (“per normal reach”, “per reach A” and “per reach B”) shown in FIG. It is set so as to be less in the case of an outlier reach effect (“out of normal reach”, “out of reach A” and “out of reach B”). In addition, “B” has a higher reach of reliability than “A”, and “B” has a reach effect (“per reach A” and “per reach A” compared to “A”). In the case of “per reach B”), it is set so as to decrease in the case of the reach effect of “out of reach” (“out of normal reach”, “out of reach A” and “out of reach B”). Furthermore, in order that “communication → B” is more reliable than “communication → A”, “communication → B” has a higher reach of random numbers compared to “communication → A”. It is set to be small in the case of “per reach A” and “per reach B”, and less in the case of outlier reach production (“normal reach out”, “reach A out” and “reach B out”). Yes.

  In this way, since the reliability of the hold B is set higher than the reliability of the hold A, the pachinko machine 100 displays that the display of the hold B wins the big hit when the hold A is displayed. It can make a player expect. In addition, since the reliability that changes from normal hold to hold B is set higher than the reliability that changes from normal hold to hold A, normal hold to hold B is changed from normal hold to hold A. The player can expect that the player who wins the display wins the jackpot. As described above, the change from the hold A, the hold B, the normal hold to the hold A, and the change from the normal hold to the hold B can also indicate the level of expectation of winning the big hit, that is, the degree of expectation. It has become.

  In addition, when “communication → A” and “communication → B” are selected in the lottery using the reservation change notice lottery table in FIG. 138, the hold change effect using the second decorative symbol display device 209 is executed. Details of the pending change lottery will be described later.

  FIG. 139 shows an example of the display mode of the hold display of the special figure variable game. The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, three display modes as a special display variable game hold display. FIG. 139 (a) shows a display mode of the hold display image when “normal” is selected in the hold change notice lottery (when the change is not selected in the hold change lottery). As shown in FIG. 139 (a), the display mode of the hold display image in “normal” is, for example, a display mode representing a white circular pattern. The display mode of the hold display image shown in FIG. 139 (a) is a display mode in the default display when the display mode of the special display variable game hold display is not changed. For this reason, the hold display image when the hold change lottery is not executed is also the display mode shown in FIG. FIG. 139 (b) shows the display mode of the hold display image when “A” is won in the hold change notice lottery. As shown in FIG. 139 (b), when “A” is won, or after “To → A” is won and the hold change effect is ended, the hold display image is a display representing the character “Panda” It becomes an aspect. FIG. 139 (c) shows a display mode of the hold display image when “B” is won in the hold change notice lottery. As shown in FIG. 139 (c), when “B” is won, or after the “change → B” is won and the hold change effect is ended, the hold display image has a display mode representing the “bancho” character. Become. The display mode of “hold A” or “hold B” corresponds to a special display mode different from the normal display mode.

  Next, when selecting “Normal”, “A” or “B” in the pending change notice lottery table of FIG. The table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 shows a gasse effect lottery table which is referred to in the case of a gasse effect lottery for lottery of whether or not to execute a hold change effect gasse effect. In the gasse effect here, a hold change effect similar to the case where “communication → A” or “communication → B” is selected in the hold change notice lottery table is executed. Is not to change. The gasse effect lottery table is used in step S2305 (gasse effect lottery) in the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition described later. The gasse effect lottery table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  The gasse effect lottery table shown in FIG. 140 is divided into three “display mode”, “gase effect execution” and “gase effect non-execution” from the left column. The “display mode” indicates the display mode of the hold display image determined using the hold change notice lottery table shown in FIG. 138.

  “Gase effect execution” on the right side of the “display mode” in the drawing indicates that the gaze effect is executed, and “Gase effect non-execution” next to it indicates that the gaze effect is not performed. “Gase effect execution” and “Gase effect non-execution” are each divided by a numerical value range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with a random number value for gasse effect lottery corresponding to “display mode”. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a random number value for lottery lottery from a random counter for lottery lottery provided in the RAM 408.

  When the “display mode” is “normal”, the numerical values 0 to 9 are assigned to “execution of the gasse effect”, and the numerical values 10 to 99 are assigned to “non-execution of the gaze effect”. When the “display mode” is “A”, the numerical values 0 to 39 are assigned to “execution of the gasse effect”, and the numerical values 40 to 99 are assigned to “non-execution of the gaze effect”. When the “display mode” is “B”, no numerical value is assigned to “execution of the gaze effect”, and all numerical values 0 to 99 are assigned to “non-execution of the gaze effect”.

  As shown in the gasse effect lottery table of FIG. 140, when the display mode of the hold display image is hold B, the gaze effect is not executed. Further, when the display mode of the hold display image is normal hold or hold A, the probability of not executing the gaze effect is higher than the probability of executing the gaze effect.

  Next, when “communication → A” or “communication → B” is selected in the pending change advance notice lottery table in FIG. An effect start timing determination table referred to when determining the start timing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 shows an effect start timing determination table that is referred to when determining the timing for executing the hold change effect or the gas change effect of the hold change effect. The effect start timing determination table is used in step S2309 (effect start timing lottery) in the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition described later. The effect start timing determination table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example.

  The effect start timing determination table shown in FIG. 141 is divided into three from the left column: “the number of holds at the time of winning a prize”, “execution of gasse effect”, and “non-execution of gasse effect”. “Holding number at the time of winning” indicates the number of holdings when a game ball wins a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the number of holds for the advance notice increases. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can hold up to four special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. When the number of holds for the advance notice increases, the number of holds for each special figure variable game is 0 to 3. For this reason, “the number of winning reservations” is divided into four, 0-3. In addition, when “the number of holds at the time of winning” is “0”, the hold is consumed immediately after the hold related to the notice increases, and the special figure variable game related to the notice is started. For this reason, when the “pending number at the time of winning” is “0”, it can be considered that the special figure variable game related to the increased holding is the change.

  “Change on hold 4” on the right side of the “Pending number at the time of winning” figure indicates that the change change effect or its gusset effect is executed when the special figure variable game related to the notice becomes the fourth hold. "Change on hold 4" on the right side of the figure "change on hold 4" indicates that the change change effect or its gusset effect is executed when the special figure change game related to the notice becomes the third hold. "Change on hold 3" on the right side of the figure "Change on hold 3" indicates that the special change game related to the advance notice is changed to the second hold, the hold change effect or its gaze effect is executed "Change on hold 2" on the right side of the "Change on hold 2" figure indicates that the special figure change game related to the advance notice becomes the first hold, the change change effect or its gasset effect Indicates that it will be executed.

  “Change in hold 4”, “change in hold 3”, “change in hold 2”, and “change in hold 1” are compared with the random number value for the production start timing lottery corresponding to “the number of holds when winning”. Each is divided by a numerical range (0 to 99). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 obtains an effect start timing lottery random value from an effect start timing lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408.

  When “the number of holds at the time of winning” is “3”, a value of 0 to 39 is assigned to “change at hold 4”, a value of 40 to 79 is assigned to “change at hold 3”, and “change at hold 2” Are assigned numerical values 80 to 89, and “changed by hold 1” are assigned numerical values 90 to 99. In addition, when “the number of holds at the time of winning” is “2”, the hold related to the notice will not be the fourth hold, so no value is assigned to “change in hold 4”, and “hold 3 Numerical values 0 to 39 are assigned to “Change in”, numerical values 40 to 79 are assigned to “Change in hold 2”, and Numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to “Change in hold 1”. In addition, when “the number of holds at the time of winning” is “1”, the hold for the advance notice does not become the fourth and third hold, so “change in hold 4” and “change in hold 3” are numerical values. Are assigned, numerical values 0 to 89 are assigned to “changes in hold 2”, and numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to “changes in hold 1”. In addition, when “the number of holds at the time of winning” is “0 (the change)”, the hold related to the notice does not become the fourth to second hold, so “change from hold 4” to “hold 2” No numerical value is assigned to “change”, and all numerical values 0 to 99 are assigned to “change in hold 1”.

  When “Number of Holds at Winning” is “0 (Change)” and “Change with Hold 1” is selected, the hold is consumed immediately after the increase in the hold related to the advance notice, and the special figure variable game related to the advance starts. Therefore, the on-hold change effect or its gasse effect cannot be executed during the period in which the on-hold is on hold, and the on-hold change effect or its gaze effect is executed during execution of the special figure variable game related to the advance notice. For this reason, the pending change effect or the gusset effect in this case functions as a notice of the change.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the on-hold change effect or the effect time of the gusset effect is 50000 ms. In addition, when the hold change effect or the gase effect is executed as a notice of the change, the change time of the change is the shortest 10000 ms (out of normal reach). For this reason, even if the hold change effect or its gasse effect is executed as a notice of the change, it is possible to reliably end the hold change effect or the gaze effect before the change ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the success / failure result of the usual figure variation game and the opening pattern of the special figure 2 starting port (electric chew) will be described. FIG. 142 is a table for explaining the success / failure result of the usual figure variation game and the opening pattern of the special figure 2 starting port (electricity Chu). The table shown in FIG. 142 is divided into three types from the left column: “common figure type”, “common figure decorative type”, and “electric chew release pattern”.

  The “type of common map” indicates a stop display pattern of a general map for notifying whether or not a common variable game is successful. In the present embodiment, there are three types of stop-display symbols for normal maps, as shown in FIG. 132 (c).

  The “common figure decoration type” on the right side of the “normal figure type” diagram indicates a normal symbol decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed during the execution of the universal figure variation game. As shown in FIG. 132 (d), when notifying the hit of “general map A”, the normal symbol decorative symbol “○” (general symbol decoration 1) is stopped and displayed. When notifying the winning, “「 ”(common figure decoration 2) is stopped and displayed, and when notifying“ normal figure C ”,“ × ”(common figure decoration 3) is stopped and displayed.

  “Electric chew release pattern” on the right side of “general decoration type” in the drawing indicates an opening mode of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232. As shown in FIG. 142, in the case where the result of normal-game variable game is “general-use A”, the blade member 232a is opened once in 300 ms (short-circuit open). In addition, when the success / failure result of the usual figure floating game is “Fusual figure B”, after the blade member 232a is opened once at 300 ms, the blade member 232a is 1 at 5000 ms after an interval of 500 ms. Opened once (long open). In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variable game is successful is out of the “normal figure C”, the blade member 232a is not opened.

  Next, a general-purpose decorative symbol variation game will be described with reference to FIG. The table shown in FIG. 143 shows the variation time and variation pattern of the usual decoration symbol variation game. The table shown in FIG. 143 is divided into two from the left column: “variation time of normal decoration symbol variation game” and “variation pattern of ordinary symbol variation game”.

  The “variation time of the normal decorative symbol variation game” indicates the variation time of the ordinary decorative symbol variation game using the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. The general-purpose decorative symbol variation game is executed with a predetermined probability during the general-purpose low probability state (non-electric support state). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the usual figure variable game in the usual figure low probability state is 20000 ms. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game does not correspond to the variation time of the general-purpose variation game, and for example, five types of 3000 ms, 15000 ms, 10000 ms, 5000 ms, and 8000 ms are provided.

  The “variation pattern of the regular pattern variation game” on the right side of the “variation time of the normal decoration symbol variation game” is displayed on the first decoration symbol display device 208, for example, when the regular pattern variation game is executed. The change display of the symbol to be displayed is shown. As shown in FIG. 143, when the “variation time of the normal decoration symbol variation game” is “3000 ms”, “○” (common decoration 1) → “◎” (common decoration 2) → “×” (general The general-purpose decorative symbol variation game is executed in the order of graphic decoration 3), and the display is repeated. When “Change Time of Normal Ornamental Design Variation Game” is “15000 ms”, “◎” (common figure decoration 2) → “◎” (common figure decoration 2) → “×” (common figure decoration 3) are displayed in this order. Then, the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game in which the display is repeated is executed. In addition, when the “variation time of the normal decoration symbol variation game” is “15000 ms”, “◎” (ordinary decoration 2) is continuously displayed, hitting the ordinary figure B, and the electric chew is The expectation of being released long can be increased. When “Change Time of Normal Ornamental Design Variation Game” is “10000 ms”, “◎” (common figure decoration 2) → “◎” (common figure decoration 2) → “◎” (common figure decoration 2) are displayed in this order. Then, the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game in which the display is repeated is executed. When the 10000 ms general symbol decoration symbol variation game in which only “◎” (general symbol decoration 2) is variably displayed is executed, hitting of the general symbol B is confirmed and long-release of the electric chew is confirmed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a notice of a special figure changing game being executed by using a general-purpose decorative symbol changing game. For example, if the “variation time of the normal decoration symbol variation game” is “10000 ms”, “○” (common figure decoration 1) → “◎” (common figure decoration 2) → “×” (common figure decoration 3) → The game is displayed in the order of “Gekiatsu!”, And the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game in which the display is repeated is executed. In this case, the display of “Gekiatsu!” Gives a notice of the special figure variable game. In addition, when “variation time of a normal decoration symbol variation game” is “10000 ms”, “◎” (common figure decoration 2) → “Gekiatsu!” → “◎” (general figure decoration 2) → “Gekiatsu! ”(Common figure decoration 3) may be displayed in this order, and the common figure decoration symbol variation game in which the display is repeated may be executed. In this case, during the cycle of the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game, “Gekiatsu!” Can be displayed twice to increase the expectation of winning a big hit in the special diagram variation game. In addition, when the “variation time of the normal decorative symbol variation game” is “5000 ms”, the display is performed in the order of “Hidden?” → “Accuracy” → “Big hit”, and the normal symbol variation symbol variation game is executed. To do. When “Big Bonus” is displayed, it is determined that a big win will be made in the special figure variation game being executed, and the opening of the variable winning opening 234 (Attacker) is confirmed. In addition, when the “variation time of the normal decoration symbol variation game” is “8000 ms”, the display is repeated in the order of “Hidden?” → “Accuracy” → “Super hot” → “Big hit” and the display is repeated. The symbol variation game is executed. Thereby, it can be notified that the special figure variation game being executed will be a big hit.

  In this way, in the general symbol decoration symbol variation game, the effect of the universal symbol variation game may be executed using only the ordinary symbol decoration symbol, or the ordinary symbol decoration symbol and “Gekiatsu!” Shown in FIG. A special figure variation game being executed using a character image such as may be executed as a notice. When a special-figure-changing game is also executed as a notice, a normal-figure-design-fluctuating game is executed using only a character image such as "Gekiatsu!" You may run a game. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may execute a general-purpose decorative symbol variation game using, for example, a character image in addition to the normal symbol decorative symbol and the character image as illustrated in FIG. 143. Although detailed explanations are omitted, the variation time of the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game is determined based on whether or not the common-variation game is successful and the special-variation game being executed. It should be noted that the variation time of the general-purpose variable game and the time of the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game may be different times or the same time. If there is no contradiction with the result of the usual figure variation game and the result of the special figure variation game, the time, the number of times, and the timing of the ordinary figure decoration symbol variation game can be set as appropriate.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, a description will be given of an electric-chu-long opening notification effect that is executed using the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 when the electric chew is opened long. FIG. 144 shows a character image displayed when the electric tulong opening notification effect is executed.

  When the electric Chu (Special Figure 2 starting port 232) hits "Putsu B" in the ordinary game, the wing member 232a is released once in 300ms, and then the wing member is placed after an interval of 500ms. 232a is released once in 5000 ms. Such opening of electric Chu is called long opening.

  In a general-purpose decorative symbol variation game that is executed with a predetermined probability during a period other than a predetermined period (for example, during the reach of Super Reach, during the jackpot game) in a low probability state (during non-electric support), When the “Popular Decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the “Popular B” is hit in the “Popular Variation” game, the electric Chu is released long. A character image in which Yoshimune makes a piece as shown in FIG. 144 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “decorative decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. It is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the electric tulong opening notification effect is executed.

  In addition, the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game is not executed during a predetermined period (for example, during the reach of Super Reach, or during the jackpot game) during a low probability of ordinary diagram (non-electric support). In the case of hitting the “common figure B”, the electric chew is opened long, and the character image in the form in which Yoshimune is making a piece as shown in FIG. 144 is the first decorative symbol display device 208 or the second decorative symbol. The display device 209 is displayed, and the electric long open notification effect is executed.

  Next, the common figure game determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The data table shown in FIG. 145 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. FIG. 145 (a) and FIG. 145 (b) show an example of the normal symbol success / failure determination table used in the success / failure determination process in the common-related lottery process (step S2023) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. FIG. 145 (a) shows a table used in a normal low probability state, and FIG. 145 (b) shows a table used in a normal high probability state.

  145 (a) and 145 (b), the normal symbol success / failure determination table has “normal symbol probability” in the first column from the left, “random number selection range” in the second column, and “correction result” in the third column. It is composed of items. “Low probability” in the “ordinary symbol probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 145 (a) indicates that the gaming state at the time of determining whether or not the normal figure variable game is successful is a normal high probability state. “Random number selection range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired regular winning random value. The “random number range” is divided into two numbers, 0 to 3 and 4 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “low probability”, “loss” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 3 and “winning” corresponding to the numerical values 4 to 65535.

  “High probability” in the “ordinary symbol probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 145 (b) indicates that the gaming state at the time of determining whether or not the normal figure variable game is successful is a normal high probability state. The “random number selection range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into two numbers, 0 to 1 and 2 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “high probability”, “out of” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1 and “winning” corresponding to the numerical values 2 to 65535.

  FIG. 146 shows an example of a general map determination table used when determining a stop symbol of a general map in the general map related lottery process (step S2023). FIG. 146 (a) shows a table used in a normal low probability state, and FIG. 146 (b) shows a table used in a normal high probability state. The normal symbol determination tables shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b) include “result of success / failure” in the first column from the left, “random number selection range” in the second column, and “stop symbol” in the third column. It consists of items. The “result of success / failure” in the first column is divided into “out” and “win”.

  146 (a) used in the ordinary low probability state, the item “failure” shown in FIG. 146 (a) indicates that the success / failure result using the low probability table for determining whether or not the common figure variation game shown in FIG. The case where it is determined to be “out of” indicates the case where “winning” indicates the case where the success / failure result of the common figure variable game using the low probability table for determining whether or not to change the normal figure game is determined to be “winning”.

  The item “random number range selection” in the second column shown in FIG. 146 (a) indicates the numerical value range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number value for general-purpose determination. In the present embodiment, one type of “general map C” is provided as the general map stop symbol when the normal map variable game is out of play. For this reason, all the numerical values 0 to 99 are assigned to the “random number selection range” in correspondence with the item “departure” of “judgment determination” in the first column.

  In addition, when hitting the usual figure variable game in the usual figure low probability state, the probability of hitting the "normal figure B" is 99% of probability and the probability of "normal figure B" is 1% of the probability. For this reason, in the table shown in FIG. 146 (a), the “random number selection range” is divided into two numbers, 0 to 98 and 99, corresponding to “win”.

  The item “stop symbol” in the third column represents a stop symbol in the general variable game. The “stop symbol” is assigned to “general symbol C” corresponding to “all” values 0 to 99 and “random” selection range. In addition, “stop symbol” is assigned “general map A” corresponding to “winning” and the random number selection range corresponding to numerical values 0 to 98, and “general map B” corresponding to numerical value 99. For this reason, when the normal figure variable game is hit in the normal figure low probability state, the probability of hitting the "normal figure A" becomes 99% of probability, and the probability of "normal figure B" becomes 1% of the probability.

  146 (b) used in the usual high probability state, the item “exclusion” of the “win / fail result” indicates that the success / failure result using the high probability table for determining whether or not the common figure variation game shown in FIG. 145 (b) is “ In this case, it is determined that the game is determined to be “out of place”, and “winning” indicates a case where the success / failure result of the usual figure variation game using the high probability table for determining whether or not the common figure variation game is determined to be “winning”.

  The item “random number range selection” in the second column shown in FIG. 146 (b) indicates the acquired random number value for general-purpose determination or the numerical range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with the random number value for general-purpose determination. . In the case of the usual figure variable game, the usual figure stop symbol is one kind of “general figure C”, so the “random selection range” corresponds to the item “missing” of the “judgment determination” in the first column. All numerical values 0 to 99 are assigned.

  In addition, when hitting the usual figure variable game in the usual figure high probability state, it becomes a hit of "common figure B". For this reason, in the “random number selection range”, all numerical values 0 to 99 are assigned to “general map B” corresponding to “winning”. For this reason, hitting the ordinary figure variable game in the ordinary figure high probability state is a hit of the ordinary figure B.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. FIG. 147 and FIG. 148 are flowcharts showing the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S2024) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 147, in the special figure prefetching process, it is first determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the electric support (step S2100). In step S2100, for example, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is in an ON state. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1101.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131, during the electric support, the game ball passes through the second general-purpose start opening 229 and the right-hand hit so that the game ball enters the special figure 2 start opening 232. In the non-electric support, the left-handed configuration is made so that the game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230. For this reason, winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 at the time of electric support and winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 at the time of non-electric support are irregular. Excluded from processing.

  In step S2101 following step S2100, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232. The determination as to whether or not there has been a prize is, for example, the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area, and the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area described later. To compare. For example, the main control unit 300 compares the special figure 2 hold number with the special figure 2 prefetch number, and if the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, the special figure 2 start port 232 has won a prize. It judges that it was, and transfers to step S2103. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 2 starting port 232 has not won a prize, and performs the processing of steps S2103 to S2113 described later. Without proceeding to step S2115.

  In step S2103 following step S2101, the start information related to the hold increased due to winning is prefetched to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable game related to the hold is in advance, and it is determined whether or not the result is a big hit. . For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2105. If the main control unit 300 determines that the result is not a big win, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2105 following step S2103, a big hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 135 with respect to the pre-reading special figure determination random number value, and displays a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 2 variable game. Prior determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S2113.

  On the other hand, if the result of prior determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2109. If the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2111.

  If the result of prior determination is a small hit, a small hit symbol is determined in step S2109. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 135 with respect to the pre-determined random number for special figure determination for hitting, and determines in advance a stop symbol after special figure 2 variable game, The process moves to S2113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination in advance in step S2107 is not a small hit but a loss, the process proceeds to step S2111 to determine a loss symbol. For example, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the random symbol value for determining the loss symbol stored in the RAM 308, and refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The symbol is determined in advance, and the process proceeds to step S2113.

  In step S2113 following step S2105, S2109, or S2111, lottery of the variation time of the special figure 2 variable game is performed based on the stop symbol determined in advance in these steps. For example, the main control unit 300 determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game using the stop symbol, the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. The process moves to step S2115.

  In step S2113, for example, the main control unit 300 uses the result of special figure 2 variable game related to the suspension in which the special figure 2 prefetching process is executed and the special figure variation time determined in advance in step S2113 as the special figure 2 prefetch result. Is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit (see FIG. 64) provided in the RAM 308. The main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 2 variable game stop symbol and special figure fluctuation time as a special figure 2 prefetch result in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. Yes. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit can store, for example, up to four special figure 2 prefetch results.

  The RAM 308 also has a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last). In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device are determined in advance by lottery using the table shown in FIG. 137, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of pre-reading processing, only the group of “out-going / normal reach out” or “reach out of reach A / reach B lose” is selected by lottery, and the change time and decorative symbol display device at the start of the special-figure variable game to be pre-read You may make it determine the detailed production aspect in.

  In step S2115 subsequent to step S2113, if the determination result of the special figure 2 or FIG. Based on the command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a first sub-control unit notice process at the time of start winning shown in FIG. 149 described later.

  On the other hand, in step S2100, for example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the time reduction flag is in the off state and is not in the electric support state, the process proceeds to step S2201 shown in FIG. Each process performed in steps S2201 to S2213 shown in FIG. 148 is the same as the process in which “Special Figure 2” in the contents of Steps S2101 to S2113 described using FIG. 147 is replaced with “Special Figure 1”. Description is omitted. Further, the special figure prefetching process shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 is executed when the number of reserved memories of the special figure variable game to be executed is within the upper limit range.

  The special figure prefetching process in FIGS. 147 and 148 is executed by referring to the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the validity determination, but a special determination table may be used for the prefetching process.

  Next, the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process in the case where the game ball enters the special opening 1 or 2 start opening 230, 232 and the start information is acquired will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the first sub-control unit notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition executed in, for example, the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. This process is executed every time a command including a prefetch result of a special figure is transmitted from the main control unit 300. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 and the like by the CPU 404 and starts the first sub-control unit notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition and a special figure variable game described later. The first sub-control unit notice process at the time is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 149, in the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition, first, a lottery 1 for holding change is executed. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a random number for holding change lottery from a random number counter for holding change lottery provided in the RAM 408, and uses the holding change lottery table shown in FIG. , “B”, “communication → A”, and “communication → B” are obtained (step S2301). More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408, the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the pending change lottery table shown in FIG. Using the change random number for hold change lottery obtained from the random number counter for hold change lottery, hold change lottery 1 is executed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the lottery 1 with the change in hold in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S2303 following step S2301, when the lottery result in the above-mentioned lottery 1 for change in hold is “through → A” or “through → B”, the hold change effect using the second decoration diagram display device 209. Is determined (whether it is the second decorative symbol display device usage pattern). The first sub-control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the pending change lottery 1 stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and determines whether the lottery result is “communication → A” or “communication → B”. If it is determined that there is, it is determined that the hold change effect using the second decorative symbol display device 209 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2309, and the lottery result is any one of “normal”, “A”, and “B”. If it is determined, it is determined not to execute the hold change effect using the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the process proceeds to step S2305.

  In step S2305 subsequent to step S2303, when “normal”, “A”, or “B” is selected in the lottery 1 for change in hold, a lottery effect lottery that determines whether or not to execute a hold change effect in a lottery effect is performed. Run. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the Gase effect lottery table shown in FIG. 140 read from the ROM 406 and the Gase effect lottery random number acquired from the random number counter for the Gase effect lottery provided in the RAM 408. A Gase production lottery for drawing “execution” or “gase production non-execution” is executed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the gasse effect lottery in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S2307 subsequent to step S2305, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in the above-mentioned lottery effect lottery is “execution of gasse effect”. The first sub-control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the gasse effect lottery stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and when the lottery result is “execute the gasse effect”, the gaze effect of the hold change effect If the lottery result is “Gase effect non-execution”, it is determined that the hold change effect Gase effect is not executed and the process of Step S2309 is not executed. The process shifts to S2311.

  Further, in step S2309 subsequent to step S2307, an effect start timing lottery for determining the timing for executing the hold change effect or the gasset effect is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the effect start timing determination table shown in FIG. 141 read from the ROM 406 and the effect start timing lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 to change the suspension. The timing for performing the performance or the performance effect is determined. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the production start timing lottery in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S2311 following step S2307 or step S2309, a command output process including a lottery result of each lottery is executed. In step S2311 following step S2309, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 includes information on the display mode of the hold display image corresponding to the lottery result of the hold change lottery 1, and the start change effect of the hold change effect or the effect of the gasset effect. Is output to the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition is terminated. Thereby, the hold display image of the hold related to the notice is initially displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 in a white circular “normal hold” display mode, and is held at the determined effect start timing when the hold change effect is executed. The change effect is executed by the second decorative symbol display device 209, and thereafter, the hold display image of the hold related to the advance notice corresponds to the lottery result of the lottery 1 of the hold change, “A” of the boat-eye panda or “B” ”Is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the time of execution of the gaze effect, the gaze effect is executed by the second decorative symbol display device 209 at the determined effect start timing, and thereafter, the hold display image of the hold related to the notice is “normal hold” having the same white circle as the original. Are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  In step S2311 following step S2307, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 sends a command including information on the display mode of the hold display image corresponding to the lottery result of the hold change lottery 1 to the first decorative symbol display device 208. To output the first sub-control unit notice process when starting information is acquired. As a result, the hold display image corresponding to the lottery 1 of the hold change corresponding to the display form of the white circular “normal hold”, the boat-eye panda “A”, or the head length “B” is displayed as the first decorative symbol display device. 208 is displayed.

  Next, the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game executed in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 70, for example. This process is executed once for each special figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the first sub-control unit notice execution process at the start of the special figure variable game, first, a common common notice lottery process is executed (step S2401). In general, the common notice is a notice of the success / failure determination result of the special figure variable game to be started. In the normal common notice, a predetermined character image (for example, a panda image) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 or the second decorative symbol display device 209, or the frame lamp 122 or the game board lamp 532 is displayed in a predetermined mode. Or turn it on. The first sub control unit 400 includes information on the variation time included in the command transmitted from the main control unit 300, a predetermined normal notice lottery table (not shown) read from the ROM 406, and a normal notice lottery provided in the RAM 408. It is determined whether or not the normal notice is to be executed using the normal notice lottery random number value acquired from the random number counter, and the process proceeds to step S2403.

  In step S2403 after step S2401, the first sub-control unit 400 sends a normal common notice command including information on the lottery result of the normal notice lottery to the first decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the second. Output to the sub-control unit 500. As a result, the first common symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol display device 209, the frame lamp 122, and the game board lamp 532 normally execute the common notice. Further, when the normal common notice is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to output the normal common notice command to the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  In step S2405 subsequent to step S2403, an ordinary drawing effect determination process is executed. In the general map change determination process, an effect related to the general map change game is determined. Details of the general drawing production determination process will be described later. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 143, since the advance notice of the special figure variation game being executed is also executed in the ordinary figure decoration symbol variation game, the ordinary figure effect determination process is performed at the start of the special figure variation game. It is executed in the first sub-control unit notice execution process. The general drawing effect determination process may be executed not at the start of the special figure variable game but at the start of the general figure variable game.

  The 1st sub control part 400 will complete | finish the 1st sub control part notice process at the time of the start of a special figure variable game, if the common figure production | presentation determination process of step S2405 is complete | finished.

  Next, the ordinary drawing effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the general drawing effect determination process executed in the normal drawing effect determination process (step S2405) shown in FIG. 150, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 151, in the ordinary drawing effect determination process, it is first determined whether or not the current gaming state is during non-electric support (step S2501). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the value of the short time flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value is “0”, the first sub control unit 400 determines that the non-electric support is being performed, and step S2503. If the value is “1”, it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), and the ordinary drawing effect determination process is terminated without executing steps S2503 to S2511 described later. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not execute the effect of the general-purpose variable game by the first decorative symbol display device 208 or the second decorative symbol display device 209 during the electric support. . The value of the time reduction flag stored in the RAM 408 is information on the on / off state of the time reduction flag included in the command transmitted from the main control unit 300 in the command setting transmission process (step S2033) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. Is set based on

  In step S2503 subsequent to step S2501, it is determined whether or not to execute the ordinary drawing effect. For example, if the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the command transmitted from the main control unit 300 does not include information on the start of the general-game variable game, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the normal-game effect is not executed. The ordinary drawing effect determination process is terminated without executing steps S2503 to S2511 described later. Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the command transmitted from the main control unit 300 includes information on the start of the general-purpose variable game, the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the general-purpose effect, The process proceeds to step S2505.

  In step S2505 following step S2503, it is determined whether or not it is during a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, for example, the super-reach production or the big hit game corresponds to the predetermined period. For example, if the first sub control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure variation game to be started is a variation time including a super reach effect, it determines that it is a predetermined period. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag transmitted from the main control unit 300 and stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, respectively, and sets the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag. If any one value is “1”, it is determined that a big hit game is in progress, and it is determined that it is a predetermined period. If both the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag are “0”, the big hit game is in progress. It is determined that it is not a predetermined period. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that it is during the predetermined period, it proceeds to step S2507, and if it determines that it is not during the predetermined period, it proceeds to step S2509. The values of the 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag stored in the RAM 408 are the values of the 15R jackpot flag included in the command transmitted from the main controller 300 in the command setting transmission process (step S2033) of the main controller timer interrupt process. It is set based on the on / off state information of the 2R jackpot flag.

  In step 2507 following step S2505, if the success / failure result of the currently-executed common figure variable game is hitting “normal figure B”, the execution of only the electric-chu-long opening notification effect is selected. In the case of hitting or losing the figure “A”, it is selected not to execute the electric-chu-long opening notification effect. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the value of the second common map flag transmitted from the main control unit 300 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value is “1”, Since it is determined that the winning of “Tutorial B” has been won, it is selected to execute the electric-chu long opening notification effect shown in FIG. 144. Therefore, it is determined that the electric tulong opening notification effect shown in FIG. 144 is not executed. In addition, the value of the second common map flag stored in the RAM 408 is based on the second common map included in the command transmitted from the main control unit 300 in the command setting transmission process (step S2033) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. It is set based on information on the on / off state of the flag.

  In step S2509 subsequent to step S2505, it is selected to execute the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game. The first sub-control unit 400 executes the normal decorative symbol variation game shown in FIG. 143 using the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 selects to execute the electric tulong release notification effect when the “normal figure B” is hit in the normal figure variable game.

  In step S2511 subsequent to step S2507 and step S2509, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a normal drawing effect command to the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. When a general-purpose decorative design variation game is executed, a command including information on the variation time and variation pattern of the general-design decorative design variation game and information on the electric-chu-long release notification production is output as the general design variation command. Is done. Further, when only the electric long open notification effect is executed, a command including information on the electric long open notification effect is output.

  Next, effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 152 to 181. Each of FIGS. 152 to 181 shows a first decorative symbol display device 208 and a second decorative symbol display device 209 that constitute a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100. In FIG. 152 (a), the second decorative symbol display device 209 is located at the initial position (first position). Further, the illustration of the effectable conductor 224 is omitted in each of FIGS. 152 to 181.

(Example 1)
First, a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155. 152 (a) to 153 (f) show, in this order, the special figure variable games in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment in time series. In the drawings described below, the time lapse between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  152A, “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornamental symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is informed that it is.

  At the lower center in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a generally square ordinary figure effect display area 800 is provided. In the ordinary drawing effect display area 800, an effect of a usual figure variable game is executed. The effects of the usual figure floating game will be described in the examples described later.

  A special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 is provided on the left side of the ordinary drawing effect display area 800 in the effect display area 208d. The special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 notifies the player of the number of special figure 1 random value pairs stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area as the special figure 1 hold number (the special figure 1 start information hold number). It is possible. At the time shown in FIG. 152 (a), since two special figure 1 variable games are held, the hold display image corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game held first in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1. a11 is displayed, a hold display image a12 corresponding to the second special figure 1 variable game is displayed, and it is notified that two special figure 1 variable games are held. The hold display images a11 and a12 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG.

  Further, a special figure 2 hold display area 208d2 for displaying a hold related to the special figure 2 variable game is provided to the right of the general drawing effect display area 800 in the effect display area 208d. Since the special figure hold display area 208d2 has the same function and function as the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 except that the special figure 2 variable game hold is displayed, detailed description is omitted. In this example, since the special figure 2 variable game is not put on hold, the hold display image is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  Further, the current gaming state is a normal state which is a special figure low probability state and a non-electric support state. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “normal mode” to notify that the current gaming state is the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed after “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, as shown in FIG. Is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 152 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2503), and it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2401). S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is not executed (No in step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 notifies the first sub-control unit at the start of the special figure variable game. The process ends.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 152 (b), the left decorative pattern display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in the figure. As shown by the downward arrow, the special figure 1 variable game of the effect that the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 hold number is decreased by 1, the hold display image a12 is deleted as shown in FIG. 152 (b).

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (for example, after 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation display), “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 152 (c), “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 9” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is notified that there is. In addition, as in the present embodiment, a plurality of symbols such as a slippage stop symbol and a reach stop symbol may be shown in one figure, but in detail, the first stop symbol (for example, the left symbol), the second stop symbol, etc. Stop in the order of symbols (for example, right symbol) and third stop symbols (for example, middle symbol). Note that, as shown in the figure, a configuration in which the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are simultaneously stopped under conditions such as a deviation variation or an electric support state can be employed as appropriate.

  When the result of determining whether or not the special symbol variation game is successful is out of place, the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol is symbol variation in the left symbol display region 208a, symbol variation in the right symbol display region 208c, and middle symbol display region 208b. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the symbol variation. In this example, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, then “decoration 9” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208c, and finally “decoration 3” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is stopped.

  In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed after the elapse of a predetermined time from the special game 1 variable game shown in FIG. 152 (d). Prior to the start, the main control unit 300 obtains a pair of special figure 1 random values stored at the earliest position of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure variable game starts from now on. At the same time, the stored special figure 1 random number set is deleted, and the special figure 1 holding number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of order (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 40000 ms (reach A is out). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, it is elected to execute a notice by the “panda” image in the common common notice lottery process (step S2401), a normal common notice command is output (step S2403), and the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2403). In S2405), it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed (Yes in Step S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is not executed (No in Step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control is performed. The unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 152 (d), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the number of special figure 1 holds is reduced by 1, the hold display image a11 is deleted as shown in FIG. 152 (d).

  As shown in FIG. 152 (e), a “panda” is displayed in the effect display area 208d overlapping the middle symbol display area 208b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Is displayed, and it is notified that the effect of the common common notice is being executed. As shown in FIG. 152 (f), after the character image representing “panda” is displayed in the effect display area 208d, the decorative pattern “decoration 6” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Instead of the “panda” displayed and displayed in the effect display area 208d, the middle symbol display area 208b has an effect in which the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from top to bottom as indicated by a downward-pointing thick arrow in the figure. Is displayed. A character image “reach!” Is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 to notify that the reach effect is being executed. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), "decoration 6" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208b on the upper right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, The decorative display is variably displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is displayed that the variation of the decorative pattern is reach. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, “cactus” (cactus and haniwa are displayed). A character image representing the character as a motif is displayed, and the reach A effect is executed.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a character image “Look at the top!” Is displayed, and in the second decorative symbol display device 209, a character image “Leach A” is displayed. It is notified that the effect of reach A is being executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 209 deviates from “decoration 6”, which is a big hit if stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b in the reach effect. The confrontation effect of the decorative design with “decoration 7” is started. The confrontation effect of the decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the result of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the second decorative symbol display device 209 to perform an effect related to the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b that the player particularly pays attention to in the reach effect. Before the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is started, the character image of “Look up!” Is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 that the player is paying attention to. In some cases, the player may be encouraged to pay attention to the second decoration diagram display device 209 disposed above. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to prevent the player from overlooking the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (c), the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a confrontation effect in which “decoration 6” and “decoration 7” are pressed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the advent of the decorative symbol. Be started. In this example, if “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, it is a big hit. Therefore, the character image “Push out 7!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first ornament symbol display device 208. Is displayed.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the confrontation where “decoration 6” and “decoration 7” are pressed, a hexagonal star-shaped effect image is displayed on the second ornamental symbol display device 209 as shown in FIG. 153 (d). Is done. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to a second position overlapping with a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 changes, and the left symbol display area 208a of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 change. The upper half of the “decoration 6” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is hidden above “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a so as to be connected to the lower half of “decoration 6” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Display half. Thereby, the entire left decorative symbol “6” is displayed so as to be visible to the player across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  In addition, the hexagon star-shaped effect image is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved to the second position, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed. The display of the upper half of “decoration 6” may be performed simultaneously or sequentially. For example, a hexagonal star-shaped effect image is displayed, then the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved to the second position, and then the upper half of “decoration 6” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. May be. Also, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, then a hexagonal star-shaped effect image is displayed, and then the upper half of “decoration 6” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. May be displayed. In this case, after the upper half of “decoration 6” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, an effect image of a hexagonal star shape may be displayed, or the upper half of “decoration 6” and the hexagonal star may be displayed. The effect image may be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not display the hidden display of the first decorative symbol display device 208, in this example, the upper half of the “decoration 6”, but the upper half of the “decoration 6”. May be hidden from the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (d), in order to suggest that the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is displayed, the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 displays “How is it?” Is displayed.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the second decorative symbol display device 209 moved to the second position, the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is out of play, “decoration 7” wins and “decoration 7” is displayed on the second ornament symbol display device 209 as shown in FIG. 153 (e). . At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays “decoration 7” in a display size larger than “decoration 6” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, it may be possible to make it conspicuous that the decoration symbol that is subsequently stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is “decoration 7”.

  Furthermore, since “decoration 7” has been won and lost, a character image “sorry ...” is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  After 40000 ms have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the reach A effect is completed, and as shown in FIG. 153 (f), the middle symbol display area 208 b is the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol “ Decoration 7 "is displayed. Thereby, “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “reach A miss”. . When the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed only by the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. Never happen. In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c with a display size larger than that during execution of the reach effect.

  The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “normal mode” to notify that the current gaming state is the normal state. Although not shown, “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (b), description will be given of game effects when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game relating to reach A is a big hit (eg, "Special Figure C"). To do. FIG. 154 (a) shows a game effect that continues from FIG. 153 (d).

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second decorative symbol display device 209 moved to the second position, the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, “decoration 6” wins and “decoration 6” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays “decoration 6” in a display size larger than “decoration 6” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Since “decoration 6” wins and is a big hit, a character image “congratulations” is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  For example, after 45000 ms have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the reach A effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 154 (b), the middle symbol display area 208b is the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol. “Decoration 6” is displayed. Accordingly, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “per reach A”. . Further, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “big hit” to notify that the big hit is won. Although not shown, “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  Next, a change example of the game effect when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game relating to reach A is out of order will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 (c) to 154 (e). FIG. 154 (c) shows a game effect that continues from FIG. 153 (c).

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the confrontation where “decoration 6” and “decoration 7” are pressed against each other as shown in FIG. 153 (c), a hexagonal star-like effect image is displayed in the second state as shown in FIG. 154 (c). It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to a second position overlapping with a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 changes, and the left symbol display area 208a of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 change. The upper half of the “decoration 6” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is hidden above “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a so as to be connected to the lower half of “decoration 6” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Display half. As a result, the entire left decorative symbol “decoration 6” is displayed so as to be visible to the player across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

Further, in order to suggest that the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is displayed, a character image “How is it?” Is displayed in the effect display region 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (d), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second decorative symbol display device 209 moved to the second position, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the initial position, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the initial position. The symbol display device 209 displays a character image “reach A” indicating that the effect of reach A is being executed.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208 displays the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is out of play, “decoration 7” wins and “decoration 7” is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first ornament symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 154 (d). Is displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 7” in the effect display region 208d with a display size larger than “decoration 6” displayed in the left and right symbol display regions 208a and 208c. Thereby, it may be possible to make it conspicuous that the decoration symbol that is subsequently stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is “decoration 7”. Furthermore, since “decoration 7” has been won and lost, a character image “sorry ...” is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may display the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbols on the first decorative symbol display device 208 after the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the initial position. .

  When the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not display the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the explanation of the effect of reach A currently being executed, as shown in FIG. 154 (d). May be.

  After 40000 ms have elapsed since the start of symbol variation display, the reach A effect is completed, and as shown in FIG. 154 (e), the middle symbol display area 208b is the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol “ Decoration 7 "is displayed. Thereby, “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “reach A miss”. . The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “normal mode” to notify that the current gaming state is the normal state. Although not shown, “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, an example of changing the game effect when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game relating to reach A is a big hit (for example, “special figure C”) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) shows a game effect continued from FIG. 153 (c).

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the confrontation where “decoration 6” and “decoration 7” are pressed against each other as shown in FIG. 153 (c), a hexagonal star-shaped effect image is displayed in the second state as shown in FIG. 155 (a). It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 209. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is located at the initial position. Further, in order to suggest that the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is displayed, a character image “How is it?” Is displayed in the effect display region 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the confrontation where “decoration 6” and “decoration 7” are pressed, the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, “decoration 6” wins and “decoration 6” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays “decoration 6” in a display size larger than “decoration 6” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (c), when displaying the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. The positional relationship with the symbol display device 209 changes. A hexagonal star-like effect image is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. The effect image is displayed so as to overlap the middle symbol display area 208b of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  For example, the reach A effect ends after 45000 ms have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 155 (d), the middle symbol display area 208b is the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol. “Decoration 6” is displayed. Accordingly, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “per reach A”. . In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “big hit” at the second position in order to notify that the big hit has been won. Although not shown, “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  Thereafter, the game shifts to a jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c as shown in FIG. 155 (e). The In addition, after the big hit game of “special drawing C” is finished, the gaming state shifts to the electric support state, so that the character image “right-handed” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A first display means (for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a first effect (for example, a decorative symbol stop display);
A game machine comprising: a second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209) capable of executing at least a second effect (for example, a decorative symbol confrontation effect);
As the relative positional relationship between the first display unit and the second display unit, it is possible to take a plurality of types of positional relationships (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved from the initial position to the second position. Can be moved to)
At least one of the plurality of types of positional relationships is a first positional relationship (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is in the initial position),
At least one of the plurality of types of positional relationships is a second positional relationship (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is in the second position),
The first positional relationship and the second positional relationship are at least different positional relationships,
The first effect is an effect capable of executing at least an effect capable of displaying a result according to the second effect,
In the case of the second positional relationship, the first display means is capable of executing at least the first effect,
In the case of the first positional relationship, the second display means can execute at least the second effect.
It is characterized by that.

(2) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A first display means (for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a first effect (for example, a decorative symbol stop display);
A game machine comprising: a second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209) capable of executing at least a second effect (for example, a decorative symbol confrontation effect);
As the relative positional relationship between the first display unit and the second display unit, it is possible to take a plurality of types of positional relationships (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved from the initial position to the second position. Can be moved to)
At least one of the plurality of types of positional relationships is a first positional relationship (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is in the initial position),
At least one of the plurality of types of positional relationships is a second positional relationship (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is in the second position),
The first positional relationship and the second positional relationship are at least different positional relationships,
The first effect is an effect that can at least execute an effect displaying the first result,
The second effect is an effect capable of executing at least an effect for displaying the second result,
The first result is a result at least according to the second result;
In the case of the second positional relationship, the first display means is capable of executing at least the first effect,
In the case of the first positional relationship, the second display means can execute at least the second effect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, it may be possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the result of the second effect is reflected on the first display means.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
Since at least one of the first display means and the second display means is movable, it is possible to take the first positional relationship and the second positional relationship.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there is a case where an impact can be given to the player by moving the display means. Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, there are cases where the positional relationship of the display means and the effects can be associated.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means includes a first display area,
The second display means includes a second display area,
The first display area and the second display area are different in size.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, there is a case where the sharpness of the production can be added.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display area is smaller than the first display area,
Since the second display means is movable, the first display means and the second display means can take the first positional relationship and the second positional relationship. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, it is possible to easily move the second display unit including the second display area smaller than the first display area.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
One of the first positional relationship and the second positional relationship is a positional relationship in which the second display means hides at least a part of the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the second display unit overlaps the first display unit, so that the relevance of effects by the plurality of display units may be easily reported.

In the pachinko machine 100, the first display means can execute a decorative symbol variation display.
The decorative symbol variation display is a big hit when a specific combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.
The decorative symbol variation display can execute at least a reach effect.
The reach effect can be executed at least when a part of the combination of the specific decorative symbols is displayed.
In the pachinko machine 100, a part of the combination of the specific decorative symbols that will be a reach effect is displayed on the first display means, and the final display (decorative symbol that is a big hit or off) is displayed on the second display means. The effect (leading effect) is derived, the derived result is displayed on the first display means, and the decorative symbol combination is determined (first effect).
Further, the first display means can execute an effect suggesting a result of the second effect (an effect suggesting a decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b).

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the first display means can execute a start hold display (display of a hold display image) indicating that the start of the symbol variation display is held at least.
The second effect can be executed as an effect suggesting whether or not to change the display mode of the start hold display (the hold change effect or its gusset effect) (see Example 2 for details).
The second display means performs an effect as to whether or not to change the display mode of the start hold display as the second effect before the symbol variation display corresponding to the start hold display is started, and displays the result. Displayed by the first display means (first effect).

In the pachinko machine 100, the first display means can execute at least a decorative symbol variation display.
In addition to the start winning a prize (at the time of winning a game ball to the special figure starting port 230, 232), it can be expected by a pre-reading notice. Since the display means (second display means) is used, there is a case where it is possible to produce a decorative symbol variation display different from the decorative symbol variation display related to the pre-reading notice in an easily understandable manner.

In the pachinko machine 100, the first big hit (for example, "Special Figure C", "Special Figure D" big hit) and the second big hit (for example, "Special Figure A", "Special Figure B" big hit) )
The second jackpot is more advantageous than the first jackpot.
The first display means performs an effect suggesting that it is the first big hit (for example, “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” stop display), and the second display means performs the second display. An effect (second effect) as to whether or not the content changes to a content indicating that it is a big hit is performed, and the result is reflected on the first display means (first effect).

The present invention is not limited to the first embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
For example, the first display means may be movable, the second display means may be movable, or both the first display means and the second display means may be movable. May be.
Further, the display means of both the first display means and the second display means move, and even if one display means does not move, the other display means moves, Since the positional relationship changes, the first display unit and the second display unit can take the first positional relationship and the second positional relationship.

The pachinko machine 100 may be configured such that the second display area of the second display means is hidden by the first display means.
Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured such that the first display means and the second display means take a third positional relationship different from the first and second positional relationships during the production. Good. The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that the first display means and the second display means perform the third effect in the third positional relationship between the first effect and the second effect. Good. The first effect may have a relationship that indirectly corresponds to the result of the second effect.
Further, in the first and second positional relations, either the first display area or the second display area may not be hidden. For example, the distance between the first display means and the second display means is different between the first positional relationship and the second positional relationship, and the first display means and the second positional relationship are both the first and second positional relationships. The second display means may not overlap. Also in this case, the pachinko machine 100 may give an impact to the player by the movement of the display means, and may be able to easily notify the relevance of the effects by the plurality of display means.
For example, it is assumed that another effect movable body moves to the front side of the first display area or the second display area, but the positional relationship of the front and rear relationship between the first display means and the second display means Therefore, the present invention can be applied without affecting the presence or absence of the operation of the effect movable body.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 may perform the first effect by the second display unit and the second effect by the first display unit. Even when the relevance of performance between the first display means and the second display means is low, the first display means or the second display means may be moved. For example, if the movement of the first display means or the second display means is used as a mere notice, the first display means or the second display means can be used as an effect movable body (a combination).

  The first display unit and the second display unit may have the same size. The determination of the magnitude relationship between the first display means and the second display means focuses only on the size of the first display area of the first display means and the second display area of the second display means. Alternatively, the overall size of the first display unit and the second display unit may be noted.

(Example 2)
Next, a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 165. FIG. 156 (a) to FIG. 165 (b) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment in time series.

  In FIG. 156 (a), “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornament symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is informed that it is.

  Since three special figure 1 variable games are held at the time shown in FIG. 156 (a), the hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1. a11 is displayed, a hold display image a12 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game held on the second is displayed, and a hold display image a13 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game held on the third is displayed. It is reported that three special figure 1 variable games are put on hold. The hold display images a11, a12, and a13 are all in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. Further, since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, no hold display image is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  Further, the current gaming state is a normal state which is a special figure low probability state and a non-electric support state. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “normal mode” to notify that the current gaming state is the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (a), it is shown in FIG. 156 (b) after a lapse of a predetermined time since “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 156 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2503), and it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2401). (Yes in S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is not to be executed (No in Step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the first sub-control at the start of the special figure variable game. The part notice process ends.

  When the above process is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 156 (b), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a13 is deleted as shown in FIG. 156 (b).

  During this special figure 1 variable game, one game ball wins the special figure 1 start slot 230, and the following processing is executed during the execution of the special figure variable game. The main control unit 300 executes special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 for the derived special figure 1 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is not in electric support (No in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 1 starting port 230 (Yes in step S2201). Based on the special figure 1 start information, it is determined that the pre-determination result is a big hit with reference to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. 134 (b) (Yes in step S2203), and the special figure determination shown in FIG. The stop symbol is determined to be, for example, “Special Figure A” with reference to the table (step S2205), and the variable time is determined to be, for example, 45000 ms with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 136 (step S2213). ), A command including information on the prior determination result is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 138 and executes the hold change lottery 1 (step S2301), and wins “communication → A” in the hold change lottery 1. The second decorative symbol display device usage pattern is determined (Yes in step S2303), the effect start timing lottery is performed with reference to the effect start timing determination table shown in FIG. 141, and "change on hold 2" is selected. (Step S2309), a command including information on the display mode of the hold display image corresponding to the lottery result of the hold change lottery 1 and information on the start timing of the hold change effect is displayed. The two-decorated symbol display device 209 is outputted (step S2311), and the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition is ended. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the hold display image a13 in the normal hold display mode is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (for example, after 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation display), “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, as shown in FIG. 156 (d), “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is notified that there is.

  In addition, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is a so-called chance in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and may be a big hit in the special figure 1 variable game reserved for the third. (Or, if chances are stopped, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit.)

  The special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 156 (e) is started after the elapse of a predetermined time after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Prior to the start, the main control unit 300 obtains a pair of special figure 1 random values stored at the earliest position of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure variable game starts from now on. At the same time, the stored special figure 1 random number set is deleted, and the special figure 1 holding number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms (out of line). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2503), and it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2401). (Yes in S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is not to be executed (No in Step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the first sub-control at the start of the special figure variable game. The part notice process ends.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 156 (e), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is reduced by 1, the holding display image a12 is deleted as shown in FIG. 156 (e).

  In this example, “change in hold 2” is selected in the production start timing lottery of the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition at the time of acquisition of the start information that is held second. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156 (e), the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position, and the character image of “の” and “holding change” are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. A character image of “chance” is displayed and a hold change effect is started. At the start of the hold change effect, first, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position, and thereafter, the character image of “爺” and the character image of “hold change chance” are the first. The character image of “爺” and the character image of “holding change chance” may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, and then the second decorative symbol display device 209. The symbol display device 209 may move from the initial position to the second position, or move from the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 209 to the second position. The character image of “” and the character image of “holding change chance” may be simultaneously displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved to the second position during execution of the hold change effect.

  When the hold change effect is started, as shown in FIG. 156 (f), a white circular “ordinary hold” image provided as a display form of the hold display image, a “hold A” of the panda with the eyes, The image and the number “hold B” and the character image “Stop with a button” are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. At this time, the white circular “normal hold” image, the “hold A” image of the boat-eye panda, and the “length hold” “Pending” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Are displayed in a display size larger than the display size of the hold display images a11 and a12 displayed on the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), in the second decorative symbol display device 209, images of “normal hold”, “hold A” and “hold B” are displayed from the top to the bottom as shown by the downward arrows in the figure. The effect of moving (rotating) is started, and an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed. In the operation request image, a chance button image imitating the chance button 136 is arranged in the center, a character string “PUSH” is arranged in the upper part thereof, and an operation valid period for accepting pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is provided in the lower part thereof. An effective period image is shown. The effective period image in this example has a horizontally long frame shape. Initially, the entire period of the effective period is indicated by a bar shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and the bar portion of the predetermined color is displayed as the period passes. It is displayed so that it gradually becomes shorter.

  FIG. 157 (b) schematically shows a chance button 136 on the upper right in the drawing in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 157 (a). As shown in FIG. 157 (b), when the player presses the chance button 136, an image of “holding A” of the boat-eye panda based on the lottery result of the holding change lottery 1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Is done. At this time, the “hold A” image of the panda with the eye displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is larger than the display sizes of the reserved display images a11 and a12 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Displayed in display size.

  Further, during the on-hold change effect, when the player presses the chance button 136, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may move from the initial position to the second position.

  When the “pending A” image of the panda with the eyes is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, the result of the hold change effect is reflected in the hold display image on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 157 (c), the hold display image a12 corresponding to the second hold related to the notice changes from the “normal hold” to the “hold A” display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (c), the hold display image a12 is displayed in the display mode of “hold A” on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of “hold A” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Is displayed, and the result of the hold change effect is simultaneously displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  For example, the effect time of the change on hold change is 5000 ms, and the change time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms. Therefore, the hold change effect can be ended in the special figure 1 variable game.

  After a specific time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (for example, after 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of symbol fluctuation display), “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, as shown in FIG. 157 (d), “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is notified that there is. “Decoration 3—Decoration 3—Decoration 7” is a chance to make a prefetch notice about the special figure 1 variable game reserved second.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 157 (d), when the hold display image is displayed in a display mode other than “normal hold” and the pre-reading notice is being executed, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays “pre-reading”. A character image “change pending” is displayed. In addition, after the hold change effect ends, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the initial position.

  In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and then the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 157 (e) is started. Prior to the start, the main control unit 300 obtains a pair of special figure 1 random values stored at the earliest position of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure variable game starts from now on. At the same time, the stored special figure 1 random number set is deleted, and the special figure 1 holding number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms (out of line). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2503), and it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2401). (Yes in S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is not to be executed (No in Step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the first sub-control at the start of the special figure variable game. The part notice process ends.

  When the above processing is completed, the special symbol variation game is started, and the symbol variation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c as shown in FIG. 157 (e). Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the number of special figure 1 holds is reduced by 1, as shown in FIG. 157 (e), the hold display image a11 is “hold A”. Displayed in display mode.

  In addition, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, two game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the main control unit 300 shows the two special figure 1 starting information derived as shown in FIG. 147 and FIG. The special figure prefetch process shown in 148 is executed. In this example, a description of the result of the special figure prefetch process is omitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. In this example, other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301). The description about the result with the 1st sub control part notice process at the time of other starting information acquisition is omitted.

  Since other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301), as shown in FIG. 157 (e), the holding display images a12 and a13 are both displayed as “normally holding”. Displayed in a manner.

  After a specific time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (for example, after 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of symbol fluctuation display), “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, as shown in FIG. 157 (f), “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is notified that there is. “Decoration 3—Decoration 3—Decoration 7” is a chance to make a pre-reading notice about the special figure 1 variable game that is reserved first.

  Also, before the end of the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the main control unit 300 shows the derived special figure 1 start information in FIGS. 147 and 148. The special figure prefetch process shown in FIG. In this example, a description of the result of the special figure prefetch process is omitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. In this example, other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301). The description about the result with the 1st sub control part notice process at the time of other starting information acquisition is omitted.

  Since other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301), as shown in FIG. 157 (f), the holding display image a14 is displayed in the “normal holding” display mode. The

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a) after the lapse of a predetermined time since “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, as shown in FIG. Is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 158 (a), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the success / failure determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special diagram A”), and the variation time of the special diagram 1 variable game is 45000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, it is elected to execute a notice by the “panda” image in the common common notice lottery process (step S2401), a normal common notice command is output (step S2403), and the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2403). In S2405), it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed (Yes in Step S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is executed (Yes in Step S2503), and the super reach effect of reach A is executed in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, it is determined that it is a predetermined period (Yes in Step S2505), and since it is won at the time of the “Utsu figure B” in the ordinary figure variable game, the execution of only the electric long opening notification effect is selected (Step S2507). The general drawing production command is output (step S2511), the general drawing production determination process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 opens the special figure variation game. It ends the first sub-control unit notice process when.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 158 (a), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a14 is deleted as shown in FIG. 158 (a).

  When the special figure variation game related to the pre-reading notice in the hold display image of the “hold A” display mode of the panda with the eyes is started, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position. Then, the character image of “文字” and the character image of “hot squirrel” are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the special figure 1 variable game being executed is notified. At this time, the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209 to the second position and the display of the character image “画像” and the character image “hot may” may be performed simultaneously. Then, after the second decorative symbol display device 209 has moved to the second position, a character image of “爺” and a character image of “hot may” may be displayed, and a character image of “爺” The second decorative symbol display device 209 may move to the second position after the character image “maybe hot” is displayed.

  Further, during execution of the special figure variable game related to the pre-reading notice, a change icon (details will be described later) for notifying the special figure variable game may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, the display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may have a function as a change notice of the hold display image (hold icon).

  As shown in FIG. 158 (b), a “panda” is displayed in the effect display area 208d overlapping the middle symbol display area 208b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Is displayed, and it is notified that the effect of the common common notice is being executed. At the start of the normal common notice, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (c), after the character image representing “panda” is displayed in the effect display area 208d, the decorative pattern “decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Instead of the “panda” displayed and displayed in the effect display area 208d, the middle symbol display area 208b has an effect in which the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from top to bottom as indicated by a downward-pointing thick arrow in the figure. Is displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, and the character image “爺” and the character image “chance” are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, thereby achieving a reach effect. It is informed that it is being executed.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 158 (d), “decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208b on the upper right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, The decorative display is variably displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is displayed that the variation of the decorative pattern is reach. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, “cactus” (cactus and haniwa are displayed). A character image representing the character as a motif is displayed, and the reach A effect is executed.

  In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a character image of “Look up!” Is displayed. An image that causes the player to pay attention to the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be displayed in the effect display area 208d. For example, an effect image or animation may be displayed in place of the character image “Let's pay attention to the top!” So as to make the player pay attention to the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved to the second position, and a character image “reach A” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 to notify that the effect of reach A is being executed. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (e), the second decorative symbol display device 209 deviates from “decoration 7”, which is a big hit if stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b in the reach effect. The confrontation effect of the decoration symbol with “decoration 6” is started. The confrontation effect of the decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the result of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, the player was elected to win the “normal figure B” in the ordinary figure variable game that was being executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. Since the super-reaching effect of Reach A was being executed, the general-purpose decorative symbol change game was not executed, but after the normal-type variable game was over, the electric Chu (special drawing 2 start port 232) was opened long. In order to notify the opening of the electric long, the electric long opening notification effect using the character image of “Yoshimune” shown in FIG. 144 is executed in the general effect display area 800 of the first decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the player can recognize the long opening of the electric chew, so that the game that has been left-handed until now can be replaced with right-handed, and the game ball can be awarded to the special figure 2 starting port 232. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (f), the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a confrontation effect where “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are pressed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the ornamental symbol confrontation effect. Be started. In this example, if “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, it is a big hit. Therefore, the character image “Push 6!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first ornament symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In addition, during the execution of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol, which is the effect of reach A, the confrontation effect is preferentially executed in the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the effect of the ordinary figure variable game is not executed.

  In addition, since the player made a right turn when the electric tulong was released, two game balls win the special figure 2 starting port 232. The main control unit 300 executes special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 for the derived special figure 2 starting information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is not in power support (No in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 1 starting port 230 (No in step S2201). A command including undetermined information that has not been performed is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated. For this reason, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including undetermined information, the first sub control unit 400 does not execute the first sub control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For this reason, in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display images a21 and a22 are both displayed in the “normal hold” display mode, and a total of two special figure 2 variable games are displayed. Is informed that has been put on hold. In addition, since the electric-chu-long opening is in progress, the electric-chu-long opening notification effect is executed in the general drawing effect display area 800.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the confrontation where “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are pressed against each other as shown in FIG. 158 (f), a hexagonal star-like effect image is displayed in the second state as shown in FIG. 158 (a). It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to a second position overlapping with a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 changes, and the left symbol display area 208a of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 change. The upper half of the “decoration 7” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is hidden above the “decoration 7” in the left symbol display area 208a so as to be connected to the lower half of the “decoration 7” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Display half. As a result, the entire left decorative symbol “decoration 7” is displayed so as to be visible to the player across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  Further, in order to suggest that the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is displayed, a character image “How is it?” Is displayed in the effect display region 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, since the electric Chu is being opened long, the electric figure long opening notification effect is being executed in the general drawing effect display area 800. For this reason, since the player continued to hit the right, two more game balls win the special figure 2 starting port 232. The main control unit 300 executes special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 for the derived special figure 2 starting information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is not in power support (No in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 1 starting port 230 (No in step S2201). A command including undetermined information that has not been performed is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated. For this reason, when the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including undetermined information, the first sub control unit 400 does not execute the first sub control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For this reason, in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display images a23 and a24 are displayed in the “normal hold” display mode, and a total of four special figure 2 variable games are displayed. Is informed that has been put on hold.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (b), after a predetermined time elapses after the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, “decoration 7” wins and “decoration 7” is displayed on the second ornamental symbol display device 209. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays “decoration 7” in a display size larger than “decoration 7” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Further, since “decoration 7” wins and is a big hit, a character image “congratulations” is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, since the electric-chu-long opening has ended, the electric-chu-long opening effect in the general drawing effect display area 800 ends.

  For example, after 45000 ms have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the reach A effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 159 (c), the middle symbol display area 208b is the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol. “Decoration 7” is displayed. As a result, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “per reach A”. . In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the initial position, and a character image “big hit” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 to notify that the big hit is won. Although not shown, “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  FIG. 159 (d) shows a state in which the big hit game is started. As shown in FIG. 131, pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment plays a game with a right hand strike during a big hit. For this reason, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image of “hit right in the big hit” to notify the player that the big hit game is advanced by right hitting. In addition, the “panda” character image is displayed in the effect display area 208d that overlaps the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect during the big hit game is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), the hold display images displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 and the special figure 2 hold display area 209d2 are erased during the big hit game.

  Also, when starting information is acquired based on winning of a game ball to the special figure 2 starting port 232 when the electric tulong is released, special figure prefetching processing may be performed even during non-electric support. In this example, as a result of the pre-reading notice process for the special figure 2 variable game held for the first time, it has been determined that it will be a big hit. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 159 (e), the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position in order to foresee that it will be a big hit in the currently reserved special figure 2 variable game. On the two-decorated symbol display device 209, a character image of “holding continuous confirmation” and character images of “savohani” and “boxer girl” are displayed. At this time, when the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, the character image “settlement continuous confirmation” and the character images “Sabohani” and “Boxer girl” are displayed. It may be done at the same time. Either may be done first.

  FIG. 159 (e) shows a state where the big hit game has progressed to 8R. During the big hit game, the current round number and the right-handed notification are performed by the second decorative symbol display device 209, but at the time shown in FIG. A notice is being made. Therefore, a character image “8R right-handed” is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the advance notice of the pending continuous confirmation in the second decorative symbol display device 209 ends, as shown in FIG. 159 (f), the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, and the second decorative symbol display device. A character image “8R right-handed” is displayed in 209.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a character image of “ultra intense heat confirmation” is displayed, and a notice of a big hit (hot hold) in the special figure 2 variable game that is put on hold is given. The

  FIG. 160 (a) shows a state at the end of the big hit game. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image of “Big hit end” and a character image of “爺”. Further, after the big hit game based on the big hit of “Special Figure A”, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability state and a normal figure high probability state (electric support state). The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “next-probability change” to notify that the next special-figure change game shifts to the special-probability high probability state.

  FIG. 160 (b) shows a state after the big hit game is over. In the first decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a stop display of the previous ornament symbol, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, and the special figure 1 hold display area In 208d1, the hold display images a11, a12, and a13 are displayed, and it is notified that a total of three special figure 1 variable games are held. In the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2, the hold display images a21, a22, and a23 are informed. , A24 is displayed and it is notified that a total of four special figure 2 variable games are on hold. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “probably changing” to notify that the gaming state has shifted to the special figure high probability state.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. For this reason, when both the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are put on hold, the special figure 2 variable game is digested. As shown in FIG. 160 (c), the next special figure 2 variable game is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the big hit game. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 160 (c), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, when the main control unit 300 erases the data of the first special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control part 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 2 prefetch in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure A”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is 45000 ms (per reach A). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, the normal common notice is won in the common common notice lottery process (step S2401), and the normal common notice command is output (step S2403). (No in step S2501), the ordinary drawing effect determination process is ended, and the first sub-control unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 2 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is reduced by 1, the holding display image a24 is deleted as shown in FIG. 160 (c).

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 2 variable game, although not shown in the drawing, a common common notice is performed, and then a reach effect of reach A is executed as shown in FIG. 160 (d). The decorative symbol “decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the middle symbol display area 208b has an effect in which the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from top to bottom as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the drawing. Is displayed. In addition, a character image “reach!” Is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 to notify that the reach effect is being executed.

  For example, after 45000 ms have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the reach A effect ends, and “decoration 7” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as shown in FIG. 160 (e). As a result, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game is “per reach A”. . The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “probably changing” indicating the current gaming state. Although not shown, “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214.

  FIG. 161 (a) shows a state at the end of the big hit game. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image of “Big hit end” and a character image of “爺”. Further, after the big hit game based on the big hit of “Special Figure A”, the gaming state shifts to a special figure high probability state and a normal figure high probability state (electric support state). The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “next-probability change” to notify that the next special-figure change game shifts to the special-probability high probability state.

  FIG. 161 (b) shows a state after the big hit game is finished. In the first decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a stop display of the previous ornament symbol, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, and the special figure 1 hold display area In 208d1, the hold display images a11, a12, and a13 are displayed, and it is notified that a total of three special figure 1 variable games are held. In the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2, the hold display images a21, a22, and a23 are informed. Is displayed and it is notified that a total of three special figure 2 variable games are on hold. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “probably changing” to notify that the gaming state has shifted to the special figure high probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (c), after the lapse of the big hit game, the next special figure 2 variable game is started as shown in FIG. 161 (c). Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 161 (c), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, when the main control unit 300 erases the data of the first special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control part 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 2 prefetch in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is 7000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2403), and it is determined that the electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2501). No), the ordinary drawing effect determination process is ended, and the first sub-control unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above process is completed, the special figure 2 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 161 (c), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a23 is deleted as shown in FIG. 161 (c).

  For example, after 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of symbol variation display, “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c as shown in FIG. 161 (d). Thus, it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game is “out of”. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “probably changing” indicating the current gaming state. Although not shown, “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (e), the next special figure 2 variable game is started after a lapse of a predetermined time since the last special figure 2 variable game has ended. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 161 (e), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, when the main control unit 300 erases the data of the first special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control part 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 2 prefetch in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is 7000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2403), and it is determined that the electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2501). No), the ordinary drawing effect determination process is ended, and the first sub-control unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 2 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 161 (e), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a22 is deleted as shown in FIG. 161 (e).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 161 (f), the hold change effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, since the current gaming state is during the electric support, the subject of the pending change effect is the suspension of the special figure 2 variable game. When the hold change effect is started, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position, and the character image “爺” and the character image “holding change chance” are displayed in the second decorative symbol display. Displayed on the device 209.

  As described above, when the gaming state is during the electric support, the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. In the pachinko machine using the acceleration device that shortens the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game and performs the game during the electric support than the time reduction in this embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed with a predetermined probability, There is a case where it can be produced as if a pre-reading notice for the special figure 2 variable game is being made. Further, during the execution of the hold change effect, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moved to the second position.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), when the hold change effect is started, the white-circular “normal hold” image provided as the display mode of the hold display image, the “hold A” of the panda with the eyes, The image and the number “hold B” and the character image “Stop with a button” are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  Also, at the time shown in FIG. 162 (a), the hold change effect has not ended, but since, for example, 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), In the right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 9” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game is “out of place”. Although not shown, “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214.

  As described above, the hold change effect may be executed over the next special figure variable game without ending in the special figure variable game executed at the start of the effect.

  Further, during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, two game balls win the special figure 2 start port 232 and the following processing is executed. The main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 147 for each of the derived two special figure 2 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is in power support (Yes in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 2 start port 232 (Yes in step S2201). Based on the special figure 2 start information that has been made, it is determined that the pre-determination result is out of order with reference to the high probability table shown in FIG. 134 (a) (No in step S2103, No in step S2107). Referring to the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 135, the stop symbol is determined as, for example, “Special Figure I” (step S2211), and the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms, for example, with reference to the special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined (step S2213), a command including information on the result of the prior determination is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated. That.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the hold change lottery 1 with reference to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 138 (step S2301), wins “normal” in the hold change lottery 1, It is determined that the pattern is not a two-decorative symbol display device use pattern (No in step S2303), and a gasse effect lottery is executed with reference to the gasse effect lottery table shown in FIG. 140 (step S2305). Is selected (No in step S2307), a command is output (step S2311), and the first sub-control unit advance notice process when starting information is acquired is terminated. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), the hold display images a22 and a23 in the normal hold display mode are displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (b), the next special figure 2 variable game is started after a lapse of a predetermined time since the previous special figure 2 variable game has ended. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 162 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, when the main control unit 300 erases the data of the first special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control part 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 2 prefetch in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is 7000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2403), and it is determined that the electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2501). No), the ordinary drawing effect determination process is ended, and the first sub-control unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 2 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a23 is deleted as shown in FIG. 162 (b).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the second decorative symbol display device 209, images of “normal hold”, “hold A” and “hold B” are displayed from the top to the bottom as shown by the downward arrows in the figure. An effect to move (rotate) is executed, and an operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed.

  FIG. 162 (c) schematically shows a chance button 136 on the upper right in the drawing in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 162 (b). As shown in FIG. 162 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136, an image of “normal hold” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. At this time, the “normal hold” image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is larger than the display sizes of the hold display images a11 to a13 and a21 to a23 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Displayed in display size.

  In this example, the display mode of the hold display images a21 to a23 displayed as “normal hold” in the hold change effect is not changed. For this reason, the on-hold change effect in this example is a gasse effect. For this reason, the character image “sorry” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  In this way, in this example, the hold change effect gasse effect is executed over two special figure 2 variable games. Moreover, since it was a gaze effect, the display mode of any hold display image does not change. For this reason, it is unclear to the player which of the holdings the holding change effect has been performed. For this reason, the appearance frequency of the gasse effect as the pre-reading notice effect may be increased.

  Almost simultaneously with the Gase effect of the hold change effect, a predetermined time (7000 ms) has elapsed since the start of the special figure 2 variable game, and “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214 (not shown). In addition, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), “decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 2 variable game is out of place. Is notified.

  In addition, during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, one game ball wins the special figure 2 start port 232, and the following processing is executed. The main controller 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 147 for the derived special figure 2 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is in power support (Yes in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 2 start port 232 (Yes in step S2201). Based on the special figure 2 start information that has been made, it is determined that the pre-determination result is out of order with reference to the high probability table shown in FIG. 134 (a) (No in step S2103, No in step S2107). Referring to the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 135, the stop symbol is determined as, for example, “Special Figure I” (step S2111), and the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms, for example, with reference to the special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined (step S2213), a command including information on the result of the prior determination is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated. That.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the hold change lottery 1 with reference to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 138 (step S2301), wins “normal” in the hold change lottery 1, It is determined that the pattern is not a two-decorative symbol display device use pattern (No in step S2303), and a gasse effect lottery is executed with reference to the gasse effect lottery table shown in FIG. 140 (step S2305). Is selected (No in step S2307), a command is output (step S2311), and the first sub-control unit advance notice process when starting information is acquired is terminated. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the hold display image a23 in the normal hold display mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (d), the next special figure 2 variable game is started after a lapse of a predetermined time since the previous special figure 2 variable game has ended. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 162 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, when the main control unit 300 erases the data of the first special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control part 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 2 prefetch in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special diagram I”), and the variation time of the special diagram 2 variable game is 1000 ms (out of super shortening). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2403), and it is determined that the electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2501). No), the ordinary drawing effect determination process is ended, and the first sub-control unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above process is completed, the special figure 2 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 162 (d), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a23 is deleted as shown in FIG. 162 (d). The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “probably changing” indicating the current gaming state.

  For example, after 1000 ms has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, “decoration 6-decoration 9-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c as shown in FIG. 162 (e). Thus, it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game is “out of”. Although not shown, “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 162 (e), the hold change effect is started during the stop display of the decorative symbol. In this example, since the current gaming state is during the electric support, the subject of the pending change effect is the suspension of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, when the hold change effect is started, the second decorative design display device 209 remains in the initial position, and the character image “爺” and the character image “holding change chance” are displayed on the second decorative design display device. 209.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (f), the next special figure 2 variable game is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the previous special figure 2 variable game. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 162 (f), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, when the main control unit 300 erases the data of the first special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control part 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 2 prefetch in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is 1000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2403), and it is determined that the electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2501). No), the ordinary drawing effect determination process is ended, and the first sub-control unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 2 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 162 (f), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c.

  Since the hold change effect has been started, as shown in FIG. 162 (f), a white circular “normal hold” image provided as a display mode of the hold display image, “hold A And a character image “Hold with a button” are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  In addition, after the start of the hold change effect, one game ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the following processing is executed. The main controller 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 147 for the derived special figure 2 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is in power support (Yes in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 2 start port 232 (Yes in step S2201). Based on the special figure 2 start information that has been made, it is determined that the pre-determination result is out of order with reference to the high probability table shown in FIG. 134 (a) (No in step S2103, No in step S2107). Referring to the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 135, the stop symbol is determined as, for example, “Special Figure I” (step S2211), and the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms, for example, with reference to the special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined (step S2213), a command including information on the result of the prior determination is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated. That.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the hold change lottery 1 with reference to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 138 (step S2301), wins “normal” in the hold change lottery 1, It is determined that the pattern is not a two-decorative symbol display device use pattern (No in step S2303), and a gasse effect lottery is executed with reference to the gasse effect lottery table shown in FIG. 140 (step S2305). Is selected (No in step S2307), a command is output (step S2311), and the first sub-control unit advance notice process when starting information is acquired is terminated. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162 (f), the hold display image a22 in the normal hold display mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  In addition, after the start of the hold change effect, one game ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the following processing is executed. The main controller 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 147 for the derived special figure 2 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is in power support (Yes in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 2 start port 232 (Yes in step S2201). Based on the special figure 2 starting information that has been made, it is determined that the pre-determination result is a big hit with reference to the high probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. 134A (Yes in step S2103), and the special figure shown in FIG. With reference to the determination table, the stop symbol is determined as, for example, “Special Figure A” (step S2205), and the variable time is determined as, for example, 65000 ms with reference to the special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. In step S2213), a command including information on the result of the prior determination is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetch process is terminated.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 138 and executes the hold change lottery 1 (step S2301), and wins “communication → B” in the hold change lottery 1. The second decorative symbol display device usage pattern is determined (Yes in step S2303), the effect start timing lottery is performed with reference to the effect start timing determination table shown in FIG. 141, and "change on hold 2" is selected. (Step S2309), a command is output (Step S2311), and the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition is terminated. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162 (f), the hold display image a23 in the normal hold display mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  After the start of the hold change effect, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), in the second decorative symbol display device 209, “normal hold”, “hold A” and “hold B” are indicated as indicated by downward arrows in the figure. An effect that the image moves (rotates) from top to bottom is executed, and an operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed.

  In addition, after a predetermined time (1000 ms) has elapsed since the start of the special figure 2 variable game, "Special Figure I" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214 (not shown) and shown in FIG. 163 (a). Thus, “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game is out of play.

  Further, during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, one game ball wins the special figure 2 start port 232, and the main control unit 300 shows the special figure 2 start information derived as shown in FIG. The figure prefetch process is executed. In this example, a description of the result of the special figure prefetch process is omitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. In this example, other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301). The description about the result with the 1st sub control part notice process at the time of other starting information acquisition is omitted.

  Since “A” and “B” other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301), the holding display images a23 and a24 are both displayed as “normally holding” as shown in FIG. Displayed in a manner.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed after “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, 208 c, the following special figure 2 variable game Is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 163 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, when the main control unit 300 erases the data of the first special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control part 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 2 prefetch in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is 1000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, the normal common notice is not won in the normal common notice lottery process (steps S2401 and S2404), and it is determined that the electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2501). No), the ordinary drawing effect determination process is ended, and the first sub-control unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 2 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a24 is deleted as shown in FIG. 163 (b).

  Further, regarding the hold displayed in the hold display image a22, it is selected that the display mode changes to the display mode of “hold B” when the second hold is made. In this example, it is informed that the change is to the “pending B” of the head length during the holding change effect that has already been executed. An image of “hold B” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Further, based on the player pressing the chance button 136, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position. Further, in this example, the hold change effect is executed over two special figure variable games.

  After the end of the hold change effect, as shown in FIG. 163 (c), the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the initial position. On the second decorative symbol display device 209 after moving to the initial position, an image of “pending B” of the head length as a result of the holding change effect is displayed. Further, since the hold change effect has ended, the display mode of the hold display image a <b> 22 changes to “hold B”.

  In this example, the display image of the hold display image for the special figure 2 variable game that has not been put on hold at the start of the hold change effect (the time shown in FIG. 162 (e)) has changed. In this case, the gaming state is a special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is high, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is short due to the short time state (electric support state), so at the start of the hold change effect Even if there is no special figure change game or hot special figure change game that will be a big hit, there is a possibility that a special figure change game or a hot special figure change game that will be a big hit will be put on hold due to the increase in hold during the change change production In some cases, it is expensive and can be performed accidentally.

  In addition, after the hold change effect ends, a special time (1000 ms) has elapsed after the special figure 2 variable game is started, and “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214 (not shown). As shown in 163 (c), “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game is out of place. Is done. The stop display of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is a chance to make a pre-reading notice for the special figure 2 variable game that is held second.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (d), the next special figure 2 variable game is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the previous special figure 2 variable game. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 163 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, when the main control unit 300 erases the data of the first special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control part 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 2 prefetch in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is 1000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2403), and it is determined that the electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2501). No), the ordinary drawing effect determination process is ended, and the first sub-control unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 2 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 163 (d), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 hold number is decreased by 1, the hold display image a23 is deleted as shown in FIG. 163 (d).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 163 (d), when the hold display image is displayed in a display mode other than “normal hold” and the pre-reading notice is executed, the pre-reading notice is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. A character image “pending change” and an image of “pending B” having a number corresponding to the display mode of the hold display image of the pre-reading notice are displayed. The display size of the display image of the number “hold B” of the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be the same as the display size of the reserved display image a21 in the first decorative symbol display device 208, or the second decorative symbol. The display size of the display image “Pending B” of the display device 209 may be larger than the display size of the hold display image a21 on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the display image of “Pending B” of the head length may not be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Moreover, you may display images (for example, character images other than the number length) other than the display image of the number “hold B” on the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  After the special figure 2 variable game is started or after 1000 ms, as shown in FIG. 163 (e), “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Displayed to notify that the special figure 2 variable game is out of play. “Decoration 3—Decoration 3—Decoration 7” is a chance to make a pre-reading notice about the special figure 1 variable game that is reserved first.

  Further, during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, two game balls win the special figure 2 start port 232, and the main control unit 300 shows the special figure 2 start information derived as shown in FIG. The figure prefetch process is executed. In this example, a description of the result of the special figure prefetch process is omitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. In this example, other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301). The description about the result with the 1st sub control part notice process at the time of other starting information acquisition is omitted.

  Since “A” and other than “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301), as shown in FIG. 163 (f), both the holding display images a23 and a24 display “normally holding”. Displayed in a manner.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (f) after a predetermined time has elapsed after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the following special figure 2 variable game is performed. Is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game shown in FIG. 163 (f), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random value set stored at the earliest position of the special figure 2 random value storage area, and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 2 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 2 random value set data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by one, and the special figure 2 reserved number is subtracted by one. Further, when the main control unit 300 erases the data of the first special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control part 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 2 prefetch in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure A”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game is 65,000 ms (per reach B). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the normal common notice is won (step S2401), the normal common notice command is output (step S2404), and in the ordinary drawing effect determination process (step S2405) (No in step S2501), the ordinary drawing effect determination process is ended, and the first sub-control unit 400 ends the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 2 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 163 (f), the symbol variable display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 2 holding number is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 163 (f), the holding display image a24 is erased and the holding display is performed. The display mode of the image 21 is “normal hold”.

  In addition, the image of “pending B” of the head of the number displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 before the start of the special figure variable game related to the pre-reading notice is displayed as another character image at the start of the special figure variable game. The display changes to a certain “爺”. The change in display may be a change due to animation. On the second decorative symbol display device 209, an image of “爺” and a character image of “maybe hot” are displayed, and a notice of the special figure changing game being executed (notice of the change) is made.

  FIG. 164 (a) shows that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed. The second decorative symbol display device 209 may display a change icon (details will be described later) as a notice of the change. Further, the image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 may have a function as a hold icon (hold display image).

  As shown in FIG. 164 (b), a “panda” is displayed in the effect display area 208d overlapping the middle symbol display area 208b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Is displayed, and it is notified that the effect of the common common notice is being executed. As shown in FIG. 164 (c), after the character image representing “panda” is displayed in the effect display area 208d, the decorative pattern “decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Instead of the “panda” displayed and displayed in the effect display area 208d, the middle symbol display area 208b has an effect in which the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from top to bottom as indicated by a downward-pointing thick arrow in the figure. Is displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image of “Intense heat” to notify that the reach effect of hot fluctuation is being executed. The character image “Intense heat” has functions of notifying the reach effect and notifying the change. When the reach effect is started, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position.

  Further, during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, one game ball wins the special figure 2 start port 232, and the main control unit 300 shows the special figure 2 start information derived as shown in FIG. The figure prefetch process is executed. In this example, a description of the result of the special figure prefetch process is omitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. In this example, other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301). The description about the result with the 1st sub control part notice process at the time of other starting information acquisition is omitted.

  Since “A” and other than “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301), as shown in FIG. 164 (c), the holding display image a24 is displayed in the “normal holding” display mode. The

  The reach production in this example is the production of reach B. As shown in FIG. 164 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208 displays “bancho” in the effect display area 208 d that overlaps the left symbol display area 208 a after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of reach B. A predetermined member of the chance button 136 rotates and vibrates in the character image, the character image “press” in the effect display area 208d that overlaps the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect display area 208d that overlaps the right symbol display area 208c. The image of the state chance button 136 and the character image “Big hit if clothes are broken by repeated hits” are displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the mission effect in reach B is executed.

  When the mission effect of reach B is executed, the first decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the decorative symbol variation display, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the decorative symbol variation display. In this example, the reach of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is a big hit, so “decoration 7” is displayed on the left and right, and the ornamental symbols are displayed variably between them. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (e), when the mission effect of reach B is executed, the chance button 136 is rotated and vibrated. In the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an effective period image indicating an operation effective period for accepting pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (e), when the player repeatedly hits the chance button 136 a predetermined number of times, the mission is accomplished, and as shown in FIG. 164 (f), an image in which the watchmaster breaks clothes is displayed. In the image where the Bancho who reports the mission completion breaks clothes, the face part of the Bancho is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 and the trunk part of the Bancho is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, the result of the mission effect executed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. For this reason, in this example, since the image at the time of accomplishing the mission is displayed on the two display devices, the image at the time of accomplishing the mission can be displayed as a larger image than when displayed on the single display device. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 209 can be moved and overlapped with the first decorative symbol display device 208 so that one image can be displayed on the two display devices.

  Further, in order to notify the mission completion, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “Yay! In addition, on the second decorative symbol display device 209, a face of a head length that notifies the mission completion is displayed overlapping the display of “decoration 7” and the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (a), after elapse of a predetermined time from the completion of the mission, the image of “bancho” broke clothes in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the reach of “decoration 7” “Decoration 7” is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 209, the display of “decoration 7” and the variation display of the decorative symbol are performed, and the reach effect is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (a), “decoration 7” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 7” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 are “ It is a display of the same type of information indicating the reach of “decoration 7”. In this example, “decoration 7” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in a larger display size than “decoration 7” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. The display size ratio between “decoration 7” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 7” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is the same as that of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 208. This corresponds to the size and ratio of the two decorative symbol display device 209. The ratio of the display sizes of “decoration 7” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 7” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is the first decorative symbol display device 208. And the second decorative symbol display device 209 may not correspond to the size and ratio.

  Immediately before the end of the reach effect B, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the second position to the first position, and at that time, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the result of the mission effect. ”Is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach of the variation display of the decorative symbols executed by the second decorative symbol display device 209 is reflected on the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  For example, after 65000 ms has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the reach B effect ends, and “decoration 7” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as shown in FIG. 165 (b). As a result, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 2 variable game is “per reach B”. . Although not shown, “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214.

  Further, in order to notify that the current gaming state is a special figure high-probability state, a character image “probably changing” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may not only notify the current gaming state but also execute a predetermined effect.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 165 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
First display means (for example, the first display means capable of executing at least the first effect related to the game (for example, the effect of the pre-reading notice using the hold display image in the display mode of “hold A” or “hold B”)) A decorative symbol display device 208);
A second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209) capable of executing at least a second effect (for example, a pending change effect) at least related to the game;
A game machine equipped with at least
The first effect is an effect including at least a display relating to a result of the second effect.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, it may be possible to produce an effect in which two display units are linked.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display means can derive at least the result of the second effect by the second display means,
The first display means is capable of executing at least the first effect including a display according to the result of the second effect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the second display means derives the result of the second presentation, so that it can be easily understood by the player that the presentation of the two display means is linked. There is.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of executing at least a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the effect execution condition is satisfied,
The third effect is an effect including at least a notification regarding the game,
The second effect is an effect related at least to the third effect,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the second display means relates to the third display while promptly and reliably informing that the performance execution condition is satisfied (for example, notification of an increase in holding). In some cases, it can be interesting to produce an effect.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means can be displayed in one notification mode among a plurality of notification modes as a notification about a game,
At least one notification mode of the plurality of notification modes is a first notification mode (for example, a “normal hold” display mode),
At least one notification mode of the plurality of notification modes is a second notification mode (for example, a display mode of “hold A” or “hold B”),
The first display means is capable of at least executing the third effect including at least a first notification mode;
The second display means is capable of executing at least the second effect including at least the first notification mode and the second notification mode,
The first display means can execute at least the first effect including the second notification mode according to the result of the second effect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display mode initially displayed in the third effect may change depending on the result of the second effect, so the player has expectation as a notice. There is a case that can be made.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice is provided.
The notification regarding the game is a start hold display (for example, a hold display image),
The first notification mode is a notification mode including at least a first start hold display,
The second notification mode is a notification mode including at least a second start hold display,
The prefetch notice means is capable of at least executing the prefetch notice by displaying the second start hold display on the first display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, when performing an effect related to the start hold display, first, the start hold display is notified to the player as a start hold display with certainty and promptly the third effect. Because it can, the player will not suffer any disadvantages. And since the effect (for example, 2nd effect) regarding the notified start hold display is performed and the result is notified to the player by the 1st effect, expectation can be given other than at the time of start winning. There is a case.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display means is capable of starting the second effect after the third effect is started,
The first display means is capable of starting the first effect after the result of the second effect is derived.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, by giving a time difference to the start of each production, it is easy for the player to pay attention to the production and the display means on which the production is performed, and the points of the production that the player should pay attention to May be easy to understand.

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means and the second display means can take a plurality of relative positional relationships,
At least one of the plurality of positional relationships is a first positional relationship (for example, when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is positioned at the initial position),
At least one of the plurality of positional relationships is a second positional relationship (for example, when the second decorative symbol display device 209 is positioned at the second position),
The second positional relationship is closer to the first display means and the second display means than the first positional relationship,
It is at least possible to take the second positional relationship in the period from the start of the third effect to the end of the first effect,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there is a case where the relevance of each effect can be made dense by the movable operation of the display means.

(8) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display,
The decorative design variation display can at least stop displaying the decorative design according to the result of the determination of success / failure after changing the decorative design.
It is characterized by that.

  The pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration allows the player to be interested in the symbol variation (decorative symbol variation display) being executed by the first display unit, and the player's expectation for the pre-reading notice by the second display unit. May be able to increase.

The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means has at least a first display area,
The second display means has at least a second display area,
The first display area is wider than the second display area;
It is characterized by.

The pachinko machine 100,
The second display means is capable of starting the second effect after the third effect is started,
The first display means is capable of starting the first effect after the result of the second effect is derived.
It is characterized by that.

The pachinko machine 100,
The second positional relationship is a positional relationship in which at least a part of the first display unit and at least a part of the second display unit overlap.
It is characterized by that.

The pachinko machine 100,
The second display means is capable of executing the second effect before the start of the third effect.
It is characterized by that.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, the second display means can display an image having the same display form as the hold display image in the second effect.
When the result of the second effect is derived, the symbol variation display related to the hold that has triggered the start of the third effect is finished. However, the first effect corresponding to the result of the second effect is performed on the increased holding thereafter. The second effect may be able to ensure the effect time without being limited by the time of symbol variation display. Further, the player may be able to impress the player with a notice with reliability, which is not limited to the concept of reserved storage. The second effect can be executed during the power support state or during the effect using the acceleration device.
The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that an effect relating to a future success / failure determination result is performed as the second effect, and the result of the second effect is reflected in the first effect.

The pachinko machine 100 derives the result of the second presentation based on the hold display that triggered the execution of the third presentation, and reflects the derived result on the first display unit using the first presentation. However, the hold display position at that time is the same as the notification by the third effect (for example, hold 4) or the hold before that (for example, hold 3 or less).
There is a possibility that the second effect may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays and a plurality of symbol variation displays may be performed without straddling a plurality of symbol variation displays.
The second effect can be started during the symbol variation display that is the same as or different from the symbol variation display related to the hold for which the notification by the third effect is performed.
The first effect can be started during the symbol variation display when the second effect is started or during a symbol variation display different from the symbol variation display.
The operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) may be involved in any of the transitions of the third effect, the second effect, and the first effect. Thereby, a sense of achievement may be imparted to the player.

  The first display means notifies that the effect of the usual figure variable game is performed, the effect of the usual figure variable game is given by the second display means, and the result is reflected on the first display means. Although the first display means and the second display means produce a variation effect of the usual figure decoration symbol, there are cases where the display means of each stop timing of the ordinary figure decoration symbol are different.

As the prefetching notice, a prefetching notice with high reliability (for example, a notice of the second start hold display) may be performed at the time of the third presentation. In this case, a more reliable hold display is derived from the second effect or the first effect.
In addition, the pre-reading notice does not necessarily have to have high reliability and expectation as time series changes. By mixing an effect equivalent to so-called demotion with the pre-reading notice, there are cases where the frequency of occurrence of the third effect is improved, the thrilling feeling of the second effect, and the like.

  The first display unit may be movable, the second display unit may be movable, or both display units may be movable.

(Example 3)
Next, a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 167. FIG. 166 (a) to FIG. 167 (b) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment in time series.

  In FIG. 166 (a), “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornament symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is informed that it is.

  Since two special figure 1 variable games are held at the time shown in FIG. 166 (a), the hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1. a11 is displayed, a hold display image a12 corresponding to the second special figure 1 variable game is displayed, and it is notified that two special figure 1 variable games are held. The hold display images a11 and a12 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. Further, since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, no hold display image is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the display shown in FIG. 166 (b) after a lapse of a predetermined time since “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 166 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2503), and it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2401). (Yes in S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is to be executed (Yes in Step S2503), it is determined that it is not in the predetermined period (No in Step S2505), and the execution of the ordinary symbol decoration symbol variation game is selected (Step S2509). A general drawing effect command is output (step S2511), the general drawing effect determination process is terminated, and the first sub control unit 400 ends the first sub control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 166 (b), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a12 is deleted as shown in FIG. 166 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 166 (b), in the ordinary drawing effect area 800 of the first decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a variation display of a normal ornament symbol (in the diagram, with a variation pattern of a variation time of 3000 ms shown in FIG. 143). Is indicated). In addition, in the effect display area 208d, a character image of “文字” and a character image “Look Up” are displayed, and thereafter, an effect of the usual figure variable game started by the second decorative symbol display device 209 is played. To attract attention. An animation image or an effect image may be displayed in the effect display area 208d to make the player pay attention to the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  When the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game is started, the second decorative symbol display device 209 starts an effect on the general-purpose variable game, and as shown in FIG. 166 (c), the second decoration in the effect display area 208d. A character image of “爺” is displayed in order to have a relevance to the effect that draws attention to the symbol display device 209, and a character image “Chance of opportunity to release electric power” is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 166 (d). In addition, if “general decoration 2” and a character image “open electric Chu when stopped” are displayed, and “general decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the general drawing effect display area 800, the electric chew is long open. To be notified.

  FIG. 166 (e) shows a state in which an effect in which the decorative symbols for normal symbols are variably displayed from right to left on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is started. In this way, at the start of the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game, the variation display of the normal symbol decorative symbol executed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is also executed.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game, as shown in FIG. Informed. At this time, the normal symbol decorative symbols are continuously displayed in the normal symbol effect display area 800.

  FIG. 167 (a) shows a state where the variation display of the decorative symbol for the normal symbol in the normal drawing effect display area 800 is finished. In this example, after “general decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, “general decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the “general decoration 2” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed in a larger display size than the “general decoration 2” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, at the end of the general-purpose decorative symbol variation game, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position to notify the result of the general-purpose variable symbol game.

  FIG. 167 (b) shows a state in which “Tual Figure B” has been won, the base figure variable game is over, and the electric Chu is long open. The electric long open effect shown in FIG. 144 is executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device. At this time, the image of “Yoshimune” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed in a larger display size than the image of “Yoshimune” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays “Yoshimune” in a display size larger than that of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and supplements the ordinary drawing effect on the first decorative symbol display device 208. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “opening” to indicate that the electric chew is opened.

  Referring to FIG. 158 (e) of the second embodiment, the electric-chu-long opening notification effect is performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the super reach effect is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 209. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the electric long open notification effect is also performed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. In this way, the electric tulong opening notification effect may be executed using any display device according to the gaming state or the state of the effect. It is possible to appropriately select which effect is preferentially executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

Example 4
Next, a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (f) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit of “Special figure A”. For this reason, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” temporarily stops (fluctuates) in the right middle left decorative symbol display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and “big hit” is indicated in the second decorative symbol display device 209. A character image is displayed, which suggests that the special figure 1 variable game will be a big hit.

  FIG. 168 (b) shows a state in which the re-lottery effect is started. The stop symbol “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is not a symbol that explicitly notifies the probable big hit, but if the player can expect to win the probable big hit by performing a redrawing effect. There is.

  When the re-lottery effect is started, in the first decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” temporarily stops (fluctuates) in the upper right middle left decorative symbol display area, and the effect display is performed. In the area 208d, two “treasure chest” images, an arrow above them, and a character image “Choose a treasure chest” are displayed, and the player is allowed to select one of the treasure chests. The player can select any treasure chest by operating the chance button 136.

  In addition, at the start of the re-drawing effect, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, and a character image “final chance Yoshimune appears and probable big hit” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 from the treasure chest. If Yoshimune appears, it is suggested that he wins a promising big hit.

  Since the player operates the chance button 136 to select the right treasure chest, for example, an animation image in which the right treasure chest moves toward the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed in the effect display area 208d. At the time shown in FIG. 168 (c), the treasure box selected by the player is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  FIG. 168 (d) shows a state where the treasure chest selected by the player is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. In this example, the “treasure chest” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 and the “treasure chest” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed in the same display size.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 168 (d), in this example, the treasure box displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 based on the operation of the chance button 136 by the player. Is done. The treasure chest movement display from the first decorative symbol display device 208 to the second decorative symbol display device 209 may not be displayed by animation. Further, a still image may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  FIG. 168 (e) shows an effect in which “Yoshimune” appears from the treasure box selected by the player. Since Yoshimune appeared in the redrawing effect, as shown in FIG. 168 (f), the character image “probability big hit” is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper right middle left In the decorative symbol display area, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the probable big hit is won in the special figure 1 variable game.

  In this example, after the image of “Yoshimune” notifying the result of the re-lottery effect is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, “Yoshimune” is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the re-lottery effect is displayed. As a result, a character image “probability big hit” is displayed. In this way, the result of the effect displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is not used as it is on the first decorative symbol display device 208, but the first decorative symbol display device 208 displays the contents displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. You may alert | report the result of a re-lottery effect with the display content different from.

(Example 5)
Next, a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 (a) to FIG. 169 (e) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment in time series.

  In FIG. 169 (a), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 9” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornamental symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is informed that it is.

  In the effect display area 208d, a character image “Daitomo setting LV34” is displayed. Daitomo is a service of a gaming machine in which the player is registered as a member and clears the mission, so that the degree of hitting (level) increases. In this example, the player logs in as a member of Daitomo and plays a game. In this example, for example, the indentation degree (level) is “LV34”.

  Since one special figure 1 variable game is held at the time shown in FIG. 169 (a), the hold display image corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game held first in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1. a11 is displayed and it is notified that one special figure 1 variable game is put on hold. The hold display image a11 is a normal hold display mode shown in FIG. Further, since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, no hold display image is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (b), it is shown in FIG. 169 (b) after a lapse of a predetermined time after “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 9” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 169 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the result of the determination is wrong (for example, the stop symbol is “special diagram A”), and the variation time of the special diagram 1 variable game is 45000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the number of special figure 1 holds is decreased by 1, the hold display image a12 is deleted as shown in FIG. 169 (b).

  FIG. 169 (c) shows a state where a premier notice, which is one of Daitomo's missions, is started by the first decorative symbol display device 208 during the special figure 1 variable game. The four “爺” are displayed in the effect display area 208d overlapping the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c.

  FIG. 169 (d) shows a state where the mission of the premier notice has been achieved. The second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position. The result of the mission effect performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is reflected on the display of the second decorative symbol display device 209, and a character image of “Daitomo No. 77 achievement / LV up” and four people are displayed. “爺” image is displayed and the mission number is displayed. 77 is notified. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may move to the second position and the mission effect result may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 at the same time. Either one may be performed first.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 169 (d), in the symbol variation display of the ornamental symbol of the special figure 1 variable game, “decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach effect is started. .

  FIG. 169 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. In addition, the mission achievement result displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is reflected on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the level is increased by one when the mission is achieved, and “LV35” is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Is done.

  As described above, the result of the effect on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is reflected on the display of the second decorative symbol display device 209 (see FIG. 169 (d)), and then the effect on the second decorative symbol display device 209. May be reflected on the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208 (see FIG. 169 (e)).

(Example 6)
Next, an effect in pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (a) to 170 (d) and (e) show, in this order, examples of effects on the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 170 (a) shows that a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) that is performed when a game is not being performed is being executed. In the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a character image “CR Yoshimune” indicating the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and character images “Yoshimune” and “と” of the characters appearing in the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. And are displayed.

  Further, when the player performs a predetermined operation during the demonstration effect of the present example, the predetermined effect is executed. For example, when the player presses the chance button 136 within 20 seconds, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position. In order to notify this, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays “If the button is pressed 100 times, the sub display will fall and the time limit will be 20 seconds”.

  Further, in order to prompt the player to press the chance button 136, a character image “PUSH” and an image imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 170 (b) shows a state where the time limit is 19 seconds remaining. On the second decorative symbol display device 209, a character image “19 seconds remaining” indicating the time limit and an image imitating the chance button 136 are displayed to prompt the user to press the chance button 136. In addition, a character image “5” is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the number of times the chance button 136 is pressed is notified. 170 (b) to (e), in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 170 (a), a chance button 136 is schematically shown at the upper right in the figure, and the player is pressing the chance button 136. Is schematically represented.

  When the player starts to press the chance button 136, the player is prompted to press the chance button 136 displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 170 (b). An image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  FIG. 170 (c) shows a state where the remaining time is 1 second. The number of times the chance button 136 is pressed at the present time is 94 times. If the chance button 136 cannot be pressed 6 times in the remaining 1 second, for example, if the number of presses for 20 seconds is 99, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed as shown in FIG. 170 (d). An image of “Bulleye Panda” and a character image of “Sorry” are displayed to inform the player that the condition could not be cleared. If the condition cannot be cleared, as shown in FIG. 170 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not move from the initial position.

  On the other hand, when the chance button 136 can be pressed 6 times in the remaining 1 second, for example, when the number of times of pressing for 20 seconds is 100, as shown in FIG. On the symbol display device 209, an image of “bancho” and a character image of “achievement” are displayed to notify that the player has cleared the condition. Since the conditions have been cleared, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves (drops) from the initial position to the second position as shown in FIG. 170 (e).

  As described above, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may move when the player achieves a predetermined condition (for example, pressing the chance button 136 100 times in 20 seconds). According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to give the player a sense of achievement of the predetermined condition clear.

(Example 7)
Next, game effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 171 (a) to 172 (d) show, in this order, time-series special figure variation games in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment.

  In FIG. 171 (a), “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornamental symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is informed that it is.

  Since two special figure 1 variable games are held at the time shown in FIG. 171 (a), the reserved display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1. a11 is displayed, a hold display image a12 corresponding to the second special figure 1 variable game is displayed, and it is notified that two special figure 1 variable games are held. The hold display images a11 and a12 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. Further, since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, no hold display image is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (a), it is shown in FIG. 171 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” was stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 171 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. Description of the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game in this example is omitted.

  When the above process is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c.

  Also, almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball wins the special figure 1 start port 230, and the following processing is executed during the execution of the special figure variable game. The main control unit 300 executes special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 for the derived special figure 1 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is not in electric support (No in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 1 starting port 230 (Yes in step S2201). Based on the special figure 1 starting information, it is determined that the pre-determination result is out of order by referring to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. 134 (b) (Yes in step S2203), and the special figure determination shown in FIG. The stop symbol is determined to be, for example, “Special Figure I” with reference to the table (step S2205), and the variable time is determined to be, for example, 7000 ms with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 136 (step S2213). ), A command including information on the prior determination result is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 138, executes hold change lottery 1 (step S2301), selects “normal” in the hold change lottery 1, It is determined that the pattern is not a two-decorated symbol display device usage pattern (No in step S2303), and a gasse effect lottery is executed with reference to the gasse effect lottery table shown in FIG. 140 (step S2305). Is selected (No in step S2307), a command is output (step S2311), and the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition ends. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the hold display image a12 in the normal hold display mode is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1.

  Furthermore, during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 start port 230, and the following processing is executed during the execution of the special figure variable game. The main control unit 300 executes special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 for the derived special figure 1 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is not in electric support (No in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 1 starting port 230 (Yes in step S2201). Based on the special figure 1 start information, it is determined that the pre-determination result is a big hit with reference to the low probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. 135 (b) (Yes in step S2203), and the special figure determination shown in FIG. The stop symbol is determined to be, for example, “Special Figure A” with reference to the table (step S2205), and the variable time is determined to be, for example, 45000 ms with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 136 (step S2213). ), A command including information on the prior determination result is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the pending change lottery table, executes the pending change lottery 1 (step S2301), and wins “A → B” in the pending change lottery 1. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display image from “hold A” to “hold B” may change. For this reason, “A → B” can be selected in the hold change effect table (not shown) used in this embodiment. Further, in the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition, it is determined that the second decorative symbol display device usage pattern is used (Yes in step S2303), and the production is started with reference to the production start timing determination table shown in FIG. The start timing lottery is executed and “change on hold 2” is selected (step S2309), information on the display mode of the hold display image corresponding to the lottery result of the hold change lottery 1, the start timing of the production of the hold change effect, and Is output to the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 (step S2311), and the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition is terminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 171 (c), the hold display image a13 having the display mode of “hold A” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1.

  After a specific time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (for example, after 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of symbol fluctuation display), “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, as shown in FIG. 171 (d), “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is notified that there is. The “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is a so-called chance in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and it is a precautionary notice that it will be a big hit in the special figure 1 variable game held on the second. Yes.

  The special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 171 (e) is started after elapse of a predetermined time after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Prior to the start, the main control unit 300 obtains a pair of special figure 1 random values stored at the earliest position of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure variable game starts from now on. At the same time, the stored special figure 1 random number set is deleted, and the special figure 1 holding number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms (out of line). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2503), and it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2401). (Yes in S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is not to be executed (No in Step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the first sub-control at the start of the special figure variable game. The part notice process ends.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 171 (e), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 171 (e), the holding display image a13 is erased and the holding display is performed. The image a12 is displayed in the “hold A” display mode.

  In this example, “change in hold 2” is selected in the production start timing lottery of the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition at the time of acquisition of the start information that is held second. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 171 (e), the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position, and the character image of “爺” and “holding change” are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. A character image of “chance” is displayed and a hold change effect is started.

  When the hold change effect is started, as shown in FIG. 171 (f), an image of “hold A” of a boat-eye panda, which is provided as a display mode of a hold display image, and “pending B” of a watchmaster, A character image “Stop with a button” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. In this example, the hold display image a12 related to the hold change effect is displayed in the display mode of “hold A” from the beginning, so that the hold change effect does not change to “normal hold”. For this reason, since the result of the holding change effect is two choices of “holding A” and “holding B”, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the image of the “holding A” of the ship-eye panda and the number “ “Pending B” is displayed. For this reason, compared with the case where the result of the holding change effect is the three choices (see FIG. 156 (f)), the image of the “holding A” of the panda with the eye on the second decorative symbol display device 209 and the “ The “hold B” image is displayed in a large display size.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the second decorative symbol display device 209, the images of “hold A” and “hold B” move (rotate) from top to bottom as indicated by the downward arrows in the figure. The operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed.

  FIG. 172 (b) schematically shows a chance button 136 on the upper right in the drawing in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 172 (a). As shown in FIG. 172 (b), when the player presses the chance button 136, an image of “pending B” of the head length based on the lottery result of the holding change lottery 1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. .

  When the image of the ban “hold B” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, the result of the hold change effect is reflected in the hold display image on the first decorative symbol display device 208. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 172 (c), the hold display image a12 corresponding to the second hold related to the notice changes from “hold A” to “hold B”.

  After a specific time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (for example, after 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of symbol fluctuation display), “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, as shown in FIG. 172 (d), “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is notified that there is. “Decoration 3—Decoration 3—Decoration 7” is a chance to make a prefetch notice about the special figure 1 variable game reserved second.

  Thus, even if the hold display image is not displayed in the default display mode (“normal hold”) from the beginning, the pachinko machine 100 executes the hold change effect and displays the hold display image display mode. May be changed.

(Example 8)
Next, game effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175. FIG. 173 (a) to FIG. 175 (f) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment in time series.

  In FIG. 173 (a), “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornament symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is informed that it is.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a substantially square variation icon display area 820 is provided at the lower center in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the variation icon display area 820, one variation icon can be displayed, and whether the variation is appropriate or not can be notified with a predetermined reliability (the variation notification) according to the display mode of the variation icon. The variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold display image (hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  In the fluctuation icon display area 820, a fluctuation icon 822 is displayed in the same display manner as “normal hold”. The fluctuation icon 822 is displayed in the same display manner as the always-on-hold image when the special figure 1 variable game is first held.

  Since two special figure 1 variable games are held at the time shown in FIG. 173 (a), the hold display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1. a11 is displayed, a hold display image a12 corresponding to the second special figure 1 variable game is displayed, and it is notified that two special figure 1 variable games are held. The hold display images a11 and a12 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. Further, since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, no hold display image is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (a), it is shown in FIG. 173 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” was stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 173 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2503), and it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2401). S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is not executed (No in step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 notifies the first sub-control unit at the start of the special figure variable game. The process ends.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 173 (b), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a12 is deleted as shown in FIG. 173 (b). In the variation icon display area 820, a hold icon 822 is displayed in the same display mode as “normal hold”.

  During the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the following processing is executed during the execution of the special figure variable game. The main control unit 300 executes special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 for the derived special figure 1 start information. First, the main control unit 300 determines that the current gaming state is not in electric support (No in step S2100), and then determines that the winning is for the special figure 1 starting port 230 (Yes in step S2201). Based on the special figure 1 start information, it is determined that the pre-determination result is a big hit with reference to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. 134 (b) (Yes in step S2203), and the special figure determination shown in FIG. The stop symbol is determined to be, for example, “Special Figure A” with reference to the table (step S2205), and the variable time is determined to be, for example, 45000 ms with reference to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 136 (step S2213). ), A command including information on the prior determination result is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S2115), and the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the prior determination results executes the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the hold change lottery 1 with reference to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 138 (step S2301), selects “A” in the hold change lottery 1, It is determined that the pattern is not a two-decorated symbol display device usage pattern (No in step S2303), and a gasse effect lottery is executed with reference to the gasse effect lottery table shown in FIG. 140 (step S2305). Is selected (No in step S2307), a command is output (step S2311), and the first sub-control unit advance notice process at the time of starting information acquisition ends. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 173 (c), the hold display image a12 in the normal hold display mode is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1.

  After a specific time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (for example, after 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of symbol fluctuation display), “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, as shown in FIG. 173 (d), “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is notified that there is. The “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is a so-called chance in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and it is a precautionary notice that it will be a big hit in the special figure 1 variable game held on the second. Yes.

  In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 173 (e) is started. Prior to the start, the main control unit 300 obtains a pair of special figure 1 random values stored at the earliest position of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a determination of whether or not the special figure variable game starts from now on. At the same time, the stored special figure 1 random number set is deleted, and the special figure 1 holding number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of place (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 7000 ms (out of line). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the common common notice is not won (steps S2401 and S2503), and it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405) (step S2401). (Yes in S2501), it is determined that the ordinary drawing effect is not to be executed (No in Step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the first sub-control at the start of the special figure variable game. The part notice process ends.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 173 (e), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is reduced by 1, as shown in FIG. 173 (e), the holding display image a12 is deleted and the holding display is performed. The image a11 is displayed in the “hold A” display mode. In the variation icon display area 820, a hold icon 822 is displayed in the same display mode as “normal hold”.

  In addition, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable icon 832 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 in addition to the variable icon display area 820. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 832 is the same as the display mode of the fluctuation icon 822. As described above, the variation icon may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. In addition, during execution of a special figure variable game, a variable icon may not be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 (see FIG. 173 (b)).

  After a specific time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 variable game (for example, after 7000 ms has elapsed since the start of symbol fluctuation display), “Special Figure I” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, as shown in FIG. 173 (f), “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is notified that there is. “Decoration 3—Decoration 3—Decoration 7” is a chance to make a prefetch notice about the special figure 1 variable game that is reserved first (first).

  As shown in FIG. 174 (a) after the lapse of a predetermined time after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, as shown in FIG. Is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 174 (a), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the success / failure determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special diagram A”), and the variation time of the special diagram 1 variable game is 45000 ms. The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the normal common notice is won (step S2401), the normal common notice command is output (step S2503), and the non-electrical effect determination process (step S2405) is performed. It is determined that support is in progress (step S2501), it is determined not to execute the ordinary drawing effect (No in step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the special figure variable game. The first sub-control unit notice process at the start is terminated.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208, As shown by the downward arrow, the special figure 1 variable game of the effect that the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started. Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the number of special figure 1 holds is reduced by 1, the hold display image a11 is deleted as shown in FIG. 174 (a).

  In the variation icon display area 820, a variation icon 822 is displayed in the same display manner as “hold A”. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a variation icon 832 in a display manner similar to that of “Pending B” as the head length. Thus, the variation icon 822 and the variation icon 832 are displayed in different display modes. Further, the variation icon 832 is displayed in a larger display size than the variation icon 822.

  The reach effect is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, and as shown in FIG. 174 (b), the decorative symbol “decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the middle symbol is displayed. In the display area 208b, an effect that the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from the top to the bottom is displayed as indicated by a downward-pointing thick arrow in the figure.

  The second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, and the display mode of the variation icon 822 displayed in the variation icon display area 820 is the variation icon displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 209. It is displayed in the same manner as the display mode of 832, that is, in the same display mode as “hold B”. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the image of “画像” and the character image of “chance” and performs a normal common notice. Different images are displayed in the variation icon display area 820 of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  In addition, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the main control unit 300 in FIG. 147 and FIG. The special figure prefetch process shown is executed. In this example, a description of the result of the special figure prefetch process is omitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. In this example, other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301). The description about the result with the 1st sub control part notice process at the time of other starting information acquisition is omitted.

  Since “A” and “B” other than “A” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301), the holding display image a11 is displayed in the “normal holding” display mode as shown in FIG. 174 (b). The

  The super reach effect of reach A is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the reach effect, and as shown in FIG. 174 (c), in the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol display area 208a. 208b, “decoration 7” is displayed, the decorative display is variably displayed in the symbol display area 208b, the change of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Displays a character image representing “cactus” (a character having a cactus and a haniwa motif), and performs the effect of reach A.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208, a character image “Look at the top!” Is displayed, and in the second decorative symbol display device 209, a character image “Leach A” is displayed. It is notified that the effect of reach A is being executed. Further, during execution of the super reach effect, the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 820.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 209 deviates from “decoration 7”, which is a big hit if stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b in the reach effect. The confrontation effect of the decoration symbol with “decoration 6” is started. The confrontation effect of the decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the result of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (e), the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a confrontation effect in which “decoration 6” and “decoration 7” are pressed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the advent of the decorative symbol. Be started. In this example, if “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, it is a big hit. Therefore, the character image “Push 6!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first ornament symbol display device 208. Is displayed.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the confrontation where “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are pressed, a hexagonal star-shaped effect image is displayed on the second ornamental symbol display device 209 as shown in FIG. 174 (f). Is done. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to a second position overlapping with a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 changes, and the left symbol display area 208a of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 change. The upper half of the “decoration 7” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is hidden. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is hidden above the “decoration 7” in the left symbol display area 208a so as to be connected to the lower half of the “decoration 7” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. Display half. As a result, the entire decorative pattern “7” on the left side is displayed so as to be visible to the player across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the second decorative symbol display device 209 moved to the second position, the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, “decoration 7” wins and “decoration 7” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 as shown in FIG. 175 (a). . Furthermore, since “decoration 7” has won and won a big hit, a character image “congratulations” is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  After 45000 ms from the start of the symbol variation display, the reach A effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 175 (b), the middle symbol display area 208b is the result of the confrontation effect of the decorative symbol “ Decoration 7 "is displayed. As a result, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “per reach A”. . In addition, when the decoration symbol variation is stopped, a variation icon 822 is displayed in the variation icon display area 820. The fluctuation icon 822 is displayed in a display mode immediately before being erased (in this example, a display mode similar to “hold B”, see FIG. 174 (b)). The variation icon 822 is displayed in a smaller display size than the variation icon 832 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 at the start of the special figure 1 variation game.

Example 9
Next, game effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 177. FIG. 176 (a) to FIG. 176 (f) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment in time series.

  In FIG. 176 (a), “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornament symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is informed that it is. In the variation icon display area 820, a variation icon 822 is displayed in the same display manner as “normal hold”.

  A fourth symbol display area 840 is provided at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, during the special figure variation game, the variable display in which the display is alternately switched between “●” and “x” of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 840 (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). When the special figure variation game is completed, “●” is stopped when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, and “×” is stopped and displayed when the determination result is out of place. At the point of time shown in FIG. 176 (a), the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong, so “x” is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 840.

  In addition, since three special figure 1 variable games are held at the time shown in FIG. 176 (a), the special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 is reserved. A display image a11 is displayed, a hold display image a12 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game reserved for the second one is displayed, and a hold display image a13 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game reserved for the third piece is displayed. It is displayed and it is notified that three special figure 1 variable games are put on hold. The hold display images a11, a12, and a13 are all in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. Further, since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, no hold display image is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 209 reports the number of reserved special figure variable games. Since the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game at the present time is 2, “2” is displayed in the hold number display area 842 provided in the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is displayed. Is informed.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (b), it is shown in FIG. 176 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” was stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 176 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the determination result is out of order (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure I”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 60000 ms (Reach B is out). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the normal common notice is won (step S2401), the normal common notice command is output (step S2503), and the non-electric support in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405). It is determined that it is in progress (step S2501), it is determined not to execute the ordinary drawing effect (No in step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 starts the special figure variable game. 1st sub control part notice process at the time is finished.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a13 is deleted as shown in FIG. 176 (b). Further, in the number-of-holds display area 842 of the second decorative symbol display device 209, a character image “2” indicating the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game is displayed. In the variation icon display area 820, a hold icon 822 is displayed in the same display mode as “normal hold”. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a variation icon 832 in a display manner similar to that of “Pending B” as the head length.

  The reach effect is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, and as shown in FIG. 176 (c), the decoration symbol “decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. In the display area 208b, an effect that the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from the top to the bottom is displayed as indicated by a downward-pointing thick arrow in the figure.

  The second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, and the display mode of the variation icon 822 displayed in the variation icon display area 820 is the variation icon displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 209. It is displayed in the same manner as the display mode of 832, that is, in the same display mode as “hold B”. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the image of “画像” and the character image of “chance” and performs a normal common notice. Different images are displayed in the variation icon display area 820 of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  FIG. 176 (d) shows a state in which the reach B effect has been developed and the super reach effect has been started. In the super reach effect of this example, an effect in which a high-quality moving image such as a movie is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is executed. As shown in FIG. 176 (d), a movie in which the character “Yoshimune” challenges the swordsman is displayed on the entire surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the movie effect is started, the second decorative symbol display device 209 executes a part of the effect performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 before the movie effect starts. In this example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the hold display images a11 and a12 and the decorative symbol variation display. Further, in this example, even after the movie effect is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 840. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “SP reach development” indicating that it has developed into super reach.

  Also, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may display the effect performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the start of the movie effect, or a certain amount of time (predetermined time) from the start of the movie effect. ) May be displayed after the first decoration symbol display device 208 has elapsed.

  FIG. 176 (e) shows a state where the result of the movie effect is informed. As shown in FIG. 176 (e), on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “Yoshimune” defeated by the swordsman and a character image of “Lose” indicating that Yoshimune was defeated are displayed. On the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “Swordsman” who defeated Yoshimune is displayed. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 209, “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (fluctuated) in the middle symbol. “Decoration 6” is displayed in a larger display size than “Decoration 7”. Thereby, the result of reach production may be made conspicuous.

  After 60000 ms from the start of the symbol variation display, the reach B effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 176 (f), the display of the decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed, “Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “reach B miss”. Further, “x” is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 840.

  When the movie effect is finished, the second decorative symbol display device 209 ends the display of the decorative symbol and the display of the hold display image, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 notifies the current gaming state “normal mode”. "Is displayed. The hold display images a11 and a12 are again displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 of the first decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, when the decoration symbol variation is stopped, a variation icon 822 is displayed in the variation icon display area 820. The fluctuation icon 822 is displayed in a display mode immediately before being erased (in this example, a display mode similar to “hold B”, see FIG. 176 (c)). Further, “x” is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 840.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the movie effect is not performed, the decorative symbol change display and the fourth symbol change display are performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208, and when the movie effect is executed, the decorative symbol change is displayed. The variation display is performed by the second symbol display device 209, and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbol variation display and the fourth symbol variation display both indicate information that suggests whether or not the special symbol variation game is successful.

  Next, with respect to the game effect when the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game related to the movie effect of reach B is a big hit (for example, “Special Figure A”), FIG. 177 (a) to (b) is used. explain. FIG. 177 (a) shows a game effect that continues from FIG. 176 (d).

  FIG. 177 (a) shows a state where the result of the movie effect is informed. As shown in FIG. 177 (a), an image of “Yoshimune” that defeated the swordsman is displayed on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is defeated by Yoshimune. An image of “Swordsman” and a character image of “Win” indicating that Yoshimune has won are displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 209, “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped (fluctuated) in the middle symbol. The “decoration 7” of the middle symbol is displayed in a larger display size than the “decoration 7” that is stopped and displayed on the first ornamental symbol display device 208 after the end of the special figure 1 variable game.

  After 65000 ms from the start of the symbol variation display, the reach B effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 177 (f), the display of the ornamental symbol on the first ornamental symbol display device 208 is resumed. “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “per reach B”. In the fourth symbol display area 840, “●” is stopped and displayed.

(Example of change)
Next, a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 178 (a) to 178 (f) show, in this order, time-series special figure variation games in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the ninth embodiment.

  In FIG. 178 (a), “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornament symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 variable game is lost. It is informed that it is. In the variation icon display area 820, a variation icon 822 is displayed in the same display manner as “normal hold”. Further, “x” is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 840.

  In addition, since three special figure 1 variable games are reserved at the time shown in FIG. 178 (a), the corresponding special figure 1 variable game is reserved in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1. A display image a11 is displayed, a hold display image a12 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game reserved for the second one is displayed, and a hold display image a13 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game reserved for the third piece is displayed. It is displayed and it is notified that three special figure 1 variable games are put on hold. The hold display images a11, a12, and a13 are all in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. Further, since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, no hold display image is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to this modified example, when the movie effect is not executed, the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not notify the reserved number of special figure variable games.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (b), it is shown in FIG. 178 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 8” was stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Thus, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 178 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 1 random number pair stored at the earliest of the special figure 1 random value storage area and executes a success / failure determination relating to the special figure variable game to be started. The stored special figure 1 random value set is erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value group data is processed so that the holding rank is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number is subtracted by one. In addition, when erasing the data of the first special figure 1 random value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously reads the first special figure 1 prefetch in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. The information of the result is erased, and 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. Further, in the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires the random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, for example, the success / failure determination result is a big hit (for example, the stop symbol is “Special Figure A”), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is 65000 ms (per reach B). The main control unit 300 transmits a command including information on the determination result and the special figure change display time to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, in the normal common notice lottery process, the execution of the normal common notice is won (step S2401), the normal common notice command is output (step S2503), and the non-electric support in the ordinary drawing effect determining process (step S2405). It is determined that it is in progress (step S2501), it is determined not to execute the ordinary drawing effect (No in step S2503), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is terminated, and the first sub-control unit 400 starts the special figure variable game. 1st sub control part notice process at the time is finished.

  When the above processing is completed, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and as shown in FIG. 178 (b), the symbol fluctuation display is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received a command including information in which the special figure 1 holding number is decreased by 1, the holding display image a13 is deleted as shown in FIG. 178 (b). In the variation icon display area 820, a hold icon 822 is displayed in the same display mode as “normal hold”. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a variation icon 832 in a display manner similar to that of “Pending B” as the head length.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (c), a reach effect is started after the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game. In the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, the decoration symbol “decoration 7” is displayed. In the display area 208b, an effect that the decorative symbol moves (rotates) from the top to the bottom is displayed as indicated by a downward-pointing thick arrow in the figure.

  The second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position, and the display mode of the variation icon 822 displayed in the variation icon display area 820 is the variation icon displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 209. The display mode is the same as that of 832, that is, the same display mode as “hold B”. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the image of “画像” and the character image of “chance” and performs a normal common notice. Different images are displayed in the variation icon display area 820 of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  FIG. 178 (d) shows a state in which the reach B effect is developed and the super reach effect is started. When the movie effect starts, in the first decorative symbol display device 208, the right middle left symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c become smaller display regions than when the movie effect is not executed, It moves upward and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  In addition, when the movie effect is executed, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is provided with a hold number display area 842 for displaying the current hold number of the special figure 1 variable game. In the number-of-holds display area 842, the number of holds displayed by a plurality of hold-display images on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as a single number and displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a character image “SP reach development” indicating that it has developed into super reach, and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 before the movie effect is started. The character image “normal mode” indicating the current gaming state is deleted. In this way, when the movie effect is executed, the display of relatively less important information (in this example, “normal mode”) may be deleted.

  Further, when the movie effect is executed, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is located at an initial position that does not overlap the first decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 may allow the player to enjoy the movie effect by preventing the second decorative symbol display device 209 from overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208 when the movie effect is executed.

  FIG. 178 (e) shows a state where the result of the movie effect is notified. As shown in FIG. 178 (e), on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “Yoshimune” that has defeated the swordsman is displayed, and on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, it is defeated by Yoshimune. The image of “Swordsman” is displayed. In addition, “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped (fluctuated) in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  Further, at the time of notifying the result of the movie effect (when the result is derived), the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol display device 209. Displays a character image of “win” indicating that “Yoshimune” won in the movie production. At this time, the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209 to the second position and the display of the character image of the second decorative symbol display device 209 “win” may be performed simultaneously, Either may be done first.

  After 65000 ms have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the reach B effect ends, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c move to the center of the display area as shown in FIG. 178 (f). Then, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “per reach B”. In the fourth symbol display area 840, “●” is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 178 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of display means capable of executing at least information display related to a game (for example, a decorative symbol variation display, a special figure variation game hold count),
At least one display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208),
At least one display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209),
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the information display;
The first display means can at least hide the information display when a first condition regarding the information display is satisfied (for example, start of a movie effect),
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the information display in at least a part of the first period,
The first period is a period after the information display displayed on the first display means is hidden.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved. Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the first display unit may be used for display other than information display related to the game.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of executing at least an effect display related to symbol variation (decorative symbol variation display),
The information display is a display that can be displayed at least during the effect display,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least during execution of the effect display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player may be able to pay attention to the effect display on the first display means.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
The information display can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
At least one display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode,
At least one display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the information display in a first display mode,
The second display means is capable of displaying the information display in one of the first display mode and the second display mode.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the second display unit may be able to easily inform the player of information by simplifying the information display. In addition, there may be a case where the effect display performed by the first display means can be made relatively conspicuous.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
It can be displayed on at least the first display means in a plurality of display modes for one information display,
At least one display mode of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode,
At least one display mode of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode,
When the first condition is satisfied, the first display means hides the information display according to the first display mode, and the information display according to the third display mode can be continuously displayed. Is,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there are cases where necessary information can be left on the display on the first display means.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
There is a first information display at least related to the first information,
There is a second information display at least related to the second information,
The first display means can display at least the first information display during the effect display;
The first display means can display at least the second information display during the effect display;
The first display means is configured to hide the first information display when the first condition is satisfied, and the second information display can be continuously displayed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, there may be a case where only information necessary for effect display can be continuously displayed on the first display means.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
When the first condition is satisfied, the effect display is a movie display,
The information display is a non-movie image;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the player may be able to enjoy the beautiful presentation display on the first display means.

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
The effect display is a decorative symbol variation display,
The decorative design variation display includes a first decorative design variation display including at least a first reach effect,
The decorative design variation display includes a second decorative design variation display including at least a second reach effect,
The first reach effect is an effect display by the movie display,
The second reach effect is not an effect display by the movie display,
The first condition can be established at least during the first decorative symbol variation display,
The first condition is not satisfied during the second decorative symbol variation display,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there is a case where the first reach production (production display) using the movie can be more fully enjoyed while adding value to the production of the movie.

The information display is, for example, an on-hold display of a symbol variation game.
The information display displayed in the first display mode in the first display mode is displayed in the first display mode in the second display mode after the first condition is satisfied. .

The information display displayed in the first display mode in the first display mode is displayed in the second display mode in the second display mode after the first condition is satisfied. .
The first display mode is a mode in which one hold display (one hold display image) is performed with respect to one symbol variation display hold.
The second display mode is a mode in which one or a plurality of symbol variation display holds are displayed as one piece of information (for example, the number is displayed as a number, and the display in the hold number display area 842). For this reason, the second display means may be able to secure a display area for displaying a predetermined effect.

The information display is a variable display of decorative symbols.
The information display displayed in the first display mode in the first display mode is displayed in the second display mode in the second display mode after the first condition is satisfied. .
The first display mode is a symbol display in which a decorative symbol is composed of an identification portion and a decorative portion (for details, see Example 10 described later).
The second display mode is a symbol display in which at least the decorative portion is different from the first display mode.
The second display mode includes only the identification portion of the first display mode.

The first display mode is a display mode of decorative symbol variation display.
The third display mode is a display mode of a variation display of the fourth symbol.
When the first display is performed, the fourth symbol is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol.
Although the information notification is continued on the first display means according to the fourth design, the display may be made in a small display so that the effect display is not disturbed, and the effect display may be conspicuous.

  The first condition includes the start of the super reach effect, the start of the prefetch effect, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player, the start of the Daitomo display during the demonstration effect, and the like.

The effect display is a decorative symbol variation display.
The second display means can display the information display when the second condition is satisfied.
The first condition and the second condition may be different.
Further, when the information display is displayed on the second display means when a relatively long time has elapsed since the display of the information display disappeared from the first display means, The second condition is different from the second condition.
The information display can be displayed in the same display mode by the first display means and the second display means.

The fact that the display modes of the two images in the present embodiment are the same includes that the contour shapes of the two images are the same and the sizes are different from each other.
Further, the fact that the display modes of the two images in the present embodiment are different includes that the display colors are different.

  As for the hold display image, either a case where a plurality of hold display images are displayed side by side on the first decorative symbol display device 208 or a case where the plurality of hold display images are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is any case. In addition, if the outline shape of the hold display image is the same, the display mode of the hold display image can be interpreted as the same display mode, but can also be interpreted as a different display mode in consideration of the overall arrangement relationship.

  As an example of performing different presentation displays for the same information, a display with a variation display of a decorative symbol and a variation display of a fourth symbol, a hold display with “normal hold”, and a look-ahead hold display with a different display mode from “normal hold” Display, display of fluctuation icon and hold icon. For example, during the pre-reading notice, normal hold (first display mode) is displayed on the second display unit as non-display on the first display unit, and pre-read hold (third display mode) is displayed on the first display unit. There is a configuration in which continuous display is performed on one display means.

  The first information display is an on-hold display, and the second information display continuously displays a decorative symbol as a decorative symbol. In some cases, it is possible to concentrate on the whereabouts of the change by notifying the hold display, which is information about the future change, while notifying the reach pattern of the change in an easy-to-understand manner.

The case where the information display is not displayed includes a case where the information display is erased.
The timing of the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209 and the start of the effect on the second decorative symbol display device 209 can be changed as appropriate.

  The first condition is not only the start of the movie effect, but also when the image quality of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is changed, for example, when the image quality of the display is high. is there. In this case, the low-quality information display on the first decorative symbol display device 208 may be hidden on the first decorative symbol display device 208.

In addition, the first condition may include the start of the first reach effect.
The first condition is not necessarily determined in a control manner. For example, the timing at which the information display is not displayed can be interpreted as the establishment condition.
In addition, the establishment condition of the first condition may be that a predetermined time elapses from the start of the special figure variable game.

Further, the first condition may be a phenomenon that is visually recognized as if a predetermined effect (for example, a movie effect) has been started. It is not essential to controlly determine whether the second condition is satisfied. For example, the timing at which the information display is not displayed can be interpreted as the satisfaction condition. Good.
The first display means and the second display means can of course perform various known displays (various effects) in addition to the effect display described in the above embodiment.

(Example 10)
First, a game effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 181. FIG. 179 (a) to FIG. 181 (a) show, in this order, the special figure variable game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment in time series.

  In FIG. 179 (a), “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 2” is temporarily stopped (fluctuated) in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c of the first ornamental symbol display device 208, and pseudo-continuous The state immediately before the start of the production is shown. The pseudo-ream is a pseudo-variation that temporarily stops the decorative design corresponding to the disengagement during the special variation display of one time and makes it appear that the decorative design has changed multiple times.

  Further, a substantially square pseudo continuous display area 824 is provided at the lower center in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208. At the time shown in FIG. 179 (a), since the first pseudo fluctuation is before the start, a character image “0” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is displayed in the pseudo continuous display area 824. . During the execution of the pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-variations may be displayed in the ordinary drawing effect display area 800 and the fluctuation icon display area 820 of the above-described embodiment. Further, in the fourth symbol display area 840, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed.

  Since one special figure 1 variable game is held at the time shown in FIG. 179 (a), the special figure 1 variable game held in the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 is reserved. The display image a11 is displayed, and it is notified that one special figure 1 variable game is put on hold. The hold display image a11 is a normal hold display mode shown in FIG. Further, since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, no hold display image is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2. In addition, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display area 842 provided in the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game is informed.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (b), the first pseudo fluctuation starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Is done. In the pseudo continuous display area 824, “1” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is displayed.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first pseudo change, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is temporarily stopped (fluctuated) in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. In the quasi-ream, the effect is executed by displaying one decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c on the other two decorative symbols and another decorative symbol. Is done. In this example, “decoration 8” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle left symbol display areas 208a and 208b, and temporary stop display (fluctuation fluctuation) of the off-decoration symbol can be performed. Is called.

  FIG. 179 (d) shows a state in which the second pseudo fluctuation is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8”. In the pseudo continuous display area 824, “2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is displayed.

  FIG. 179 (e) shows “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation) in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the second pseudo fluctuation. It shows the state being done.

  FIG. 179 (f) shows a state in which the third pseudo variation is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8”. In the pseudo continuous display area 824, “3” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is displayed.

  In this example, the step-up notice is started at the third pseudo fluctuation. In step 1 of the step-up notice, a decorative symbol 850 having an identification portion 850a and a decorative portion 850b is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In this example, the identification portion 850a includes an image representing a number, and the decoration portion 850b includes a character image. As shown in FIG. 179 (f), the effect of step 1 of the step-up notice has an identification portion 850 a having an image representing the number “1” and a decoration portion 850 b having a character image of the chief choir. The decorative symbol 850 is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), an identification portion 850a having an image representing the number “2” in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a decorative portion 850b having a character image of a boat eye. The decorative symbol 850 having the following is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the middle symbol display area 208b is provided with an identification portion 850a having an image representing the number “3”, and a character image of a number length. A decorative pattern 850 having a decorative portion 850b is displayed.

  FIG. 180 (c) shows a state in which step 1 of the step-up notice is completed after step 1 of the step-up notice has been completed, the reach effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and step 2 of the step-up notice is started. As shown in FIG. 180 (c), the decoration symbol “decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the decoration symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the figure. An effect of moving (rotating) downward from is displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays the image of “画像” and the character image of “chance” and performs a normal common notice.

  In addition, one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the main control unit 300 executes special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 for the derived special figure 1 starting information. In this example, a description of the result of the special figure prefetch process is omitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the first sub-control unit notice process at the time of starting information acquisition shown in FIG. In this example, other than “A” and “B” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301). The description about the result with the 1st sub control part notice process at the time of other starting information acquisition is omitted.

  Since “A” and “B” other than “A” are selected in the lottery 1 for holding change (step S2301), the holding display image a12 is displayed in the display mode of “normally holding” as shown in FIG. 180 (c). The

  FIG. 180 (d) shows a state immediately before the reach effect is developed into a super reach effect. In the second decorative symbol display device 209, a character image “SP reach development” is displayed, and it is informed that it will develop into a super reach production.

  FIG. 180 (e) shows a state where a movie effect as a super reach effect is started in step 3 of the step-up notice. When the movie effect is started, the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position, and the information displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Is displayed. For example, in the second decorative symbol display device 209, “pseudo triple” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations and “decoration 7” reach indicating that “decoration 7” is reached in the decorative symbol fluctuation display. Is displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays “step up 3” indicating that the step up notice has been developed up to step 3.

  As described above, at the start of the movie effect, some information displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is erased on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the partial information is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device. 209 is displayed.

  FIG. 180 (f) shows a state in which the result of the movie effect is notified. As shown in FIG. 180 (f), an image of “Yoshimune” that defeated the swordsman is displayed on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is defeated by Yoshimune. The image of “Swordsman” is displayed. Also, before the movie effect is finished, the decorative display of the decorative pattern is resumed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the right middle left decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation). In the second decorative symbol display device 209, a display indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations, a display indicating that “decoration 7” is reached in the decorative symbol variation display, and a step-up notice have been developed up to step 3. Is deleted, and a character image of “win” indicating that Yoshimune has won is displayed.

  As described above, when the first decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the display of information that has been displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 before the start of the movie effect and has been erased after the movie effect starts, the first decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the display. There is. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 209 erases the display of information displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 in place of the first decorative symbol display device 208 after the start of the movie effect at the end of the movie effect. May be.

  After 65000 ms have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the reach B effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 181 (a), the display of the decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed. “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “per reach B”. In the fourth symbol display area 840, “●” is stopped and displayed.

  FIGS. 181 (b) to (f) show a modification example of the game effect continued from FIG. 180 (b) of the present embodiment. 181 (b) to 181 (f) show the game effects in this modified example in this order in chronological order.

  FIG. 181 (c) shows a state in which step 1 of step-up notice is completed, reach effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and step 2 of step-up notice is started. In step 2 of this example, the reach effect is executed using the decorative pattern 850 of the mode displayed in step 1, as shown in FIG. 181 (c), the decorative symbol 850 is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Is displayed. The decorative design 850 includes an identification portion 850a including an image representing the number “7” and a decoration portion 850b including a character image of a boxer girl. Thereby, it is notified that the decoration 7 is reached by the variable display of the decoration symbol.

  FIG. 181 (c) shows a state immediately before the reach effect is developed into a super reach effect. In the second decorative symbol display device 209, a character image “SP reach development” is displayed, and it is informed that it will develop into a super reach production.

  FIG. 181 (d) shows a state where a movie effect as a super reach effect is started in step 3 of the step-up notice. In this modified example, when the movie effect is started, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 with a relatively small display size compared to before the movie effect starts. Further, the first symbol display device 208 deletes the fourth symbol variation display, and the second decoration symbol display device 209 displays the fourth symbol variation display 844.

  Further, in this modified example, when the movie effect is started, only the display of the same content as the identification portion 850a in the decorative symbol 850 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 before the movie effect is started is the second decoration. It is displayed on the symbol display device 209. Therefore, “decoration 7” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Further, the symbol variation display on the first decorative symbol display device 208 after the start of the movie effect is performed only by displaying the same content as the identification portion 850a of the decorative symbol 850.

  FIG. 181 (e) shows a state where the result of the movie effect is informed. As shown in FIG. 181 (e), on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “Yoshimune” that has defeated the swordsman is displayed, and on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208, it is defeated by Yoshimune. The image of “Swordsman” is displayed. Also, before the movie effect is finished, the decorative display of the decorative pattern is resumed on the first decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the right middle left decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation). In the second decorative symbol display device 209, a display indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations, a display indicating that “decoration 7” is reached in the decorative symbol variation display, and a step-up notice have been developed up to step 3. Is deleted, and a character image of “win” indicating that Yoshimune has won is displayed.

  After 65000 ms have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the reach of the reach B is finished, and as shown in FIG. 181 (a), an identification portion 850a having an image representing the number “7” and a boxer girl The decorative symbol 850 having the decorative part 850b having the character image of the character is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variable game is “per reach B”. . In the fourth symbol display area 840, “●” is stopped and displayed.

  Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the above embodiment, the first decorative symbol display device 208 is described as being larger than the second decorative symbol display device 209, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may have the same size.

  The same type of game information (first type of display) displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 or the second decorative symbol display device 209 includes the following. FIG. 182 (b) shows predetermined game information, and shows an image 860 having a character image 860a having a longest length and a character image 860b of “chance”. FIG. 182 (c) shows predetermined game information, and shows an image 870 having a character image 870a having a bancho and a character image 870b of “hot”.

  The portion showing the same game information (first type display) in the image 860 and the image 870 may be the number-length character image 860a and the number-length character image 870a, or “chance” May be a character image 860b and a character image 870b of “Intense heat”, a character image 860a of a bancho and a character image 860 of “chance”, a character image 870a of a buncho and a character “hot” The image 870b may be the entire image 860 and the entire image 870.

  In the above embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 209 is overlapped with a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208 when viewed from the player when the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves to the second position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, FIG. 182 (d) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 209 is located at the initial position, and FIG. 182 (e) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 209 is in the second position. The position is shown. Thus, in the second position, it is only necessary that the second decorative symbol display device 209 is closer to the first decorative symbol display device 208 than the initial position. If one of the first decorative symbol display device 208 or the second decorative symbol display device 209 moves, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may change.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 182 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A first display means (for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display relating to a game;
A second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display relating to the game;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means having a display area smaller than that of the first display means,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a first type of display among the plurality of types of display,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the first type of the plurality of types of display,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the first type of display in a first size,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the first type of display in a second size,
The second size is greater than the first size;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved. In some cases, the player can be focused on the second display means having a relatively small display area by performing large display on the second display means.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least the first type of display in a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the first type display can be displayed by the first and second display means in the same relationship as the size relationship of the display means. Sometimes it can be emphasized.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of executing at least a first game effect relating to a game,
The second display means is capable of executing at least a second game effect relating to a game,
The second game effect is a game effect related to at least the first game effect,
The display of the first type is a display related at least to the first game effect,
The second display means is capable of at least executing the first type of display in the second size when performing the second game effect.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, when performing the second game effect related to the first game effect performed by the first display means that is the large display means that the player usually pays attention to, The second display means displays the first type with a second size that is larger than the first size, so that the first game effect is expected while keeping the second game effect focused. There are cases where it is possible.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first type of display is a notice display;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the player's expectation may be increased by conspicuous notice.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice is provided.
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of start hold display (for example, a hold display image, a hold icon),
The first type display is at least one type of start hold display among the plurality of types of start hold display,
At least one start hold display among the plurality of types of start hold displays is a first start hold display,
At least one start hold display among the plurality of types of start hold displays is a second start hold display,
The prefetch notice means is capable of at least executing the prefetch notice by causing the first display means to perform the second start hold display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, the pre-reading notice functions at least as a notice that expects a big hit in the future symbol variation display, and therefore it is possible to focus on the second game effect currently being performed. There are cases where it is possible.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a start hold display,
The first display means is capable of at least executing symbol variation display;
The first display means is capable of displaying at least one notice display of a plurality of kinds of notice displays,
At least one of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display (for example, a change icon 822),
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the first notice display after starting the symbol variation display,
The first notice display is a notice display including at least a display of the same mode as the start hold display,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, it may be possible to make a notice at the start of the change conspicuous.

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the second notice display after starting the symbol variation display,
The second notice display is a notice display including at least a display of a mode different from the start hold display,
The second notice display is a notice display at least different from the first notice display,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the first notice display in a first display area,
The first display means is capable of displaying at least the second notice display in a second display area.
It is characterized by that.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the first display means and the second display means are image display means (liquid crystal display device).

  In the pachinko machine 100, the first display means can display the first type of display at least in a fourth size, and the fourth size is the second size. The size is larger than the size of.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the first display means can execute at least symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display).

  In the pachinko machine 100, the first display means is capable of displaying at least the first type of display in a first period, and the second display means is the first type of display. Can be displayed at least in the second period, and the first period and the second period have at least a period that does not overlap.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the second display means can derive at least the first type of display in connection with execution of the second game effect.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the second display means can display at least the first type of display over one or more symbol variation displays.

  In the pachinko machine 100, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second display means can execute the first type of display in the second size.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the first display means can display at least a second type of display (for example, a display change of the fourth symbol), and the second display means The second type display can be displayed at least, and the first display means can display the second type display only in a third size, and the second display The means can display the second type of display only in the third size. According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to reliably notify the change display of the fourth symbol without conspicuous.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the first display means is capable of displaying the first type of display in at least a first animation display, and the second display means is the first display means. The type of display can be displayed at least in the second animation display, and the first animation display and the second animation display are at least different in display mode. According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there may be a case where animation display corresponding to the relationship between the display area of the display means and the display size may be performed.

  Of the two displays, the same type of information display includes at least a case where the outline shape of both displays is the same, a hold display image or a decorative design displayed with the same purpose and function.

  The first display means performs decorative symbol variation display, jackpot game display, etc., but the second display means can also perform various displays. For example, the second display means can perform at least a part of the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device of the conventional game table as well as the demonstration display, the display regarding the Daitomo, and the information display such as the game history.

  In addition, the display contents of the first display unit and the second display unit are not necessarily linked at all times. One display means may produce effects over a plurality of symbol variations.

  At least a part of the game state is normal, there is no relevance between the effect performed by the first display means and the effect performed by the second display means. There may be a case where an effect relating to the display performed at least by the first display means is not performed by the second display means.

  All the images displayed in the second size on the second display means are not displayed, and even if they are displayed outside the display area, they are the same as the images displayed on the first display means. If it can be recognized that it is a type, it can be determined as a size. That is, the images displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit may be visually different.

  The second size larger than the first size may have a plurality of sizes, and the size may change depending on the reliability or the like.

  The relationship between the display size of the predetermined display on the first display means and the display size of the predetermined display on the second display means includes the relationship between the apparent size and the size of the display area of each display means. There is a relationship with. That is, the size of the first type of display on the first display unit and the size of the first type of display on the second display unit may be directly compared, The ratio of the first type display to the display area of the first display means may be compared with the ratio of the first type display to the display area of the second display means in the second display means. . For example, when the size of the first type display on the first display unit and the size of the first type display on the second display unit are directly compared, the first type display on the first display unit Even when the display is larger than the first type of display on the second display means, the first display means on the first display means is compared when the sizes of the display areas of the respective display means are compared. The ratio of the type display to the display area of the first display means is 20%, for example, and the ratio of the first type display on the second display means to the display area of the second display means is 30%, for example. In some cases, the first type of display on the second display means is larger than the predetermined display on the first display means.

  Further, the size of the first type of display may be compared based on the size of the display area visible to the player. For example, the first display means and the second display means are displayed on the first display means when their display areas are temporarily narrowed by a shield (such as an effect movable body). An image larger than this kind of image may be displayed on the second display means.

  The display period of the display in which the first type display is displayed in the first size and the display period of the display in the second size may not be completely overlapped. That is, when the first type of display is performed only on one of the first display unit or the second display unit and then the first type of display is performed on the other side, the first type performed first is performed. The type of display may be erased.

  The first type of display is not limited to the hold icon, the change icon, and the change display of the decorative design, but may be another display. For example, the first type of display may be a general-purpose decorative symbol variation game, a step-up notice, a two-dimensional code display in an original mode, a user mode, or the like.

  The second display means may perform not only the hold change effect at the time of the pre-reading notice but also the hold change effect related to the hold increase that occurred accidentally. For example, the configuration may be such that the pre-reading notice executed by the pachinko machine equipped with the game characteristics of the acceleration device and the on-hold change effect by the second display means contradict each other in time series. For example, if the second display means performs the hold change effect, and there is no hold display related to the prefetch notice at the time when the result is derived, the subsequent hold display is related to the prefetch notice, The on-hold change effect may be rewritten.

  The display on the second display means may be not only during the symbol variation display but also during the big hit game. The effect on the second display means can also be applied to a probable change notification effect during a big hit game, a Daitomo setting effect during a demonstration, and an effect that can be executed periodically using an RTC (real time clock).

  The pachinko machine 100 may include three or more display means. In this case, each of the two predetermined display means only needs to have the configuration of the first display means and the second display means.

  When a plurality of the same type of display is performed on each of the first display unit, the second display unit, or both display units, the present invention is applied by comparing only the maximum display and the minimum display. can do.

  The display on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the display on the second decorative symbol display device 209 in each embodiment can be interchanged with each other. For example, the information displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 in each embodiment is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the information displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 209. It may be displayed on the device 208.

  Further, when the information displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, the information of the information is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208 to the second decorative symbol display device 209. An animation may be displayed such that the display moves. At this time, an effect may be displayed. The animation or the effect may be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be controlled by separate control means. For example, the first decorative symbol display device 208 may be controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

  Note that the items described in the eighth embodiment, in particular, the items described in Examples 1 to 10 of the eighth embodiment can be combined.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth to seventh embodiments described above will be described with reference to the drawings again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine comprising at least a plurality of display means (for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208 and a second decorative symbol display device 209),
The plurality of display means are capable of at least producing effects.
It is characterized by that.
(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
The plurality of display means are capable of at least performing effects related to each other (for example, the first image and the second image are images of the same character).
It is characterized by that.
(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The position of at least one display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 209) of the plurality of display means is changeable.
It is characterized by that.
(4) In the pachinko machine 100,
At least two of the plurality of display means (for example, the first decorative design display device 208 and the second decorative design display device 209) have different display areas.
It is characterized by that.
(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
At least one display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208),
At least one display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means (for example, a second decorative symbol display device 209).
It is characterized by that.
(6) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is capable of executing at least a first display;
The second display means is capable of executing at least a second display.
It is characterized by that.
(7) In the pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, pachinko machine 100).
It is characterized by that.

[Ninth embodiment]
Next, image control of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 183 to 187 are used only in the description of the ninth embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment. In the explanation of Fig. 1, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in Figs.

<ROM and VRAM of the first sub-control unit 400>
First, the internal configuration of the ROM 406 and the VRAM 436 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 183 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the ROM 406 and the VRAM 436 before image data is expanded in the VRAM 436.

  As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 reads out the ROM 406 for storing the control program and the image data, the VRAM 436 for temporarily storing the image data, and the image data stored in the ROM 406. And a VDP 434 that generates a display image using the storage area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  In addition to the control program, the ROM 406 stores in advance image data such as compressed movie data (compressed moving image data) and texture data including still images.

  The VRAM 436 includes a movie data expansion area for temporarily storing (developing) movie data, a texture data expansion area for temporarily storing (developing) texture data, and a first decorative symbol display device. 208 and / or a frame buffer 1 (FB1) and a frame buffer 2 (FB2) for temporarily storing (developing) image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 are provided. Note that the frame buffer 1 (FB1) and the frame buffer 2 (FB2) are configured so that one of a drawing area and a display area can be specified, and image data is developed in the frame buffer specified in the drawing area. By changing the designation from the drawing area to the display area, the image corresponding to the image data stored in the frame buffer designated in the display area is displayed in the first decorative design display device 208 and / or the second. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 209. The VRAM 436 may be configured to be included in the VDP 434, and the ROM 406 may be configured to be included in the VDP 434.

<Image control processing / image data transfer processing / initial transfer processing>
FIG. 184 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the ROM 406 and the VRAM 436 after image data is expanded in the VRAM 436. The first sub-control unit 400 performs initial transfer processing of movie data and texture data in step S701 after the power is turned on or reset.

  Specifically, in the initial transfer process of movie data, the development data provided for each type of control information (for example, for each resolution) in the movie data development area in accordance with the control information of the movie data stored in the ROM 406. Set the area. In the texture data initial transfer process, all texture data stored in the ROM 406 is transferred (developed) to the texture data development area.

<Image control processing / image data transfer processing / steady transfer processing>
The first sub-control unit 400 performs regular transfer processing of movie data in step S701 after the initial transfer processing. Specifically, in the regular transfer process of movie data, the movie data corresponding to the movie to be played is decompressed into a plurality of image data out of the movie data stored in the ROM 406, and then the decompressed image data is stored in one frame. Each time it is transferred (expanded) to the movie data expansion area. If the resolution of the decompressed image data and the resolution of the movie data development area are different, the image data is transferred (expanded) after performing processing such as enlargement / reduction.

<Image control processing / image drawing processing>
Next, an image drawing process performed by the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the flow of image drawing processing when playing back a movie.

<Image control processing / Image drawing processing / Movie>
When playing back a movie, the first sub-control unit 400 decompresses the movie data into a plurality of image data, and then transfers the decompressed image data to the movie data development area frame by frame.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the frame data in the frame buffer 1 (FB1) or the frame buffer 2 (FB2) of the VRAM 436 based on the movie data transferred to the movie data development area (for example, for resolution 1280 × 1024). In order to form an image, the VDP 434 is instructed on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM 436 coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.).

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 designates the frame buffer in which the display image is formed and issues a drawing instruction. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the drawing instruction. As a result, an image corresponding to the movie data is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the second decorative symbol display device 209.

  Next, a configuration for displaying an image on a plurality of display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208 and / or second decorative symbol display device 209) based on a signal from VDP 434 will be described with reference to FIG. The first decorative symbol display device 208 is configured to display an image based on a signal from the VDP 434. The distribution circuit 438 is configured to output a predetermined signal to the second decorative symbol display device 209 based on the signal from the VDP 434. The second decorative symbol display device 209 is configured to display an image based on a signal from the distribution circuit 438.

  Next, the flow of signals in the VDP 434, the distribution circuit 438, the first decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol display device 209 will be described. The first decorative symbol display device 208 is based on an RGB signal, a data enable signal (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “RGBDE signal”), and a CLK signal (for example, a dot clock signal) that are signals output from the VDP 434. The image can be displayed. Note that the first decorative symbol display device 208 in the present embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal panel capable of displaying an image of 1280 pixels in width and 800 pixels in length, but may be a display panel having another configuration. The distribution circuit 438 outputs the RGB signal, the RGBDE signal, and the CLK signal to the second signal based on the RGB signal, the CLK signal, the HSYNC signal (horizontal synchronization signal), and the VSYNC signal (vertical synchronization signal) that are signals output from the VDP 434. The decorative symbol display device 209 can be output. As shown in FIG. 186, the RGB signal and the CLK signal output from the VDP 434 are input to the first decorative symbol display device 208, branched in the middle of the transmission path, and input to the distribution circuit 438. It is configured as follows. The second decorative symbol display device 209 outputs an image based on the RGB signal (image signal corresponding to the image data developed on the frame buffer), the RGBDE signal, and the CLK signal, which are signals output from the distribution circuit 438. It is configured to be displayable. Note that the second decorative symbol display device 209 in the present embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal panel capable of displaying an image of 320 pixels in width and 240 pixels in height, but may be a display panel having another configuration.

  Next, based on the image data output from the VDP 434, the first image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second image is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 (a) shows the frame buffers (FB1, FB2). The size of the frame buffer is 1280 pixels horizontally and 1024 pixels vertically. The size of the first region of the frame buffer is 1280 pixels wide and 800 pixels vertically, and the size of the second region of the frame buffer is 300 pixels wide and 224 pixels vertically. FIG. 187 (b) shows the flow of processing. First, the VDP 434 expands the first image data to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 in the first area. Next, the VDP 434 expands the second image data to be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 in the second area. Next, the VDP 434 outputs image data (RGB signals) corresponding to the frame data expanded in the frame buffer. At that time, the VDP 434 outputs an RGBDE signal based on the size of the first image data (WXGA size) together with the output of the image data. Here, the RGBDE signal is configured to be on while outputting the first image data of the image data. As a result, the first decorative symbol display device 208 displays the first image based on the first image data. Note that the RGBDE signal is not always on, and the first image data of the image data is being output, such as being on while the HSYNC signal is off and outputting WXGA line data. As long as it is turned on at such a timing that can be identified. On the other hand, the distribution circuit 438 adjusts the timing and scales the image data (RGB signal) based on the image data (RGB signal) output from the VDP 434, the HSYNC signal, and the VSYNC signal, and outputs the image data (RGB signal). Specifically, the distribution circuit 438 counts the number of times the HSYNC signal is turned on after the VSYNC signal is turned from on to off, and converts the RGB signal output when the count number is between 800 to 1024 to the QVGA size. Adjust and output. As a result, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a second image based on the second image data. As described above, the VDP 434 outputs various signals on the basis of the image data of the SXGA size (1280 × 1024), assuming the WXGA panel (1280 × 800), so that the first image becomes the first decorative symbol display device. 208, the distribution circuit 438 extracts the signal incorporated in the blanking of the WXGA signal, adjusts it to QVGA (320 × 240), and outputs it, so that the second image is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209. Is displayed. The distribution circuit 438 may be configured by an IC of one package, and the size adjustment and timing adjustment such as QVGA may be executed by setting a predetermined value in a predetermined register in the IC. Good. For example, a counter for storing the number of times the HSYNC signal is turned on may be constituted by a predetermined register. Further, the configuration and processing for displaying images on a plurality of display devices are not limited to this example. For example, it may be configured to display on the first decorative symbol display device 208 via the distribution circuit 438. Further, a plurality of distribution circuits 438 may be used. Further, the signal input to the distribution circuit 438 and the signal output from the distribution circuit 438 are not limited to this example. Further, the VDP 434 may have two drawing circuits, and one of the two channels may be assigned to the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the other channel may be assigned to the second decorative symbol display device 209. Further, by using the distribution circuit 438 for one of the two channels, an image may be displayed on three or more decorative symbol display devices.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
For example, in the above embodiment, one second decorative symbol display device 209 is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of second decorative symbol display devices 209 may be provided.
A plurality of second decorative symbol display devices 209 having different sizes may be mounted.
Further, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be configured to be larger than the first decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, the display area is wide and the unit is heavy).
Moreover, the structure provided with the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 209 which moves and the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 209 which does not move may be sufficient.
Moreover, the order of the arrangement of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may change. For example, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may move behind the first decorative symbol display device 208.
In addition, a plurality of second decorative symbol display devices 209 may be provided without the first decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, when the power is turned on, a different display may be performed for each of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209, or the same display may be performed.
When the power is turned on, at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 is notified of power-on (at least the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device). 209 On the other hand, the power-on notification is not performed.
When the power is turned on, the display may be performed first on one display device, or the display may be performed simultaneously on both display devices. Even if one of the display devices can be displayed first, the display may be waited until the other display device can display.

Further, by performing the same display on a plurality of display devices other than the display device that is desired to be noticed by three or more display devices, a display device that performs independent display may be noticeable.
Moreover, you may alert | report different information using the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209 in one game state.
In addition, information displayed on at least one display device in a plurality of gaming states may be common.
Further, for example, the acquired number of balls may be displayed on a display device close to the attacker 234. It may not be displayed on a display device located far from the attacker 234.

  Further, the hold information in FIG. 1 may be displayed on a display device located on the left side, and the hold information in FIG. 2 may be displayed on a display device located on the right side. Alternatively, the hold information in FIG. 1 may be displayed on the upper display device, and the hold information in FIG. 2 may be displayed on the lower display device. That is, the configuration may be such that related information is displayed at a close position in accordance with the area (left-handed, right-handed) where the game ball is to be launched.

In addition, when performing display across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209, the predetermined position may be set as a reference, and the display may be shifted at positions away from the reference position. Or you may make it shift | deviate, so that it leaves | separates. Further, one end of the image may be substantially matched and the other end may not be matched.
Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be arranged horizontally or may not be arranged horizontally. For example, it may be configured such that one display device is inclined at an angle toward the player at the initial position.
In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may hide the symbol which is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 and is fluctuating. When a plurality of second decorative symbol display devices 209 are provided, at least one of the second decorative symbol display devices 209 may be hidden, or both of the second decorative symbol display devices 209 may be hidden. Good.
Moreover, you may comprise so that a fluctuation | variation display or a fixed display may be performed only with one decoration symbol display apparatus.

In addition, a first display corresponding to the operation of the first operation means is provided on the first display means (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208) provided with a plurality of operation means. The corresponding second display may be performed by the second display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 209). The display may be performed in one state and is not limited to the above contents in the other state. The operation effective period may overlap. For example, the effective period of the first operation unit and the second operation unit may overlap in the same period.
Further, while the first display corresponding to the operation of the first operation means is performed by the first display means, the second display corresponding to the second operation means may be performed by the first display means. Then, the second display corresponding to the second operation means may be performed by both the display means of the first display means and the second display means.
Moreover, the structure by which the 1st decoration design display apparatus 208 and the 2nd decoration design display apparatus 209 are arrange | positioned by point symmetry may be sufficient. The point may be arranged so as to be on a display area of another display device. In addition, the appearance of the display areas of a plurality of display devices arranged symmetrically may be different from each other.

In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may hide the symbol or the hold being confirmed. However, the second decorative symbol display device 209 does not hide the fourth symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208.
Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the display device whose display surface is closest to the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at least when it is stopped and displayed regardless of whether the second decorative symbol display device 209 is movable. Of course, the fourth decorative symbol display device 209 may display the fourth symbol in an area where it cannot move.

In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 209 that has moved may conceal the luminescent combination, even though the luminescent combination is emitting light. During the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 209, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be hidden by the light emission of the light emitting accessory. The player's eyes may be deflected from the game board by light emission.
Moreover, the structure provided only in at least one of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209 may be sufficient as a light-emitting accessory. The second decorative symbol display device 209 that moves may be provided only in the first decorative symbol display device 208.

In addition, the movable second decorative symbol display device 209 is provided at a position where at least a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden at the initial position, and is movable to a position where it is not hidden when moved. Also good. Alternatively, it may be moved to a position to be largely hidden by movement.
In addition, certain notifications (notifications related to errors / games / notifications prompting the player to operate) are not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209 (small / moving / far from the center of the game table), and the first decorations are not displayed. It may be configured to display only on the symbol display device 208.

Moreover, the structure which the some 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 209 contacts in front of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208 may be sufficient. In addition, a so-called united configuration may be employed such that a plurality of second decorative symbol display devices 209 can form a single pattern or the like in a contacted state (in the case of combining, a configuration that does not contact) Also good).
Further, the plurality of combined second decorative symbol display devices 209 may be larger than the first decorative symbol display device 208 that is not combined. Further, the plurality of combined second decorative symbol display devices 209 may cover the entire display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208 that is not combined.

The first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 include those in which light sources such as LEDs are arranged in a matrix shape or a circular shape.
Further, when the first decorative symbol display device 208 is darkened, the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be darkened. A black image may be displayed with nothing displayed.

The game ball may pass before the second decorative symbol display device 209 before the movement (initial position), and the game ball may not pass before the second decorative symbol display device 209 after the movement.
Further, the first display unit may be able to contact the second display unit. Further, the first display means may be able to contact the third display means. The second display means may be in contact with the third display means or may not be in contact.

Regardless of whether the second decorative symbol display device 209 is movable or not, there may be an image that is continuously displayed at a specific position on a specific display device. The image may be a hold display, a fourth pattern, a tutorial, or other display.
In addition, when the number of holdings is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 209, the number of holdings increases or decreases while the second decorative symbol display device 209 is moving to the first position. Although it occurs, if it has moved to the second position, it does not decrease but only increases. The first position may be an initial position, and the second position may be a moving position.

The second decorative symbol display device 209 has a border. When displaying across a plurality of display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 209 displays a border when displaying an image straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. When displaying without consideration, or when displaying an image straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209, display may be performed in consideration of the border.
In addition, when performing display across a plurality of images, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may have different scales. For example, the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the display of the second decorative symbol display device 209.

The first image is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209, and the second image is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209. May be displayed. The second image is, for example, a decorative design.
In some cases, the second decorative symbol display device 209 hides the display performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208. The hidden display may be an error or an operation suggestion.

Even if the relative positions of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are the same, the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 are straddled at the first timing. The display may be performed, and at the second timing, the display may not be performed across the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209.
In addition, the first display device and the second display device have three or more display devices, and the third display device is disposed between the first display device and the second display device. The structure which performs a related display may be sufficient. However, it is preferable that the related display is not performed in the third display device during the display.

The first positional relationship (initial position) may be a state in which the plurality of second decorative symbol display devices 209 are farthest apart.
Further, the second positional relationship may be a state in which the plurality of second decorative symbol display devices 209 are closest (for example, a contact state).
Further, the third positional relationship may be approximately between the first positional relationship and the second positional relationship.
Further, the third position may be taken according to the gaming state (for example, the probability variation state).
Further, the gaming state that is more advantageous than the unfavorable gaming state may be more likely to be in the second positional relationship in terms of frequency and time.
In addition, there are cases in which display is performed in conjunction with the case where independent display is performed. Independence may be a sprite, and interlocking may be a movie. Further, some displays (for example, effect images) may not be interlocked while being interlocked.

Further, during power recovery, only one of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 may be displayed and the other may not be displayed.
Further, in order to make one display of the first decorative symbol display device 208 and the second decorative symbol display device 209 conspicuous, the other may be hidden.
Further, the number of holds may be displayed on a different display device for each special figure.
The decoration hold may be displayed on one display device.
Moreover, although the display regarding hold is performed by each, the time which the display regarding hold is performed for one of the 1st decorative design display apparatus 208 and the 2nd decorative display apparatus 209 may be made shorter than the other. In addition, for example, a display device in which the display related to the hold is performed may be larger than a display device that displays the display related to the hold.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine. The enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The game machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 188, “a plurality of types of symbols are provided and a plurality of reels 1002 are driven to rotate, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 189 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, execute a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

In recent years, there has been a demand for a game machine that can produce more various effects.
The objective of this invention is providing the game stand which can improve the interest of a game.
According to the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.
The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
A first display means capable of executing at least display;
A second display means capable of executing at least display;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is capable of at least moving from the first position to the second position (hereinafter referred to as first movement),
The second display means is capable of at least moving from the first position to the third position (hereinafter referred to as second movement),
The first movement is performed at least along a first path;
The second movement is performed at least along a second path;
The first route is a route different from the second route,
At least a part of the second display means in the second position hides at least a part of the display by the first display means;
At least a part of the second display means in the third position is for hiding at least a part of the display by the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The second position and the third position are the same position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1 or 2,
A third display means capable of executing at least display;
The second display means is capable of at least moving from the first position to the fourth position (hereinafter referred to as third movement),
The third movement is through a third path;
At least a part of the second display means in the fourth position is to hide at least a part of the display by the third display means;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
In the gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The size of the first display means is the first size,
The size of the second display means is the second size,
The first size is different from the second size.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
In the gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The second display means that has performed the first movement moves from the second position to the first position when the first condition is satisfied, and performs the second movement. The second display means moves from the third position to the first position when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
A game machine having at least a plurality of display means,
The plurality of display means are capable of at least producing effects.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 7)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 6,
The plurality of display means are capable of at least performing effects related to each other.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 6 or 7,
The position of at least one of the plurality of display means is changeable.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 6 to 8,
At least two display means of the plurality of display means have different display areas.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 6 to 9,
At least one display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
At least one display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 11)
The gaming machine according to appendix 10, wherein
The first display means is capable of executing at least a first display;
The second display means is capable of executing at least a second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 6 to 11,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decoration symbol display device 209 Display board 224 Production movable body 226 General winning opening 228 General drawing starting opening 230 Special drawing 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 234 Variable winning opening 234a Door member

The above purpose is
A gaming table having a Viewing means capable of displaying a plurality of display,
The Display means are means including a plurality of components,
One of the plurality of components is a touch panel,
The display means is means including a plurality of display areas,
One of the plurality of display areas is a touch display area,
One of the plurality of displays is a touch display,
The touch display is a display that can be displayed in the touch display area,
The touch display, the operation of the touch panel (hereinafter, referred to as "touch operation".) Is valid region (hereinafter, referred to as. "Touch region") is a display that relate to,
The touch area is an area including an area at least partially overlapping the touch display area (hereinafter referred to as “overlapping area”).
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved by using the resistive touch-sensitive touch panel or the capacitive touch panel to produce the game using the touch feeling of the player. An infrared touch panel or the like may be used.
(4-12)
A gaming machine provided with display means (for example, a touch panel display device 252) capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
The display means is means including a plurality of components,
One of the plurality of components is a touch panel (eg, touch panel 252a),
The display means is means including a plurality of display areas,
One of the plurality of display areas is a touch display area,
One of the plurality of displays is a touch display,
The touch display is a display that can be displayed in the touch display area,
The touch display is a display related to an area (hereinafter referred to as “touch area”) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is effective.
The touch area is an area including an area (hereinafter, referred to as “overlapping area”) at least partially overlapping the touch display area (see, for example, FIG. 30F).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-13)
The game stand according to (4-12) above,
The touch area is an area including an area that does not overlap at least partly with the touch display area (hereinafter referred to as “non-overlapping area”) (for example, see FIG. 30F).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-14)
The gaming machine according to (4-13) above,
The non-overlapping area is an area narrower than the overlapping area (see, for example, FIG. 30 (f))
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-15)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-14) above,
The touch area is an area narrower than the touch display area (see, for example, FIG. 31B).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-16)
The game stand according to (4-12) above,
The touch area is an area in which all the touch areas are included in the touch display area (for example, see FIG. 31B).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-17)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-14) above,
The touch area is an area wider than the touch display area (see, for example, FIGS. 34 (g) and (i)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-18)
The game stand according to (4-13) or (4-14) above,
The touch area is an area where one touch area is provided corresponding to one touch display,
The display means is means capable of displaying the touch display which is the first number,
The display means is means capable of displaying the touch display which is a second number,
The second number is greater than the first number;
The one non-overlapping region when the touch display is the first number is a region different from the one non-overlapping region when the touch display is the second number (for example, see FIG. 41). ,
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-19)
The gaming machine according to (4-18) above,
The one non-overlapping area in the case where the touch display is the first number is an area larger than the one non-overlapping area in the case where the touch display is the second number (for example, see FIG. 41). ),
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-20)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-19) above,
One of the plurality of display areas is a decatouch display area,
One of the plurality of displays is a decatouch display,
The decatouch display is a display that can be displayed in the decatouch display area,
The decatouch display is a display related to the touch area,
The decatouch display area is an area wider than the touch display area,
The touch area is a larger area when the decatouch display is performed than when the touch display is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 31, 32, and 33).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-21)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-20) above,
The period during which the touch display is displayed is a period in which at least a part is included in a period during which the touch operation is effective (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation effective period”).
The touch area is an area where the touch operation is valid over the touch operation valid period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-22)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-21) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.

The above purpose is
Production means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays ;
A touch panel;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a display that can be displayed in a touch display area (hereinafter referred to as “touch display”),
One of the plurality of displays is a display that can be displayed in a decatouch display area (hereinafter referred to as “decatouch display”).
The touch display, the operation of the touch panel (hereinafter, referred to as "touch operation".) Is an indication that is associated with effective as Do that touch area,
The decatouch display is a display related to a decatouch area where the touch operation is valid,
The touch region, Ri region der containing realm at least partially overlap the touch display area,
The decatouch area is an area including an area at least partially overlapping the decatouch display area,
The decatouch area is an area including at least a part of the touch area,
The decatouch area is an area wider than the touch area,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a reach effect in the decorative symbol variation display,
The display means is means capable of displaying one of the touch display and the decatouch display during execution of the reach effect,
When the decatouch display is displayed in the reach effect, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is more likely to be a big hit than when the touch display is displayed in the reach effect.
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game can be improved by using the resistive touch-sensitive touch panel or the capacitive touch panel to produce the game using the touch feeling of the player. An infrared touch panel or the like may be used.
(4-12)
A gaming machine provided with display means (for example, a touch panel display device 252) capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
The display means is means including a plurality of components,
One of the plurality of components is a touch panel (eg, touch panel 252a),
The display means is means including a plurality of display areas,
One of the plurality of display areas is a touch display area,
One of the plurality of displays is a touch display,
The touch display is a display that can be displayed in the touch display area,
The touch display is a display related to an area (hereinafter referred to as “touch area”) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is effective.
The touch area is an area including an area (hereinafter, referred to as “overlapping area”) at least partially overlapping the touch display area (see, for example, FIG. 30F).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-13)
The game stand according to (4-12) above,
The touch area is an area including an area that does not overlap at least partly with the touch display area (hereinafter referred to as “non-overlapping area”) (for example, see FIG. 30F).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-14)
The gaming machine according to (4-13) above,
The non-overlapping area is an area narrower than the overlapping area (see, for example, FIG. 30 (f))
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-15)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-14) above,
The touch area is an area narrower than the touch display area (see, for example, FIG. 31B).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-16)
The game stand according to (4-12) above,
The touch area is an area in which all the touch areas are included in the touch display area (for example, see FIG. 31B).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-17)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-14) above,
The touch area is an area wider than the touch display area (see, for example, FIGS. 34 (g) and (i)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-18)
The game stand according to (4-13) or (4-14) above,
The touch area is an area where one touch area is provided corresponding to one touch display,
The display means is means capable of displaying the touch display which is the first number,
The display means is means capable of displaying the touch display which is a second number,
The second number is greater than the first number;
The one non-overlapping region when the touch display is the first number is a region different from the one non-overlapping region when the touch display is the second number (for example, see FIG. 41). ,
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-19)
The gaming machine according to (4-18) above,
The one non-overlapping area in the case where the touch display is the first number is an area larger than the one non-overlapping area in the case where the touch display is the second number (for example, see FIG. 41). ),
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-20)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-19) above,
One of the plurality of display areas is a decatouch display area,
One of the plurality of displays is a decatouch display,
The decatouch display is a display that can be displayed in the decatouch display area,
The decatouch display is a display related to the touch area,
The decatouch display area is an area wider than the touch display area,
The touch area is a larger area when the decatouch display is performed than when the touch display is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 31, 32, and 33).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-21)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-20) above,
The period during which the touch display is displayed is a period in which at least a part is included in a period during which the touch operation is effective (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation effective period”).
The touch area is an area where the touch operation is valid over the touch operation valid period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-22)
The game stand according to any one of (4-12) to (4-21) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-23)
Effect means (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing decorative symbol variation display;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays (for example, a touch panel display device 252);
A touch panel (eg, touch panel 252a);
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a display that can be displayed in a touch display area (hereinafter referred to as “touch display”),
One of the plurality of displays is a display that can be displayed in a decatouch display area (hereinafter referred to as “decatouch display”).
The touch display is a display related to a touch area in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is valid,
The decatouch display is a display related to a decatouch area where the touch operation is valid,
The touch area is an area including an area at least partially overlapping the touch display area (see, for example, FIG. 30 (f))
The decatouch area is an area including an area that at least partially overlaps the decatouch display area (see, for example, FIG. 31A).
The decatouch area is an area including at least a part of the touch area,
The decatouch area is an area wider than the touch area,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a reach effect in the decorative symbol variation display,
The display means is means capable of displaying one of the touch display and the decatouch display during execution of the reach effect,
When the decatouch display is displayed in the reach effect, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is more likely to be a big hit than when the touch display is displayed in the reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-24)
The gaming machine according to (4-23) above,
At least a part of the period in which the decatouch display is displayed is a period included in a period in which the touch operation is valid (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation valid period”).
The decatouch area is an area where the touch operation is valid in the touch operation valid period,
The decatouch display is a display including a frame image (see, for example, FIG. 31A),
The decatouch display is a display including a character suggesting the touch operation inside the frame image (for example, see FIG. 31A).
A game stand characterized by that.
(4-25)
The game stand according to (4-23) or (4-24) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D1)
A game machine comprising first display means capable of executing at least a first display,
The first display means is means including at least a touch panel,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in the first region;
The first display is a display related at least to an area (hereinafter referred to as “second area”) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is effective,
The second region is a region that is at least partially different from the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix D1,
The second region is a region including at least a region overlapping with the first region (hereinafter referred to as “third region”),
The second region is a region including at least a region that does not overlap at least partly with the first region (hereinafter referred to as “fourth region”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D3)
A game machine according to appendix D2,
The fourth region is a region narrower than the third region,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D3,
The second region is a region narrower than the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D4,
The second region is a region in which all the second regions are included in the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D3,
The second region is a region that is at least wider than the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D7)
A gaming machine according to appendix D2 or D3,
The second region is a region in which one second region is provided corresponding to one first display,
The first display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display which is the first number when the first condition is satisfied,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display of the second number when the second condition is satisfied,
The second number is a number different from the first number;
The one fourth region when the first condition is satisfied is a region different from the one fourth region when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D8)
A gaming machine according to appendix D7,
The second number is at least greater than the first number;
The one fourth area when the first condition is satisfied is an area larger than the one fourth area when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D8,
The first display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display,
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in the fifth area,
The fifth region is a region that is at least wider than the first region;
The second display is a display associated at least with the second region;
The second region is a region that is wider when the second display is performed than when the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D9,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second area is an area where the touch operation is effective over a second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D1 to D10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D12)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
The display means is means including a plurality of components,
One of the plurality of components is a touch panel,
The display means is means including a plurality of display areas,
One of the plurality of display areas is a touch display area,
One of the plurality of displays is a touch display,
The touch display is a display that can be displayed in the touch display area,
The touch display is a display related to an area (hereinafter referred to as “touch area”) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is effective.
The touch area is an area including an area at least partially overlapping the touch display area (hereinafter referred to as “overlapping area”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D13)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix D12,
The touch area is an area including an area that does not overlap at least partly with the touch display area (hereinafter referred to as “non-overlapping area”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D14)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix D13,
The non-overlapping region is a region narrower than the overlapping region.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D12 to D14,
The touch area is an area narrower than the touch display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D16)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix D12,
The touch area is an area in which all the touch areas are included in the touch display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D12 to D14,
The touch area is an area wider than the touch display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D18)
A game machine according to appendix D13 or D14,
The touch area is an area where one touch area is provided corresponding to one touch display,
The display means is means capable of displaying the touch display which is the first number,
The display means is means capable of displaying the touch display which is a second number,
The second number is greater than the first number;
The one non-overlapping region when the touch display is the first number is a region different from the one non-overlapping region when the touch display is the second number.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D19)
A gaming machine according to appendix D18,
The one non-overlapping area when the touch display is the first number is an area larger than the one non-overlapping area when the touch display is the second number.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D12 to D19,
One of the plurality of display areas is a decatouch display area,
One of the plurality of displays is a decatouch display,
The decatouch display is a display that can be displayed in the decatouch display area,
The decatouch display is a display related to the touch area,
The decatouch display area is an area wider than the touch display area,
The touch area is a larger area when the decatouch display is performed than when the touch display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D12 to D20,
The period during which the touch display is displayed is a period in which at least a part is included in a period during which the touch operation is effective (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation effective period”).
The touch area is an area where the touch operation is valid over the touch operation valid period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices D12 to D21,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D23)
Production means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A touch panel;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a display that can be displayed in a touch display area (hereinafter referred to as “touch display”),
One of the plurality of displays is a display that can be displayed in a decatouch display area (hereinafter referred to as “decatouch display”).
The touch display is a display related to a touch area in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is valid,
The decatouch display is a display related to a decatouch area where the touch operation is valid,
The touch area is an area including an area at least partially overlapping the touch display area,
The decatouch area is an area including an area at least partially overlapping the decatouch display area,
The decatouch area is an area including at least a part of the touch area,
The decatouch area is an area wider than the touch area,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a reach effect in the decorative symbol variation display,
The display means is means capable of displaying one of the touch display and the decatouch display during execution of the reach effect,
When the decatouch display is displayed in the reach effect, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is more likely to be a big hit than when the touch display is displayed in the reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D24)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix D23,
At least a part of the period in which the decatouch display is displayed is a period included in a period in which the touch operation is valid (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation valid period”).
The decatouch area is an area where the touch operation is valid in the touch operation valid period,
The decatouch display is a display including a frame image,
The decatouch display is a display including characters suggesting the touch operation inside the frame image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix D25)
A gaming table according to appendix D23 or D24,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.

Claims (11)

A game machine comprising first display means capable of executing at least a first display,
The first display means is means including at least a touch panel,
The first display is a display that can be displayed at least in the first region;
The first display is a display related at least to an area (hereinafter referred to as “second area”) in which an operation of the touch panel (hereinafter referred to as “touch operation”) is effective,
The second region is a region that is at least partially different from the first region.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The second region is a region including at least a region overlapping with the first region (hereinafter referred to as “third region”),
The second region is a region including at least a region that does not overlap at least partly with the first region (hereinafter referred to as “fourth region”).
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The fourth region is a region narrower than the third region,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The second region is a region narrower than the first region.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The second region is a region in which all the second regions are included in the first region.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The second region is a region that is at least wider than the first region.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
The second region is a region in which one second region is provided corresponding to one first display,
The first display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display which is the first number when the first condition is satisfied,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display of the second number when the second condition is satisfied,
The second number is a number different from the first number;
The one fourth region when the first condition is satisfied is a region different from the one fourth region when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 7,
The second number is at least greater than the first number;
The one fourth area when the first condition is satisfied is an area larger than the one fourth area when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
The first display means is means capable of displaying at least a second display,
The second display is a display that can be displayed at least in the fifth area,
The fifth region is a region that is at least wider than the first region;
The second display is a display associated at least with the second region;
The second region is a region that is wider when the second display is performed than when the first display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period;
The second area is an area where the touch operation is effective over a second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10, Comprising:
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The touch operation of the touch panel is an operation accepted at least when the touch panel screen is touched directly.
A game stand characterized by that.

Images